CONSTRUCTION OF INDIAN

ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING FOR

I.I.A, AT LEH, J&K

TENDER FOR CIVIL, STRUCTURAL, FINISHING,

PLUMBING, & ELECTRICAL WORKS

CLIENTS:

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ASTROPHYSICS

Koramangala,
Bangalore - 560034.

ARCHITECTS :

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

B 4/ 103, Safdarjung Enclave,
New Delhi 110029.

Page 1 of 304

VOLUME - I

Page 2 of 304

CONTENTS
Volume I
Notice Inviting Tender

4 - 10

Instructions for filling the Tender

11 - 12

Tender Form

13

Annexure A Format for Declaration of Current Works

14

Annexure B List of Drawings

15

General Conditions of Contract

16 - 68

Special Condition of Contract

69 - 77

Schedule of Fiscal Aspects

78 - 79

Annexure 1, Schedule of Owner Supplied Materials

80

Milestone Chart

81

Volume II
Technical Specifications

83 - 230

Bill of Quantities

232 - 285

Volume III
Drawings

287 - 304

Page 3 of 304

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ASTROPHYSICS

2nd BLOCK, KORAMANGALA, SARJAPUR ROAD,
BANGALORE-560 034
PUBLIC TENDER NOTICE NO: 02 / IIA/CIVIL/IAO/LEH/2012-13
DATED:23.04.2012

(TWO BID SYSTEM)

The Indian Institute of Astrophysics invites sealed item rate tenders on behalf of The Director in
Two part in the prescribed form from reputed registered Contractors in state PWD, CPWD, MES,
Scientific Institutions and Private Body Competent contractors who have executed works of similar
nature.
Sl.
No

1.

Name of the work

Estimated
cost in Rs.

Civil, Structural, Finishing,

Plumbing & Electrical Works 511.00
for Construction of INDIAN Lakhs
ASTRONOMICAL
BUILDING
for
Indian
Institute of Astrophysics at
LEH, J&K

Time
for
completion

EMD
Rs.

24
Months 10.00 lakhs
including all
seasons

Cost
of
tender doc
Rs.
1500/=

The Tender Document can be viewed and downloaded from our website
http://www.iiap.res.in/tenders.htm. and pay the document cost during submission of bids. The
documents can also be purchased from our Institute at Leh/Bangalore on payment of the cost of the
document. Tenderers shall submit their offers along with EMD (refundable) & Tender fee for
downloaded documents (non-refundable) prescribed therein, only in the form of Demand Draft drawn
in favour of Director, Indian Institute of Astrophysics. However, your offers (both Technical &
Commercial/price bids) should be separately sealed and superscribed by mentioning the tender notice
no., and date with Date of opening. Both the Bids again shall be submitted in another sealed envelope
addressed to The Director, Indian Institute of Astrophysics, Koramangala Bangalore 560 034.
The offers should be submitted in two sealed covers one superscribed Technical Bid and other
Price Bid. Both covers shall be put in another sealed cover superscribing the envelope with Tender
for, Civil, Structural, Finishing, Plumbing & Electrical Works for Construction of INDIAN
ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING FOR I.I.A. AT LEH, Notice No. and due date. The last date of
submission of bid is 28.05.2012 on or before 3:00 pm. The Technical bid will be opened at 3.30 pm.
on the same day in the presence of attending tenderers or their authorized representatives. The pre bid
meeting will be held at IIA, Leh office on 14.05.2012 at 11.00 A.M.
After opening of Technical bid, the capability and suitability of the bidders shall be evaluated and
Price bid of the qualified bidders shall only be opened in the presence of the attending bidders. The
date of opening of Price bid will be informed to the qualified bidders. The unopened price bids and
EMD of the non qualified bidders will be returned.

Page 4 of 304

Following are the Qualifying Criteria:

1) Should have completed at least one similar work costing not less than Rs. 500.00 lakhs during
previous 3 years for Government / Semi Government/Reputed corporate clients.
Or
Three similar works each costing not less than Rs 200.00 lakhs including Civil & Electrical, during
previous three years for Government / Semi Government/Reputed corporate clients.
The intending Bidders shall furnish the relevant experience certificates duly signed by the competent
Authority not less than the rank of Executive Engineer.
2) The tenderers should submit latest three years Audited Balance Sheet duly certified by the
Chartered Accountant. And also the latest TDS Certificate indicating the Income Tax deducted by the
client for the execution of similar works.
The Director, IIA reserves the right to accept or reject any or all tenders without assigning any
reason thereof.

Administrative Officer
For Director

Page 5 of 304

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERER FOR FILLING AND SUBMISSION OF

TENDER FORM
1.

Name of the work:

Construction of INDIAN ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING for Indian Institute of
Astrophysics at LEH

2.

The Site:
The site is at located at Leh, Ladakh, J & K State.

3.

Description of Work
The scope of work contains Civil, Structural, Finishing, Plumbing & Electrical Works for
Construction of INDIAN ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING for Indian Institute of
Astrophysics at LEH
.

4.

Schedule of Work
The date of commencement of the Work shall be from the FIFTEENETH DAY from the date of
issue of letter of intent (LOI) and completion will be within Twenty Four (24) months
(including all seasons) and as per the agreed Milestones.

5.

Form of Contract:
Item Rate

6.

Bid documents:
Tenderers are advised to go through all the documents in connection with this contract
carefully. You are requested to keep this information to yourself in the interest of the project.
Tender form may be obtained from the office of Indian Institute of Astrophysics,
Leh/Bangalore from 24.04.2012 upto 10.05.2012 (between 9.00 A.M to 2.00 P.M) on
payment of Rs. 1500/- (Rupees One Thousand Five Hundred only) in cash (non
refundable) or may download the complete document from our website
http://www.iiap.res.in/tenders.htm and submit the same along with the cost of the
document in the form of DD in favour of Director, Indian Institute of Astrophysics
payable at Bangalore
The pre bid meeting will be held at IIA, Leh Office on 14.05.2012 at 11.00 A.M. for
clarifications and site visit.

7.

Submission of Bids:
Sealed Tenders with all necessary documents shall be deposited by the tenderer at the office
of the Indian Institute of Astrophysics, 2nd Block, Koramangala, Bangalore-560034 latest by
3:00 PM on 28.05.2012.
Tenderers will pack, mark and deposit the following in three separate sealed envelopes.
Tender documents will be submitted in original.

(i)

Envelope 1 Should be marked as Envelope 1 and contain the following:

a) EMD in the form of DD/Pay order in favour of Indian Institute of Astrophysics, payable
at Bangalore.
b) Cost of the tender document in the form of DD/Pay order in favour of Indian Institute of
Astrophysics, payable at Bangalore if the document is downloaded form website.
Page 6 of 304

c) Letter from Tenderer, accepting all terms, conditions and technical specifications of
tender.
d) Volume 1 of tender (NIT, Tender form, General & Special Conditions of Contract etc.)
duly signed & stamped.
c) Every Tenderer should furnish along with his tender PAN No., an income-tax and sales
tax clearance certificates & brief information regarding the income-tax circle, Ward & the
District in which he is assessed by income-tax, the reference No. of assessment and the
assessment year, as also details of any attachments, prohibiting orders, proceedings in
connection therewith.
d) The Tenderer should submit a declaration disclosing all Works for which he has already
entered into contract, the value of work that remains to be executed in each such contract,
while submitting the tender and details of any disputes pending in respect of any such
contract whether in a court or any other Forum or under discussion / negotiation with the
other party to such contracts (Refer Vol. 1-Annexure A: FORMAT FOR
DECLARATION OF CURRENT WORKS).
e) Every Tenderer should furnish along with his tender the Work Contract Tax / VAT
Registration Certificate.
f) Certified copies of Registration Certificate (issued by the Registrar of Companies in case
of Company and issued by Registrar of Firms indicating names etc., of all registered
partners, incase of Partnership Firm), Partnership Deed and Power of Attorney or
Memorandum and Articles of Company in case of Limited / Private Limited Companies
will have to be furnished along with the tender to render the tender eligible for
consideration.
g) ESI and PF registration with authorities
h) The Tenderer shall submit the site organization chart with names of project In-charge,
Site Engineer, Foreman and Supervisor along with their qualification and work
experience.
i) Tenderer shall furnish the detailed construction programme based on the mile stone chart
provided in tender and incorporating the activities of other services contractors, keeping
in view the provision under various clauses of contracts.
j) The Tenderer shall submit the cash flow chart.
k) Detailed list of Plant & Machinery along with shuttering material proposed to be
deployed at Project.
l) List of Sub Contractor proposed to be employed at the Project.
(ii)

Envelop No.2 Should be marked as Price Bid (Envelope 2) and should contain the
following:
a) Volume 2 of Tender - Priced bill of quantities duly signed and stamped by the
authorized signatory
b) Tender drawing duly stamped and signed

(iii)

Envelope No.3 : Should contain both sealed Envelopes 1 and 2 superscribing the name
of the work, last date of submission, address and contact details of the bidder and
address to the
The Director,
Indian Institute of Astrophysics,
2nd Block, Koramangala,
Bangalore-560034
Ph No.: 080 22541200/25541259/22541359
Any Queries or clarifications regarding the tender or the work shall be submitted in writing to
this Institute latest by 12:00 Noon on 11.05.2012 Clarifications, if any, shall be issued to all
tenderers in the form of an Addendum to the Tender (The Addendum) and also published in
the website. Any clarification may be obtained from the following address during office
hours:
Page 7 of 304

Indian Astronomical Observatory

Indian Institute of Astrophysics
Azim Enclave, Fort Road, Sheynam,
Leh-Ladakh 194 101 INDIA
Tel : 91 (01982) 252195, 253104
Contact: Mr. Angchuk Engineer in Charge
Mobile No. 9419178895
Indian Institute of Astrophysics,
2nd Block, Koramangala, Bangalore-560034
Contact Person : Mr. R.Ramachandra Reddy
080-22541417 Mob: 9448092029

8.

Acceptance/ Rejection of tenders:

Tenders not accompanied with the EMD in separate envelope shall be rejected and also the
tenders that are not properly filled, are mutilated, have pages missing or with incorrect,
inaccurate calculations or generally not complying with the conditions will be rejected.
Tenderers should quote their rates with the totals both in figures & in words (English). The
total of each page along with carried over figures of the previous page shall be given in ink
and signed by the tenderer. No blank space shall be left. Amounts quoted in words shall be
deemed to be correct in case of cuttings or overwriting.
In case of a tender where the prices of any items appear unrealistic, such a tender will be
considered as unbalanced. The tender issuing authority reserves the right to call for the rate
analysis in such items which are in his opinion, unbalanced and the tenderers is unable to
provide satisfactory explanations, the Project Manager reserves the right to disqualify such a
tender and forfeiting EMD without prejudice to any other right for failure on part of the
tenderer.
If the tender is made by an individual it shall be signed by him and his full name and
complete address shall be given. If it is made by a partnership firm it shall be signed in the
name of the firm by a partner of the firm who shall sign his own name and give the name and
address of each partner of the firm and attach a copy of `Power of Attorney' with the tender
authorizing him to sign on behalf of the other partners
No alterations, amendments or modifications shall be made by the tenderer in the Notice
Inviting Tenders, Instructions to the Contractors, Contract Form, Conditions of the Contract,
Drawings and Specification and if any such alterations are made or any special conditions
attached, the tender is liable to be rejected without reference to the tenderer.
Canvassing in connection with tender is strictly prohibited and tender submitted by tenderers
who resort to canvassing will be liable to rejection.
The acceptance of a tender shall rest with INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ASTROPHYSICS as
their authorised representative who does not bind itself to accept the lowest tender and
reserves to itself the right to reject any or all the tenders received without assigning any
reason(s) whatsoever. Non-acceptance of any tender shall not make the Owner or the Project
Manager liable for compensation or damages.

Page 8 of 304

At any time prior to the Tender submission date stipulated, the Owner may, for any reason,
whether on its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by a tenderer amend
the Tender documents by issuing an Addendum (The Addendum).
The Addendum will be notified in writing to all Tenderers who have purchased and also
published in the website. Tenderers shall promptly acknowledge receipt thereof to the person
issuing the NIT with due signature and submit the same along with the tender.
Tenders shall be unconditional in all respects. The Tenders containing uncalled remarks or
any additional conditions are liable to EMD forfeiture and rejection of bids.
9.

Earnest Money Deposit: (E.M.D)

e) Earnest Money Deposit of Rs. 10,00,000 /- (Rupees Ten Lakh Only) in the form of
Demand Draft valid for atleast 90 days from the date of tender submission, should be
submitted along with the Tender. The Demand Draft should be in favour of The
Director, Indian Institute of Astrophysics payable at Bangalore should be submitted in
a cover along with the Tender in a envelope 1 marked as EMD.
E.M.Ds of the unsuccessful tenderers will be returned within 90 Days from the last date
stipulated for submission of tender.
E.M.Ds shall be forfeited if the Contractor selected for the work fails to submit the prescribe
performance guarantee and sign the prescribed agreement and / or fails to start the work
within FIFTEEN DAYS of order to commence the work.
The E.M.Ds of the successful tenderer will be retained by Indian Institute of Astrophysics
and returned to the Contractor upon his furnishing a Bank Guarantee for Performance Bond in
an approved format and to the satisfaction of the Institute.
The EMD shall not bear any interest.

10.

PERIOD OF VALIDITY:
The tender shall remain valid for acceptance for a period of NINETY DAYS from the last
date for submission of the tenders. If any tenderer withdraws his tender before the said period
or makes any modifications in terms and conditions of the tender, then the Project Manager /
Owner shall be entitled to forfeit the said Earnest Money Deposit / Performance Bond
Guarantee by encashment / enforcement of the Bank Guarantee herein before referred to.

11.

INSPECTION OF SITE:
Every tenderer is expected to inspect the site of the proposed work and acquaint himself with the
site conditions, working space available for material / fabrication yards, batching plant, stores,
offices and any other contractors facility, approaches, availability of labour & raw materials,
geological and weather conditions etc. before quoting his rates. He must go through all the
drawings, specifications and other tender documents. Any further clarifications in the drawings
and documents can be had from the Architects/Institute at the above-mentioned address.
Submission of the tender shall be deemed to be due compliance with this clause.

12.

This notice inviting tenders will form part of the tender document and the Contract
Agreement executed by the successful tenderer.

13.

All the tender documents submitted by the contractor are the property of the Owner and shall
remain under the Owners ownership at all times.

Page 9 of 304

For further information/clarifications, the tenderer may contact the following

OWNER
Indian Institute of Astrophysics,
2nd Block, Koramangala,
Bangalore-560034
Ph No.: 080 22541200/25541259/22541359
ARCHITECTS :

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

B 4/ 103, Safdarjung Envlave,,
New Delhi 110029.

PLACE: Bangalore
DATE: 23.04.2012

Administrative Officer,
for Director,

Page 10 of 304

INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING IN THE TENDER FORM

1.

Each of the following documents referred to, as Volume 1, 2 & 3 with their respective
contents shall individually and collectively constitute the Tender Document:
VOLUME 1

NOTICE INVITING TENDER, TENDER FORM, CONTRACT

AGREEMENT, DRAFT FORMATS FOR BANK GUARANTEES,
FORMAT FOR DECLARATION OF CURRENT WORKS
(ANNEXURE A), LIST OF DRAWINGS (ANNEXURE B),
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
OF
CONTRACT,
SPECIAL
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, SCHEDULE OF FISCAL
ASPECTS, SCHEDULE OF NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS,
SCHEDULE OF OWNER SUPPLIED MATERIAL (ANNEXURE
1), SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED MATERIALS
(ANNEXURE 2), SPECIAL NOTES (ANNEXURE 3) AND
PROJECT MILESTONE CHART.

VOLUME 2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WITH PREAMBLE, BILL OF

QUANTITIES, LISTS OF APPROVED MAKES FOR CIVIL &
STRUCTURAL WORKS.

VOLUME 3

TENDER DRAWINGS.

Technical specifications are the general instructions for carrying out the Work.
2.

For the Bill of Quantities, in VOLUME 2 the rates shall be written (after carefully studying
the technical specifications and detailed specifications and drawings) clearly, legibly in
figures and in words (English). In case of any doubts, or discrepancy the amount in words
will be treated as correct. Amounts should be entered after carefully checking up the unit
adopted for the item.

3.

List of drawings accompanying the tender documents is furnished in Volume - 3. All tender
drawings form an integral part of tender and the details shown on the drawings are
complementary to the Bill of Quantities and vice versa. Rates quoted must and be deemed to
have taken note of all the Drawings, Technical specifications, Detailed Specifications and Bill
of Quantities.

4.

The Tenderer should certify that he has studied the Work at site and acquainted himself with
the position with regard to construction, materials & labour etc. required for the work

5.

The Tenderer should submit a declaration disclosing all Work for which he has already
entered into contract, the value of work that remains to be executed in each such contract,
while submitting the tender and details of any disputes pending in respect of any such contract
whether in a court or any other Forum or under discussion / negotiation with the other party to
such contracts (Refer Vol. 1-Annexure A: FORMAT FOR DECLARATION OF CURRENT
WORKS).

6.

Every Tenderer should furnish along with his tender PAN No., an income-tax and sales tax
clearance certificates & brief information regarding the income-tax circle, Ward & the
District in which he is assessed by income-tax, the reference No. of assessment and the
assessment year, as also details of any attachments, prohibiting orders, proceedings in
connection therewith.

7.

Every Tenderer should furnish along with his tender the Work Contract Tax Registration
Certificate.
Page 11 of 304

8.

The Tenderer are to pay the amount of earnest money as specified in the tender notice
separately along with the Tender. Tenders for which earnest money deposit has not been
received shall be rejected.

9.

Certified copies of Registration Certificate (issued by the Registrar of Companies in case of

Company and issued by Registrar of Firms indicating names etc., of all registered partners,
incase of Partnership Firm), Partnership Deed and Power of Attorney or Memorandum and
Articles of Company in case of Limited / Private Limited Companies will have to be
furnished along with the tender to render the tender eligible for consideration.

10.

All Tenderers shall recheck the quantities of the BOQ with respect to the drawings. Should
the Tenderer notice any discrepancy or error in any statement made, or quantities or units
shown against items, he shall immediately bring to the notice of the Architect and obtain
clarifications before submitting the tender. The tender shall be recorded as such in the
covering letter to the tender, failing which the Owner shall have right to ask the Tenderer to
execute the Work according to the statement made or quantities or units shown in the tender,
without any extra payment.

11.

All pages of tender documents shall be initialed at lower right hand corner or signed wherever
required, by the tenderer or by a person holding the power of attorney authorizing him to sign
on behalf of the tenderer. Signatures in the tender documents shall be dated as well. All
corrections and alterations in the entries of tender papers should be signed in full by the
tenderers. Correction with white fluid and overwriting are not permitted.

12.

The Tenderer should submit the following additional documents:

a) Complete bar chart worked out based on the required milestones.
b) Site organization chart giving details of all staff to be deployed including names and biodata of managerial and engineering staff for the execution of this project.
c) A detailed list of plant and machinery and shuttering material proposed for deployment
should be submitted along with the offer.
d) A list of Subcontractors (if any) should also be enclosed along with the offer.

13.

NOMINATED AGENCIES / SUB-CONTRACTORS / VENDORS:

a) The nominated or any other sub-contractors / vendors related to above cited work are part
and parcel of the Tenderer therefore the Tenderer shall be responsible for them and coordinate & provide the facilities for the nominated sub-contractors / vendors with prior
approval of the Architect/Owner.

14

The tender of any Tenderer not complying with any of the above instructions 1 to 13 may be
rejected.

Administrative Officer,
for Director,

Page 12 of 304

TENDER FORM
To,
M/s INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ASTROPHYSICS
Koramangala,
Bangalore 560034.
Dear Sirs,
Sub: Tender for, Civil, Structural, Finishing, Plumbing & Electrical Works for Construction
of INDIAN ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING FOR I.I.A. AT LEH
With reference to the tender invited by you for the above-proposed work, I/We write this after having:
a) examined the drawings, technical specifications, detailed specifications to tenders, agreement,
the general conditions of contract and special conditions of contract annexed thereto (hereinafter
called The Contract Documents') relating to construction.
b) visited and examined the site of the proposed work and acquired the requisite information
relating to or affecting the tender.
I/We undersigned hereby offer to construct the proposed work in strict accordance with the contract
document for the consideration to be calculated in terms of the priced schedule of quantities.
I/We undertake to complete the whole of the works as per the attached schedule from the date of issue
of intimation by you that our tender has been accepted and upon being permitted to enter site. I/We
further undertake that on failure, subject to the conditions of the contract relating to extension of time,
I/We shall pay agreed `Liquidated Damages' for the period during which the work shall remain
incomplete.
I/We hereby deposit with you as Earnest money Rs. 10,00,000 /- (Rupees Ten Lakhs Only)
[carrying no interest] by means of Demand Draft no. . , dated .. in favour of The
Director, Indian Institute of Astrophysics Payable at Bangalore. and I/We agree that this sum shall
be forfeited in the event of the Owner accepting my/our tender and I/We fail to take up the contract
when called upon to do so.
I/We further agree to the deduction of 5% from the `Interim Payment' and up to a maximum of
5% of the contract value towards the Retention Money', which will be returned as per the
relevant clauses in the agreement.
I/We will furnish the Performance Guarantee Bond as per the approved format .
OUR BANKERS ARE
1.
2.

PLACE
DATE

:
:

SIGNATURE OF TENDERER
NAME OF THE PARTNERS OF THE FIRM
OR
NAME OF THE PERSON HAVING POWER OF
ATTORNEY TO SIGN THE CONTRACT

Page 13 of 304

ANNEXURE A

FORMAT FOR DECLARATION OF CURRENT WORKS

(Declaration disclosing all works for which the contractor has already entered into contract)
NAME OF TENDRER: _________
SL
NO.

NAME OF
WORK &
LOCATION

NAME OF
CLIENTS
CONTACT
PERSON /
TELE. NO.

DATE OF
AWARD /
PROPOSED
COMPLETION

VALUE
OF THE
WORK

VALUE OF ANY
WORK
DISPUTES
THAT
PENDING
REMAINS
TO BE
EXECUTED

Certified that the above information is true to the best of my/our knowledge.

PLACE:
DATE:

SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER

WITH SEAL AND ADDRESS

Page 14 of 304

ANNEXURE B

LIST OF DRAWINGS
S. No.

TITLE

DRAWING No.
(REFER VOLUME 3)

Page 15 of 304

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1. DEFINITIONS:
In the Contract (as hereinafter defined) the following words and expressions shall have meanings
hereby assigned to them, except where the context otherwise requires: (In alphabetical order)
1.1

Approved/Approval:
Approved/Approval shall mean and include approved/approval accorded by the
Institute/Architect in writing.

1.2

Approved Equal:
Approved Equal shall mean an alternative product or service approved by the
Institute/Architect as being equivalent to that specified in the Contract Documents.

1.3

Architects / Services Consultants:

Architect shall mean M/s ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES having its office
at B 4/ 103, Safdarjung Envlave, New Delhi 110029.

1.4

Basic Rate - Material:

Basic Rate shall mean the landed cost at site including all taxes, royalties, cartage,
handling etc. but excluding wastage and WCT / VAT.

1.5

Contract:
The Contract shall mean and include the Contract Agreement and its supporting
documents forming part thereof, executed between the Parties (Institute and the agency
to whom the work is awarded) thereto for the purpose of proper execution and
completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.6

Contractor:
The Contractor shall mean and include the person or persons, firm, company or
consortium whos tender has been accepted by the Owner / Project Manager and
includes the Contractor's legal representatives, successors and permitted assign.

1.7

Contractors Representative:
The Contractors Representative shall mean the person or party duly appointed by the
Contractor to act for and on its behalf on a day-to-day basis during the construction of
the Work and the Project. Any action to be taken by the Contractor may be taken on the
Contractors behalf by the Contractors Representative. The Contractors Representative
shall be considered a key person for purposes of Clause 11.1 of the General Terms of
Contract.

1.8

Contract Documents:
The Contract Documents shall collectively mean and include Contract Agreement and
the documents mentioned therein as forming part thereof and would also include all
modifications thereof and additions thereto incorporated in and made to any of those
documents during the term of the Contract.

1.9

Contract Price / Sum:

Shall mean the sums referred to in the Contract Documents for the Contractors
performance of the Work.
The Contract Price is inclusive of all taxes, including sales tax, entry tax, octroi, works
contract tax, Turn over tax, VAT, ESI, PF contribution and all other statutory taxes and
levies if any applicable to the contractors/workers etc., and the Owner shall not be
responsible in any way whatsoever to pay for the same.
Page 16 of 304

The Contract is neither a fixed lump sum contract nor a piece work contract, but is an
item rate contract to carryout the Work according to the actual measured quantities at the
rates contained in the schedule of rates and probable quantities as provided in the Priced
Bill of Quantities with Detailed Specifications. The Contract Price shall not exceed as
indicated in the Letter of Intent/Purchase Order/ Work Order, amounts in excess of this
number, not approved in advance by the Project Manager / Owner shall be at the
Contractors expense. The Contractor has to closely monitor the quantities and cost and
obtain an Approval from the Project Manager well in advance for any change outside the
scope of the Work which would cause the cost of the Work to exceed the Contract Price
as indicated in the Letter of Intent. Prices will be firm until the end of the contract.
No escalation in prices shall be allowed for any reason whatsoever during the
period of the project.
1.10

Consultant:
Shall mean any person or persons duly appointed by the Owner / Project Manager /
Architect to act as CONSULTANT to render consultancy services in any area/field
of activity connected with and arising out of the Contract under a separate agreement
setting out the consultant(s) responsibilities and terms.

1.11

Defect(s) Liability Period:

Defect(s) Liability Period shall be the 12-month period after Virtual Completion and
any period extended as a result of rectification of the Work/change orders, between
the Virtual Completion and the Final Completion of the Work, and during which
period the Contractor shall be bound to replace and/or rectify and make good all
defective materials, equipment and/or workmanship which arise in the Works or
come to notice subsequent to the Virtual Completion of the Works and prior to the
Final Completion of the Works.

1.12

Drawings:
Drawings means all drawings, details and sketches along with the technical
information therein, furnished by the Architect through the Project Manager to the
Contractor under the Contract and any modifications of such drawings or such other
drawings as may be from time to time be furnished or approved in writing by Project
Manager. All drawings, samples, patterns, models, operation and maintenance
manuals and other technical information of a like nature submitted by the Contractor
shall also be referred as 'drawings'.

1.13

Final Completion:
Final Completion will be deemed to have been achieved when at the end of the Defects
Liability Period a Final Completion Certificate has been issued by the Architect &
Project Manager when all the requirements of the Contract have been met and complied
with and when all the defective items of Work and defects have been replaced and/or
rectified and made good as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager /
Owner.

1.14

Force Majeure:
Force Majeure are risks due to riots (otherwise than among Contractor's employees)
and civil commotion (in so far as both these are uninsurable), war (whether declared
or not), invasion, act of foreign enemies, hostilities, civil war, rebellion, insurrection,
military or usurped power, an act of Government, an act of God, such as lightening,
unprecedented floods, tornado, and damage from aircraft.

Page 17 of 304

1.15

Headings:
The headings in these General Conditions of Contract shall not be deemed to be part
thereof or to be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of
the Contract.

1.16

Insolvency:
The term Insolvency means any act of insolvency as defined by the Presidency
Towns Insolvency Act or the Provincial Insolvency Act or any amending statute.

1.17

Labour Rate:
Labour: As per Local Administration labour rates notified and fixed from time to
time.

1.18

Measurement Books:
The measurement books shall be defined as the books maintained during the
currency of the project to record all measurements qualifying for payment. The
contractor shall maintain measurement books of all work done by them. The
contractor shall get the measurement books verified by the Project Manager
/Architect/quantity surveyor periodically.

1.19

Nominated Sub Contractor:

"Nominated Sub-Contractor" refers to those specialists, tradesmen and others, whose
credentials as well as quotations are evaluated and approved by the Project
Manager/Owner and then nominated for executing special works or supplying special
equipment or materials, for which provisional sums are included in the Contracts.
Such agencies shall be deemed to have been employed by the Contractor.

1.20

Owner/Institute:
The Owner/Institute shall mean and include The Director, INDIAN INSTITUTE OF
ASTROPHYSICS, having their registered office at Koramangala, Bangalore 560034, or their respective successors in office, successors in interest, administrators
and assigns etc.

1.21

Owners Representative:
Owners Representative shall mean and include the Project Manager and / or any other
person duly appointed and authorized by the Owner to act for and on its behalf at the
Site during the progress of construction of the Project.

1.22

Project:
Project shall mean and include the execution of the Work to be performed under this
Contract plus works of all later phases necessary to complete the construction to
make it habitable, according to the standards adopted by the Project Manager.

1.23

Project Manager (PM):

The Project Manager is authorized to represent and act on behalf of the Owner on a dayto-day basis during all packages of construction of the Project. All communications,
approvals and decisions to be taken in connection with the Architects Services and
those of the Owner shall be communicated to and enforced by the Project Manager. In
the absence of Project Manager, the representative of the owner/Institute will act as a
Project Manager

1.24

Provisional Sum:
Provisional sum shall mean a lump sum amount included in the tender documents
representing the estimated value of the work for which details are not available at the
time of issue of tender
Page 18 of 304

1.25

Records and Audits:

The contractor shall keep books and records to Project Managers satisfaction, in such
a manner, as to enable the Project Manager to carry out effective financial control and
to have necessary reports thereon from the internal auditors of the Contractor, with
liberty to the Project Manager to seek inspection thereof to ascertain maintenance of
proper records concerning the Project.

1.26

References And Cross-References To Clause And Sub-Clause Numbers:

Unless specifically stated otherwise, all references and cross-references made to clause
and sub-clause numbers in these General Conditions of Contract refer to the clauses and
sub-clauses of the General Conditions of Contract itself.

1.27

SHE Plan:
SHE plan means Environmental, Health and Safety Plan prepared by the Contractor
for implementation at site, base on and including, without limitation to various
Clauses of the Conditions of Contract pertaining to Safety, Health and environment;
and approved by the Project Manager.

1.28

Singular or Plural / Typographic Errors:

Words in the singular also include the plural and vice versa, where the context so
requires. Words implying persons include persons and corporations. Typographic or
spelling errors shall not be cause to vitiate the contract.

1.29

Site:
The Site shall mean the location at Leh, Ladakh (Jammu & Kashmir State).

1.30

Specifications:
"Specifications" shall mean and include the specifications for the Work included in the
Architects / Consultants Drawings, the Works Technical Specifications and Priced Bill
of Quantities, and any modification thereof or addition thereto.

1.31

Sub-contractors (Nominated or otherwise):

Sub-Contractors shall mean and include the persons, firms, companies or agencies
who after approval of the Project Manager, have entered into a direct Contract with the
Contractor in respect of any part of the Work and any later package of the Project, and
include the Sub-contractors' legal representatives, successors and permitted assignee.
The Contractor shall have full responsibility for the actions and work of any
Subcontractor whether contracted by the Contractor to perform portions of the Work or
for any later package of the Project.

1.32

Tender:
Tender shall mean and include the Contractors offer to construct and maintain the
Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents as set forth on the Tender Form

1.33

Tender Documents:
Tender Documents shall mean and include Notice Inviting Tender, Tender Form and
Contract Agreement Draft, General Conditions Of Contract, Special Conditions Of
Contract, Works Technical Specifications, Bill Of Quantities With Detailed
Specifications, Environmental, Health & Safety (SHE) Plan, Preliminary Project
Construction Schedule, Drawing Site Location, Drawings for Works.

1.34

Temporary Works:
Temporary works mean all temporary works of every kind required for the execution
of the works by the Contractor.
Page 19 of 304

1.35

Terms /, and, or, and/or:

The terms /, and, or, and/or used in context with the description or
enumeration of two or more items or components of work of documentation or
anything similar shall mean as is relevant and applicable to the text and context.

1.36

Urgent Works:
Urgent works shall mean any urgent measures which in the opinion of the Project
Manager becomes necessary during the progress of the work to obviate any risk of
accident or failure or which become necessary for security for completing the overall
project within the stipulated time.

1.37

Vendors:
Vendors shall mean and include all suppliers, contractors, sub-contractors,
nominated sub-contractors and trade contractors engaged for same / later phase(s) of
the Project, when such Vendors are in privity of Contract with the Project Manager /
Owner.

1.38

Virtual Completion:
Virtual completion will be deemed to have been achieved upon a Virtual Completion
Certificate being issued by the Project Manager with concurrence of the Architect and
the Owner, when the Work, according to the Project Manager, Owner and Architect,
have been completed in every respect in conformity with the Contract Documents and
are ready and fit for the intended purpose, complete with all systems and services having
been tested and commissioned.

1.39

Written Notice:
Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the
authorized representative of the firm / company for whom it is intended, or if
delivered at and a written delivery receipt obtained or sent by registered mail to the
last business address known to them, who gives the notice.

1.40

Work:
Work shall mean and include the items of work included in this Contract
Document, all materials, Plant & machinery, equipments, tools and labour necessary
to complete all components of the Project in full compliance with the requirements of
the Contract Document.

1.41

Working day, Day, Week and Month:

Working Day shall mean and include any day from Monday to Saturday (both days
inclusive) excluding Public Holidays. Work at site shall continue over Sundays and all
holidays excepting statutory Government public holidays.
"Day" shall mean a calendar day of 24 hours each.
Week shall mean 7 days without regard to the number of hours worked in any day
in the week.
"Month" shall mean English Calendar month, without reference to the number of
days worked during this period.

2.

SCOPE, EXTENT, INTENT ETC.:

2.1

Scope:
The general character and the scope of the Work shall be as illustrated and defined in the
Drawings, Specifications, Schedule of Rates and other Contract Documents.
Page 20 of 304

3.

2.2

Extent:
The Contractor shall carry out and complete the Work under the Contract in every
respect, and his work shall include the supply of all labour, equipment, materials, plant
and machinery, tools, transportation, form work, scaffolding and everything else
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents and to the directions and satisfaction of the Project Manager,
Architect and Owner. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for everything
and all matters in connection with or arising out of or being a result or consequence of
his carrying out or omitting to carry out any part of the Work. Where any parts of the
Work may be executed by Sub-Contractors, such responsibility and liability of the
Contractor shall cover and extend to the work of all such Sub-Contractors.

2.3

Intent:
The Contract Documents are complementary and what is called for by any one shall be
binding as if called for by all. Wherever it is mentioned in the Contract Documents that
the Contractor shall perform certain work or provide certain facilities, it is understood
that the Contractor shall do so at his own cost. Materials or work described in words
which so applied have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to
such recognised standards as are applicable.

2.4

Instructions of Project Manager:

The Architect through the Project Manager may from time to time, issue further
supplementary Drawings, written instructions, details, directions, and explanations,
which shall be collectively referred to as the Instructions of Project Manager. The
Contractor shall forthwith comply with and duly execute the work comprised in such
Instructions of Project Manager, provided always that verbal instructions, directions and
explanations given to the Contractor or his works representative by the Architect or
Project Manager shall, if involving a variation, will be got confirmed in writing from the
Project Manager, by the contractor.

2.5

Approval of Project Manager:

Approval of the Project Manager shall always mean approval in writing. The onus shall
be on the Contractor to obtain all the necessary approvals in writing. Such approvals,
however, shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the
Contract.

2.6

Increases/Decreases to scope of Work:

The Owner / Project Manager reserves the right to increase or decrease the scope of the
Work on any or all items or to change the nature of the Work involved in any or all items
or to completely delete any items of the Work under the Contract. The Contractor shall
not be entitled to claim for loss of anticipated profits, for mobilization of additional
resources, or for any other such reason on account of these change orders.

2.7

Items of work for completion:

The Contractor is bound to carry out any items of work necessary for the completion of
the Work even though such items of work may not be expressly described in the
Contract Documents/ Drawings.

PROJECT MANAGER, OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE, AND CONTRACTORS

REPRESENTATIVE:
The status, duties and responsibilities of the Project Manager, Owners Representative, and
Contractors Representative shall be as detailed below:
Page 21 of 304

3.1

Role and responsibilities of the Project Manager:

i.

The Owner will be represented for the purpose of the execution of the Contract by
the Project Manager. The Project Manager shall be responsible for the day-to-day
supervision, quality control checks, progress monitoring, co-ordination and direction
of the Work, and generally to ensure that the Work is carried out in all respects in
strict conformity with the Contract Documents.

ii. The Project Manager shall have the authority to stop the work whenever such
stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the Work. The
Contractor shall provide all the necessary facilities to the Project Manager in the
performance of his duties. The Contractor shall refer all matters relating to the
performance of the Contract to the Project Manager.
iii. The Project Manager shall observe sound and established engineering practices
using latest standards, codes and regulations, as applicable for the purpose specified
and suitable for respective uses intended.
iv. The Project Manager shall exercise intimate, constant and continuous supervision
and control over the workmanship and materials, plant, machinery, equipment etc
used in the Work and may when required, get them inspected.
v. The Project Manager shall check the measurements of the Contractor's bills and
forward the same to the Architect for verification and Certification for payments.
vi. To process the bills and Architects Certificate for payment and release payments to
the Contractor as appropriate.
vii. Project Manager shall remain in close contact with the Architect and shall obtain cooperation and co-ordination from him for effective progress and development of the
Works at site.
3.2

Decision:
The Project Manager shall make decisions with or without consultation and concurrence
of the Owner and the Architect on all matters relating to the execution and progress of
the Work, including the claims and queries of the Contractor. The decision, opinion,
direction and interpretation of the Project Manager, with respect to any or all matters
shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

3.3

Role and responsibilities of the Owner:

i. The Owner shall be represented at the Site by the Project Manager and shall be
responsible for the interaction with the Project Manager.
ii. The Owner shall have the authority to make and communicate all decisions to the
Project Manager for implementation, as called for in this Contract to be made by the
Owner.

3.4

Role and responsibilities of the contractors representative:

i. The Contractor shall be represented at the Site by the Contractors Representative.
The Contractors Representative shall be on Site at all times during performance of
the Work and the Project Coordination Services and shall be responsible for the dayto-day interaction with the Project Manager and the Owners Representative.
ii. The Contractors Representative shall have the authority to make and communicate
all decisions called for in this Contract to be made by the Contractor or the
Contractors Representative. The Contractors Representative shall be responsible
Page 22 of 304

for the day-to-day supervision and overseeing of the Project Coordination Services,
including, without limitation, the SHE Plan implementation described in Clause 1.27
of the Definitions.
3.5

Architect's Role and Obligations:

i. The Architect shall be responsible for undertaking the design, the specification and
the production of drawings for the Work.
ii. The Architect shall be responsible for periodic supervision of works to evaluate
contractors works and to ensure that the work is executed as per the desired quality
standards, integrity, building design, safety, statutory compliance and conformance
with design, conceptual and contractual intent.
iii. The Architect shall be responsible to issue control samples and to inspect samples/
mock-ups to ensure that they are as per the desired specifications and quality
standards.
iv. The Architect shall review, verify, evaluate and provide its recommendation to the
Project Manager on the shop-drawings, design calculations, product data, samples,
mock-ups, extra/additional/deduction items, rate analysis, quotes, selection of subcontractors etc. proposed by the Contractor.
v. Where necessary the Architect shall perform plant inspection at workshops of the
contractor.
vi. The Architect shall verify all Contractor's bills, the measurements of which have
been checked by the Project Manager and issue Certificates for payments to enable
the Project Manager / Owner to process the bills and release payments to the
Contractor as appropriate.
vii. The Architect shall assist the Project Manager in joint inspection of the buildings on
their completion to maintain and provide list of items to complete, defects to correct,
virtual & final completion certificates to the Project Manager.
viii. The Architect shall make and communicate all decisions to the Project Manager as
called for in this Contract to be made by the Architect.

3.6

Access For Owner, Owners Representative, Architect And Project Manager To

The Works:
The Owner, Owners Representative, Project Manager, the Architect, and their
respective consultants shall at all times have access to the Work and the Site and to the
workshops or other places of the Contractor where the Work is to be so prepared and in
workshops or other places of Sub-Contractors and suppliers. The Contractor shall by a
term in its Sub-Contracts so far as possible, secure a similar right of access to those
workshops or places for the Owner, Owners Representative, Project Manager,
Architect, and their respective consultants and shall do every thing for the purposes of
carrying out inspections to ascertain and ensure that work is being carried out in
conformity with the Contract Documents or for any other purpose in connection with the
Work under the Contract.

3.7

Contractors responsibilities:
The Contractor shall have the following responsibilities in carrying out the Work and the
Project Coordination Services, respectively:
i.

The Contractor shall, on the instruction of the Project Manager, immediately dismiss
from the Work any person employed thereon by him who may, in the opinion of the
Project Manager / Owner, be incompetent or who engages in unlawful or disorderly
conduct, and such persons shall not be re-employed on the Work without the prior
written permission of the Project Manager.

Page 23 of 304

ii. Contractor shall indemnify the Owner & Project Manager for loss suffered by the
Owner & Project Manager on account of any act/omission/neglect of the
Contractor's, workers, employees, Sub-Contractors etc.
iii. The Contractor shall comply with all safety standards to the satisfaction of the
Projects Manager.
iv. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the management & supervision of
the Sub-Contractors.
v. The Contractor shall ensure that all Sub-Contractors engaged exercise all such skill,
care and technical competence as represents a high standard within their respective
professions or trades as is appropriate for the satisfactory execution of their work
and services.
vi. The Contractor shall not assign this Contract or any part of it. The Owner / Project
Manager and Architect reserves the right to review and approve each SubContractor which the Contractor recommends at any time to engage to perform any
services before such Sub-Contractor is hired or performs any service.
vii. The Contractor shall be responsible for the care of the Work and the management
and supervision of the Sub-Contractors.
viii. The Contractor shall exercise constant and continuous supervision and control over
the workmanship, materials, plant, machinery, equipment etc used in the Work and
report on the status of the same to the Project Manager.
ix. The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits, approvals,
certificates and the like.
x. All the obligations and responsibilities of the Contractor under the Contract shall
be discharged by him subject to the satisfaction of the Owner / Project Manager.
xi. Any activity conducted or responsibility assumed by the Owner or the Project
Manager shall not relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations and
responsibilities under the Contract.
xii. The contractor shall use latest standards, codes and regulations, as applicable for the
purpose specified and suitable for respective uses intended. The contractor must
keep at site the latest IS codes in CD form for quick referencing.
xiii. The contractor shall ensure that all work complies with statutory norms and
regulations.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate and provide the facilities mentioned in Bill of
Quantities free of charge to the agencies / Vendors and nominated Sub-contractors
appointed directly by the Project Manager / Owner.
4.

SITE:
4.1

Contractor to satisfy himself about site conditions:

The Contractor represents that before tendering for the Work the Contractor has visited
the Site and satisfied himself about the Site conditions for construction and for logistics
and smooth flow of workmen and materials as well as permission from Authorities for
this purpose. The Contractor has examined the Site and taken note of character of the
soil and of the excavations, the correct dimensions of the Work, and facilities for
Page 24 of 304

obtaining any special articles called for in the Contract Documents. The Contractor has
also made its own assessment and obtained all information on the Site constraints and on
all matters that will affect the execution, continuation and progress, and completion of
the Works. Any extra claims or extension of time made in consequence of any
misunderstanding, incorrect information on any of these points or on the grounds of
insufficient description or information shall not be entertained or allowed at any stage.

5.

4.2

Access to site by the contractor:

The access to the Site will be shown immediately on award of the Contract to the
Contractor and the Site shall be shared with other Vendors and Sub-Contractors as
applicable. The Contractor shall upon being given such access commence the Work and
diligently proceed with the execution of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Access to the Site by the Contractor shall be merely a licence for carrying
out the construction of the Work under the Contract, and the Contractor shall not by his
being allowed such entry on the Site, acquire any right, lien or interest either in the Work
carried out by him under the Contract or anything appurtenant or attached thereto or to
any part of the Site, and his claim will only be in the nature of money found due and
payable to him in accordance with the certificates issued by the Project Manager /
Architect under the provisions contained herein. The Work shall be free from all liens,
charges or claims of whatsoever nature from any party other than the Owner / Project
Manager. The Owner / Project Manager shall have a lien over all work performed by
the Architect, the Contractor, Sub-Contractors and Vendors and also for the materials
and equipment brought on Site by them.

4.3

Treasures, Antiquities found are property of owner:

All fossils, antiquities and other objects of interest or value, which may be found on the
Site at the commencement or during the progress of the Work shall be the property of
the Owner. The Contractor shall carefully take out and preserve all such fossils,
antiquities and objects and shall immediately deliver the same in their discovered state
into the possession of the Owner.

NATURE OF CONTRACT:
ITEM RATE Contract:
The Contract shall be an item rate Contract wherein the item rates are for the finished work as per
the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be entitled to payment, in Indian Rupees, of no
more than the Contract Price as stated in the Letter of Intent / Work Order, in consideration of the
Work performed and completion of the Work. The contract price is tentative based on the
estimated quantities and is liable to change as per the actual quantities executed and approved by
the Project Manager. The Contractor understands and agrees that the amount payable is assessed
on a re-measurable basis in accordance with the tendered rates. However, the Contract Price may
be altered on account of a change order approved in advance by the Owner / Project Manager.
The Contract Price shall include payment for the supply of all labour (including payment to his
Sub-Contractors), equipment, materials, plant and machinery, tools, transportation, framework,
scaffolding, works under this tender and all applicable taxes excluding Service Tax but including
the Work Contract Tax (WCT), VAT, duties, octroi, levies, royalties, fees, insurance premiums,
contributions towards employees benefits including ESI and PF and funds, arrangement of power
and water and all services and activities constituting the Scope of Work defined in the General
Conditions of Contract. The Contract Price shall also include the Contractor's establishment,
infrastructure, overheads & profits and all other charges, and shall generally be inclusive of every
cost and expense required by the Contract to be borne by the Contractor and necessary for the
proper execution and completion of the Work under the Contract, in conformity with the
Contract Documents and the best engineering and construction practices and to the satisfaction of
the Architect, Project Manager, and the Owner.

Page 25 of 304

No escalation of the prices shall be allowed during the period of the contract for any
reasons whatsoever and the prices quoted by the Contractor shall be deemed to be fixed.
6.

TAXES, DUTIES ETC.:

As part of the Contract Price, the Contractor shall, in connection with the Work include sales
tax, octroi, all applicable duties, works contract tax and any other taxes including sales tax on
the Work, VAT, levies or royalties payable on the materials and equipment forming part of
the Work, now or hereafter imposed, increased or modified from time to time and shall also
include any other statutory obligations and no claims on this account shall be entertained or
allowed at any stage subsequently. Tax including Work Contract Tax (WCT) shall be deducted
as applicable at Source in accordance with the statutory requirements from all payments made to
the Contractor, including that in respect of the Mobilization advance. Contractor shall provide
Form C, Form 38, or any other forms and comply with all the formalities that may be required
by the Central/State Government for procurement of Owner supplied material, if any, and shall
be liable to file all such returns with the Government Departments as may be necessary and get
them assessed at his own cost.

7.

NOTICES, FEES, BYELAWS, REGULATIONS, ETC.:

The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws and Government Acts including the
Byelaws or regulations of Central and / or Local Authorities relating to the Work in so far as
labour, construction, fabrication and installation activities are concerned, and he shall obtain from
the Central and / or Local Authorities all permissions and approvals required for the plying of
trucks, construction machinery etc., and also for construction of temporary offices, labour camps,
stores and other temporary structures in connection with the Work, and the Contractor shall give
all notices and pay all fees and charges that are and that can be demanded by law there under. In
the Contract Price for the Work, the Contractor shall allow for such compliance and work, and
for the giving of all such notices, and shall include the payment of all such fees and charges.

8.

LICENCES AND PERMITS:

The Contractor shall directly obtain all licences and permits for the materials under Government
control, and those required to be obtained by the Contractor for the execution of the Work. The
Contract Price shall include all transportation charges and the other expenses that may be
incurred in this connection.

9.

ROYALTIES AND PATENT RIGHTS:

All royalties or other sums payable by the contractor in respect of the supply and use of any
patented articles, processes or inventions for the carrying out of the Work as described by or
referred to in the Contract Documents, shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract
Price. The contractor shall keep the Owner & Project Manager indemnified against all such
demands as may arise on account of payment of royalties.

10.

INSURANCE:
10.1

Insurance Policies:
Before commencing the execution of the Work, the Contractor, without limiting his
obligations and responsibilities under this Contract shall insure in the joint names of the
contractor and Owner, latter being the beneficiary, against his liability for any material
or physical damage, loss or injury which may occur to any property, including that of the
Owner/Project Manager/ Architect, Sub-Contractors, Vendors or to any person including
any employee of the Owner/ Project Manager/Architect, Sub-Contractors, Vendors or a
member of the general public, by or arising out of the execution of the Work or in
Page 26 of 304

carrying out the Contract. It shall be obligatory for the Contractor to obtain and retain
for all relevant times the insurance cover (in the joint names of the contractor and
Owner, latter being the beneficiary) under the following policies:
10.2

i) Contractor's All Risk Insurance and Extensions on first loss basis: Policy to inter
alias cover the following:
a. Contract works for entire Contract Value plus cost of Owner supplied material (if
any) valid for the completion period and any extension thereof.
b. Earthquake, Civil commotion, riots, war and other disturbances.
c. Debris removal.
d. Extended Maintenance Cover till completion of Defects Liability Period and any
extension thereof.
e. Third Party Insurance including Cross Liability: To cover for any damages to
third party. The limit of indemnity in respect of Any one Accident or series of
accidents arising out of one event shall be Rs. 1,00,00,000/. Policy shall be valid till
completion of work and any extensions thereof and shall include any damage to the
properties and/or injury including death to the persons of the general public and any
one else deemed to be third party.
ii) Workmens Compensation Insurance Policy to cover Contractor's liability under
Workmen's Compensation Act 1923, Minimum Wages Act 1948, Contract Labour
(Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970 and other relevant Acts listed elsewhere. This shall
be valid for the period up to Final Completion of the Work, and any extensions thereof
plus six months handing over period.
iii) Marine cum Erection Insurance (Required only in case Contractors scope of work
involves transportation and erection of equipments & machines for incorporation in
Project) Policy against damage or loss due to any reason in respect of materials,
equipment and/or work done. Limit of liability shall not be less than the value of such
equipment, materials and/or work done at any stage of the Contract, valid for the period
of completion including Defects Liability Period and any extensions thereof.
The Contractor shall insure against all such liabilities and shall continue such insurances
during the currency of the Contract including the Defects Liability Period. Premium for
all insurance policies shall be paid and borne by the Contractor and shall not be
reimbursable.
The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager all policies of insurance in original.
These policies shall be fully executed and shall state that the policies cannot be cancelled
until completion of the Contract including defects liability period and any extensions
thereof.
The Contractor shall obtain similar policies from all Sub-Contractors and thereby
assume responsibility for any claims or losses to the Owner and Project Manager
resulting from failure of any of the Sub-Contractors to obtain adequate insurance
protection in connection with their work and shall indemnify and keep indemnified the
Owner and Project Manager including their employees, officers, servants, agents and
any other person moving in the premises, accordingly.

10.3

Failure to insure:
If the Contractor fails to comply with the terms of this Clause 10, the Project Manager
may effect and / or keep current (but without obligation to do so) the insurance at the
cost and expense of the Contractor and at two times the expenses incurred, deduct the
expenses from any moneys that may be or become payable to the Contractor or may, at
Page 27 of 304

his option, refuse payment of any certificate to the Contractor until the Contractor
complies with this condition.
10.4

11.

Unlimited liability:
In addition to the liability imposed by law upon the Contractor for injury (including
death) to persons or damage to property by reason of the negligence of the Contractor or
his agents, which liability is not impaired or otherwise affected hereby, the Contractor
hereby assumes liability for and agrees to save the Owner and Project Manager
including their employees, officers, servants, agents and any other person moving in
the premises harmless and indemnifies them from every expense, liability or payment
by reason of any injury (including death) to persons or damage to property suffered
through any act or omission of the Contractor, his employees, agents, servants,
workmen, suppliers or any of his Sub-Contractors, or any person directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or from the conditions of the Site or any part of the Site which
is in the control of the Contractor or his employees or any of his Sub-Contractors, or any
one directly or indirectly employed by either of them or arising in any way from the
Work.

CONTRACTORS SITE ORGANIZATION AND RESOURCES:

11.1

Contractors representative and supervisory staff:

The Contractor shall at his cost provide and ensure continued effective supervision of the
Work with the help of the Contractors Representative, assisted by team of qualified,
experienced and competent engineers, supervisors and adequate staff, to the satisfaction
of the Project Manager for the entire duration of the Work. The Contractor shall submit
his proposed site organization chart for the approval of the Project Manager. The
Contractors Representative shall be on the Site at all times as the Work and the Project
progresses and shall be responsible for carrying out the Work to the true meaning of the
Drawings, Specifications, Conditions of Contract, Schedule of Rates, the other Contract
Documents, and instructions and directions of the Project Manager. The instructions and
directions given in writing to the Contractors Representative or to any of his assistants
at the Site by the Project Manager shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor
officially. Attention is called to the importance of the Contractor requesting written
instruction from the Project Manager before undertaking any Work where the Project
Manager's and/or Owners and / or Architects direction or instructions are required.
Any such Work done in advance of such instructions will be liable to be removed at the
Contractor's expense and will not be paid for unless specifically approved in writing by
the Project Manager, as the case may be.
All key staff employed at the Site by the Contractor shall be considered essential to the
performance of the Work and the Project Co-ordination Services, and all key staff shall
be subject to the approval of the Project Manager. However such approval shall not
relieve the Contractor of any of his Contractual obligations. No staff including the
resident engineer and other technical supervisory staff shall be removed or transferred
from the Work without the prior written permission of the Project Manager. The Project
Manager shall, however, have the authority to order the removal from Site of any
undesirable personnel. If key staff becomes unavailable for assignment to the Work or
the Project Co-ordination Services for reasons beyond the Contractors control, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Project Manager to evaluate the impact on the
project. Prior to substitution or addition of any key staff, the Contractor shall obtain the
Project Managers written consent as to the acceptability of replacements or additions to
such personnel. The Contractor shall at all times be fully responsible for the acts,
omissions, defaults and neglect of all of his representatives, agents, servants, workmen
and suppliers and those of his Sub-Contractors.

11.2

Man-power and plant and machinery:

Page 28 of 304

The Contractor shall at his own cost provide and install all equipment, materials,
plant/machines. Provision of Passenger Lift, Batching Plant, Concrete Pumps, Cranes,
and Material Hoists each of adequate capacity, will be required in case of bulk
concreting and high-rise tower construction. Other equipments like concrete mixers
(weigh batchers in case of design mixes), ladders, and scaffolding etc, necessary for the
execution of the Work in conformity with the Contract Documents and to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager will also be provided by the contractor at his own
cost in adequate quantity. Also, all machines, tools, trucks, formwork material, manpower and every thing else necessary for the proper and satisfactory execution and
completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be provided
by the Contractor at his own cost. The Contractor shall within two weeks of the award of
Contract submit a complete list of his manpower, plant and machinery for the approval
of the Project Manager which approval however shall not relieve the Contractor of any
of his responsibilities, obligations and liabilities under the Contract. The Contractor
shall augment his manpower, plant and machinery without extra cost to the Project
Manager whenever required or so directed by the Project Manager in order to conform to
the approved construction programme for the achievement of milestones and Virtual
Completion.
The batching plant shall be computerised (Microprocessor based) with printing facility
so as to keep the printed out-put for each batch of concrete mix and for each component
(stone aggregates, sand, cement, fly ash, water, plasticiser & any other concrete
admixture) for each batch of design mix concrete.
11.3

Contractor store, site offices and other facilities:

Contractor has inspected the site and has made his own assessment towards the
availability of space at site for his stores, yards, offices, placement of batching plant,
steel & shuttering yards, cranes, material hoists and other facilities. A mutually
determined area within the constraints of the Site will be allowed to the Contractor
free of cost for the purpose of storing his tools, plant, materials, Site office, cement
godown, canteen, plant & machinery etc. Incase contractor is not able to
accommodate his facilities within the site, or in the opinion of the Project Manager
contractors facilities are to be removed or relocated in the interest of the progress of
work (contractors and / or any other agencies / vendors) the contractor shall make
his own arrangements elsewhere out side the site at his own cost for the same. Water
tank for the purpose of construction, Site offices, toilets, workshops and storage sheds
etc. shall be built by the Contractor at the Contractors cost. Water tank/s constructed
for the purpose of construction should be of such dimensions as to provide storage for
at least two days consumption. Site offices shall be of such dimensions to
accommodate the Contractors own office. A separate sanitary facility shall be
provided and maintained for, Engineers and workers. The same shall be cleared after
construction period. The Contractor shall remove all the temporary construction
constructed by him at the Site for the purpose of completing the Work after the
Project is completed. Costs of all such facilities including construction & removal
shall be borne by the Contractor. Construction of labour hutments will not be
allowed inside on the Site. The Contractor shall at his own cost make all
arrangements for space, lodging, transportation etc. for the labour. No person will be
allowed to stay on Site except the security and watchman except during night
construction when the Work is in progress.

11.4

Security:
The Contractor shall at his cost provide at all times adequate number of watchmen to
guard the Site, materials and equipment, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall at all times be fully responsible for the security of all materials
and equipment on the Site, whether his own or those of any Sub-Contractor. Owner /
Page 29 of 304

Project Manager shall not be responsible for any loss due to theft, fire, accident or any
other reasons, whatsoever.
11.5

Telephone / Communication:
The contractor shall make his own arrangement for the telephones and mobile phones
at site with information to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall provide his
representative and key personnel with mobile phone for round the clock communication
with Project Manager. Contractor shall also at his own cost ensure two way
communication either by way of providing, maintaining and running the walkie-talkie or
mobile phones of adequate range at site, between the Project Managers team members
and contractors own key personnel (from Project In-charge to function / area In-charge
level) deputed at site, with whom Project Manager would required to interact on day to
day basis.

11.6

Survey Equipment:
The Contractor shall keep & provide sufficient number of required survey equipments
as at site for his own use. The contractor will provide at his own cost for the sole use
of the Project Manager survey equipment as required by the Project Manager.

11.7

Sanitary Convenience:
The Contractor shall at his expense provide and erect with prior permission and details to
the Project Manager all necessary sanitary conveniences including septic tank and soak
pits at the Site for the staff and all workmen of his own, his Sub-Contractors, the
Owners Representative and the Project Manager. The sanitary conveniences shall be
strategically located around the Site to provide ready access to all site operatives and
employees. The Contractor shall maintain such convenience in a clean, hygienic, orderly
condition and shall clean, disinfect and deodorize the ground after their removal, and
meet all statutory requirements.

11.8

Scaffolding, staging, guard rails, barricades:

The Contractor shall at his cost provide steel scaffolding, staging, guard rails,
barricades and safety barriers around all excavations, openings and at all edges,
temporary stairs and other temporary measures required during construction. The
supports for the scaffolding, staging guard rails, barricades and safety barriers and
temporary stairs shall be strong, adequate for the particular situations, tied together
with horizontal pieces and braced properly. The temporary access to the various parts
of the building under construction shall be rigid and strong enough to avoid any
chance of mishaps. The entire scaffolding arrangement together with the staging,
guard rails, barricades and safety barriers, and temporary stairs shall be to the
approval of the Project Manager which approval however shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities, obligations and liabilities for safety and for
timely completion of the Work. The use of wooden scaffolding on the Site is strictly
forbidden.

11.9

Temporary Roads:
The Contractor shall at his cost construct and maintain temporary roads/access ways
to suit Site requirements at locations mutually agreed with the Project Manager. Such
roads/access ways will also be used by other Vendors working at the Site.

11.10

Safety Equipment & Personnel:

The Contractor shall provide sufficient helmets, safety boots/shoes, nets and
protective clothing for use by the Project management team, his own staff and staff of
its sub-contractors. The Contractor shall make available at all times when work is
being undertaken, a vehicle suitable for the emergency evacuation of personnel from
the site to a hospital staffed and equipped to receive injured personnel.
Page 30 of 304

The contractor shall provide a fulltime, experienced and suitably qualified Safety
Officer at site who shall be responsible for incorporation, implementation and
enforcement of all safety measures and requirements for maintaining safe working
conditions, safety of manpower and equipment, general safety and security of Site as
per the various safety codes and stipulations mentioned in contract documents.
The Contractor shall provide I-Cards (Identity Cards) to each of his worker with
designated number & colour only of the card as directed by the Project Manager.
11.11

Temporary Lighting:
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement in respect of the provision of
adequate lighting at all places where his workmen are engaged for carrying out the
Work and also provide general lighting of site as a whole in a proper safe and
satisfactory manner. Contractor shall ensure that all staircases, lobbies and basements
are well lighted by providing at least one tube light at each landing of every staircase
and also in each lift lobby. The Contractor shall provide general lighting in basement
by installing at least one tube light per 100 sqm area at his own cost.

11.12

Protection of Environment:
The Contractor understands that the Site is free from pollutants at the time of access
to the Site and commencement of the Work. The Contractor shall comply with all
applicable environmental laws and regulations and shall ensure that the Site is and
remains free from pollutants at the end of the Project. The Contractor shall ensure
inter-alia, that neither the soil nor the ground water is polluted or contaminated by
fuels or lubricants emitted by machinery operated on the Site or by other dangerous or
poisonous substances which are or are deemed to be hazardous to the environment.
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor shall comply with all the directions and
decisions of the Project Manager in this regard.

11.13

First Aid Equipment & Medical Facilities:

The Contractor shall establish a fully equipped and staffed (trained) first aid centre on
the Site to deal with accidental injuries and workers health. Contractor shall ensure that a
qualified & registered doctor is engaged to regularly visit the site for labour welfare. The
Contractor shall provide such first aid and medical facility to at his own cost.
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements with a local hospital and with local
doctors so that his sick or injured persons may receive prompt medical treatment with
minimum delay at any hour of the day or night.

12

LABOUR REGULATIONS:
12.1

Regulations:
The Contractor shall be wholly and solely responsible for full compliance with the
provisions under all labour laws and /or regulations such as Payment of Wages Act
1948, Employees Liability Act 1938, Workmen's Compensation Act 1923,
Employees State Insurance Act 1948, Employees Provident Fund Act 1952, Industrial
Disputes Act 1947, the Maternity Benefit Act 1961, the Contract Labour (Regulation
and Abolition) Act 1970 and the Factories Act 1948 or any modifications thereof or
any other law relating thereto and rules there under introduced from time to time.
The Contractor shall assume liability and shall indemnify the Owner & Project
Manager from every expense, liability or payment by reason of the application of any
labour law, act, rules or regulations existing or to be introduced at a future date during
the term of the Contract. Insurance cover towards the above shall be effected by the
Contractor as called for in Clause 10. In general, in respect of all labour directly or
indirectly employed in the Work for the performance of Contractor's part of the
Contract, the Contractor shall comply with all the rules framed by the Government
Page 31 of 304

authorities concerned from time to time for protection of the health and welfare of the
workers. The Contractor shall at his own cost obtain a valid licence for himself and
the Owner / Principal Employer under the Contract Labour (R & A) Act 1970 and the
Contract labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central Rules 1971 and under any other
applicable rules before the commencement of the Work and continue to have a valid
licences until the completion of the Work.
12.2

Payment of wages:
The Contractor shall pay to labour employed by him either directly or through SubContractors wages not less than fair wages as defined in the relevant Central / Local
Labour Regulations or as per the provisions of the Contract Labour (Regulation and
Abolition) Act 1970 and the Contract Labour Regulation and Abolition of Central
Rules 1971, wherever applicable. He shall also abide by the minimum wages and
other regulations applicable to the labour engaged in the Work, as laid down by the
concerned Central / local authorities (State, District or other local Authorities).
In case the contractor fails to pay fare wages as required by the authorities then the
owner/ Project Manager shall be entitled to do so and receives such amounts
including associated cost incurred by them in doing so from the contractor.

12.3

Model Rules:
The Contractor shall at his own expense comply with or cause to be complied with,
Model Rules for labour welfare framed by Government or other local bodies from
time to time for the protection of health and for making sanitary arrangements,
Malaria control, etc. for workers employed directly or indirectly on the Work and in
the workers hutment area. In case the Contractor fails to make arrangements as
aforesaid, the Owner shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from the
Contractor.

12.4

Safety Codes:
In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed on the Work for the performance
and execution of the Contractor's Work under the Contract, the Contractor shall at his
own expense arrange for all the safety provisions as listed in (i) Safety codes of
C.P.W.D. and Bureau of Indian Standards, (ii) The Electricity Act, (iii) The Mines Act,
and Regulations, (iv) Regulations of employment & conditions of service Act 1996,
Rules and Orders made there under and such other acts as applicable.
Precautions as stated in the safety clauses are of minimum necessity and shall not
preclude the Contractor taking additional safety precautions as may be warranted for the
particular type of work or situations. Also mere observance of these precautions shall
not absolve the Contractor of his liability in case of loss or damage to property or injury
to any person including but not limited to the Contractor's labour, the Owner's,
Architect's, Owners Representatives and Project Manager's representatives or any
member of the public or resulting in the death of any of these.
Protective gear such as safety helmets, boots, belts, gloves, spectacles, nets, fire
extinguishers etc. shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost to all his
manpower at the Site. The Contractor shall impose such requirements on all SubContractors and Vendors also. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure
that such protective gear is worn at all times by all personnel working at the Site during
the term of the Project. The Owner, Project Manager and Owners Representative shall
each have the right to stop any person not wearing such protective gear from working on
the Site.
In case the Contractor fails to make arrangements and provide necessary facilities as
aforesaid, the Project Manager shall be entitled (but not obliged) to do so and recover
Page 32 of 304

the costs thereof from the Contractor. The decision of the Project Manager in this
regard shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
12.5

Safety/Site Conditions:
i. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequacy, stability and safety of
all Site operations and ensure that the methods of carrying out the Work and the
Project by the Contractor including his workmen, employees, Sub-Contractors and
Vendors meet all the necessary safety standards and requirements of the SHE Plan.
In order to fulfill this obligation the Contractor shall appoint a permanent, full time
and suitably qualified safety officer for the Site.
ii. The Contractor shall institute and implement to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager a construction safety programme, including:
a. Preparing a Site-specific written safety programme consistent with the SHE
Plan, Indian law and best practices. As a minimum, the programme shall
require applicable safety equipment for all workers, use of barriers and
barricades around potentially dangerous areas, protection of workers working
under elevated conditions, accident reporting, medical & first aid provisions,
lighting, housekeeping, sanitation etc.
b. Weekly safety reviews and risk assessments shall be carried out in
conjunction with the Project Manager and the Owners representative in order
to identify potential safety hazards and to militate against them. Contractor
shall be required to maintain proper records of these inspections along with
the checklists.
c. The Contractor will be required to provide all personnel entering the Site a
safety rules card with instructions on Dos and Donts and verbal explanation
of the safety programme.
d. Requiring all Sub-Contractors and other workers under the responsibility of
the Contractor (including the Vendors or later phases of the construction of
the Project) to adhere to the written safety programme.

The Contractor has full responsibility for maintaining the Site in good and clean condition and
removing all trash and debris on a daily basis to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. The
Contractor is responsible for providing adequate sanitary facilities and maintaining them in a
clean and healthy condition. If the Contractor fails to comply with the above the Project
Manager will have the authority to get the same cleaned by an external agency and debit the
expenses incurred on the same to the Contractors account; but without being under any legal
obligation to do so.
If, by reason of any accident, or failure, or other event occurring to, in, or in connection with the
Project, or any part thereof, either during the execution of the Work, or during the Defects
Liability Period, any remedial or other work is, in the opinion of Owners Representative or the
Project Manager urgently necessary for the implementation of the safety programme of the
Project by the Contractor and the Contractor is unable or unwilling at once to do such work, the
Project Manager shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out such work as the
Project Manager may consider necessary. If the work or repair so done by the Project Manager
is work which, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the Contractor is liable to do at its own
cost, then all costs consequent thereon or incidental thereto shall be recoverable from the
Contractor and may be deducted by the Project Manager from any of the Retention Money and
any moneys due or to become due to the Contractor and the Project Manager shall notify the
Contractor accordingly, provided that the Project Manager shall, as soon after the occurrence of
any such emergency as may be reasonably practicable, notify the Contractor thereof.
Page 33 of 304

The Contractor shall ensure that all operations by the Contractor, his workmen, employees, SubContractors to complete the Project and the remedying of any defects therein shall, so far as
compliance with the requirements of this Agreement permit, be carried on so as not to interfere
unnecessarily or improperly with:

The convenience of the public, or

The access to, use and occupation of public or private roads, railways and footpaths to or of
properties whether in the possession of Owner/Project Manager or of any other person.
The Owners /Project Managers operation and utilization of the facility at the Site; and
The Work of Vendors.

If any hazardous or obnoxious materials (as defined by Indian law) are specified for use or are
being used by Sub-Contractors or Vendors, the Contractor shall keep record of such material and
forthwith give written notice to the Project Manager and shall ensure that the Sub-Contractors
and Vendors, as applicable, use, store and dispose of such hazardous or obnoxious materials
strictly in accordance with all applicable laws.
12.6

Additional Safety Regulations:

The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection for the Work against
fire and other hazards and shall protect the Owners /Project Managers property from
damage or loss during the performance of this Contract. The Contractor also shall
adequately protect property adjacent to the Work.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of its employees,
Subcontractors and the Vendors performing the Work and later phases of the Project
and shall comply with all applicable safety laws and regulations to prevent accidents or
injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating a safe working programme with
the Project Manager. Such a programme shall include, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for maintaining, the following safe working conditions and practices:
i.

All combustible material, food matter, garbage, scrap, and other debris generated
during the performance of the Work shall be collected and removed from the Site
on daily basis. Arrangements for scrap burning should be discussed with Project
Manager.

ii. An adequate number and type of fire extinguishers and sand buckets shall be
provided at the Site for fire control and shall be kept/maintained in satisfactory
and effective working condition, at all times.
iii. Rescue operation team with availability of stretchers and transport vehicle. This
team shall conduct mock drills at regular intervals. The report of which shall be
submitted by the contractor to the Project Manager.
12.7
12.8

Each gas welding or burning, arc welding unit, tar pot, or open flame unit requires a
fire extinguisher and sand buckets with it during operation.
The availability of fire blankets is recommended. Other equipment related conditions
are as follows:
i.

The Contractor shall use only safe equipment in good condition. The Contractor
shall not use or permit to be used the Owner's / Project Managers equipment and
the Owner / Project Manager shall not use the Contractor's equipment without
prior written permission of the other.
Page 34 of 304

ii. When working in an occupied building or area, the Contractor must before
commencement of work familiarize himself with the hazards of that area, such as
the location of flammable substances and toxic fumes and make suitable
precautionary arrangements.
iii. Materials and equipment intended for installation in the Work as well as the
Owner's / Project Managers equipment and materials already in place are to be
protected at all times from debris, weather, or any damage. The Contractor shall
take all steps necessary to ensure the preservation condition of such equipment.
iv. The Contractor's materials, tools, and equipment shall be stored only in areas
approved by the Project Manager for this purpose.
v. Site access and parking by the Contractor's personnel shall be at locations
designated by the Project Manager. Only the Contractor's personnel necessary
for the performance of the Work shall be permitted access to the Site. The
Contractor and its employees and Sub-contractors shall adhere to all speed limits
and traffic regulations at the Site.
vi. The Contractor and its employees and subcontractors shall strictly obey all "No
Smoking" restrictions.
vii. The Contractor shall not operate or use or manipulate utilities at the Site without
the Project Managers prior written approval.
viii. No valves shall be turned off or on, or electrical disconnect switches operated
except in an emergency. Any required utility "shut downs" will be scheduled and
co-ordinated with the Project Manager.
ix. The Contractor shall make any requests for utility manipulation or "shut downs" in
writing on least two (2) days' notice to the Project Manager.

12.9

Safety with regard to site and housekeeping:

The contractor shall depute a dedicated team of adequate number of worker under the
responsibility of the Safety In-charge for carrying out the safety and housekeeping
work at site on daily basis. Following shall be ensured by the Contractor and his
safety & housekeeping team:
i.

The use of intoxicants or unlawful drugs at the Site, in any degree, shall be
strictly prohibited. The Contractor shall rigorously enforce this regulation.

ii. When overhead work is in progress in or around an occupied area, signs to denote
such work prominently displaying "Overhead Work" shall be used and a
barricade shall protect the area. Safety nets and appropriate catchments provisions
shall be provided at suitable levels so as not to allow any material to fall on the
ground.
iii. Dusty work, such as concrete breaking or demolition, in or near occupied areas,
shall proceed only after wetting down the area and taking steps necessary to
prevent dust from penetrating occupied areas and creating a nuisance.
iv. Care shall be taken not to block any door, passageway, and safety exit, fire fighting
equipment, or safety equipment with materials or equipment.

Page 35 of 304

v. Materials must be piled, stacked, or stored in a neat and orderly manner. All
stacking, whether inside or outside a building, shall be parallel to or at right
angles to the building line or fence. The stacking of materials shall be organised
on daily basis.
vi. When noisy operations of a prolonged nature are necessary in or near an occupied
area, arrangements must be made with the Project Manager for scheduling to
minimize any nuisance in the occupied area.
vii. All critical and dangerous locations / areas at site shall be marked with caution
signs, indications and directions in the form of well designed and uniform
signages, the design of signages shall be approved by the Project Manager.
12.10

If the Project Manager notifies the Contractor of non-compliance with all or any of
the foregoing regulations, the Contractor shall immediately, if so directed, or in any
event not more than eighteen (18) hours after receipt of such notice, make all
reasonable efforts to correct such non-compliance. If the Contractor fails to do so, the
Project Manager may suspend all or any part of the Work. When the Contractor has
undertaken satisfactory corrective action, Project Manager shall lift the suspension of
the Work. The Contractor shall not claim any extension of time to complete the
Work or additional fees due to any such work suspension.

12.11

Notwithstanding anything herein before contained, particularly in Clause 12.4 and

12.5, the Contractor shall be liable to ensure and implement all safety measures,
whether or not statutorily prescribed, to safeguard, preserve and protect the life,
health and welfare of every workman employed/deployed/engaged directly or
indirectly by the Contractor on the Site and in relation to or connected with the Work
and all Vendors employed in later phases of the Project in addition to installing,
providing every prescribed safety and protective equipment, clothing etc., and the
mere absence of any reference to or specification of a particular statute or rule or
regulation in this Contract shall not absolve the Contractor of an obligation to comply
with every such law, rule or regulation. The obligations stipulated in Clauses 12.4
and 12.5 shall not in any manner be deemed to limit or restrict any obligation or duty
that any law, rule or regulation may otherwise impose upon the Contractor. The
Contractor shall be liable for all consequences/liabilities arising out of his violating
any of the aforesaid provisions, including fines, penalties, compensations, damages,
prosecutions, proceedings, medical expenditure and costs, rehabilitation costs and all
other expenses connected therewith.

12.12

Child Labour:
The Contractor shall not employ any labour less than 18 years of age on the job. If
female labour is engaged, the Contractor shall make necessary provisions at his own
expense for safeguarding and care of their children and keeping them clear of the Site.
No children shall be permitted on the Site.

12.13

Crches:
If women workers are employed on the Work, the Contractor shall provide at his
expense two rooms of -reasonable dimensions plus toilet facilities for the use of their
children under the age of six years. One room shall be used as a playroom and the other
as the bedroom of the children. The rooms shall be built to reasonably good
specifications in consultation with the Project Manager. The rooms shall be well lit and
well ventilated.
The Contractor shall provide adequate number of toys and games in the playroom and
sufficient number of cots and beddings in the bedroom. The rooms shall be maintained
absolutely clean, employing sweepers.
Page 36 of 304

The Contractor shall provide Dai (ayah) to look after the children in the crche. The use
of the rooms earmarked as crches shall be restricted to children, their attendants and
mothers of the children.
13.

CONTRIBUTION TOWARDS EMPLOYEE BENEFITS, FUNDS ETC.:

The Contractor shall include in the Contract Price all expenses necessary to meet his obligations
for making contributions toward employee benefits funds (Such as provident fund, ESI benefits,
old age pension and/or any other benefits/compensation legally payable) in compliance with all
the statutory regulations and requirements. All records in this connection shall be properly
maintained by the Contractor and produced for scrutiny by the concerned authorities and the
Project Manager and the Owner whenever called for
13.1

Employees State Insurance Scheme (ESI)

The Contractor shall be liable to pay his contribution and Employees contribution to the
State Insurance Scheme in respect of all labour employed by him or for the execution of
the contract in accordance with the provision of The Employees State Insurance Act,
1948 as amended from time to time.

13.2

Employees Provident Fund (EPF)

The Contractor shall obtain prescribed recommendations from the Regional Provident
Funds Commissioner under the Employees Provident Fund and Misc. Provisions Act,
1952 and shall cause provident fund contribution from all eligible employees and
Contractors contribution to be deposited regularly with the prescribed authority and in
token of which shall submit every month necessary receipts/ documentary evidence as
may be required by the Project Manager. The contractor shall also provide its P.F.
registration number/ certificate to Project Manager.
In case the contractor fails to comply with above provisions as required by the
authorities then the Project Manager shall be entitled to do so and recover such amounts
including the associated costs incurred by them in doing so, from the contractor.
The Contractor must fully satisfy himself as to these points and allow coverage for the
same in the rates while giving his tender. Nothing extra shall be paid on these accounts.

14.

SETTING OUT AND SITE SURVEYS:

The Contractor shall establish, maintain and assume responsibility for all bench marks and grid
lines, and all other levels, lines, dimensions and grades that are necessary for the execution of the
Work, in conformity with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall establish his relation to
the permanent benchmarks and boundary lines established at the Site. The Contractor shall verify
and co-relate all the survey data available at the Site before commencing the Work and shall
immediately report in writing any errors or inconsistencies to the PM. Commencement of Work
by the Contractor shall be regarded as his acceptance of the correctness of all survey and setting
out data available at the Site and no claims shall be entertained or allowed in respect of any errors
or discrepancies found at a later date. If at any time error in this regard appears during his
progress of the Work, the Contractor shall at his own expense rectify such error to the satisfaction
of the P M
The approval by the Project Manager of the setting out by the Contractor shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of the responsibilities, obligations, and liabilities under the Contract.
The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal, vertical and other
alignment for all levels and dimensions and for the correctness of every part of the Work, and he
shall rectify effectively any errors or imperfections therein. All such rectifications shall be
Page 37 of 304

carried out by the Contractor at his own cost and to the instructions and satisfaction of the Project
Manager
The Contractor shall employ qualified surveyors to carry out all the surveys and setting out
works.
15.

DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, INTERPRETATIONS ETC.:

For guidance of the bidder, Architectural, Structural and Finishing drawings are enclosed with
these Tender Documents. These drawings are broadly indicative of the work to be carried
out. These drawings are not the Construction Drawings and details indicated there in are for
guidance only and are liable to be modified by the Project Manager during course of actual
construction. No claim what so ever shall be admissible on account of changes that may be
introduced later by the Project Manager / Architect / Consultant.
Within two (2) weeks after the issue of Letter of Intent, the Contractor shall be furnished by
the Project Manager and/or Owner with one copies each of the Conditions of Contract,
Specifications, and Schedule of Rates, without cost to him for his own use and for the use of
his Sub-Contractors until the completion of the Contract. Additional copies of Contract
Documents will be supplied on payment at actual cost basis. The architect through the Project
Manager shall provide three copies of working drawings to the Contractor as the Work
progresses. The timing of the provision of drawings shall be mutually agreed between the
Contractor, Project Manager and Architect in conformity with the construction programme
and with due regard for the need to order and specify materials and equipment to the Site.
Additional copies of construction status drawings will be supplied on payment at actual cost
basis. Contractor shall keep atleast one copy readily available at site for inspection and use by
the Project Manager or his representative and any other person authorised by them.
In general, the Drawings shall indicate the dimensions, positions and type of construction, the
Specifications shall stipulate the quality and the methods and performance criteria, and the
Schedule of Rates shall indicate the rates for each item of work for evaluating change orders.
However, the above Contract Documents being complementary, what is called for by any one
shall be binding as if called for by all. Wherever there is a discrepancy between drawings and
specifications, the drawings shall be followed. In interpreting the specifications, the following
order of decreasing importance shall be followed:
BOQ
Technical Specifications
Drawing
Matters not contained in the specifications and in case of any ambiguities in written
specifications of the contract, the works shall be executed as per relevant BIS codes and CPWD
specifications in that order of preference. If such codes have not been framed, the decision of the
Architect shall be final.
Any work indicated on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications or vice versa, shall
be deemed as though fully set forth in each. Work not specifically detailed, called for, marked or
specified shall be the same as similar parts that are detailed, marked or specified.
From time to time during the progress of the Work, the Contractor will be issued with revisions
of Drawings and written instructions by the Project Manager in connection with and necessary
for the proper execution and completion of the Work. All such revisions of Drawings and
written instructions shall be part of the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall be bound to
carry out the work that is shown and detailed on all such Drawings and shall be bound to follow
and comply with all such instructions.
Page 38 of 304

The Project Manager will issue all Drawings and their subsequent revisions via listing on
transmittals / Register to the Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain a Drawing register listing
all Drawings and their latest revisions. All superseded Drawings shall be so stamped and
withdrawn from circulation at the Site and returned to the Project Manager. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain and ensure that all the Work is carried out in
accordance with the latest revisions of the Drawings issued to him. Should the Contractor fail to
do this, all the rectifications and remedial work that may be required to conform to the latest
revisions of the Drawings shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Wherever it is mentioned in the Conditions of Contract, Specifications, and other Contract
Documents that the Contractor shall perform certain work or provide certain facilities, it is
understood that the Contractor shall do so at his own cost, unless otherwise provided in the
Documents.
No deviations shall be made by the Contractor, in the execution of the Work from the Drawings,
Specifications, and other Contract Documents. Only the Project Manager shall issue
interpretations and clarifications.
The Contractor shall immediately in writing bring any errors or inconsistencies in the Drawings
and Specifications to the attention of the Project Manager for interpretation or correction before
proceeding with the affected portion of the Work, and no claims or losses alleged to have been
caused by such discrepancies shall be entertained or allowed at any stage. Local conditions,
which may affect the Work, shall likewise be brought to the Project Managers attention at once.
If at any time it is discovered that work, which has been done or is being done is not in
accordance with the approved Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall correct the work
immediately. Correction of such work shall be at the expense of the Contractor and shall not
form a basis for any claims for payment or extension of time. The Contractor shall carry out all
the rectification work only after obtaining approval for the same from the Project Manager
No scaling of any Drawing shall be done to obtain the dimensions. Figured dimensions on the
Drawings shall be used for carrying out the Work. Drawings with large-scale details shall take
precedence over small scale Drawings. Where any Drawings and details have not been provided
but are necessary for the execution of the Work, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
seek these drawings and details in writing from the Project Manager at least four weeks prior to
the latest date by which the Contractor needs these drawings and details to suit the programmed
execution of the Work. No extension of time shall be allowed for any delays caused due to the
Contractor's failure to seek such details.
Drawings, Schedule of Rates, Specifications, and other Contract Documents, and all copies
thereof furnished by the Project Manager shall become the Owner's property. They shall not be
used on any other work and shall be returned to the Owner at his request or at the completion of
the Contract.
16.

WATER AND ELECTRICITY:

Applicable as per the Special Conditions of Contract Clause no. 28.

17.

ASSIGNMENT AND SUB-LETTING:

The Contractor shall not assign this Contract. The Contractor may, however, sub-contract any
part of the Work with the prior written consent of the Project Manager. Any permission to
sub-contract parts of the Work shall not relieve the Contractor from any of his
responsibilities, obligations, and liabilities under this Contract.

18.

SUB-CONTRACTORS:
Page 39 of 304

As soon as practicable, but at least four weeks before awarding any Sub-Contract, the
Contractor shall submit to the Architect and Project Manager in writing the names of the SubContractors along with their profiles and work experience proposed for any part of the Work,
for the approval of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall employ such Sub-Contractors
only after he has received confirmation in writing of such approval from the Project Manager.
Such approval, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities,
obligations and liabilities under the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for the acts,
defaults and neglect of all Sub-Contractors and their agents, servants and workmen. The
Contractor shall not employ any Sub-Contractor to whom the Project Manager objects and/or
does not approve.
19.

SEPARATE CONTRACTS:
The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Project. The
Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for their access to the Site,
for the storage of their materials, and for the execution of their work, or if specified give
assistance to such contractors for such purposes as are specified. The Contractor shall
properly connect and co-ordinate his Work with that of the other contractors that may be
employed or engaged by the Owner / PM and shall co-ordinate, communication among the
PM, Architect, the Contractor, its Sub-Contractors and the Vendors and provide the facilities
and oversee construction schedule, construction co-ordination and Site Safety for the Project.
If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of
any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report in writing to the Project
Manager any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and
results. The Contractor's failure to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the
other contractor's work as fit and proper for receiving the work of the Contractor. Contractor
may note that other contractors including civil contractors are already working on other
Phases / Parts of the Project for making necessary arrangements to facilitate his own
work

20.

CO-ORDINATION OF WORK:
At the commencement of the Work, and from time to time, the Contractor shall co-operate with
other contractors, Sub-Contractors, persons engaged on separate contracts in connection with the
Project, Vendors, the Project Manager, the Owner and the Architect for the purpose of the coordination and execution of various parts / phases of the Project. The Contractor shall determine
and ascertain from the Vendors and persons engaged on separate contracts, in connection with
the Project, the extent of all chasings, cutting and forming of all openings, holes, details of all
inserts, sleeves, etc. that are required to accommodate the various services.
The Contractor shall determine and ascertain the routes of all services and positions of all floor
and wall openings, outlets, traps, the details of all inserts, equipment and services and shall carry
out the construction and making good of all "builder's work" in accordance with and as shown,
described and/or measured in the drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents. Also,
the Contractor shall ensure that all required services, inserts, sleeves, embedment etc. are in
place/ position before he proceeds with his work. Should the Contractor fail to comply with
these requirements and the consequence of such failure necessitates the breaking, re-doing and
making good of any work, then the cost of all such breaking, re-doing and making good of any
work shall be to the account of the Contractor and shall be borne by him. No breaking and
cutting of completed work shall be done unless specifically authorised in writing by the Project
Manager. No work shall be done over broken or patched work without first ascertaining that the
broken surface is adequately prepared and reinforced to receive and hold further work, as
determined by the Project Manager.

Page 40 of 304

In order to ensure proper co-ordination is being undertaken, weekly meetings, chaired by the
Project Manager, will be held with the various contractors and Architect, at which co-ordination
will be discussed and minutes of actions proposed circulated.
21.

USE OF CONTRACTORS FACILITY BY OTHERS:

Contractor shall allow the use of his access ways, scaffolding, temporary staging, lighting, and
sources of temporary power and water, to other Contractors, Sub-contractors and Vendors etc.,
where necessary for their legitimate work, without let or hindrance, but in a coordinated manner.
Should there be conflict, then direction of the Project Manager shall be final and all parties shall
be bound by it. For use of water by other contractor / sub contractor and vendors they shall be
allowed to draw only from the source of water free of cost. All extension required thereof shall
be done at respective contractors, sub contractors at vendors cost. For electricity similar
methodology shall be adopted however the cost of electricity consumption shall be chargeable to
other contractors, sub contractors / vendors etc. on prevailing rates of local state electricity board.

22.

23.

OVERTIME WORK:
22.1

If it is necessary for the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor to work on other than

working days or outside the normal working hours in order to keep up to the time
schedule and meet the Construction Programme, the Contractor shall obtain the prior
approval of the Project Manager in writing, which approval shall not be unreasonably
withheld. The additional cost of wages and any other costs incurred as a result of
overtime or any shift work (except supervision expenses incurred by the Project
Manager) shall be borne by the Contractor.

22.2

Where work is being carried out in or around an operating plant / office or occupied
building /premises and is liable to cause disturbance or interruption in working of the
Plant / Office or inconvenience to the occupants of the premises, the Contractor shall
work only at specified places and times as mutually arranged between the Contractor
and the Project Manager so as not to cause any disturbance. Due to this the Contractor
may be required to work during off-hours, Sundays and holidays. The Contractor
shall not be entitled for any extra payment for doing work in the manner described
above.

MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, STORAGE, INSPECTIONS ETC.:

23.1(A) Owner Supplied Material: 23.1.1 The Owner will not supply any material. Sole responsibility rests with the
contractor for procurement of all other materials required for completion of
work within the stipulated time.
23.1.2 Materials specified as to be issued by the Owner, if any, will be supplied to the
Contractor by the Owner from his stores or the dealer or the dealers warehouse
or railway siding or from any other specified place.
23.1.3 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to take delivery of the materials
and arrange for its loading, transport and unloading at the site of work, at his
own cost. The materials shall be issued during working hours only.
23.1.4 The Contractor shall bear all incidental charges for the storage and safe custody
of materials as directed by the Project Manager, at site after these have been
issued to him

Page 41 of 304

23.1.5 The materials shall be issued in standard sizes as obtained from the
manufacturers.
23.1.6 It shall be the duty of the contractor to inspect the materials supplied to him at
the time of taking delivery and satisfy himself that they are in good condition.
After the materials have been delivered, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to keep them in good condition and if the materials are damaged or
lost, at any time, they shall be repaired and/or replaced by the contractor at his
own cost, according to the directions of the Project Manager.
23.1.7 The Owner shall not be liable for delay in supply or non-supply of any
materials, if any, which he has undertaken to supply where such failure or delay
is due to natural calamities, transport and procurement difficulties and any
circumstances beyond the control of the Owner. In no case, shall the Contractor
be entitled to claim any compensation or loss suffered by him on this account.
23.1.8 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange in time all the materials
required for the works. If, however, in the opinion of the Project Manager /
Owner, the execution of the work is likely to be delayed due to the contractors
inability to make arrangements for supply of materials which normally he has to
arrange for, the project Manager / Owner shall have the right, at his own
discretion to arrange for issue of such materials from the market or elsewhere
and the Contractor will be bound to take such materials at the rate decided by
the Owner. This however, does not in any way absolve the Contractor from
responsibility of making arrangements for the supply of such material in part or
full, should such a situation occur nor shall this constitute a reason for the delay
in the execution of the work.
23.1.9 The Contractor shall, if desired by the Project Manager / Owner, be required to
execute an indemnity bond in the prescribed form for safe custody and
accounting of all materials issued by the Owner.
23.1.10 A day to day account of the materials issued by the Owner shall be maintained
by the Contractor, indicating the daily receipt, consumption and balance in hand,
in a manner prescribed by the Project Manager.
23.1.11 The Contractor shall see that only the required quantities of materials are got
issued. The contractor shall not be entitled to cartage and incidental charges for
returning the surplus materials, if any, to a place as directed by the Project
Manger.
23.1.12 Materials supplied by the Owner, if any, shall not be used for any other purpose
other than that issued for.
23.1.13 Accounting and reconciliation of materials supplied by owner shall be done as
per procedure given in Annexure 2.
23.1(B) Contractor Supplied material
23.1.1 All the materials including reinforcement steel & cement shall be procured by
the contractor. Basic rates for selected materials and fixtures in the tender are
provided to enable the contractor to quote the item rates accordingly. Quoted
rate to include labour, basic cost of material, cost of accessories, taxes, payment
to suppliers, transportation, handling, storage, safety, wastage, accounting and
reconciliation and to provide Form C & 38 and any other
Page 42 of 304

documents/formalities for purchase of materials, cost of electricity, water, WCT,

VAT and contractors overheads and profits etc.
23.1.2 In case the Contractor fails / refuses to procure and provide any material, the
Project Manager in the interest of the work may resort to procure and provide
such materials at the risk and cost of the Contractor. Under such circumstances
a procurement charge @ 15% of the respective item rates shall be imposed on
the Contractor and recovered from his bills / any outstanding payments. Clauses
23.1.2 to 23.1.13 shall mutatis mutandis apply to such materials.
23.1.3 The materials shall be fully accounted for by the Contractor as required
hereinafter. In accounting for the materials, allowances, as indicated in the
Annexure 1 & 2 against each item, will be made to cover all wastages and
losses that may have been incurred in the process of handling, storing, cutting,
fabrication, fixing and installing. The contractor shall submit statement of
account and reconciliation of material lying in Contractors stores along with
each Running Account Bill and consolidated statement of reconciliation along
with Final Bill.
23.1.4 The Contractor shall, at all times when requested, satisfy the Project Manager by
the production of records or books or submissions of returns that the materials
are being used for the purpose for which they are procured and the Contractor
shall at all times keep the records updated to enable the Project Manager to
apply such checks as he may desire to impose. The Contractor shall, at all times,
permit the Project Manager to inspect his godown. The Contractor shall not,
without prior written permission of the Project Manager, utilise or dispose of the
materials for any purpose other than intended in the Contract.
23.2

Materials and workmanship:

The Contractor shall be responsible for the establishment of a full and comprehensive
quality control system for the Work. The system shall include, but not be limited to, the
means of controlling the testing and receipt of materials, the inspection of the Work, the
filing and ordering of drawings and correspondence and the duties and responsibilities of
staff members.
All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be new. The materials,
equipment, and workmanship shall be of the best quality of the specified type, in
conformity with Contract Documents and the best engineering and construction
practices, and to the complete satisfaction of the Project Manager. This requirement
shall be strictly enforced at all times and stages of the Work and no request for change
whatsoever shall be entertained on the grounds of anything to the contrary being the
prevailing practice. The Contractor shall immediately remove from the Work any
materials, equipment and/or workmanship which, in the opinion of the Project Manager,
are defective or unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents and best
engineering and construction practices, and the Contractor shall replace such rejected
materials, equipment and/or workmanship with proper, specified, required and approved
materials, equipment and/or workmanship, all at his own cost within a period of seven
(7) days from the date of issuance of such notice.
The Contractor shall, whenever required to do so by the Project Manager, immediately
submit satisfactory evidence and necessary test results as to the kind and quality of the
materials and equipment.

23.3

Special makes or brands:

Where special makes or brands are called for, they are mentioned as a standard. Others
of equivalent quality may be used provided that Project Manager considers the
Page 43 of 304

substituted materials as being equivalent to the brand specified, and prior approval for
the use of such substituted materials is obtained in writing from the Project Manager.
Unless substitutions are approved by the Project Manager in writing in advance, no
deviations from the Specifications and other Contract Documents shall be permitted, the
Contractor shall indicate and submit written evidence of those materials or equipment
called for in the Specifications and other Contract Documents that are not obtainable for
incorporation in the Work within the time limit of the Contract. Failure to indicate this
in writing within one month of the signing of the Contract will be deemed sufficient
cause for denial of any request for an extension of time and /or additional cost because of
such circumstances.
Alternative equivalent brands if suggested by the Contractor during construction may be
considered if approved brand is not available in market, provided the suggested brand
fully meets the requirements and is acceptable to the Project Manager. The contractor
has to furnish the rate analysis of all such items and get its prior approval from Project
Manager before execution.
23.4

Proper scheduling and delivery of materials:

All materials and equipment shall be scheduled and delivered so as to ensure a speedy
and uninterrupted progress of the Work, and the same shall be properly stored. Within
fifteen days of signing of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the material
procurement schedule for approval of Project Manager for all materials to be procured
by the Contractor and required to be supplied by the Project Manager / Owner.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to give the quarterly requirement for the
Owner supplied material in writing to the Project Manager at least four weeks prior to
the latest date by which the Contractor needs these materials to suit the programmed
execution of the Work. No extension of time shall be allowed for any delays caused due
to the Contractor's failure to raise such requisitions.

23.5

List of Materials:
Within fifteen days of the signing of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the
approval of the Project Manager a complete list of all materials and equipment the
Contractor and his Sub-Contractors propose to use in the Work, of definite brands or
makes, which differ in any respect from those specified, or the particular brand where
more than one is specified as standard. The Contractor shall also list materials to be
supplied by the Owner and the items not specifically mentioned in the Contract
Documents but which are reasonably inferred and are necessary for the proper execution
and completion of the Work.

23.6

Storage of materials and equipment at site

The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide adequate storage sheds and yards at the
Site, at locations pre-approved by the Project Manager, for all materials and equipment
that are to be incorporated in the Work. This shall be for all the materials and
equipment, supplied by the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor or supplied by the Owner /
Project Manager. In addition to being watertight and weatherproof, the storage facilities
shall be of such a manner that all the materials and equipments are adequately protected
in every way from any deterioration or contamination or damage whatsoever, to the
complete satisfaction of the Project Manager. The method of storing of all the materials
and equipment shall be in conformity with the Specifications and/or to the directions and
instructions of the Project Manager. At no time shall any material or equipment be
stored in open or in contact with the ground. Should any of the materials or equipment
deteriorate or be contaminated or damaged in any way due to improper storage or for
any other reason then such materials and equipment shall not be incorporated in the
Work and shall be removed forthwith from the Site and the replacement of all such
materials and equipment shall be entirely at the cost and expense of the Contractor. The
Page 44 of 304

Contractor shall be responsible for also providing, at his own cost, proper and adequate
security for all the materials and equipment stored at the Site so as to prevent any theft,
pilferage etc., and the Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all the matters in
connection with such security or the lack thereof. Where, after permission has been
sought and obtained from the Project Manager, any material or equipment is kept on any
portion of the structure, this shall be done in such a manner as to prevent any
overloading whatsoever of the structure, to the complete satisfaction of the Project
Manager. The cost associated with any damage to any portion of the structure in this
respect shall be to the account of the Contractor and shall be borne by him.
Should delays be caused on account of removal and replacement of any materials or
equipment or on account of any lack of security, the Contractor shall not be entitled to
any extension of time or increase in the Contract Price.
Wherever applicable the storage of materials shall be in accordance with the relevant
Indian Standard Specifications.
Cement storage capacity of the Contractor shall be of minimum 5,000 bags to store
substantial quantity of cement, keeping in view the tight schedule of the Work. Sand and
aggregates shall be stored over hard concrete base or paved brick platforms.
Reinforcement bars shall be stored diameter-wise over raised sleepers and protected
from rain in suitable manner as approved by the Project Manager. Similarly, structural
steel sections shall also be stored in the yard in a proper orderly manner.

23.7

23.8

Right Type of Workmen, Plant and Machinery, Jigs, Tools, etc.:

The Contractor shall employ the right type of workmen, plant and machinery, jigs, tools
etc. to fabricate and/or install all materials and equipment. They shall be fabricated
and/or installed without any damage and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and manuals, and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Inspection:
All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination
and testing by the Project Manager at all times and stages during construction,
manufacture and/or installation and they shall have the right to reject and order the
removal and replacement of any defective material, equipment and / or workmanship or
require its correction and rectification. The Contractor shall not proceed with any
operation or sequence or trade of the Work until the previous operation or sequence or
trade has been inspected and approved by the Project Manager. No embedded items or
any other work shall be covered up unless these have been inspected and approved by
the Project Manager. The onus shall be on the Contractor to get such inspections carried
out and obtain such approvals. Should the Contractor fail to comply with these
requirements, then all additional or redoing of work necessitated as a consequence
thereof shall be at the Contractor's cost and expense. No inspection or approval shall
relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities, obligations and liabilities under the
Contract. No defective workmanship shall be repaired or patched up in any way without
inspection and direction of the Project Manager.
Rejected workmanship shall be immediately corrected and rectified and rejected
materials and equipment shall be removed and replaced with proper, specified and
required materials and equipment, by the Contractor to the approval and satisfaction of
the Project Manager. The cost of all such correction and rectification and such removal
and replacement shall be to the account of the Contractor and shall be borne by him, and
also, the Contractor shall be responsible for all delays in this regard. The Contractor
shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected materials and equipment from the Site
and shall not reuse them in the Work. If the Contractor fails to proceed at once with the
Page 45 of 304

correction and rectification of rejected workmanship and/or the removal and replacement
of rejected materials and equipment, the Project Manager shall have the right to employ
other persons / agencies to correct and rectify such workmanship and/or remove and
replace such materials and equipment, and recover the cost thereof from the Contractor,
or the Project Manager may terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed further with
the Work.
The Contractor shall furnish promptly and without any charge, all facilities, access,
labour, materials, plant and tools required and necessary for enabling the Project
Manager, to carry out inspections and tests in a safe and convenient manner. The
Contractor shall ascertain and ensure that the facilities and access provided for the
carrying out of all inspections are completely safe in every respect and the Contractor
shall be fully responsible and liable for all matters in connection with such safety.

24.

23.9

Testing:
All the tests on materials (including owner supplied), equipment, and workmanship that
shall be necessary in connection with the execution of the Work, as decided by the
Project Manager and as called for in the Contract Documents, shall be carried out at the
cost of the Contractor at the place of work or of manufacture or fabrication or at the Site
or at an approved testing laboratory or at all or any such places. The Contractor shall
provide all assistance, instruments, machines, labour and materials as are required for the
examining, measuring and testing as described above, which shall be got calibrated from
approved laboratory at the specified frequency to ensure accuracy of results, the testing
and all expenses connected with the tests as described above shall be borne by the
Contractor.

23.10

Certificates:
The Contractor shall furnish, at his own cost, test certificates, calibration certificates for
the various materials and equipment as called for by the Project Manager. Such test
certificates should be for the particular consignment/lot/piece as decided by the Project
Manager. The details in respect of the test and calibration certificates shall be as decided
by the Project Manager for the relevant items.

SAMPLES, SHOP DRAWINGS:

After the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish for the approval of the Project
Manager, all samples of materials and shop drawings called for in Contract Documents or
required by the Project Manager. The samples and shop drawings shall be delivered as
directed by the Project Manager. The Contractor shall construct prototypes of works as laid
down in the Contract Documents or as instructed by the Project Manager / Architect, such
prototypes or samples, of works, after approval by the Project Manager shall serve as the
standards to be achieved in the final construction. No extra payment shall be due to the
Contractor for submission of material sample and preparation of shop drawings and
prototypes. A schedule giving dates of the submission of samples and shop drawings shall be
included in the time schedule. Samples / materials approved by the Project Manager, shall be
kept at Site under safe custody of Contractor and on completion of the Work handed over to the
Project Manager.

25.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME, SCHEDULES AND PROGRESS REPORTS:

25.1

Construction Programme:
i. Every contractor should furnish along with his tender an overall construction
programme utilizing a known CPM software package like Microsoft Project, latest
version. The construction programme shall clearly show all the sequential activities
of work required to be carried out from the commencement of the Work up to the
Virtual Completion. Work associated with each of the packages, i.e., civil, water
Page 46 of 304

supply and sanitation, fire fighting and electrical works etc., shall be clearly
identifiable.
ii. The construction programme shall be based on the required milestones as per the
enclosed bar chart.
iii. The Tenderers proposed Construction programme and Payment Milestones should
elaborate in detail on relevant Milestones as per the enclosed bar chart.
iv. Every week, or sooner if required by the Project Manager, the approved programme
charts shall be reviewed in relation to the actual progress of the Work, and shall be
updated as necessary. If at any time it appears to the Project Manager that the actual
progress of the Work does not conform to the approved programme, the Contractor
shall produce, at its expense and without reimbursement therefore, a revised
programme showing the modifications to the approved programme and the
additional input of resources by the Contractor necessary to ensure completion of the
Work within the time stipulated for completion.
v. The submission to and approval by the Project Manager of such programmes or the
furnishing of such particulars shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities, obligations and liabilities under the Contract.
25.2

Construction Schedules:
Along with the construction programme described in Clause 25.1, the Contractor shall
also submit the following schedules:
i. Manpower Schedule.
ii. Cash-flow Schedule.
iii. Plant and Equipment Schedule
iv. Materials Schedule (including status and mobilization programme)
v. Material samples Schedule
vi. Shop drawings Schedule (including status and delivery)

25.3

Daily site reports:

The Contractor shall throughout the contract period, submit daily site reports on an
approved / prescribed proforma to the Project Manager. The reports will include, but not
be limited to:
i. Record of the Site progress
ii. Number of employees on the Site
iii. Number of men employed on individual trades
iv. Plant and machinery at site (including an indication as to whether the plant is
working or standing)
v. Notification of accidents, if any
vi. Events influencing the progress of the Work

25.4

Site Order Book the contractor shall maintain the site order book for the day to day
records of deficiencies / rectifications required etc.

25.5

The records should include all staff employed by the Contractor as Sub-contractors.

25.6

Site Register:
The Contractor shall maintain a site register that records the name and time of arrival
and departure, at Site, of any visitors.

Reason for Hindrance for delay of work with details like number of days etc. shall
be recorded with the knowledge of the Project Manager/Architect/Owner which
shall need to be produced during the consideration of pray for extension of time.
Page 47 of 304

25.7

26.

27.

Concrete Pour Register the contractor shall maintain the concrete pour register for
taking the instructions from the Project Manager / Owners.

Progress Reports:
At the end of each month the Contractor shall submit a monthly progress report in a
prescribed / agreed format with the Project Manager. The reports shall include 2 sets of
progress photographs taken from pre-determined locations, which illustrate the
progression of the Work.

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS:

26.1

A reference made to any Indian Standards Specifications in the Contract Documents

shall imply reference to the latest version of that Standard, including such
revisions/amendments as may be issued, during the currency of the Contract, by the
Bureau of Indian Standards and the corresponding clause/s therein shall hold valid in
place of those referred to. The Contractor shall keep copies at the Site of all latest
publications of relevant BIS Codes and Indian Standards Specifications applicable to the
Work at the Site and as listed in the Specifications for quick referencing.

26.2

Amendments to BIS codes announced after finalization of the Contract shall be

followed.

TOLERANCES:
27.1

The Contractor shall exercise every care to ensure that all structural members are plumb
and true to line, level and dimensions called for on the Drawings, for the purposes of
structural requirements as well as in order to receive finishes, equipment and similar
items. The details of the finishing items are based upon allowing tolerances as per the
most stringent requirements laid down in the Contract Documents/Indian Standard
Specifications/Best Trade practices and the limits of tolerances shall be in strict
conformity with such Documents and Standards. Any variations beyond such limits
shall require, in accordance with the directions and to the approval of the Project
Manager, rectifications in the structural members and/or wall openings or the remaking
or replacing of the finishing elements and / or equipment, fabricated to fit into the
openings or spaces shown on the Drawings. All such rectifications or remaking or
replacing of work, shall immediately be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost and
expense, and he shall be responsible for all delays in this regard. All such costs and
expenses shall be recovered from the Contractor and shall be deducted by the Owner /
Project Manager from any money that may be payable or that may become payable to
the Contractor.

27.2

In case of separate Contracts the Contractor or Sub-Contractor whose work does not
conform to the dimensions and limits of tolerances specified in the Contract Documents
and/or the Indian Standard Specifications shall be liable for all costs and expenses
incurred for rectifications and/or replacements of any other Contractor's and/or SubContractor's work required, in accordance with the directions of the Project Manager, for
the proper installation of the finishing elements and/or equipment, and/or for structural
purposes. The Project Manager 's decision in this respect shall be final and binding on
the Contractors and Sub-Contractors, and all such costs and expenses shall be recovered
from the pertinent Contractors and Sub-Contractors and shall be deducted by the Owner
/ Project Manager from any money that may be payable or that may become payable
under the Contract to such pertinent Contractors and Sub-Contractors for and on behalf
of the Contractor.
Page 48 of 304

28.

29.

PROTECTIONS OF WORKS:
28.1

Protection of works:
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the proper care and protection of the
Work from commencement of work until completion and handing over of the Work to
the Project Manager at no additional cost. The Contractor shall protect and preserve the
Work in every way from any damage, fire or accident, including by providing temporary
roofs, boxing or other construction as required by the Project Manager. This protection
shall be provided for all property on the Site as well as adjacent to the Site. The
Contractor shall adequately protect, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, all the
items of finishing work to prevent any chipping, cracking, breaking of edges or any
damage of any kind whatsoever and to prevent such work from getting marked or
stained or dirty. Should the Contractor fail to protect the Work or any part thereof and
should any damage be caused to the same, the Contractor shall be responsible for all
replacement and rectification, as directed by the Project Manager, and all costs and
expenses in connection with such replacement and rectification shall be to the account of
the Contractor and shall be borne by him.

28.2

The Contractor shall in connection with the Work provide and maintain at his own cost
all lights, security guards, fencing and anything else necessary for the protection of the
Work and for the safety of the public and every one associated with the Work, all to the
approval and satisfaction of the Project Manager.

28.3

All operations necessary for the execution of the Work shall be carried out so as not to
interfere with the convenience of the public, or with the traffic, or the access to, use and
occupation of public or private roads and footpaths or of properties whether in the
possession of the Owner or of any other person. The Contractor shall save harmless and
indemnify the Owner & Project Manager in respect of all claims, proceedings, damages,
costs, charges, and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in relation to any such matters.

CLEANING OF WORKS AND CLEARING OF SITE:

29.1

The Contractor shall maintain the Site, adjoining areas within 20 meters all around site
and all Work thereon in neat, clean and tidy-conditions at all times. The Contractor shall
remove all rubbish and debris from the Site and adjoining areas on daily basis and as
directed by the Project Manager. Suitable steel skips shall be provided at strategic
locations around the Site to receive waste and packaging materials.

29.2

Just prior to the Virtual Completion of the Work, or whenever so directed by the Project
Manager, the Contractor shall carry out all the work necessary to ensure that the Site &
20 meter area all around site is clear and the Work are clean in every respect, the surplus
materials, debris, sheds and all other temporary structures are removed from the Site, all
plant and machinery of the Contractor are removed from site, the areas under floors are
cleared of rubbish, the gutters and drains are cleared, the doors and sashes are eased, the
locks and fastenings are oiled, all electrical, plumbing and other services are tested and
commissioned, the keys are clearly labelled and handed to the Project Manager, so that
at the time of Virtual Completion the whole Site and the Work are left fit for immediate
occupation and use, to the approval and satisfaction of the Project Manager and the
Owner.

29.3

Should the Contractor fail to comply with the cleaning requirements, whether
progressively or before completion, or fail to clear the Site and 20 meter area all around
site as directed and required, then the Project Manager, after giving due notice in writing
to the Contractor, shall have the right to employ other persons or agencies to carry out
the cleaning and/or clearing work and all costs incurred on such work shall be recovered
Page 49 of 304

from the Contractor and shall be deducted by the Owner / Project Manager from any
money that may be payable or that may become payable to the Contractor.
30.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT:
All Works shall be measured for making payments to the Contractor. To evaluate Work under
this Contract and instructed as per work order/change orders issued by the Project Manager, the
standard method of measurement in accordance with the Standards laid down by Bureau of
Indian Standards (IS: 1200) shall be followed. However if definite methods of measurements are
stipulated in the Schedule of Rates or Specifications, then the same shall supersede BIS methods
and shall be followed. In the event of any dispute with regard to the method of measurement of
any work, the decision of the Project Manager shall be final and binding and no extra claims shall
be entertained or allowed at any stage in this regard.

31.

COVERING UP:
The Contractor shall give at least 24 hours clear notice in writing to the Project Manager before
covering up any of the Work in foundations or any other such areas in order that inspection of the
Work may be carried out for maintaining proper quality control. In the event of the Contractor
failing to provide such notice he shall, at his own expense, uncover such Work as required to
allow the inspection to be taken and thereafter shall reinstate the Work to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager.

32.

PAYMENTS AND SECURED ADVANCE:

Payments for executed work:
32.1

Billing:
The Contractor shall prepare measured bills as directed by the Project Manager (detailed
measurement, abstract sheet, purchase bills, and other supporting documents) once per
month and submit the same to the Project Manager in quadruplicate for checking and
issue of interim certificate. Contractor shall also provide soft copy of the bills prepared
on latest version of MS office software.

32.2

Payment of Bills:
Running Account Bills:
The Contractor has to submit the Running Account Bills in quadruplicate once in a
month along with detailed measurements in serially machine numbered register,
abstract sheets, deviation statement for on going and completed work, purchase bills,
materials reconciliation statement and any specific instructions which may be given
in this regard by the Project Manager shall also be adhered to by the Contractor.

32.3

Running Bill Certification:

i. The Contractor shall prepare and submit running bills to the Project Manager
once a month throughout the Construction period. Provided that amount of said
billing exceeds the minimum value for the running bill stipulated in the Schedule
of Fiscal Aspects annexed to these General and Special Conditions of Contract.
ii. Running bills shall be presented along with soft copy in a format to be agreed in
advance with the Project Manager and shall be supported by, detailed
measurements item by item.
iii. Retention Money and Mobilisation Advance shall be applied to interim billings as
mentioned elsewhere in the general conditions of contract.

Page 50 of 304

iv. Cost of materials if any issued by the Owner / Project Manager shall be recovered
from the running bills at rates specified in the Contract Documents.
v. Within 7 days of the receipt of Contractors running bill for payment, the Project
Manager shall check and point out corrections, if any to be made in the bill. The
Contractor shall correct the bill and resubmit the same to the Project Manager.
vi. Within 20 days of receipt of the corrected bill from the Contractor, the Project
Manager shall check the bill and certify the bill for payment.
vii. The payment of running bills shall be made by the Owner /Project Manager within
10 days from receipt of the Project Managers approval certificate for payment.
viii. All running bills shall be accompanied with detailed material reconciliation
statements for cement, steel and other Owner supplied materials.
ix. Any running / interim Certificate of Payment given by the Architect / Project
Manager relating to the work done or the materials delivered shall be adhoc in
nature and may be modified or corrected by any subsequent interim Certificate or
the Final Certificate of payment. No certification by the Project Manager /
Architect supporting an interim payment shall itself be conclusive evidence that
any work or materials to which it relates is/are in accordance with the Contract.
x. The Project Manager/owner may release payment @ 75% of the bill amount as
assessed by him, for interim payment, if deem fit necessary as an On Account
Payment against the Running Bills. This payment shall be released within 7 days
from the receipt of complete Bill. Balance payment for the bill shall be released
as per the relevant Tender Conditions.
32.4

Retention Money:
Deduction towards Retention Money shall be made at 5% of the value of Work as
certified by the Project Manager during each running bill subject to a maximum of
5% of the contract value. 50% Retention money will be released after issue of Virtual
Completion Certificate on submission of bank guarantee of the same amount and
valid for the defects liability period including any extensions thereof.
The balance 50% of retention money shall be returned after issue of Final Completion
Certificate on completion of Defects Liability Period including any extensions
thereof, provided that the building is then free of defects and the Contractor has
rectified all defects identified by the Project Managers, Architects and Owner. The
Retention Money shall not carry interest.

32.5

Final Bill:
i. The final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor within one month of the date
fixed for Virtual Completion of the Work or of the date of the Virtual Completion
Certificate furnished by the Project Manager, whichever is later.
ii. The final bill will be checked by the Project Manager within 60 working days
from the date the bill is received by the Project Manager (provided the Contractor
has complied with all formalities as described in various clauses of the Contract)
and thereafter the same would be forwarded to the Architect for verification and
certification.
iii. The Architect shall certify the bill with in 30 days on receipt from the Project
Manager.
Page 51 of 304

iv. The payment of the final bill shall be made to the Contractor by the Owner
/Project Manager within 30 days from receipt of the Project Managers/Architect
approval certificate for payment.
v. No further claim shall be made by the Contractor in respect thereof even after
submission of the final bill and the same shall be deemed to have been fully
waived and absolutely extinguished.
vi. The final billing shall be accompanied by all substantiating documentation as
required for running bills with the addition of the following items that shall be
supplied by the Contractor:
a. All written guarantees / warranties and spares required by the Contract
documents.
b. Operation and Maintenance manuals and instructions for equipment and
apparatus.
c. One (1) reproducible and two (2) blue prints of all requisite As Built
drawings along with the soft copy thereof on latest version of AutoCAD
software.
32.6

Certificate for payment format: (To be finalized later with Project Manager)
Value of Work done for Interim Certificate
A
Total A
Deductions:
Retention 5% on A subject to a maximum of 5% of
Contract value.
Value of Material issued by the Owner
(Actually used by the Contractor in the
work completed up to
that period)
Mobilization advance recovery on pro rata basis
from R A Bill in such a manner that full advance
recovered when 80% work done
Previous Payments made
Any other Deductions including WCT
Total Deductions:
Net Bill Value

32.7

C
D
E
F
G
A(-)G

Withholding of payments
The Project Manager may withhold payment or, on account of subsequently
discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any payment certificate to such
extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner / Project Manager from loss on
account of including but not limited to the following:
i. Defective work not remedied by the Contractor.
ii. Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly and regularly to his own
workers, to his Sub-Contractors, to his suppliers.
iii. Damage by the Contractor to the work of other Contractors, Sub-Contractors or
Vendors.
iv. A reasonable doubt that the Contract cannot be completed for the balance unpaid
amount.
v. A reasonable doubt that the Contractor intends to leave work items incomplete.
Page 52 of 304

vi. Failure of the Contractor to execute the Work in conformity with the Contract
Documents.
vii. Failure of the Contractor to meet or keep-up with the approved Construction
Programme.
viii. Failure of the Contractor to comply with and fulfill all contractual obligations and
liabilities stipulated in the Contract Documents.
32.8

33.

Secured Advance 75% value of material cost shall be paid towards Secured
Advance for items other than perishable such as secured advance against an
indemnity bond for such amount and insurance against such materials.

RECTIFICATION OF IMPROPER WORK NOTICED:

If it shall appear to the Project Manager during the progress of the Work that any work has been
executed with unsound, imperfect or unskilful workmanship or with materials of any inferior
description or that any materials or articles provided by the Contractor for the execution of the
Work are unsound or of a quality inferior to that contracted for or otherwise not in accordance
with the Contract, the Contractor shall, on demand in writing from the Project Manager
specifying the work, materials or articles complained of, notwithstanding that the same may have
been passed and certified, forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct the work so specified in
whole, or in part as the case may require or as the case may be, remove the materials or articles
so specified and provide other proper and suitable materials or articles at his own proper charge
and cost and in the event of his failing to do so within a period so specified by the Project
Manager in his demand aforesaid, the Project Manager may rectify or remove and re-execute the
work or remove and replace with others, the materials or articles complained of as the case may
be at the risk and expense in all respects of the Contractor, and deduct the expenses from the
Retention Money or any sums that may be due at any time thereafter may become due to the
Contractor or from his performance bond.

34.

CHANGE ORDERS:
34.1

The Owner / Project Manager reserves the right to alter the Scope of Work (See
Clause 2.6) and consequently the Contract Price shall be suitably adjusted for such
changes by reference to the rates in the Schedule of Rate. All change orders shall be
issued by the Project Manager and the onus shall be on the Contractor to obtain such
prior written consent of the Project Manager.

34.2

If the rates for the extra, additional, altered or substituted items of work are not
specifically provided in the Schedule of Rates then such rates shall be derived by
interpretation /interpolation from the rates that are specified for a similar class of
work in the Contract. The Project Managers interpretation as to what is a similar
class of work and his decision on the method in which the rate is to be derived shall
be final and binding on the Contractor.

34.3

If the rates for the extra, additional, altered or substituted items of work cannot be
determined in the manner specified above, then the rates for such work shall be
determined on the basis of actual /theoretical consumption of materials, and actual
/theoretical use of labour, as detailed below; consideration of actual or theoretical
consumption shall be at sole discretion of the Project Manager.
i.

Cost of materials actually used by the Contractor and /or by theoretical analysis of
consumption of materials at work, at no more than prevailing market rates, actually
incorporated in the Work.
ii. Cost of labour actually used at the Site and /or by theoretical analysis of labour
utilization on the Work at prevailing rates of labour.
Page 53 of 304

iii. 15% of the costs in respect of (i) and (ii) above, towards Contractor's establishment,
water & electricity charges, tool & plants, all other costs, overhead & profit plus
applicable VAT/WCT in Ladakh. Said 15% component (Contractor's overheads
and profit) shall not be allowed on Owner supplied items, if any. Instead, 2% will
be paid on the cost of the Owner supplied items as Contractor's handling charges.
iv. For this purpose the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager detailed analysis
of the rate proposed by the Contractor supported by relevant vouchers along with the
estimated quantity of work item involved.
v. In case contractor executes any extra additional, altered or substituted items of work
through the agency identified and negotiated by the Project Manager Co-ordination
charges to main contractor shall be 5% plus WCT as applicable only over the rates
analyzed for the specialized agency for such items. However, this shall not be
applicable on items mentioned in Annexure-1 & 2 for Owner & Contractor supplied
materials, which shall be treated as mentioned else where in this tender.
34.4

If the Contractor and the Project Manager cannot agree on a rate as determined in
accordance with this sub-clause, then the Project Manager may determine a reasonable
rate which shall be final and binding on the Contractor or, at the Owners /Project
Managers option, may order and direct the work to be carried out by such other persons
or agencies as it may think fit, and such other persons or agencies shall not, in any
manner be prevented or obstructed in their work or from entering upon the Work by the
Contractor for the purpose of carrying out such work. The Contractor shall not be
entitled to any payment whatsoever in connection with such work carried out by such
other persons or agencies.
Before any extra work is undertaken by the Contractor, he shall ensure that he has
received from the Project Manager a specific Change Order on a mutually agreed
proforma, signed and approved by the Project Manager. No additional payments shall be
made to the Contractor without prior agreement and receipt of the necessary signed
Change Order. Each Change Order shall clearly state the value of the additional work
agreed to and signed for by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall at monthly intervals submit to the Project Manager an account
giving particulars, as full and detailed as possible, of additional work ordered in writing
by the Project Manager and which the Contractor has executed during the preceding
month. In case any Change Order instructed by the Project Manager causes a delay in
the completion of the Work causing the Contractor to overrun the time fixed for
completion of the Work, the contractor shall notify the Project Manager in writing about
such expected delay, before /issuance of such change order by the project manager. If
necessary and if requested by the contractor with in 3 days of the receipt of the change
order in writing, the PM shall organize with due dispatch, a joint review on the question
of expected delay, to be held and had amongst the Contractor, Project Manager and the
Owner with or without the assistance of the Architect and the issue of such expected
delay would be immediately resolved through such joint review to facilitate extension of
time for completion of the Work.

35.

DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK:

35.1

If the Project Manager deems it inexpedient to get corrected or rectified any work of
the Contractor which is defective or damaged or of substandard quality or is generally
not in accordance with the Contract Documents, then an equitable and appropriate
deduction shall be made thereof from the Contract Price, and the Project Managers
decision in this respect shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

35.2

Furthermore if, by reason of any accident, or failure, or other event occurring to, in or
in connection with the Work, or any part thereof, either during the execution of the
Page 54 of 304

Work or during the Defects Liability Period, any remedial or other work or repair
shall, in the opinion of the Project Manager, be urgently necessary for the safety of
the Work, or any part thereof, and the Contractor is unable or unwilling to
immediately and at once do such work or repair, the Project Manager may employ and
pay other persons or agencies to carry out such work or repair as the Project Manager
may consider necessary. If the work or repair so done by other persons or agencies is
work which, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the Contractor was liable to do at
his own expense under the Contract, then all expenses incurred by the Owner / Project
Manager in connection with such work or repair shall be recovered from the
Contractor and shall be deducted by the Owner / Project Manager from any money
that may be payable or that may become payable to the Contractor or from the
Contractors performance bond.
35.3

The defective or uncorrected work of the Contractor at any stage (during or after
completion of work) may adversely affect or damage the work of other Vendors.
Contractor shall at his own cost immediately rectify, correct or replace both his
defective work as well as the work of the other Vendors so damaged, with in the time
period stipulated by the Project Manager, so as not to effect the progress and quality
of other Vendors work. In case the Contractor fails to do the necessary corrections
to the satisfaction of Project Manager or unduly delays the correction work, then the
Project Manager shall be at liberty to get the correction work done and if the
correction work is not possible, then any extra work necessary to cover the defect or
damage, done through same / any other Vendor at Contractors cost.
Actual costs including any incidentals thereof incurred by the Project Manager on
such corrections / extra works shall be recovered from the payments or any amounts
due to the Contractor.

36.

TIME FOR COMPLETION:

36.1

Time: the essence of the contract:

The time allowed for carrying out the Work as entered in the tender shall be strictly
observed by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be of the essence of the Contract and
shall be reckoned from the date of award of the Contract. The Work shall proceed with
due diligence until Final Completion. The Contractor shall prepare a Construction
Programme with time schedule keeping in view the completion period stipulated for
specific portions of the Work and also the overall completion time and submit the same
for the approval of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall comply with the time
schedule as approved by the Project Manager. In the event of the Contractor failing to
comply with the overall and individual milestones contained in the time schedules, he
shall be liable to pay liquidated damages as provided for in this Contract.

36.2

Completion Period:
The date of commencement of the Work shall be as mentioned in the Schedule of Fiscal
Aspects.
The Milestone dates shall be as per the schedule attached. In case the Contractor fails to
meet the above stipulated completion period, Contractor shall be liable to pay to the
Owner / Project Manager, the liquidated damages as specified in Clause 43 of General
Conditions of Contract.
In addition to his own work in the overall time period, the Contractor shall provide for
the works of other Sub-contractors and Vendors, including those employed directly by
the Owner / Project Manager.

Page 55 of 304

36.3

Causes of delay for which claims for extension of time may be considered;
The Contractor shall be entitled to claim for extension of time, subject to the Conditions
herein, should he be delayed or impeded in the execution of the Work by reason of the
following:
i. Force Majeure;
ii. Delay in the receipt of construction status drawings from the Architect provided
that, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the Contractor has made every effort and
endeavour to minimize the effect of such delays.
iii. Any change orders directed by the Project Manager, which in the opinion of the
Project Manager entail the requirement of additional time for completion of the
Work.

37.

36.4

In respect of items 36.2. (a), (b) and (c) above, the Contractor shall submit in writing to
the Project Manager his intention to claim for an extension of time within seven (7)
working days of any of the above mentioned reasons or events causing a delay. Any
claim of extension of time in respect of item (c) shall be notified by the Contractor
before such change order is actually issued. The Contractor shall thereafter detail and
submit his claim for the extension of time within fourteen (14) working days of such
delay having occurred. If the Contractor does not comply with both these conditions for
each and every delay caused by any of the above-mentioned reasons or events then he
shall not be entitled to any extension of time.

36.5

The Project Manager shall study and verify the particulars of the claim for extension of
time submitted by the Contractor and shall then reject or amend or accept the claim. He
will extend the time by notifying the Contractor in writing for completion of the Work
by such period as he shall think adequate with the prior approval of the Owner and the
time for completion of the Work so extended shall for all purposes of the Contract be
deemed the time specified for completion of the Work. The decision of the Project
Manager in this regard shall be final and binding on the Contractor. No extension of
time shall be granted separately for any concurrent or parallel activities, and only a
delay, caused by any of the above-mentioned reasons or events, in a critical activity,
which has a direct effect on the overall completion of the Work, shall form a basis for
granting extension of time.

36.6

Should any deletions or changes in the scope of the Work reduce the time required to
complete the Work under the Contract, then the time savings accruing from such
deletions may be considered by the Project Manager in offsetting the durations awarded
for an extension of time.

NO FINANCIAL OR OTHER COMPENSATION FOR DELAYS:

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation for any loss suffered by him on account
of delays in commencing or in executing or in completing the Work, whatever might be the
cause of the delay if such delay is on account of the Contractor.

38.

SUFFICIENCY OF TENDER:
The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to the correctness
and sufficiency of his tender for the Works and of the rates and prices stated in the priced bill of
quantities and the schedule of rates and prices, if any. The tender rates and prices shall cover all
his obligations under the Contract and all matters and things necessary, for the proper completion
and maintenance of the Work.

Page 56 of 304

39.

PROPRIETY & OCCUPATION OF EXECUTED WORK:

All executed work, whether in part or in whole shall be the exclusive property of the Owner /
Project Manager. The Contractor or any of his Sub-Contractors or their employees or workmen
or servants or agents shall not be entitled to the use of any such work except for the purpose of
carrying out subsequent work that is required to be carried out under the Contract or to complete
the Project. The Owner / Project Manager shall have the right to occupy and take over the Work
or any part thereof at any time during the progress of the Work or upon their completion,
irrespective of any pending claims or disputes that the Contractor may have against the Owner.
Such occupation shall not relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations under the Contract.

40.

INDEMNITY:
40.1

The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold and keep indemnified, the Owner /
Project Manager, including their employees, officers, representatives, servants, agents,
suppliers, vendors and any other persons claiming through or under them from and
against all actions, suits, claims costs, liabilities and demands brought or made against
the Owner / Project Manager in respect of:
i)

ii)
iii)

any matter or thing done or omitted to be done by the Contractor or any of his
Sub-Contractor(s) or their employees, workmen, representatives, agents,
servants or suppliers in the execution of or in connection with the Work; or
any matter or thing done or omitted to be done by the Contractor or any of his
Sub-Contractor's about performance under this Contract; or
against any loss or damage to the Owner / Project Manager in consequence of
any action or suit being brought against the Contractor or any of his SubContractor(s) or their employees, workmen, representatives, agents, servants or
suppliers for anything done or omitted to be done in execution of the Work and
the Project Coordination Services under this Contract; including but not limited
to a) meeting the Project milestones, b) non-compliance with the applicable
laws and regulations of the government and local authorities, c) not obtaining
the relevant licenses and permits, d) infringing any patents rights specifically
regarding use, storage and disposal of hazardous materials.
The obligations of the Contractor under this clause shall survive the termination
of this Contract.

iv)

The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractors indemnify, defend and
hold, and keep indemnified the Owner / Project Manager, including their
employees, officers, representatives, servants, agents, suppliers, vendors and
any other persons claiming through or under them harmless from all actions,
suits, claims, costs, fines, judgements and liabilities in respect of:
a)
b)

any matter or thing done or omitted to be done by the Sub-Contractors

or their employees, workmen, representatives, agents, servants and
suppliers in execution of or in connection with the Work; or
any matter or thing done or omitted to be done by the Sub-Contractors
or their employees, workmen, representatives, agents, servants and
suppliers arising out of or in any way alleged to be in connection with
Sub-Contractors' performance under this Contract;
including but not limited to a) not meeting the Project milestones, b) noncompliance with the applicable laws and regulations of the government
and local authorities, c) not obtaining the relevant licenses and permits, d)
infringing any patents rights and specifically regarding the storage, use or
disposal by the Sub-Contractors of hazardous materials in, on or under
Page 57 of 304

the Site or at any location whatsoever in connection with the Project in

any way.
The Sub-Contractors' responsibility under this indemnification shall
also include any and all hazardous materials introduced to the Site by
their agents, representatives, employees, workmen, servants and
suppliers. The obligations of Sub-Contractors under this clause survive
the termination or expiry of this Contract.
41.

CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE VIRTUAL COMPLETION OF WORKS:

41.1

42.

The Project Manager, Owners Representative and the Architect shall jointly conduct an
extensive inspection just prior to the Virtual Completion of the Work and shall prepare a
list of materials, equipment, and workmanship which are defective or damaged or of
substandard quality or improperly executed or generally unacceptable due to not being in
conformity with the requirements stipulated in the Contract Documents. The Contractor
to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, Owner and the Architect shall promptly
remove, replace, re-execute, rectify and make good, to conform to the requirements
stipulated in the Contract Documents, all such materials, equipment, and/or
workmanship included or itemised in the said list and the Contractor shall bear and pay
for all expenses in connection therewith and consequent thereon and incidental thereto,
including the cost for all remedial work on the work of other contractors destroyed or
damaged by such removal, replacement, re-execution, rectification and making good. If
the Contractor fails to remove, replace, re-execute, rectify and make good the rejected
materials, equipment, and/or workmanship within a reasonable time, fixed by written
notice, the Owner / Project Manager may employ and pay other persons or agencies to
carry out such removal, replacement, re-execution, rectification and making good and all
expenses incurred in connection therewith, including all damages, losses and expenses
consequent thereon and incidental thereto shall be recovered from the Contractor and
shall be deducted by the Owner / Project Manager from any money that may be payable
or that may become payable to the Contractor. It is clarified that all materials weather
owner supplied or not shall be procured by the Contractor at his own cost for
construction of work.

VIRTUAL COMPLETION OF WORKS:

42.1

42.2

42.3

42.4

The Works shall be considered as Virtually Complete only upon fulfillment of the
procedure laid down in Clause 36 above, and only after the Work has been completed in
every respect in conformity with the Contract Documents and after all the systems and
services have been tested and commissioned, and after the Site has been cleared and the
Work cleaned in accordance with Clause 28 & 29 and when the Project Manager &
Architect has certified in writing that the Work is Virtually Complete. The Defects
Liability Period shall commence from the date of such Certificate of Virtual Completion.
Should, before Virtual Completion, the Owner / Project Manager decide to occupy any
portion of the Work or use any part of any equipment, the same shall not constitute an
acceptance of any part of the Work or of any equipment, unless so stated in writing by
the Project Manager.
Prior to the issue of the Virtual Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall submit and
hand-over to the Owner / Project Manager the keys to all locks, all operation and
maintenance manuals for systems and services, material reconciliation statements,
warrantees, as built drawings, any spares called for in the Contract, and every thing else
necessary for the proper use and maintenance of the Work complete with all systems and
services.
It is clarified that all materials whether owner supplied or not shall be procured by the
contractor at his own cost for carrying out correction work. No charges shall be paid on
this account.
Page 58 of 304

43.

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES / PROGRAMME CHART / MILESTONES:

The Contractor should study the enclosed milestones prepared by the Project Manager/Architect
and adhere to the milestones. If the milestones are not achieved by the Contractor the Contractor
shall pay the Owner 0.5% (point Five percent) of the Contract Price per week of delay, limited
to Five percent (5%) of the Contract Price (inclusive of amounts, increases or decreases, in
respect of change orders), by way of liquidated damages for each week that the milestones work
is incomplete in any way whatsoever after the date assigned for completion of the milestone
work. However, release of interim Liquidated Damages can be considered in case the very next
Milestone is achieved on time. Extension of time for any milestone if allowed has to be obtained
in writing from the Project Manager well in advance of completion dates.

44.

45.

PENALTY / FINE:
44.1

If the Project Manager notifies the Contractor of non-compliance with safety codes as in
Clause no. 12.4 and 12.5 and the labour laws etc. Contractor shall immediately if so
directed or in any event not more than 10 hours after receipt of such notice, make all
reasonable effort to correct such non-compliance and to ensure that there is no
reoccurrence of such non-compliance.

44.2

If the Contractor fails to do so, the Project Manager shall levy fine of Rs.500 per head
per day for not complying with safety codes & labour laws etc.

GUARANTEES:
45.1

The Contractor understands and agrees that the Owner / Project Manager is expressly
relying and will continue to rely on the skill and judgment of the Contractor in executing
the Work and remedying any defects in the Work. The Contract represents and warrants
that :i.

The Contractor shall perform the Work in a timely manner, in strict accordance with
the Contract Documents, and consistent with generally accepted professional,
construction and construction-supervision practices and standards provided by an
experienced and competent professional contractor and construction supervisor
rendered under the same or similar circumstances.

ii. The Contractor is and will be responsible to the Owner / Project Manager for the
acts and omissions of all Sub-Contractors and their respective employees, agents and
invitees and all the persons performing any of the Work.
45.2

Besides the guarantees required and specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall in general guarantee all work executed by the Contractor and the SubContractors for Defects Liability Period from the date of issue of the Virtual Completion
Certificate. Those parts of the Work or equipment or installations, for which extended
guarantee periods are stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, shall be
guaranteed for such periods that are so stipulated. The duration of the Defects Liability
Period, unless specified otherwise, shall be the extent of length of such guarantee
periods.

45.3

The Contractor represents, warrants and guarantees to the Owner / Project Manager,
inter alias that:

Page 59 of 304

i.

The construction of the Project shall be approved and capable of use, operation,
performance and maintenance for accomplishing the purpose for which it has been
built and acquired.

ii. The Work shall comply with the Specifications, Drawings, and other Contract
Documents.
iii. The Work shall, for Defect Liability Period from the date of issue of the Virtual
Completion Certificate, be free from all defects and the Project shall be of structural
soundness, durability, ease of maintenance, weather tightness etc.
iv. The materials, workmanship, fabrication and construction shall be of the specified
and agreed quality and all materials shall be new.
v. The Work performed for the Owner / Project Manager shall be free from all liens,
charges, claims of whatsoever nature from any party other than the Owner & Project
Manager.
45.4

45.5

46.

Where, during such guarantee periods as mentioned above, any material or equipment or
workmanship or generally any item of work fails to comply or perform in conformity
with the requirements stipulated in the Contract Documents or in accordance with the
criteria and provisions of the guarantee, the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall
bear and pay all costs and expenses for replacing and/or rectifying and making good
such materials, equipment, workmanship, and items of work and, in addition, the
Contractor shall be also responsible for and shall bear and pay all costs and expenses in
connection with any damages and/or losses suffered as a consequence of such failure.
All guarantees required under the Contract shall be in the format approved by the Project
Manager and submitted to the Project Manager by the Contractor when requesting
certification of the final bill.

DEFECTS LIABILITY:
The Defect Liability Period shall be applicable as mentioned in the schedule of Fiscal Aspects.
46.1

Maintenance by contractor during defects liability period:

All defective items of work and defects noticed and brought to the attention of the
Contractor during the Defects Liability Period shall be promptly and expeditiously
attended to and replaced and/or rectified and made good by the Contractor at his own
cost, to the complete satisfaction of the Owner & Project Manager.

46.2

Replacement and/or rectification and making good by contractors of all defective

materials, equipment and/or workmanship during defects liability period:
The Contractor shall replace and/or rectify and make good, at his own cost, and to the
satisfaction of the Owner & Project Manager, all defective items of work and defects
arising, in the opinion of the Project Manager, from materials, equipment, and/or
workmanship not performing or being in accordance with the Drawings or
Specifications or the instructions of the Project Manager or other Contract Documents or
the best engineering and construction practices, and which may appear or come to notice
within Defects Liability Period after Virtual Completion of the Work. Any item, material
or matter repaired or replaced shall receive a new Defects Liability Period of like
duration beginning upon the date the repaired or replaced item, material or matter is
returned for use to the Owner / Project Manager, provided that the aggregate guarantee
period shall not exceed 24 months. The Contractor shall be also liable for all costs
associated with damages and/or losses which are a consequence of such defective items
of work and defects, and such costs shall be recouped by Project Manager from the
Contractor and shall be recovered from the Retention Money held and/or from the
Page 60 of 304

Contractor's final bill (if the final bill has not been certified and paid for at the time), or
the same would otherwise be recovered from the Contractor.
Such defective items of work and defects as mentioned above shall, upon instruction and
direction in writing of the Project Manager and within such time as shall be specified
therein, be replaced and/or rectified and made good by the Contractor at his own cost. In
case of default or failure by the Contractor to replace and/or rectify and make good such
defective items of work and defects, the Owner / Project Manager may employ and pay
other persons or agencies to replace and/or rectify and make good such defective items
of work and defects, and all costs, damages, losses and expenses therefor, consequent
thereon and incidental thereto shall be to the account of the Contractor and such costs,
damages, losses, and expenses shall be recouped by the Owner / Project Manager from
the Contractor and shall be recovered from the Retention Money held and/or from the
Contractor's final bill (if the final bill has not been certified and paid for at the time).
Should the Retention Money held (and the amount in respect of the final bill if it has not
been certified and paid for at the time) be insufficient to meet such costs, damages,
losses and expenses, as determined by the Project Manager, then the Contractor shall be
legally bound to pay he balance amount due under the claim to the Owner / Project
Manager within one month of receiving notification to that effect from the Project
Manager. In the event of failure on the part of the Contractor to pay the balance amount
due within one month as stated above, the Owner / Project Manager shall be entitled to
invoke the performance bond and the Contractor shall raise no objection in this regard.
In respect of those parts of the Work for which longer guarantee periods are stipulated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Defects Liability Period for such parts of the
Works shall be until the end of the respective guarantee period that is stipulated for each
such part. No payment shall be made to the contractor on this account.
All the material whether Owner supplied or not shall be supplied by the Contractor at his
own cost for undertaking any correction/rectification/replacement of defective/damaged
or uncorrected works.
46.3

Taking over of the works by the Floor Occupant / Project Manager

The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain all his works till completion of the
Defects Liability Period and to handover the floor to the Project Manager. In this regards
the works would be jointly inspected by a team comprising of representatives of
Contractor and the Project Manager, for noting any discrepancy, defect, shortcomings.
Within the time period specified by the Project Manager the Contractor shall rectify,
correct or replace the defective works so noted during the joint inspection, at his own
cost to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. On acceptance of the contractors work,
the contractor shall prepare the inventory of his works, and hand over the floor & the
inventory to the Project Manager.
During carrying out the rectification, correction or replacement works as mentioned
above the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to safeguard the existing
finishing and works of other Vendors against any damage. In case the works of other
Vendors are damaged by the Contractor while undertaking the rectification / replacement
work, the Contractor shall rectify / replace the works so damaged at his own cost to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager.
On failure of the contractor to rectify, correct or replace the defective works or on undue
delay on part of the contractor for the same, the Project Manager shall be at liberty to
undertake the correction works by itself or through any Vendor at the Contractors cost.
All such costs including any incidentals thereof incurred by the Project Manager shall be
recovered from the Contractors payments or from any amounts due to the Contractor.

Page 61 of 304

Taking over of the works prior to completion of the Defects Liability Period by the
Project Manager shall not discharge the contractor of his responsibilities for the balance
Defects Liability Period and the Defects Liability Period shall remain in force till
completion of Defects Liability Period as mentioned in Schedule of Fiscal Aspects.
On removal of all the defects, handing over to the Project Manager and successful
completion of the Defects Liability Period by the Contractor, the Project Manager shall
issue the Final Completion Certificate to the contractor and the Defects Liability Period
shall deemed to be complete.

47.

FINAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK :

The Work shall be considered as finally complete at the end of the Defects Liability Period
subject to the Contractor having replaced and/or rectified and made good all the defective items
of work and defects and hand over the floors in accordance with clause above, to the satisfaction
of the Project Manager, and provided that the Contractor has performed all his obligations and
fulfilled all his liabilities under the Contract, and when the Project Manager & Architect has
certified in writing that the Work are finally complete. Such Final Completion in respect of those
parts of the Work, for which extended guarantee periods are stipulated elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, shall be achieved at the end of such stipulated guarantee periods.

48.

49.

FORCE MAJEURE:
48.1

The right of the Contractor to proceed with the Work shall not be terminated because of
any delay, subject to the time limits set forth in this clause, in the execution of the Work
due to unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the
Contractor, or the Sub-Contractors, defined under Force Majeure, as Acts of God or that
of the public enemy, restraints of Governing States, fires and floods. The following
events are explicitly excluded from Force Majeure and are solely the responsibilities of
the non-performing party: a) any strike, work-to-rule action, go-slow or similar labour
difficulty (b) late delivery of equipment or material (unless caused by Force Majeure
event), (c) economic hardship and (d) changes in applicable laws.

48.2

If the Contractor is wholly prevented from the performance of the Contract for a period
in excess of thirty (30) consecutive days because of a Force Majeure, the Project
Manager may terminate this Contract by fifteen (15) days written notice delivered to the
Contractor, and if the period of the Force Majeure exceeds one hundred and twenty
(120) consecutive days, the Contractor may terminate this Contract by fifteen (15) days
written notice to the Project Manager. In the event this Contract is so terminated, the
Contractor shall be paid for the costs of the Work actually executed up to the date of
termination. Such costs shall not include loss of profits or for any other expenses of the
Contractor or Sub-Contractors such as salaries or wages of the employees or workers,
hire charges for plant and machinery, expenses towards maintenance of establishment,
demobilization, break charges or any other expense. Failure to agree on an equitable
settlement shall be deemed to be a dispute.

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT BY THE OWNER /

PROJECT MANAGER:
49.1

The Owner / Project Manager, may without, prejudice to any other right or remedy and
after giving the Contractor seven days notice in writing, terminate the employment of the
Contractor and take charge of all materials, equipment, tools, and plant and machinery
thereon and use these as the Owners property for the completion of the Project. Such
decision for termination of the Contract would be taken by the Project Manager based on
Page 62 of 304

the fact if, in their opinion, sufficient cause exists to justify such action, on the happening
of all or any of the following events: i.
ii.
iii.
iv.

if the Contractor shall be adjudged bankrupt; or

if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors; or
if a receiver shall be appointed on account of his insolvency/bankruptcy; or
if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse to carry out the Works diligently;
or
v.
if he should fail to provide enough properly skilled workmen or proper
materials or equipment or plant and machinery or tools or anything else
necessary for the progress of the Work in accordance with the approved
Construction Programme and not able to achieve the milestone provided in
the said programme; or
vi. if he should fail to make prompt payments to Sub-Contractors or to suppliers
for materials or equipment or to his workers; or
vii. if he should persistently disregard laws or ordinances or instructions of the
Owner / Project Manager; or
viii. if he should be guilty of a violation or breach of any provision of the Contract;
or
ix. if he has abandoned the Contract; or
x.
if he has failed to commence the Work within the time specified or if he has
suspended the Work.
49.2

In the event of the termination of the Contract as mentioned in Clause 49.1 above, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Project is
completed. If the amount due to the Contractor for the Work carried out by him as per
the Contract terms exceeds the expenses incurred by the Owner / Project Manager,
including for additional management and administrative services, for completing the
Project and in respect of the actual expenses suffered by the Owner / Project Manager
due to the Contractor's default, then such excess shall be paid to the Contractor within
three months of the final completion of the Project. If such expenses for completing the
Project and in respect of the damages and/or losses suffered exceed such amount due,
then the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner / Project Manager within one
month of receiving the notice to that effect from the Owner / Project Manager. The
expenses incurred by the Owner / Project Manager for completing the Work and in
respect of the actual expenses suffered by him due to the Contractor's default, shall be
certified by the Project Manager and his decision on this matter shall be final and
binding on the Parties.

49.3

Without prejudice to any claims that the Owner / Project Manager may have against the
Contractor, the Owner / Project Manager at their own sole discretion, for the sake of
convenience and without assigning any reason may terminate the Contract at any time,
by giving the Contractor at least seven days prior written notice to that effect.

49.4

In the event of the termination of the Contract as mentioned in Clause 49.3 above, the
Owner / Project Manager shall pay the Contractor for such portions of the Work as are
due and properly invoiced under the provisions for final payment in Clause 32 for Work
performed prior to termination of the Contract.
Provided however, that in any event, the total payments made to the Contractor under
this clause shall not exceed the Contract Price (for the relevant items / Works actually
carried out and done by the Contractor) and that prior to full payment, the Contractor
shall comply with the requirements for the release of claims and other documentation as
appropriate and provided for under the provisions for final payment in Clause 32. The
Owners / Project Managers sole liability to the Contractor for termination pursuant to
Page 63 of 304

Clause 49.3 above, shall not entitle the Contractor to any further payments (beyond what
is provided for in this Clause), including without limitation, loss of anticipated profits.

50.

49.5

The Owner or the Project Manager, at any time, time to time and for any reason may
suspend any part of or the whole of the Work by giving at least 24-hours written notice
to that effect to the Contractor, specifying the part of the Work to be suspended and the
effective date of such suspension. The Contractor shall cease work on said part of the
Works on and from the effective date of such suspension. The Contractor shall continue
to perform any unsuspended part of the Work. The Owner / Project Manager may, at any
time, authorize resumption of the suspended part of the Work by notifying the
Contractor of the part of the Work to be resumed and the effective date (which shall not
be less than 24 hours from such notification) of withdrawal of suspension. The
Contractor agrees and undertakes to resume the suspended Work properly on receipt of
such notice.

49.6

Incase the suspension period does not exceed one Week, the Owner/Project Manager
shall not be liable for reimbursement of any expense to the Contractor for the Cost of
Labour borne and expended by the Contractor for keeping any manpower idle who were
actually working on the suspended work. Incase the suspension period exceeds one week
upto a period of next three weeks the Project Manager/Owner shall only reimburse the
actual cost on such portion of idling of labour whose services have not actually been
utilized by the Contractor on any other work during the said period. The Number of
workmen who were actually working on the suspended work shall be identified by both
the Parties at or before the time of suspension of the work and utilization or nonutilisation of such manpower by the Contractor shall be reported to the Project Manager
on daily basis. It is further clarified that the Owner/Project Manager shall not at all be
responsible for non-utilisation of the whole or any part of plant, machinery and
equipments by the Contractor during the suspension period. In case the suspension
period is notified by the Project Manager to exceed a period of one Month then the
Project Manager/Owner shall not be liable for payment of any compensation to the
Contractor on any count whatsoever and it shall be the prerogative of the Contractor as
to in what manner the Contractor utilizes his manpower.

TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT BY THE CONTRACTOR:

In case the Work remains suspended for a continuous period of more than Six (6)
Months by or at the instance of the Owner / Project Manager or on account of any court
orders not arising out of any misconduct of the Contractor, or because of any vis-majure
causes, the Contractor shall be entitled to Terminate this Contract by serving One
Months notice in writing and thereupon to have the accounts settled with the Owner /
Project Manager.

51.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

51.1

It is hereby acknowledged and agreed that the Owner / Project Manager has
commissioned the Work in connection with the Project and accordingly ownership of all
intellectual property rights, including but not limited to property rights in the design and
in all Drawings, Specifications and documents prepared by the Architects, the Contractor
and any Sub-Contractors or Vendors belongs and shall be assigned solely to the Owner
who shall be entitled to deal with the designs, Drawings, Specifications and documents
in whole or in part, in any manner in the Owner's sole discretion, directly or through the
Project Manager. The Contractor hereby disclaims any right whatsoever on these
intellectual property rights in which cases the Owner shall be duly informed in that
regard. This intellectual property right entitlement shall extend to any maintenance,
repair and renewal, reinstatement and enlargement of the Project. The Contractor shall
Page 64 of 304

ensure that any provisions of this type necessary to protect the intellectual property rights
of the Owner / Project Manager are included in all its contracts with Sub-Contractors.
51.2

All communications, whether written or oral, including but not limited to this Contract,
its Annexures, Drawings, data sheets, Specifications, bills of material, sketches,
calculations, designs and all other materials shall be treated as confidential and shall be
the exclusive property of the Owner unless otherwise agreed in writing and must be
given to the Owner upon request, but in any event all such materials shall be delivered to
the Owner / Project Manager upon termination/expiry of this Contract.

51.3

The Contractor agrees that it and its employees, agents, Sub- Contractors and consultants
shall not (without the prior written consent of the Owner) during the term of this
Contract or thereafter, disclose, make commercial or other use of, give or sell to any
person, firm or corporation, any information received directly or indirectly from the
Owner or Project Manager/ Architect or acquired or developed in the course of the
Work, Project or this Contract, including by way of example only, ideas, inventions,
methods, designs, formulae, systems, improvements, prices, discounts, business affairs,
trade secrets, products, product specifications, manufacturing processes, data and knowhow and technical information of any kind whatsoever unless such information has been
publicly disclosed by authorised officials of the Owner / Project Manager. The
Contractor agrees that prior to assigning any employee or agent or hiring any Sub Contractor or consultant to work on this Project, such employee, agent, Sub-Contractor
or consultant shall be required to execute a document containing in substance and form,
a confidentiality provision similar to this provision.

51.4

The Contractor shall not, without the Project Managers prior consent:
i.

Take any photographs or videos of the Project (or any part thereof) for use otherwise
than in connection with carrying out and completion of the Project;
ii. Write for publication, or cause, information or comment or pictures about the
Project;
iii. Supply to any third person such as actual and prospective clients, contractors,
publishers, other interested parties and the like, the designs and any articles or
information relating to the Project; and
iv. Give interviews to the press including television, radio print and the like regarding
the Project or the Contractors involvement in the Work.

52.

51.5

Notwithstanding the foregoing, this provision shall not limit the obligation of the
Contractor to take photographs and/or videos on a regular basis for the purpose of
providing the progress reports required by this Contract.

51.6

The Contractor, Sub-Contractors and their respective employees, representatives, agents,

servants, workmen and suppliers shall not, during or after the termination/expiry of this
Contract, disclose any information pertaining to this Contract or the Project to any
person without the prior written consent of the Owner / Project Manager except when
called upon to do so by a valid and lawful direction or order of a statutory or
Government authority or an order of a court of law or where any of the parties require
production of this document and related information for establishing their respective
legal rights.

SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES / ARBITRATION:

52.1

All disputes and differences of any kind whatsoever arising out of or in connection
with this Contract as also with regard to the implementation, meaning, interpretation
or implications of the various clauses of the Contract and those of the Contract
Documents or in respect of any other matter or thing arising out of or relating to the
Page 65 of 304

development and construction of the Project whether during the progress of the work
or after their completion shall be communicated by the Contractor in writing to the
Project Manager and all possible efforts would be made by the Parties to sort out and
resolve all such matters of controversy, disputes and differences, amicably with due
dispatch and effective priority. In case, the Contractor and the Project Manager were
unable to resolve such issues amicably latest within 10 working days from the date of
receipt of such communication by the Project Manager. In such eventuality the Owner /
Project Manager shall take their decision thereon without any undue delay and
preferably within next 10 working days and there upon they shall notify in writing
such decision to the Contractor with in next 5 working days.
52.2

Decisions, directions and clarifications pertaining to measurements, drawings and

certificates taken by the Director of M/s INDIAN INSTITUTE OF
ASTROPHYSICS shall be final and binding on the Parties. The Decisions so taken
with respect to any matter the decision for which is specially provided for by these or
other special conditions to be given and made by the Project Manager / their Director,
IIA with or without the concurrence of the Owner or of the Architect are exempted
matters for the purpose of Arbitration proceedings and shall not be set aside on
account of non-observance of any formality, any omission, delay or error in
proceeding in or about the same or on any other ground or for any reason. They shall
be specifically excluded from the scope of arbitration proceedings hereinafter referred
to.

52.3

Subject as aforesaid in Clauses 52.1 and 52.2, all disputes and differences
whatsoever, which shall at any time hereafter arise between the Parties hereto,
touching or concerning this Agreement or its interpretation or effect or as to the
rights, duties, obligations and liabilities of the Parties hereto or either of them under
of by virtue of this Agreement or otherwise as to any other matter in any way
connected with or arising out of or in relation to the subject matter of this Agreement
shall be referred to the Arbitration in accordance with the provisions of Arbitration
and Conciliation Act 1996. The Parties agree that the reference of the disputes and
differences between the Parties would be made to the Sole Arbitrator, to be appointed
by the Management Review Committee (MRC) constituted by the Owner and the
Project Manager.
The jurisdiction and arbitration venue shall be at BANGALORE. The procedure for
the arbitration shall be determined by the Arbitrator. Costs of such arbitration shall be
equally shared between the Owner and the Contractor. The Parties undertake to abide
and remain bound by the award of the Arbitrator so rendered.

53.

52.4

The Contractor shall not, except with the consent in writing of the Owner and Project
Manager, in any way delay the carrying out of the Work by reason of such matter,
question or dispute being referred to arbitration. On the contrary the Contractor shall
proceed with the work with all due diligence and shall, until the decision of the
arbitrator is given, abide by the decision of the Project Manager. The award of the
arbitrator shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to adhere strictly to the
Owners / Project Managers instructions with regard to the actual carrying out of the
Work save and except as the Award may specifically affect such instructions.

52.5

This tender shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the courts at BANGALORE.

GOVERNING LAW:
The governing law of the Contract shall be Indian law.

54.

STANDARDS OF CONDUCT:
Page 66 of 304

54.1

The Contractor, in performing its obligations under this Contract, shall establish and
maintain appropriate business standards, procedures and control, including those
necessary to avoid any real or apparent impropriety or adverse impact on the interests of
the Owner / Project Manager. The Owner / Project Manager will in no event reimburse
the Contractor for any costs incurred for purposes inconsistent with such policies.

54.2

Compliance with Laws, Rules and Regulations:

Contractor represents, warrants, certificates and covenants that in connection with
performance under this contract that:
i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

vi.

55.

It shall, and the Work to be provided hereunder shall, comply with all applicable
Local, National, and Central Laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited
to those governing building constructions, environmental, safety of persons and
property, ESI, workmen compensation, PF and applicable industrial/labour laws,
and land development laws, rules and regulations.
No services provided hereunder will be produced using forced, indentured or convict
labour or using the labour of persons in violation of the minimum working age law
in the country where the Work are rendered;
It shall comply with all laws regarding improper or illegal payments, gifts or
gratuities; and Contractor agrees not to pay, promise to pay or authorize the payment
of any money or anything of value, directly or indirectly, to any person or entity for
the purpose of illegally or improperly inducing a decision or obtaining or retaining
business or any advantage in connection with this Contract;
It has not paid or provided and shall not pay, any gratuity for the benefit of any
agent, representative or employee of the Owner / Project Manager other than in
accordance with the Owners / Project Managers applicable policies; and
It has not, and shall not, engage in any sharing or exchange of prices, costs or other
competitive information or take any other collusive conduct with any third party
supplier or bidder in connection with the preparation or submission of any bid or
proposal to the Owner / Project Manager or the negotiation of this Contract.
It will also comply with all rules and regulations of the Owner / Project Manager
which may be in effect at the Facility site regarding employment, passes, badges,
smoking, fire prevention, safety and conduct or property. On behalf of the Owner /
Project Manager, Contractor shall request and monitor that such is observed by any
Contractor, subcontractors, vendors and each of their employees.

WARRANTY AS TO DOCUMENTS SUBMITTED TO OWNER; AUDIT:

The Contractor represents that all Documents, including invoice, vouchers, financials to
settlements, billings and other reports submitted or to be submitted by the Contractor to the
Owner / Project Manager in support of an application payment are true, correct, complete and
accurate in all respects. Upon request of the Owner / Project Manager, the Contractor agrees to
cooperate fully with the Owner / Project Manager in the conduct of a billing and technical audit
by an independent agency of the billings by the Contractor for the Work.
The Contractor accepts that the contract / work shall be subject to the technical audit by an
independent technical auditor appointed by the Owner / Project Manager to audit the quality and
quantities of the works done by the contractor, and agrees to render all necessary assistance to
such agencies / professionals, whose reports / assessments shall be final and binding. Contractor
shall fulfill the requirements as per the auditors assessments at his own cost with in the time
stipulated by the Project Manager.

Page 67 of 304

56.

57.

CHANGES IN CONTRACTORS CONSTITUTION:

56.1

Where the contractor is a Partnership, prior approval in writing shall be obtained from
the Project Manager before any change is made in the Constitution of the partnership.

56.2

Where the Contractor is an individual or a Hindu Undivided Family business, such

written approval from the Project Manager shall likewise be obtained before
Contractor enters into any partnership agreement in which the partnership would have
the right to carry out the work previously to be undertaken by the Contractor.

56.3

If such written prior approval is not obtained by the Contractor, the contract shall be
deemed to have been assigned in the contravention of Clause 17 of these General
Conditions of Contract and same action taken and consequences ensue, as provided
for under Clause 49 of these General Conditions of Contract.

GROUNDS FOR WITHHOLDING PAYMENTS:

The Owner / Project Manager may withhold the whole or part of any compensation due to the
Contractor to the extent necessary to protect the Owner from any loss on account of any
breach of Contractors obligations under the Contract. When the cause for withholding is
rectified, such amounts then due and owing shall be paid or credited to the Contractor.

58.

CONTRACT SIGNING:
After acceptance of tender, the tenderer shall sign the necessary contract papers / documents with
in 10 days of the intimation. Expenses for the agreement including the cost of the stamp papers
etc. shall be borne by the contractor.

Page 68 of 304

SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (S.C.C.)

1.

GENERAL:
The Special Conditions of Contract are an extension of and are to be read in conjunction with the
General Conditions of Contract. Should there be any contradictory requirements in the two, the
requirement as per the Special Conditions of Contract shall prevail.

2.

DRAWINGS:
i.

Contract / Tender Drawings duly signed by the Architect / Consultants are diagrammatic but
shall be followed as closely as actual construction permits. Any deviations made shall be in
conformity with the direction of the Project Manager and with the prior approval of the
Project Manager.
ii. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over Structural drawings, which in turn shall
take precedence over services drawings in regard to all dimensions.
iii. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions at the Site and bring to the notice of the Project
Manager discrepancies if any, the Project Manager's decision in this respect shall be final.
3.

WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT BY LICENSED PERSONS/FIRMS:

Technically competent persons or firms holding valid licenses shall only carry out any special
service installations included in the scope of the Work.

4.

INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS:

The Contractor shall, if so required, produce manufacturers' test certificates for any particular
batch of materials supplied by him. The tests carried out shall be as per relevant Indian
Standards and shall be carried out at Government approved test facility specified by the Project
Manager.
For checking setting out and testing materials at the Site the Contractor shall provide the
following minimum testing equipment:
i.
Theodolites / Total Station
ii.
Automatic levels
iii.
Steel tapes
iv.
Weighing machines
v.
Spirit levels, plumb bobs
vi.
Micro meters
vii.
Thermometers
viii.
Hydraulic testing machines
ix.
Smoke test machines
x.
Complete concrete testing lab equipment
xi.
Moisture meters
xii.
Complete sets of sieves
xiii.
Oven.
All such equipment shall be calibrated at specified frequency for accuracy at a Testing Facility
approved by the Project Manager and calibration certificates will be submitted to the Project
Manager.

5.

REFERENCE DRAWINGS:
The Contractor shall maintain on site one set of all Drawings issued to him for reference.

Page 69 of 304

6.

SHOP DRAWINGS:
6.1

The Contractor shall submit, during the currency of the project, to the Project Manager
four (4) copies of all shop drawings for his approval. Shop drawings shall be submitted
generally for the following:
i. Construction and installation details for shuttering and formworks
ii. Structural Steelwork, especially joint details.
iii. For specific areas requiring detailing as called for by the Project Manager /
Architect.
iv. Manufacturer's and/or Contractor's fabrication drawings for equipment supplied
by Contractor.

6.2

All the shop drawings shall be prepared on computer through AutoCAD software.
Within 7 days after the issue of award of the contract and initial set of working
drawings, the contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager, for the approval of the
Architect/Consultant, four sets of detailed shop drawings of all equipment and
materials as required by the Architect/ Project Manager.
Each item of equipment/material proposed shall be a standard catalogue product of an
established manufacturer strictly from the List of Approved Makes and
Manufacturers listed in Volume 2 Annexure B.

6.3

Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval sufficiently in advance of planned

delivery and installation of any materials to allow Architect/Consultant ample time
for scrutiny. No claims for extension of time shall be entertained because of any delay
in the work due to his failure to produce shop drawings at the right time, in
accordance with the approved programme.

6.4

Manufacturers drawings, catalogues, pamphlets, equipment characteristics data,

performance charts and other documents submitted for approval shall be in four sets.
Each item in each set shall be properly labeled, indicating the specific services for
which material or equipment is to be used, giving reference to the governing section
and clause number and clearly identifying in ink the items and the operating
characteristics. Data of general nature shall not be accepted.

6.5

Samples of all finishing materials like Tiles (vitrified and ceramic), Indian marble &
granite, paints, door shutters, door locks & other hardware etc. other than materials so
specified shall be submitted to the Project Manager prior to procurement. These will
be submitted in triplicate for approval and retention by Project Manager and Architect
and shall be kept in their site office for reference and verification till the completion
of the Project.

6.6

Approval of shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or

of building dimensions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean
that the drawings supersede the contract requirements, nor does it in any way relieve
the contractor of the responsibility or requirement to furnish material and perform
work as required by the contractor.

6.7

Where the contractor proposes to use an item of equipment, other than that specified
or detailed on the drawings, which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions,
foundation, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or
architectural layouts; he shall inform the Project Manager well in advance and no
delays resulting from such re-design shall be admissible. He shall also submit all
Page 70 of 304

related information as may be required for such redesign to the Architect/ Project
Manager.

7.

6.8

Where the work of the contractor has to be installed in close proximity to, or will
interfere with work of other trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to
make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Project Manager, the contractor
shall prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less
than 1:50, clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of
other trades. If the Contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades,
or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, he shall make all the
necessary changes without extra cost to the Owner / Project Manager.

6.9

Within four weeks of approval of all the relevant shop drawings, the contractor shall
submit four copies of a comprehensive variation in quantity statement, and itemized
price list of recommended (by manufacturers) imported and local spare parts and
tools covering all equipment and materials in this contract. The Project Manager shall
make recommendation to Owner for acceptance of anticipated variation in contract
amounts and also advise the Owner to initiate action for procurement of spare parts
and tools at the completion of project.

COMPLETION DRAWINGS & STANDARD MEASUREMENT BOOK (SMB):

On completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of the site
produced drawings and marked up prints of "AS BUILT" drawings verified and approved by the
Architect to the Project Manager. These drawings shall include and show all the changes /
deviations made from the working drawings during the course of construction and also the other
details as called for by the Project Manager. During the execution of the Works a set of drawings
shall be retained in the Contractors Site Offices for the exclusive purpose of recording changes
made to the Work as the construction proceeds. The drawings shall be prepared on computer
through AutoCAD Software and provided to the Project Manager on CD.
Along with the completion drawings the Contractor shall also prepare and submit to the
Project Manager the Standard Measurement Book (SMB) in the form of a bound book and a
soft copy of the same. SMB shall incorporate the standard measurements of the items as per
the completion / as built drawings in modules finalized in consultation with the Project
Manager.

8.

TESTING OF INSTALLATIONS:
All water retaining structures and the basement shall be tested as specified for the waterproof
qualities, in the presence of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall also perform all such tests
as may be necessary and required by the Project Manager to ensure quality of the executed works
and by local authorities to meet Municipal and other bye-laws, regulations in force. The
Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment, and materials etc., required for the performance
of the tests.

9.

SITE INFORMATION:
All information, levels and dimensions given in the tender drawings relating to Site conditions
are given in good faith; the Contractor shall, however, make his own independent inquiries and
verify the same. Any claims for extras on account of any deviations or incorrectness of above
referred information, levels etc., shall be considered as inadmissible.
The Contractor shall obtain all information relating to local regulations, by-laws and all
regulations applicable to the work or applicable profession. Any claims in this regard shall be
inadmissible.
Page 71 of 304

10.

SITE INSTRUCTION FILE:

The Contractor shall maintain a Site instruction file at the Site office. All instructions received
from the Project Manager relating to the Work shall be retained in the file.

11.

PHOTOGRAPHS:
Besides submitting progress charts, reports, etc., the Contractor shall submit progress
photographs as directed by Project Manager, every four weeks in triplicate along with negatives.

12.

PROFESSIONAL INTEGRITY AND TEAM SPIRIT:

It is the intent of the Owner and the Project Manager that this Project will be executed in a spirit
of teamwork and full professional integrity. The Contractor shall fully co-operate with all
agencies concerned to fulfill this objective.

13.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL PROGRAMME:

The Contractor shall establish an effective quality control system at the Site and implement the
same through an independent team consisting of the Contractors Representative and qualified
and experienced engineers and technical personnel to enforce quality control on all items of the
Work and the Project at all stages.

14.

CONTRACT DRAWINGS:
Drawings forming part of the Contract are listed in Annexure B. Further supplementary
Drawings furnished by the Project Manager from time to time shall also be deemed to form
part of the Contract.

15.

ENTRY TO THE SITE:

The Project Manager, at his discretion has the right to issue passes to control the admission of the
Contractor, his agents, employees and work people to the Site of the Work or any part thereof.
Passes shall be returned at any time on demand by the Project Manager.

16.

FIRE PRECAUTIONS:
The Contractor shall take all precautions and preventive measures against fire hazards at the Site
and shall assume full responsibility for the same.

17.

PERFORMANCE BOND:
The Contractor shall furnish a performance bond in the form of a bank guarantee from a
Nationalised bank approved by the Project Manager, for the value and validity as mentioned in
the Schedule of Fiscal Aspects, within Ten (10) days from the date of LOI / Work Order issued
to the Contractor. The Bank Guarantee shall be in the approved format.

18.

DRILLING, CUTTING ETC.:

All cutting and drilling of walls or other elements of the building for the proper entry/installation
of inserts, boxes, equipment, etc. shall be carried out using electrically operated tools only.
Manual drilling, cutting, chiseling, etc. shall not be permitted. No structural member shall be cut
or chased without the written permission of the Project Manager. Cutting and drilling of
structural members shall be carried out using vibration free diamond wire sawing and diamond
Page 72 of 304

drilling only with prior permission from the Project Manager. The costs for procurement and
using such equipment are deemed to be included in the Contract and no extra costs will be paid.
19.

APPROVAL BY STATUTORY BODIES:

The Owner will handle commencement Certificate, No Objection Certificate and Occupation
Certificate if applicable for the permanent building works under this Contract.
The contractor shall be responsible for providing required notices to authorities and to obtain
and retain with him at his own cost all other approvals from the statutory bodies pertaining to
works under this tender and temporary structures to be constructed at site, labour, ESI, PF,
Tax Deptts. etc. and any other approval required to facilitate performance of Contractors
work under the Contract till completion.
Refusal by statutory authorities to issue completion / occupation certificate or any other
approvals due to the Contractors failure to construct the building in accordance with the
sanctioned plans and/or specifications shall render the Contractor liable for damages and in
addition, render him liable to obtain such certificates at his cost.

20.

LABOUR WAGES:
The Contractor shall have no claim whatsoever, if on account of any rules and regulations or
otherwise, he is required to pay wages in excess of fair wages called for under Clause 12.2 of
General Conditions.

21.

MOBILISATION ADVANCE:

21.1

Mobilisation Advance for Works:

The Owner / Project Manager will pay Mobilisation advance up to 5% (Five percent) of the
value of the Contract. 10 (Ten) Lacs of the said advance shall be paid on production of a
Bank Guarantee of equal amount from a Nationalised bank after signing of the Contract.
Balance amount to be paid against mobilization of material (i.e. shuttering, scaffolding,
machinery, establishment of office / infrastructure) of same value against BG. BG to be valid
up to Thirty (30) days after the scheduled date of Virtual Completion or the extended date till
the full Mobilisation Advance is recovered. The Bank Guarantee shall be in the approved
format. The Mobilisation Advance shall be recovered by the Owner /Project Manger from the
Contractors Bills as prescribed for in Schedule of Fiscal Aspects.

22.

OWNER'S, PROJECT MANAGERS OFFICE & FACILITIES

The Contractor shall supply, erect and satisfactorily maintain in good repair until final
completion of the Project, at no additional cost, the following facilities:
i. Furnished Project office for Owner, Project Manager, Architects as per the attached
drawing (for an area of approx. 750 sft.).
ii. Free water, stabilised power and lighting as required for the duration of the Project.
iii. Sanitation facilities for the duration of the Project.
iv. Janitorial and Housekeeping of project office on daily basis.
v. 3 nos. Air Conditioners/heaters & complete furniture, storages, marker boards etc. as
required.
The Contractor shall provide at all times for the duration of the Contract survey instruments
for the exclusive use of Architect/Project Manager/Owner/Owners Representative for
carrying out of their duties in connection with the Contract.

Page 73 of 304

Such instruments which must be approved by the Architect, shall include but not limited to
the following:
- One theodolite & tripod capable of reading to 20 seconds / Total Stations
- One level with horizontal circle and tripod.
- Two metric levelling staffs not less than 3.5mtr high.
- One 100 metre rust less steel band, one 30 metre rust less steel tape & two 30 metre linen
tapes.
- An adequate number of ranging rods drop arrows, wooden setting-out pegs, etc.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all such instruments and equipments and shall
ensure that they are at all times in good repair and adjustment.
23.

24.

TESTING FACILITIES AT SITE:

23.1

The Contractor shall provide facilities/equipment to test the quality of material

being used.

23.2

The Contractor shall provide the minimum but not limited to the following facilities
/ equipment and trained staff at site at his own cost.
Compression Testing Machine for concrete and bricks
Slump testing apparatus.
Sieve sets for testing of fine and coarse aggregate balance
Cube moulds
Balance
Ovens
Weighing Machine

23.3

The Contractor shall get other tests carried out at his own cost at approved
laboratory as per the directions of the Project Manager.

REPORTS & CHECKLISTS BY CONTRACTOR:

24.1 Contractor has to note that Project Manager follows the ISO procedures and all reports,
returns & checklists shall conform to ISO standards & procedures as informed to the
Contractor by the Project Manager for time to time. With in 15 days of award of contract
the contractor shall submit the draft formats for various reports and Checklists for the
approval of the Project Manager. During progress of the Work the Contractor shall prepare
and submit to the Project Manager various checklists, for having checked various Works at
different stages of progress and reports as per the approved formats and at specified
frequency.
24.2 The Contractor shall file daily category-wise labour return. The report shall indicate
scheduled requirement against actual strength.
24.2 The Contractor shall prepare weekly reports of planned and actual progress of the Work
and the subsequent week's scheduled Work. These will also include material procurement
status.
These reports shall be submitted to Project Manager and Owners Representative and shall
be reviewed in weekly co-ordination meeting.
24.3 The Contractor shall submit monthly report along with monthly bills.
24.4 Further progress charts and schedules shall be prepared by the Contractor as directed by
the Project Manager.
24.5 Contractor shall submit a safety procedure manual or Company policy on safety.
Complying with the SHE Plan and outlining its implementation by the Contractor and
including:

Page 74 of 304

i. Quality Assurance and Control System (Sample format).

ii. Realistic construction programme/schedule.
24.6 Contractor shall maintain and make available all the records pertaining to reports, returns
and checklist to the Project Manager during audits (internal as well as external) and make
necessary corrections, additions and actions based upon the findings / observations of the
audits.
25.

NAME BOARD AND PUBLICITY:

The contractor is not entitled to do any publicity on account of the project. Contractor shall
not put any hoarding, publish any advertisement, put any banner or circulate any pamphlet or
adopt any other publicity method save and except with prior written approval of the Project
Manager.
A name board may be made and displayed by the Contractor at his own cost at the Site at
some approved place. The drawing of the Name Board shall be got approved from the Project
Manager. The contents of the board shall be as follows:i. Name of the Project.
ii. Name of the Owner/Owners.
iii. Project Manager/ Architect / Consultants with their addresses.
iv. Contracting Agency.
v. Other Contracting Agencies.
Care should be taken to see that the height of letters especially for the Architects should not
be more than 2" to abide by the code of professional conduct prescribed by the Indian
Institute Of Architects. The colour, texture etc., of the board shall be as per the Architect's
instructions.

26.

SITE BARRICADING:
Site barricading with painted GI sheet at site shall be maintained by the Contractor at his own
cost till completion of the Project. Contractor for safety reason provide the GI sheet
barricading around the excavated pits and his work area, which shall be put in proper line and
level and shall be painted as per the instructions of the Project Manager. Contractor shall at
his own cost provide lockable gates at all the openings in the site barricading, boundary wall,
access roads that may be required from time to time during progress of work. Contractor shall
be required to provide appropriate barricading within the site to ensure safety of men and
material, at his own cost.

27.

RATE ONLY ITEMS, NON-TENDERED / EXTRA ITEMS AND QUANTITIES

EXCEEDING THE TENDERED QUANTITIES:
The contractor shall immediately and before procurement and execution of the work
obtain a written approval of the variation order from the Project Manager for the rate
only item, non-tendered /extra items and quantities exceeding the tendered quantities.
No payments will be entertained without the Project Managers written approval of the
change / variation order. The onus shall be on the Contractor to obtain such prior written
variation order from the Project Manager.

28.

WATER AND ELECTRICITY:

Contractor shall make his own arrangement for electricity and water for construction
purposes.
28.1

There is no water arrangement at site from which the Contractor may draw water for
construction purpose. The contractor shall arrange the water good for construction &
personal use at his own cost and shall be responsible for all further connections,
Page 75 of 304

28.2

28.3

28.4

28.5

pumps, pipes, storage facilities and all other things necessary to distribute and use
services from this distribution point..
The electricity required for Construction Work shall be arranged by the Contractor
from the authorities and/ or generators at his own cost. Contractor shall be responsible
for all distribution points as may be required for the Work. The Contractor shall also
make arrangement for alternative standby services at his own cost in the form of
additional Generators of adequate capacity (day & night) so that there is no delay in
progress of Work as per construction schedule submitted by him and approved by the
Project Manager. The Contractor shall also share electricity from his Generators and
electric connection with other Contractors, Sub-contractors, Vendors & Project
Manager etc. and share proportionate cost (excluding the Project Manager for whom
the electric supply is free) with them at tariff prevalent as per State Electricity Board.
The point of supply shall be at Generator / Electric supply Board. The cost of energy
meter shall be borne by the allied contractors. Contractors shall ensure adequate
capacity of generators to support such load sharing with other vendors.
The Contractor shall prepare schematic distribution diagrams of distribution of
electricity and water for construction purposes incorporating all safeties and get them
approved by the Project Manager, the distribution at site shall be in accordance to the
approved schematic. The contractor shall ensure incorporation and strict
implementation of all safety parameters, equipments, instruments and directions
given by the Project Manager from time to time in this regard.
The contractor shall install the temporary distribution lines for water and electricity
ensuring that work of other agencies / vendors is not interrupted or hampered. Incase
during the course of construction these lines foul or interrupt or hamper the work of
other agencies / vendors, the contractor shall remove and relocate the service lines
and relocate the same at his own cost with in the time stipulated by the Project
Manager.
If the Institute provides the water and electricity, the cost for such facility will be
borne by the contractor at 1% of the bill value for water and electricity or as per
actual consumption which will be decided before providing the facility by the owner.

All statutory Fees, & miscellaneous expenses and costs for electric power and Water
connection for construction purposes shall be borne by the Contractor. However the statutory
fees if refundable shall be reimbursed by the Owner on production of proper receipts.
29.

ASSOCIATED CIVIL WORKS:

All civil works required for the storage of materials or the installation of equipments any
other required for the contractor's functioning shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

30.

GUARANTEE TO PERFORM:
The contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the drawings, specifications,
schedule and other documents forming part of the contract.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the performance of the works executed by him.
All waterproofing works and termite proofing works executed by the contractor, shall be
guaranteed for a minimum period of ten years from the date of final completion of Project.
The guarantees on the approved format shall be submitted to the Project Manager along with
the as-built documentation at the end of the project. These guarantees will be executed &
extended by the contractor and not by the sub agencies to the Project Manager.

Page 76 of 304

31.

ESCALATION:
No escalation on Contract price / rates shall be applicable during the tenancy of the
Contract period including extensions thereof.

32.

33.

DEWATERING AND FLOODING CONTROL:

32.1

The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for any and all temporary dewatering,
during the execution of his Work. Such work shall include but not necessarily be
limited to the safe disposal of the resulting water; removal, replacement and/or
recompaction of the water logged soils/surfaces; backfilling plugging of all temporary
sumps, ditches, temporary materials and devices.

32.2

Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs associated with removal of
flood waters and any associated sludge debris etc. from the basement level or any
other part of the building so effected in the event of flooding due to heavy rains
during his construction activities and after basement, superstructure work is
completed until such time as Contractor has completed and handed over all his works
under the Contract.

PROTECTION / PRESERVATION OF TREES:

Contractor shall take all measures necessary to ensure the protection and preservation of
existing trees within / outside the boundary of the site. Contractor shall be responsible of any
damage / casualty to the trees happing as a result of his working at site and for any action,
claim, penalty or expenses imposed by the forest / any other department. No claim / payment
shall be payable to the contractor on this account.

Page 77 of 304

1. SCHEDULE OF FISCAL ASPECTS

Ref. Clause Clause Description
NIT 9
Earnest Money

Summary
Rs. 10,00,000/-(Rupees Ten Lakhs only) as a bank
guarantee/DD valid upto 90 days from the date of
submission of Tender.
Tax including Work Contract Tax (WCT) shall be
deducted as applicable at Source in accordance with the
statutory requirements from all payments made to the
Contractor, including that in respect of
the
Mobilization advance, if paid.
Workman compensation, third party insurance, CAR
policy shall be taken by own. Policies in original will
be submitted with the Project Manager with in one
month of start of the Project.
One bill per month. The minimum amount of the bills
raised shall not be less than Rs. 50.00 Lacs.

GCC 6

Tax Deduction at Source

GCC 10

Insurance

GCC 32.3

Running / Interim Bills

GCC 32.3

Running Bills certification

With in 30 working days after receipt of Contractors

bill complete in all respect incorporating Project
Managers observations (if any).

GCC 32.4

Retention Money

GCC 32.4

Release of Retention

GCC 32.5

Final bill Payment

GCC 32.8

Secured Advance Against Material

GCC
36.2

Commencement of work

5% of the value of work done in each interim bill to a

maximum of 5% of the contract value.
50% Retention money will be released after issue of
Virtual completion certificate and on submission of
bank guarantee of the same amount valid for Defects
Liability Period Including extensions.
The rest after issue of Final Completion Certificate on
completion of Defects Liability Period including any
extension thereof.
Within 120 working days after receipt of Contractors
final Bill complete in all respect incorporating Project
Managers observations (if any).
75% value of material cost shall be paid towards
secured advance for items other than perishable such as
secured advance against indemnity bond for such
amount.
The work shall commence within 15 days from the date
of issue of LOI.

GCC
36.2

Period of Completion

Twenty Four (24) Months after 15 days of issue of

LOI including all seasons.

GCC 43

Liquidated Damages

0.5% of the contract value per week of delay in

completion of each milestone work, limited to a
maximum of 5% of the contract value.

GCC 46

Defects Liability Period

12 Months from the date of Virtual Completion. Where

extended Guarantee periods are stipulated in the
Contract Documents for particular parts of the Works,
the Contractor shall furnish appropriate guarantees in
approved formats for same before issuance of the Final
Completion Certificate.
Page 78 of 304

SCC 17

Performance Bond

SCC 21

Mobilisation Advance

To be submitted with in 10 days from date of LOI /

Work Order. For the value of 5% of the contract value
in the form of scheduled bank guarantee to be
submitted at the start of the project and valid till 90
days after virtual completion of the project, in
approved format.
Mobilization Advance - 5% advance against
mobilization shall be paid in following manner
(a) Rs. 10 lacs against BG of equal amount after signing
of the agreement and issue of LOI.
(b) Balance amount to be paid against mobilization of
material of the same value against BG to be valid upto
30 days after the virtual completion:
i. Shuttering / scaffolding cost.
ii. Machinery Batching Plant
iii. Establishment of office infrastructure.
Recovery of Mobilization Advance - The mobilization
advance given to the contractor shall be recovered in 10
(Ten) equal installments starting from 2nd R.A. Bill
being submitted by the Contractor.

Others

The contractor shall also submit within fifteen days of

the award of work, a detailed schedule along with dates
for material delivery for the project, a list of machinery
and equipment to be used on the site along with site
utilization plan showing the placement of equipment,
machinery, material stacking areas, temporary stores /
sheds, workshops and site offices etc., a list of tests to
be conducted at and off site, a cash flow statement for
the project. Samples of stones and all finishing
materials must be submitted atleast 3 months or basis
lead time required for procurement ahead of their
scheduled use at site to the project manager for
approval. Any deviations from the list of approved
makes and vendors must be brought to the notice of the
Project Manager and a substitute got approved well in
advance of the actual execution.
All subcontractors and specialized agencies must be got
approved from the Project Manager.

Page 79 of 304

Annexure 1
1.

Schedule of Owner supplied Materials:

Owner shall not supply any material. The sole responsibility rests with Contractor for procurement of
all other materials required for completion of work within stipulated time.
S.
No.

Particulars

Basic Rate

Page 80 of 304

Permissible Limit for

wastage for
reconciliation

Penal
Recovery
Rates

Project Milestone Chart for Civil and Structural Work

S.NO.
1.
D- Day

MAJOR MILESTONES

DATES
Date of LOI / Work Order

2.

Start of Construction

D + 15 days

3.

Completion of Basement

D + ..days

4.

Each floor slab in cycle of

days

5.

Completion of RCC structure & plaster

D + .. days

Contractor has to furnish the detailed construction programme based on the above milestone and also
incorporating the activities, services, keeping in view the provisions under various clauses of
contracts.

Page 81 of 304

VOLUME - II

Page 82 of 304

INDIAN ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING

FOR I.I.A,AT LEH

VOLUME II: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION & BILL OF

QUANTITIES

TENDER FOR CIVIL, STRUCTURAL, FINISHING,

PLUMBING, FIRE FIGHTING & ELECTRICAL WORKS

CLIENTS:

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ASTROPHYSICS

Koramangala,
Bangalore - 560034.

ARCHITECTS :

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

B 4/ 103, Safdarjung Envlave,,
New Delhi 110029.

Page 83 of 304

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL & FINISHING WORKS

Page 84 of 304

CONTENTS

Volume II
Technical Specifications
List Of Codes
Preamble To Specification
List Of Approved Makes of Material
Bill of Quantities

Page 85 of 304

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORK

Preamble To Specifications
1.0

GENERAL

87 - 88

2.0

SITE DEVELOPMENT AND EARTH WORK

89 - 95

3.0

CONCRETE WORKS (PLAIN & RCC)

96 - 110

4.0

MASONRY WORKS

111 - 119

5.0

WATERPROOFING

120

6.0

WOOD WORKS

121 - 123

7.0

FLOORING / CLADDING WORKS

124 - 125

8.0

FINISHING WORKS

126 - 133

9.0

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

134 - 152

Page 86 of 304

1.0

GENERAL

1.1

Scope
This specification applies to the Civil, Structural, Finishing and External Development Works
and building works to be executed by the Contractor. It is to be read in conjunction with and
subject to the general conditions of contract and in conjunction with the drawings, the schedule
of rates and such other documents as may from time to time be agreed upon as comprising part
of this contract. Where these specifications are not clear, relevant BIS codes and CPWD
specifications shall be followed with prior permission of Project Manager.

1.2

Clearing
The contractor shall clear the site of all rubbish and old buildings, remove all grass and low
vegetation and remove all bush wood, trees, stumps of trees, and other vegetation only after
consultation with the Project Manager as to which bushes and trees shall be saved. All disused
foundations, drains or other obstructions met with during excavation shall be dug out and
cleared.

1.3

Site Levels
The contractor shall carry out the survey of the site and shall establish sufficient number of grids
and level marks to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, who shall decide on the basis of this
information, the general level of the plot and the plinth.

1.4

Bench-marks
Prior to commencement of construction, the contractor shall in consultation with the Project
Manager, establish several site datum bench-marks, their number depending on the extent of the
site. The bench-marks shall be sited and constructed so as to be undisturbed throughout the
period of construction.

1.5

Site investigation
The Project Manager might have got the soil investigation done and if so, the report will be
handed over to the contractor for their scrutiny. The contractor shall however inspect the site
and study the findings from the trial pits or bores in order to assess the problems involved in and
methods to be adopted for excavation and earthwork. The contractor shall ascertain for himself
all information concerning the sub-soil conditions, Ground water table periods and intensity of
rainfall, flooding of the site and all data concerning excavation and earthwork. Any extra work
required on this account, nothing will be paid extra.

1.6

Setting out the work

The contractor shall set out the works and during the progress of the building shall amend at his
own cost any errors arising from inaccurate setting out.
During the execution of the work contractor must cross check his work with the drawings. The
contractor shall be responsible for all the errors in this connection and shall have to rectify all
defects and/or errors at his own cost, failing which the Project Manager reserves the right to get
the same rectified at the risk and cost of the contractor.

1.7

Cleaning up and handing over

Upon completion of the work all the areas should be cleaned. All floors, doors, windows,
surface, etc. shall be cleaned down in a manner which will render the work acceptable to the
Project Manager. All rubbish due to any reason, shall be removed daily from the site and an area
of up to ten metres on the outer boundaries of the premises will be cleaned by the contractor as a
part of the contract. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall turn over to the Project
Manager the following:
a)
Written guarantee and certificates.
b)
Maintenance manuals, if any, and
c)
Keys.

Page 87 of 304

1.8

Samples
The contractor shall submit to the Project Manager samples of all materials for approval and no
work shall commence before such samples are duly approved. Samples of precast concrete
panels, masonry units, building insulation, finished hardware, metal window and door frames,
terrazzo flooring, kota stone, marble etc. and every other work requiring samples in the opinion
of the Project Manager shall be supplied to the Project Manager, and these samples will be
retained as standards of materials and workmanship. The cost of the samples shall be borne by
the contractor.
Throughout this specification, types of material may be specified by manufacturers' name in
order to establish standard of quality, price and performance and not for the purpose of limiting
competition. Unless specifically stated otherwise, the tenderers may assume the price of
'approved equivalent' except that the burden is upon the contractor to prove such equality, in
writing.
A detailed programme shall be submitted by the Contractor for the material approvals, within
four weeks of the Project Manager's order to commence. The detailed programme shall include
but not limited to:
Date/s of submitting the various material samples.
Date/s by which the Project Managers approval is required.
Date/s of placing orders on the Manufacturers/Suppliers.
Date/s of arrival of the approved material/s on to the site.
Date/s of the completion of the `Mock-ups', wherever required, and the Date/s by which the
Project Manager's inspection of such `Mock-ups' should be completed and the Date/s by which
the Project Manager should fully approve the said Mock-ups.

1.9

Tests
All materials and methods of tests shall conform to the latest rules, regulation and/or
specifications of the following authorities where specified herein as applicable. Bureau of Indian
Standards (BIS), British Standards Code of Practice (BS) in case no equivalent BIS is available.
The Project Manager will have the option to have any of the materials tested and if the test
results show that the materials do not conform to the specifications, such materials shall be
rejected. A reasonable number of representative tests will be deemed to be included in the rates
tendered.

1.10

Mode of Measurements
All measurements will be taken in accordance with IS 1200 latest issue unless otherwise specified.

1.11

Cost of activities under Para 1.1 to 1.9, the contractor should include in their quoted rate as well
as contract scope of work may be considered.

Page 88 of 304

2.0

SITE DEVELOPMENT AND EARTH WORK

2.1

General
This specification deals with the clearance of the Site of Works and preparation of the same to
commence the proposed construction activities. Wherever applicable, this is deemed to include
all preliminary works like Dismantling/Demolition, Site Clearance, General Levelling etc.
The contractor shall visit the site, inspect the same and decide for himself the nature of the
ground and the sub-soil to be excavated. No claim on account of extras will be entertained in
consequences of any misunderstanding or incorrect information or ignorance of the existing
conditions.

2.2

Dismantling/Demolition
Existing Buildings and structures within the boundary of the site, and as indicated in the drawings
or as instructed by the Project Manager, shall be carefully and gradually dismantled or
demolished, as the case may be.
i)

The contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager, a detailed scheme as well as a
programme of these works, at least one week prior to the commencement of the actual
demolition works and get the latters approval of the same.

ii)

On approval of the above programme and scheme, the contractor shall serve notices to
concerned authorities, owners, etc. as and wherever applicable, informing them of the
proposed demolition and get their approval of the same, prior to the
demolition/dismantling.

iii)

The whole of the building/structures that are to be demolished, shall be evacuated and
cleared off any valuable life and/or property to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Where required, the employer shall provide alternative arrangements to house those who
have been evacuated.

iv)

The site of demolition shall be well cordoned off from the other areas to the satisfaction
of the Project Manager, with all-necessary warning and signals, erected in the vicinity by
the Contractor.

v)

Such of those parts of the building/structures that are likely to fetch some returns from
the market and/or those parts which are likely to be reused elsewhere, shall be first
carefully removed from the existing buildings and then stored away properly to the
complete satisfaction of the Project Manager. Such parts shall include items like
woodwork, built in furniture, electrical fittings, sanitary wares etc. and all others that are
listed out by the Project Manager. All such valuable / reusable material shall be the
property of the Project Manager / Owner.

vi)

The demolition work shall then commence preferably from the top and proceed
downwards, gradually. In case of buildings comprising more than one floor, the
demolition shall commence from top and shall be dismantled floor by floor in such a
way that all the debris are collected in the next lower floor. Dismantling of external
walls/cladding shall be done from outside inwards. The dismantling of the next lower
floor shall commence only after the clearance of all debris collected in that floor from
the floor above, is completed.

All dismantling/demolition works shall include excavation of the ground, wherever necessary, to
dismantle the existing foundations, and back filling, including compacting to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager. The material used for back filling shall be as per specifications and as
approved by the Project Manager.

Page 89 of 304

All dismantling/demolition works shall be carried out in such a manner, so as not to cause any
damage, whatsoever, to the properties or persons in the vicinity of the site. If such damages
occur, the contractor shall be liable for full reinstatement, of all such damages, at his own cost.
All services, like electrical, water supply and sanitary lines/ connections, to the existing buildings
or structures that are to be dismantled and/or demolished, shall be properly cut off at points as
per the instructions of the Project Manager. If any such service lines are feeding adjacent plots/
sites/premises as well as within the premises, the contractor shall inform the Project Manager,
well in advance, and shall follow up with the Authorities concerned, to provide necessary
reconnections to the users of these service lines.
Wherever applicable, the contractor shall apply for the various permits, for executing such works
as may be required, from the relevant authorities.
Disposal of demolished/dismantled materials
Demolished/dismantled materials shall NOT be stacked or dumped in such a manner, as to
present a hazard to vehicles or pedestrians or properties or to cause blockage in drainage
channels etc. In case Contractor fails to clear the malba from the site the same shall be cleared by
the Owner at Contractor's risk and cost.
The contractor shall obtain necessary permission from the local Government Authorities, pay the
necessary deposits, for the location and the manner in which the debris to be disposed and then
carry out the disposal, as directed by the Project Manager.
Demolished/Dismantled debris shall be dumped/stacked in an area, primarily within the site, if
required, subject to the approval of the Project Manager and shall cart away and dispose off,
within the shortest possible time, as directed by the Project Manager.
All dismantling works shall be carried out by crow bar, chiselling or by Jack - hammering BUT
IN NO CASE BLASTING OPERATION IS PERMITTED AT SITE.
All debris shall be transported from the site on daily basis during prescribed hours as approved
by local authorities for transportation.
All dismantling works shall be carried out during daytime.
2.3

Classification of Soils
The earth shall be classified under the following categories and measured separately for each
category:

2.3.1

Hard dense soil

Generally any soil which requires the close application of picks or jumpers or scarifiers and
rippers to loosen the same such as:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.3.2

Stiff clay, hard shale or compact moorum requiring grafting tool and/or pick and shovel.
Shingle and river or nallah bed boulders.
Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime or cement mortar below ground level.
Soft, conglomerate or soft laterite when the stone can be detached from the matrix with
picks and shovel.
Existing WBM roads, pavements etc.

Ordinary/Soft/Decomposed rock (not requiring blasting)

Rock or boulders, which may be quarried or split with crowbars or wedges/picks; such as lime
stone, sand stone, hard laterite, hard conglomerate or other soft or disintegrated rock.
Page 90 of 304

2.3.3

Hard rock (requiring blasting) :

Rock which is in solid beds, which can only be removed either by wedging or chiselling, shall be
treated as hard rock. An isolated boulder or detached rock, measuring one cubic meter or more,
shall also be treated as hard rock, if the same cannot be removed without wedging or chiselling.
(If required, approved chemical may be used for loosening the materials).
Blasting is totally prohibited and will not be allowed under any circumstances.

2.3.4

Authority for classification of Soils/Rocks

The classification of excavation shall be decided by the Project Manager and his decision shall be
final and binding on the contractor.

2.3.5

Blasting
Blasting shall not be permitted under any circumstances. Alternately chemicals can be used to
split rock. The tenderer/contractor shall submit with his tender, the method which he intends to
adopt for execution of the work of rock excavation. A list of specialised tools and plants to be
used for rock excavation shall be enclosed.

2.3.6

Trimming of Slopes
All slopes shall be trimmed by hand or mechanically true to line and profile and consolidated to
the Project Manager's satisfaction. Any rock or boulders appearing on the face or likely to be
unstable, shall be removed and the void thereof filled with approved material and compacted.

2.3.7

Shoring/Earth work support

The contractor shall shore and strut the sides of excavation to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager. Should there be any slips or settlement, not withstanding the shoring, the contractor
shall make good the same at his own expense, with concrete or other approved material, as
directed by the Project Manager. Shoring shall be removed gradually side by side with backfilling
to prevent any settlement and under no circumstances, until such time as the foundation concrete
has hardened enough, to take any loads brought on by the removal. Under special circumstances,
shoring shall be left in place, if so directed by the Project Manager. No extra payment shall be
made for shoring. The rate for the same shall be included in the excavation items.

2.3.8

Dewatering
All excavation shall be kept free from water from any source. The contractor shall provide and
clear away on completion, all drains, pumps and other equipment, for this purpose. The
contractor shall be responsible for preventing any subsidence of adjoining ground due to
pumping. Dewatering would be required to be continued till casting of ground floor (upper
basement roof) slab.
Contractor shall keep site dewatered till all construction works in basement and all other areas are
completed, including waterproofing. The dewatering (well point system) would be required to
be continued till casting of ground floor (upper basement roof) slab and as advised by the
Structural Consultant / Project Manager. No extra amount shall be claimed by the contractor on
this account and his quoted rates shall be deemed to have been included for total dewatering.

2.3.9

Contractor to keep excavation clear

Should any sand, mud, weed, rubbish or other materials be deposited on excavated area, by
sandstorm, rain, flood, landslips or from any cause, whatsoever, such materials shall be removed
by the contractor at his own expense.

2.3.10 Back filling

All materials used as fill shall be to the Project Manager's approval and shall be well consolidated
in layers not more than 200 mm thick. Final compacting must be done just before concrete is to
be laid.

Page 91 of 304

All fill materials shall be compacted at a moisture content appropriate to the material being used.
The compacted filling shall achieve a density, which shall not be less than 95% of the maximum
dry density obtained. Filling shall be free of any wood, organic matter or any other deleterious
material.
Sand, soil, gravel etc. from the excavation may be used for backfilling of pits and trenches or for
making up levels subject to approval of the Project Manager and subject to selection of proper
materials. The contractor shall take instructions of the Project Manager regarding the location in
which each type of excavated material is to be used according to its quality.
In case the excavated materials are not approved for backfilling, either totally or in part or if their
quantity falls short of the quantity required for filling, suitable materials shall be brought to site
from an approved source.
2.3.11 Disposal of surplus
Surplus excavated materials and all excavated materials rejected for backfilling, shall be carted
away from the site by the Contractor.
2.3.12 Measurements
i)
Existing Ground Level shall be taken jointly and recorded before commencing the
excavation work. Depth of excavation in cutting shall be computed from these spot
levels. The G. L. shall be recorded, at maximum 5 mts interval. Average of these reading
shall be taken as the average ground level for the pits.

2.4

ii)

Bottom width excavation shall be measured as given in foundation drawings and details
showing the width of the bedding concrete only and hence side clearance if any will not
measured separately. The contractor should cover this in his rate.

iii)

Diagonal ridges, cross ridges, or dead man shall be left in position shown by the Project
Manager to enable accurate measurements being taken on the completion of one work.
Where the ground is not uniform or where the site is required to be levelled, levels shall
be taken before the start of the work and after the completion of the work and the
quantity of excavation in cutting computed from these levels. These ridges or deadman
shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost after the measurements.

iv)

Where soil, soft rock, and hard rock are mixed, the measurements for the entire
excavation shall be computed from the levels & dimensions as described in (i) & (ii)
above.

v)

Excavated materials from `HARD ROCK' and SOFT ROCK shall be stacked separately,
measurement reduced by 50% to allow for voids to arrive at the quantity payable under
'hard rock' and 'soft rock' respectively.

vi)

The difference between the entire excavation (worked out from the levels) and the such
of the quantities payable under 'hard rock' and 'soft rock' shall be paid for as excavation
in all kind of soil.

vii)

Wherever rock excavation is encountered, contractor will be paid only up to required

level, and any extra excavation if carried out due to any reason, no payment shall be done
for the extra quantity.

Excavation in all Soils

Excavation and/or removal of any other material on the site, shall be carried out accurately to the
lines, levels and dimensions shown in the drawings or as ordered by the Project Manager, so as to
allow proper and efficient concrete work and other work in clean and dry condition. The
method of excavation shall be at the discretion of the Project Manager but should the dimensions
of any excavation exceed those shown on the drawings or ordered by the Project Manager or
should the sides collapse, the contractor shall fill such extra space with concrete or other
approved material, at his own expenses.
Page 92 of 304

All founding levels will be inspected by the Project Manager and suitability for bearing of the
bottom shall be determined before the concrete is placed. Records of all foundation levels shall
be submitted by the contractor to the Project Manager.
The final 150 mm depth of excavation shall be taken out by hand unless otherwise permitted by
the Project Manager. Extra depth of excavation, if any, beyond those shown in the drawings or
ordered by the Project Manager, shall be filled up with Grade 10 concrete for which payment
shall not be made to the contractor.
The contractor shall excavate any soft patches or rock outcrops below the founding level and
refill with M-10 concrete. The founding stratum shall be trimmed to required level and rammed
to the satisfaction of the Project Manager before concrete is placed.
Foundations within any one building shall not rest on soil strata with differential bearing
capacities. Strip foundations shall not be stepped along the length of the foundations. When
excavating for individual footings at different levels care shall be taken not to disturb the bearing
stratum of the higher foundations. The excavation bottom shall be watered as directed by the
Project Manager before the foundations are laid.
2.5

Pre-construction Anti-termite treatment

i)

Chemicals
The chemicals used for the soil treatment shall be any one or a combination of the following with
concentration shown against each in adequous emulsion:
Chemicals (EC's)
Chlorpyriphos / Landane

Concentration
20% EC By weight

Chemicals are available in concentrated form in the market and concentration is indicated on the
sealed containers. To achieve the percentage of concentration specified above, chemical should
be diluted with water in required quantity before it is used. Graduated containers shall be used
for dilution of chemical with water in the required proportion to achieve the desired percentage
of concentration. e.g. to dilute chemical of 30% concentration add 59 parts of water to one part
of chemical to achieve 0.5% concentration.
Chemical shall be brought to site of work in sealed original containers. The material shall be
brought in at a time in adequate quantity to suffice for the whole or at least a fortnight's work.
The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the Project Manager. The
empties shall not be removed from the site of work, till the relevant item of work has been
completed and permission obtained from Project Manager.
Hand operated pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to facilitate proper
penetration of chemicals in the earth. To have proper check for uniform spraying of chemical,
graduated containers shall be used. Proper check should be kept that the specified quantity of
chemical is used for the required area during the operation.
ii)

Time of application
Soil treatment should start when foundation trenches and pits are ready to take mass concrete in
foundations. Laying of mass concrete should start when the chemical emulsion has been
absorbed by the soil and the surface is quite dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is
raining or soil is wet with rain or sub-soil water. The foregoing applies also in the case of
treatment to the filled earth surface with the plinth before laying the sub grade for the floor.
The treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed after they are formed. If by chance, treated soil
barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and completeness
of the barrier system.

Page 93 of 304

iii)

Treatment for basement & foundation

The bottom surface and sides at the excavation made shall be treated with the chemical emulsion
mentioned above at 5 litre per sqm of surface area.

iv)

Treatment to backfill earth

After the retaining walls of the basement come up, the back fill in immediate contact with the
foundation structure shall be treated with the chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5 Ltrs. per Sq.m.
of the vertical surface of the sub-structure for each side. The earth is usually returned in layers
and the treatment shall be carried out in similar stages. The chemical emulsion shall be directed
towards the concrete surface of the columns and walls so that the earth in contact with these
surface is well treated with the chemical.

v)

Treatment of top surface of plinth / basement filling

The top surface of the consolidated earth within the walls shall be treated with the chemical
emulsion at the rate of 5 Ltrs. per sq.m. of the surface before the sand bed or sub-grade is laid. If
the filled earth has been well rammed and the surface does not allow the emulsion to seep
through, holes up to 50 to 75 mm deep at 150 mm centres both ways may be made with 12 mm
dia MS rod on the surface to facilitate absorption of the emulsion.

vi)

Treatment at junction of walls and floor

Special care shall be taken to establish continuity of the vertical chemical barrier on inner wall
surfaces from the ground level (where it has stopped with the treatment described in (iv) above
up to the level of the filled earth surface. To achieve this, a small channel 3 x 3 cm shall be made
at all the junctions of wall and columns with the floor (before laying the subgrade) and rod holes
to be made in the channel up to the ground level 15 cm. apart and the rod moved back ward and
forward to break up the earth and chemical emulsion poured along the channel at the rate of 7.5
Ltrs. per Sq.m. of the vertical wall or column surface of the sub structure so as to soak the soil
right to the bottom. The soil should be tamped back in to place after this operation.

vii)

Treatment to soil along external perimeter of building

After the building is complete, the earth along the external perimeter of the building should be
roded at intervals of 15 cm. and to a depth of 30 cm. The rods should be moved back ward and
forward parallel to the wall to break up the earth and chemical emulsion poured along the wall at
the rate of 7.5 Ltrs. per Sq.m. of vertical surfaces. After the treatment, the earth should be
tamped back in to place. Should the earth outside the building be graded on completion of
building, this treatment should be carried out on the completion of such grading. In the event of
filling being more than 30 cm. the external perimeter treatment shall extend to the full depth of
filling up to the ground level so as to ensure continuity of the chemical barrier.

viii)

Treatment for walls retaining soil above floor level

Retaining walls like the basement walls or outer walls above the floor level retaining soil need to
be protected by providing chemical barrier by treatment of retained soil in the immediate vicinity
of the wall, so as to prevent entry of termites through the voids in masonry, cracks and crevices
etc. above the floor level. The soil retained by the walls shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 Ltrs. per
sq.m. of the vertical surface so as to effect a continuous outer chemical barrier in continuation of
the one formed under (iii).

ix)

Treatment of soil surrounding pipes, wastes and conduits

When pipes, wastes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundation, the soil
surrounding the point of entry must be loosened around each such pipe waste or conduits for a
distance of 15 cm. and up to a depth of 7.5 cm before the treatment is commenced. When they
enter the soil external to the foundations, they shall be similarly treated unless they stand clear of
the walls of the building by about 7.5 cm. for a distance of over 30 cm.

x)

Treatment for expansion joints

Expansion joints at ground floor level are one of the biggest hazards for termite infestation. The
soil beneath these joints should receive special attention when the treatment under (V) is carried
Page 94 of 304

out. This treatment should be supplemented by treating through the expansion joint after the
sub-grade has been laid, at the rate of 2 Litre per linear metre.
xi)

Safety precautions
All chemicals used for anti termite treatment are poisonous and hazardous to health. These
chemicals can have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin, in haled as
vapours or spray mists or swallowed. Person using or handling these chemicals should be
warned of these dangers and advised that absorption through the skin is the most likely source of
accidental poisoning. They should be cautioned to observe carefully the safety precautions given
below:
These chemicals are usually brought to site in the form of emulsifiable concentrates. The
containers should be clearly labelled and should be stored carefully so that children and pet
cannot get at them. They should be kept securely closed.
Particular care should be taken to prevent skin contact with concentrates. Prolonged exposure to
dilute emulsions should also be avoided. Workers should wear clean clothing and should wash
thoroughly with soap and water, especially before eating and smoking. In the event of severe
contamination, clothing should be removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water. If
chemicals splash in to the eyes they shall be flushed with plenty of soap and water and immediate
medical attention should be sought.
The concentrates are oil solutions and present a fire hazard owing to the use of petroleum
solvents. Flames should not be allowed during mixing.
Care should be taken in the application of chemicals to see that they are not allowed to
contaminate wells or springs, which serve as sources of drinking water.

xii)

Spraying equipment
A pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to facilitate proper penetration of
chemicals in to the earth.

Page 95 of 304

3.0

CONCRETE WORKS (PLAIN AND RCC)

3.1

All concrete included in the works shall comply with the General requirements of this section of
the specification except where those requirements are modified by the provisions of later Clauses
relating to specialized uses for concrete in which case the requirements of those Clauses shall
take precedence.

3.2

Quality Assurance Plans and Supervision :

A competent person shall be employed full time whose first duty will be to supervise all
stages in the preparation and placing of the concrete. All test on materials, the making and
testing of cubes and the maintenance and calibration of all mixing and measuring plant shall
be carried out under his direct supervision in the presence of the Project Manager.
Contractor shall set up a laboratory with all testing arrangement at site. On award of the
work contractor shall submit their quality assurance plans, complete methodology, list of
testing equipment & sequence of construction for all activities.

3.3

Materials

a)

Cement
Cement shall in general comply the following specifications :i)

Types
The cement used shall be ordinary portland cement conforming to IS 8112 (Latest
revision) of grade 43 for all works except where specifically mentioned in the Drawings,
Bill of Quantities, and/or directed by the Project Manager (use of Grade 53 cement is
strictly prohibited).
All cement shall be fresh when delivered. Cement shall be delivered in sound and
properly secured bags or other packages ready for immediate use and shall be used direct
from the bag. The contractor shall maintain for Project Manager' inspection a record of
receipts and consumption of cement indicating the source, the age and the date of
receipt of cement. Cement containing lumps which cannot be broken by a light touch of
fingers shall not be used in the works. Admixtures shall not be used without written
consent of the Project Manager.

ii)

Sources
Cement shall be obtained from sources, which are approved by the Project Manager.
Makes and sources of cement shall not be varied from those used for trial mixes; should
a change be unavoidable the contractor shall submit his proposals for the prior approval
of the Project Manager and then carry out new trial mixes unless otherwise directed by
the Project Manager. Cement of different kinds shall not be mixed at any stage.

iii)

Manufacturers' Test Certificates for Cement

The Contractor shall request the cement manufacturer to forward to his site office the
Certificate of conformity in accordance with IS. 269 (Latest Revision), and he shall cause
a copy to be supplied to the Project Manager within 48 hours of the arrival of the
certificate, which shall not be later than 14 days from the day of delivery of the relevant
consignment. The test certificate shall be related to the date of delivery at site of
consignment. The frequency of deliveries shall be such as to ensure that no cement is
more than 3 months old when used in the works.

iv)

Samples of Cement
Samples of cement to be used in the works shall be deposited with the Project Manager
for his approval together with a certificate stating the name and address of the
Manufacturer, the name and address of the supplier from whom it was purchased. The
Project Manager may from time to time take samples of the cement being used in the
works for testing.

v)

Storage of Cement
Page 96 of 304

The contractor shall provide a proper separate weatherproof store building with raised
floor for cement storage on the site and shall at all times protect the cement from damp
or any other deleterious influences. Each consignment of cement shall be kept
separately and the contractor shall be careful to ensure the consignments are used in the
order in which they are received.
Incase cement gets affected from damp or any other deleterious influence, such cement
shall not be used for construction work.
b)

Aggregates
i)
Materials used as aggregates shall be obtained from a source known to produce
aggregates satisfactory for concrete and shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable,
of limited porosity and free from adherings, coating, clay lumps, coal residues and
organic or other impurities that may cause corrosion of reinforcement or may impair the
strength or durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of IS. 383 or IS. 515 and the results of such tests shall be as hereinafter
specified, the percentages being by weight unless the context indicates otherwise.
ii)

Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or sand derived by crushing material like gravel or
stone and shall be free from coagulated lumps. Sand derived from stone unsuitable for
coarse aggregates shall not be used as fine aggregates. The caustic soda test for organic
impurities shall show a colour not deeper than that of the Standard solution. The
amount of fine particles as ascertained by the Laboratory Sedimentation test shall not
exceed 10% for crushed stones. The settling test for natural sand or crushed stone shall
be made, and after being allowed to set in for three hours the thickness of the layer of
silt deposited on the coarser material shall not exceed 8%.
The grading of a natural sand or crushed stone i.e. fine aggregates shall be such that not
more than 5 (five) percent shall exceed 5 mm in size, not more than 10% shall pass IS
sieve No. 150 not less than 45% or more than 85% shall pass IS sieve No. 1.18 mm and
not less than 25% or more than 60% shall pass IS Sieve No. 600 micron.
Only washed sand of quality and grading specified herein above shall be used.
Admixture of sand obtained by crushing natural stone may be permitted by the Project
Manager, provided the mixture satisfies the requirements for the fine aggregates here in
above specified. But not more than one part of the sand obtained by crushing natural
stone may be added to two parts of washed sand.

iii)

Coarse Aggregate
Coarse Aggregates shall be crushed stone. The pieces shall be angular, rounded in shape
and shall have granular or crystalline or smooth (but not glossy) non-powdery surface.
Fragile, flaky and laminated pieces, and mica shall not be present.
The "Aggregates Crushing Value" shall not exceed 45%. The amount of fine particles
occurring in a free state or as a loose adherent shall not exceed 1%. When determined
by the laboratory sedimentation test, after twenty four hours immersion in water. A
previously dried sample of the coarse aggregates shall not have gained in weight more
than 5%.
Size of coarse aggregate shall be maintained within tolerance limit of 2.5%.
The grading of coarse aggregate shall be such that not more than 5% shall be larger than
20 mm and not more 10% shall be smaller than 5 mm and not less than 25% or more
than 55% shall be smaller than 10 mm.
Maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be of 20 mm unless otherwise noted.

Page 97 of 304

The grading of coarse aggregate of nominal size of 40 mm shall be such that not more
than 5% shall be larger than 40 mm and not more than 5% shall be smaller than 5 mm
and not less than 10% or more than 35% shall be of 10 mm size.
Aggregate (Fine and Coarse) shall be thoroughly washed with clean water if so directed
by the Project Manager.
Fragile, flaky and laminated pieces, and mica shall not be present. Aggregate should be
free from fine holes and stone should not be weathered.
3.4

Steel Reinforcement
The reinforcement steel shall in general comply the following specifications, these specifications
shall also be binding on the contractor incase reinforcement steel is supplied by the Owner /
Project Manager.
Type
Steel for bar and fabric reinforcement shall conform to mild steel of tested quality conforming to
IS. 432 (Latest), or high yield strength deformed bar conforming to IS. 1786 or 1139 (Latest) as
specified in the drawings. The steel shall be kept clean and free from pitting, loose rust, mill
scale, oil, grease, earth, paint or any material which may impair the bond between the concrete
and the reinforcement or which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or deterioration of the
concrete. Fabric reinforcement (IRC weld mesh or equivalent) shall be delivered to site in flat
sheets only.
Storage of Reinforcement
Before and after bending, reinforcement shall be stored on raised racks in separate lots by size
and type and protected from damage, contamination and the effects of the weather. For the
purposes of identification each lot shall be marked plainly and securely by approved methods.
Fabrication
Fabrication shall be accurately done to the dimensions, spacing and minimum cover as per
structural drawings. Spacers shall be of cement mortar (1:2) cubes however shall not be leaner
than the approved design mix. Steel chairs, spacer bars shall be used in order to ensure accurate
positioning of reinforcement. All joints in steel reinforcement shall be overlapped. The length
of over lap for tension and compression joints in mild steel reinforcement above 16 mm diameter
may be welded if permitted by the Project Manager in writing.
Welded Laps
Wherever specified, welded laps shall be provided and paid for separately unless specifically
included in the item of work. No payment shall be made to the contractor for welding as per
Project Managers requirements, if the same is necessitated due to the reasons attributable to the
Contractor. The welding of bars shall be carried out as per IS: 2751-1979, IS:9417-1979. Before
doing welding of bars at site, the contractor shall make minimum 3 joints and get them tested in
an approved laboratory at his own cost. The following precautions shall be taken:
a)
b)
c)

3.5

If the cold twisted deformed bar has an untwisted end at lapping point, then this portion
shall be cut off prior to welding.
Bars shall be free from rust at joints to be welded.
Bars shall be aligned and kept in proper axis in order to minimize crookedness in bar
after welding.

Water
Type
Water for mixing concrete shall be clean and free from harmful material and comply with the
requirements of Clause 5.4 of IS:456:latest.
Water shall be only from sources / bore wells approved by the Project Manager, and shall be
used in a manner as directed by the Project Manager.
Page 98 of 304

Testing of Water
Prior to the commencement of the works, or whenever there is a change in the source of supply
or when directed by the Project Manager, the contractor shall arrange for samples of water, for
mixing concrete, to be submitted to an independent Government authorised testing laboratory,
acceptable to the Project Manager for tests to determine that the water complies with this
specification and is satisfaction in all other respects for the manufacture of high quality concrete.
3.6

Grades and Strength Requirements of Concrete

General
Concrete shall consist of the material described under previous sections, using separate coarse
and fine aggregate in an appropriate combination determined in the course of the preparation of
mix design described hereinafter. The overall grading shall be such as to produce a concrete of
the specified quality, which will work readily in to position without segregation and without the
use of excessive water. In the case of mass concrete or blinding concrete specified by nominal
mix the use of "all-in" (20 mm and down) aggregate may be approved by the Project Manager.
No addition of water shall be made at site. It shall be a homogeneous mix before use at site.
Slump
Only specified quantity of water shall be added to the cement and aggregate during mixing to
produce concrete having a sufficient workability to enable it to be well consolidated, to be
worked in to the corners of the shuttering and around the reinforcement to give the specified
surface finish, and to have the specified strength. Water cement ratio shall be maintained as per
IS. 456-(latest) unless specified otherwise. When a suitable amount of water has been
determined, the resulting consistency shall be maintained through out the corresponding parts of
the work and tests shall be conducted to ensure the maintenance of this consistency according to
the standard method of test for consistencies of concrete (slump test) as below:
Description of work
Beams and slabs
Columns & Walls
Slabs & Staircase
Footings

Maximum slump in mm.

25 to 75 mm
50 to 100 mm
upto 25 mm
upto 25 mm

Incase of pumpable concrete the slump & workability required for pumping the concrete shall be
achieved by the contractor at his own cost. Nothing extra shall be paid for use of extra cement
and / or plasticisers.
Concrete Grades
Grade of concrete used in the works shall be shown on the drawings or as directed by the Project
Manager. Minimum cement contents shall be as per IS 456- (latest) or specified otherwise. The
grade of concrete to be adopted in the construction shall be as follows:a)

For mud mat, lean concrete , mass filling the concrete mix will be nominal mix concrete
of 1:5:10 , 1:4:8 , 1: 3:6 ( Cement : Coarse sand : 20mm Down aggregates ) grade as
specified in the construction drawings These mixes may be prepared using mechanical
mixer .

b)

For all RC.C work concrete used will be controlled concrete with grade of concrete
M15 or more as per construction drawings. The cement contents in the mix design shall
not be lesser than as indicated in the table below. The water cement ratio and other
parameters shall be strictly adhered to as per the table below:

Grade

Min. cement

Water Cement

Kg/Cum.(*)

ratio

Compressive Strength
Kg/Sq.cm
7 days
28 days
Field test

Page 99 of 304

M - 10
M - 15
M - 20
M - 25
M - 30
M - 35

170
240
320
350
400
450

0.6
0.6
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.45

70
105
140
175
210
245

100
150
200
250
300
350

*
Note:- the actual requirements of cement contents are likely to be more than the minimum
indicated. The limit has been fixed strictly from the concretes durability point of view.
Approved admixtures may be used strictly as per IS 456-(latest) and nothing extra will be paid for
the use of the same. Admixture used should not impair durability of concrete nor combine with
constituents to form harmful compounds nor increase the risk of corrosion of reinforcement.
Dosages of retarders , plasticisers and supertplasticisers if used shall not exceed 0.5 , 1.0 and 2.0
percent respectively by weight of cementitious materials.
MIX DESIGN
As the guarantor of quality of concrete used in the construction, contractor shall
carryout mix design and the mix so designed shall be approved by the Project Manager,
however approval by Project Manager shall not relive the contractor from his responsibility
towards quality & sufficiency of design mixes. The mix shall be designed to produce the
grade of concrete having workability and a characteristic strength as indicated in the
drawings. The target mean strength of concrete mix should be equal to the characteristic
strength plus 1.65 times the standard deviation as indicted below.

GRADE OF CONCRETE

STANDARD DEVIATION (N/Sq mm)

M10, M15

3.5

M20, M25

4.0

M30, M35

5.0

Mix design shall be carried out as per SP-23 (Hand book concrete mixes) Proportion / Type of
aggregates shall be made by trial in such a way so as to obtain dense possible concrete with
required workability. All ingredients of concrete should be used by mass only. Contractor shall
carry out the mix design and get it tested from the laboratory / Institution as per the instructions
of Project Manager. Test report shall indicate
1.

Workability Test of fresh concrete

2.

Analysis of fresh concrete

3.

Setting time of concrete

<

4.

Strength Test

<

5.

Cement Type

6.

Grades of aggregate and their specific gravity.

7.

28 days strength results.

8.

Quantity of water.

Initial setting time

Final setting time
7 days

8 days

Page 100 of 304

9.

Quantity and make /grade of chemical admixture, if required.

No substitutions in materials used on the work or alterations in the established proportions be made
without additional test to show that the quality and strength of concrete are satisfactory. Design
mix shall not be converted into volume mix under any circumstances.
3.7

Batching and Mixing

Only controlled design mix will be used for concrete with strength more or equal to M15 .
Volume batching may be allowed ( Using mechanical Mixers ) for mixes up to M10 , for these
leaner mixes mass volume relationship shall be checked frequently to ensure specified grading is
maintained.
For the production of controlled concrete contractor shall set up, on site, automatic microchip
controlled batching plant of capacity 10Cum/Hr or more, complete with silos / stock piles for
cement and aggregates and D.G sets to be provided to have uninterrupted supply of concrete. The
batching plant shall be tested and calibrated as per manufacturers manual and to the satisfaction of
Project Manager, before starting the production of concrete, to provide uniform & consistent
cement concrete mix conforming to approved mix design Batching / Mixing plant shall conform
to the requirements of IS 4925 & 4926. Batching plant shall have facilities for presetting the
quantities to be weighed with automatic cut off when the same is achieved and also shall be
equipped with sensors to control water ratio as per moisture contents of aggregates. Printed
reports of all the components of all the batches of concrete as separated by on line computer of
batching plant, shall be presented to Project Manager for his approval and records. Cube samples
from each batch shall be taken as per the requirement of IS 456-(latest), in the presence of Project
Manager. Cubes shall be tested to record 7days & 28Days cube strength. Contractor shall be
responsible for the quality of concrete which will be indicated as per the cube strength results at
the end of 7days & 28days. However 28days strength results will be treated as final.
Contractor shall make his own trial mixes for different grade and submit the report of the final
design mix to be adopted for different grades to Project Manager for his approval and records (
Contractor shall take in cognisance while designing concrete mixes, time required for transporting
and placing the cement concrete mix at final position ). Contractor shall specify along its bid the
type and make of the proposed batching plant with brief specifications.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment should be within plus or minus 2% of the quantity of
cement being measured and within plus or minus 3% of the quantity of aggregate , water ,
admixture being measured. All measuring equipment should be maintained in a clean, serviceable
condition.
Mixing with mechanical mixer ( for M15 or richer ) will only be permitted in exceptional
circumstances and then with the specific arrangement of the Project Manager. No water shall be
added to mixed concrete other than the quantity of water allowed for in the mix design and
incorporated in batching..
Concrete or mortar which has commenced to set shall not be remixed with additional water and
in no circumstances shall such concrete or mortar be used in the work.

3.8

Concrete Admixtures & Plastisizers

Admixtures are materials added to the concrete before or during mixing with a view to modify
one or more properties of concrete in plastic or hardened state. Concrete admixtures are
proprietary items of manufacturers and shall be obtained from established manufacturers having
proven track record, with Project Managers approval.

3.9

Transporting Concrete
From batching plant concrete to the location of proposed construction shall be transported
through transit mixers or concrete pumps only . Contractor shall specify the make & type and
number of transit mixers to be deployed along with concrete pumps with their make , capacity .
Page 101 of 304

The path to be used by transit mixers will be strictly as per the instructions of Project Manager.
From the transit mixers concrete shall be transported to the final floor level / position through
pumping or builders hoist only .Concrete and mortar shall be transported speedily and deposited
in its place in the works without contamination, loss of ingredients or segregation.. Buckets of
builders hoist shall be large enough to contain an integral number of batches .No concrete shall
be placed in the works until the contractors' proposed method of transporting concrete have
been approved. When concrete is conveyed in chutes from transit mixers , the equipment shall
be of such size and design as to ensue a continuous flow in the chute. The chute shall be of
metal or metal lined, and if two or more lengths are used they all shall have approximately the
same slope. If the distance of the discharge end of the chute above the surface of the concrete is
more than 1 metre, a spout or "elephant trunk" shall be used and the lower end positioned as
near to the surface of deposit as practicable. The chute or "elephant trunk" shall be thoroughly
cleaned before and after each run. The debris and any water shall be discharged outside the
forms.
3.10

Concrete placement
General
Concrete, when deposited, shall have a temperature of not less than 5oC (41oF) and not more
than 32oC (90oF).
The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on the drawings, in this
specification and/or as directed by the Project Manager.
Contractor shall give adequate notice to the Project Manager of his intention to concrete any
section of the works.
Except where otherwise directed, concrete shall not be placed unless the representative of the
Project Manager is present and has previously examined and approved the positioning, fixing and
condition of the reinforcement or any other items to be embedded and the cleanliness,
positioning and suitability of the concreting surface.
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall be placed in
such a manner as to avoid segregation of the concrete and displacement of the reinforcement,
other embedded items, or formwork. It shall be brought up in horizontal layers not exceeding
450 mm in compacted thickness unless otherwise authorised or directed by Project Manager.
Concrete shall not be placed simultaneously on each side of large horizontal specified or
approved construction joints.
Shutters for walls or thin sections of considerable height shall be provided with openings or
other devices that will facilitate the cleaning of the accumulation of hardened concrete on the
shutters or on the metal reinforcement above the level of the concrete and the removal of
concrete in the case of segregations.
Placing concrete in cold weather
No concrete shall be mixed or placed while the ambient temperature is above 40 degree C. on a
rising thermometer or below 5 degree C. on a falling thermometer. The contractor shall supply
an accurate maximum and minimum thermometer and hang it in an approved position on the
works. Aggregates that have been exposed to frost shall not be used until completely thawed.
Concrete shall be maintained by approved means at a temperature of not less than 4 degree C.
during placing, and for a period of three days thereafter. All concrete placed during cold weather
or when a frost is predicated or is likely to occur or occurs contrary to expectation, shall be
protected from freezing by approved means.
Placing of concrete in wet weather
Concrete shall not be mixed and or placed in rainy weather or when there is likelihood of
impending heavy showers. If it becomes necessary to place concrete during rainy weather, the
contractor shall provide adequate protection by means of tarpaulin or similar other water proof
material to immediately cover fresh concrete to prevent rain falling over it. This protection shall
be left on the concrete for a period of 24 hours after placing of concrete.
Page 102 of 304

3.11

Concrete placement under water

Concrete placed under water shall be deposited through a tremmie pipe the diameter of which
shall be atleast 8 times the size of the largest aggregate used in the concrete mix.
The construction of and the method of handling the tremmie pipes shall be approved by the
Project Manager. The pipes shall be waterproof and sufficiently strong to withstand severe
handling conditions and any joints must be sealed with adequate gaskets.
At the commencement of tremmie work the bottom of the pipe shall be sealed before being
lowered in to position. The seal shall only be broken by the concrete being placed. The concrete
placed in contact with a horizontal construction joint shall have a lower proportion of coarse
aggregate and a higher proportion of cement than the remainder of the concrete. The proportion
shall be agreed with the Project Manager's Representative.
All underwater concrete shall be placed in still water within a cofferdam or formwork which shall
extend above water level.
The proportions of the mixes shall be agreed in accordance with the strength and workability
required by the specification. To allow for losses an addition of 10% of cement shall be added to
mixes of concrete scheduled to be placed under water.

3.12

Maintenance of Plant and Equipment

The contractor shall keep Bathing Plant , weight batching machines, mixing machines,
compressors, vibrators and other plant and equipment for concrete and mortar work clean, well
maintained and adjusted and where appropriate, shall check the accuracy of the measuring
devices at regular intervals, all to the approval of the Project Manager's Representative. Mixer
blades shall be replaced when worn down by 20 mm.

3.13

Night Work
Concrete shall not be mixed, placed, compacted or finished during the hours of darkness, except
where necessary to complete a pour. However, concreting in darkness for these exceptions shall
be only after obtaining the express permission in writing from the Architects/Project Manager's
representative and in his presence only.

3.14

Compacting Concrete
The concrete shall be fully compacted through out the full extent of the layer. It shall be
thoroughly worked against the moulds, and around any reinforcement and other embedded items
without displacing them, and in to corners of the moulds. Successive layers of the same lift shall
be thoroughly worked together adjacent to the common face. The date of laying concrete shall
be marked for curing and removal of form work.
Immersion vibrators shall be of approved type and shall have frequency of not less than 10000
oscillations per minute. They shall penetrate the full depth of the concrete to be vibrated and be
immersed at sufficiency close spacing so that the whole volume of the concrete is satisfactorily
and uniformly compacted.
Where the underlying layer is of fresh concrete, immersion vibrators shall also penetrate that
layer to ensure homogeneity. Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent
formation of voids. Vibrators shall not be used to work the concrete along the moulds or in
such a way as to damage shuttering or other parts of the structure or to displace the
reinforcement or other embedded items. Immersion vibrators shall only be operated by those
who have received proper instruction and training in their use.
External vibrators shall be of approved type and shall have a frequency of not less than 3000
oscillations per minute. They shall be securely and rigidly clamped to the shuttering. External
vibrators shall only be used on shuttering which is strong enough to withstand the vibration
without displacement, distortion or other damage.

Page 103 of 304

The contractor shall ensure that sufficient standby vibrators and ancillary equipment are available
during concreting operations.
3.15

Quality Control
i)
In order to ensure that the quality of materials and the mix proportions are suitable for
the particular grade of concrete required are so maintained, sampling and testing shall be
carried out regularly during the course or the works.
iii)

As frequently as the Project Manager's representative may require and in any case at least
once a day while concreting is in progress, the contractor shall sample and carry out a
determination of the moisture content and a mechanical analysis of the fine aggregate
and each nominal size of coarse aggregate shall lie within the respective limits specified.
The surface moisture test of aggregates should be carried out a number of times during
the day and necessary adjustments in the water content of the concrete mix should be
made.

iii)

Workability testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS:456. The results shall lie
within the range upon which the accepted mix design is based. Testing shall be carried
out at such a frequency that the required workability is consistently achieved.

iv)

Samples of concrete shall be taken at random in accordance with IS: 516 at the time and
place of deposition of the concrete.

v)

Notwithstanding the foregoing, additional samples shall be taken by the contractor when
directed by the Project Manager. The test cube procedure shall be in accordance with IS:
516 throughout.

vi)

Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be assumed if :

a)

Each of the six cubes in a group has a test strength not less than the
characteristic strength or,

b)

Not more than one cube has a test strength less than the specified characteristic
strength but not less than 85% of the specified characteristic strength and the
average strength of the group of four test results is not less than the specified
characteristic strength plus the standard deviation of the group.

3.16

Seven day cube tests

Acceptance of concrete is based on the 28th day results. However, the contractor shall establish
a relation ship between 7 days and 28 days strengths by carrying out 7 days tests at the time of
performing the laboratory testing and from subsequent quality control testing. This relation ship
shall be used in interpreting any further test results to predict the probable value of the
corresponding 28 days cube strengths. The contractor shall without delay advise the Project
Manager of any sample that appears likely to fail to meet the specification and the contractor
shall take any necessary action to minimize the effect of such failure.

3.17

Acceptance Criteria
The general Acceptance Criteria of any and all of the concrete work shall be as per the relevant
Clauses of IS. 456.
If any of the works tests are not up to the standard, the Project Manager shall have the power to
stop the work until the reason is investigated and steps taken to prevent further low results. The
contractor shall not be entitled to any claims on account of such delays. Any concrete carried out
from the batch that is afterwards found to be faulty, will be liable for rejection and if so directed,
the contractor shall at his own expenses dismantle and replace the defective work and any work
built thereon or shall take such other measures as may be deemed necessary by the Project
Manager. At the discretion of the Project Manager, the contractor may be allowed to prove by
means of a load test to be carried out at his own expense, that the concrete is capable of safely
withstanding the loads as specified in the test.
Page 104 of 304

3.18

3.19

Construction joints
Construction joints shall be provided in the position described on the drawings or elsewhere and
where not so described on the drawings or else shall be in accordance with the following: a)

A joint shall be formed horizontally at the top of a foundation and 75 mm below the
lowest soffit of the beams meeting at the head of a column.

b)

A joint shall be formed in the rib of a large tee beam and all beams 25 mm below the
soffit of the slab.

c)

Concrete in a haunch or a splay on beam or a brace, and in the head of a column where
one or more beams meet, shall be placed without a joint at the same time as that in the
beam or beams or brace.

d)

Concrete in the splay at the junction of a wall and slab shall be placed throughout
without a joint, but if the provisions of a joint is unavoidable, the joint shall be vertical
and the middle of a span.

e)

A joint in a slab shall be vertical and parallel to the principal reinforcement, where it is
unavoidable, at the right angles to the principal reinforcement, the joint shall be vertical
and at the middle of the span.

f)

Expansion joints, hinges or other permanent structural joints shall be provided in the
positions and of the form described in the drawings or elsewhere. Before placing new
concrete against concrete that has already hardened the face of old concrete shall be
cleaned and roughened and scrubbed and loose aggregate removed from the form.
Immediately before placing the new concrete the face shall be thoroughly wetted and a
coating of neat cement grout applied thereto. The new concrete shall be well rammed
against the prepared face before the grout sets.

Form Work and scaffolding / Staging :Form work to the fresh concrete shall be sufficiently rigid and shall be such as to prevent
loss of slurry from the concrete and details and design of the form work shall conform
to IS 14687. The tolerances on the shape , lines and dimensions shall be as per CL. 11
of IS 456 2000.
All staging and scaffolding work shall comprise of MS .Pipes / Structural steel
sections with necessary coupling arrangement. ( NO WOODEN BALLIES /
PROPS WILL BE PERMITTED ) . Adequate size foundation blocks / base plates
shall be provide below staging members to disperse the loads as per the founding strata.
Form work construction
i)
The contractor should submit detailed drawing of the centering & shuttering and get the
same approved from the Project Manager before laying concrete also he should get the
centering shuttering approved in writing before start of concreting. The concreting
should be done in the scientific and methodical manner so as to give a uniform finish
in line and level, so that minimum rendering or plastering is done. The work found
defective, should be dismantled & redone and site cleared.
ii)

Form work shall be so constructed that concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly
compacted. Form work shall be firmly supported and adequately strutted, braced or tied
to maintain position and size . Forms shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to with
stand the weight of wet concrete and necessary pressure due to ramming and vibration
of concrete and movement of men material and other loads without excessive deflection
from prescribed limits. It shall be capable of adjustment to the lines , levels and
dimensions of the finished concrete.

Page 105 of 304

iii)

All form work shall be constructed to be rigid during the casting of concrete and
constructed so that the surfaces adjacent to the concrete are with plus minus 6 mm or
the required surfaces when supporting the concrete and sufficiently watertight to prevent
loss of liquid from the concrete, and it shall be capable of being removed without shock
or vibration to the concrete. Forms shall be cleaned with compressed air immediately
before placing concrete to remove all rubbish. The inside faces of the form work shall
be treated with a mould oil of type to be approved by the Project Manager and every
care shall be taken to prevent mould oil from getting on to the reinforcement.

iv)

Beams boxes shall be erected with an upward camber of 6 mm for each 3 M. of span.

v)

Around the periphery of the building beyond building line , staging shall be erected by
the contractor free of cost , using structural steel members duly braced to sustain all
loads , with all safety measures like netting , temporary railings / parapets , platforms
etc. to provide free access to external faade of the building at each floor level for
construction and inspection. . Staging shall grow along with the building .

Removal of Form work (Striking Time)

Unless certainly specified in the drawing, or directed by the Project Manager, the following shall
be minimum intervals of time, which should be allowed between the placing of the concrete and
the striking of the mould where ordinary portland cement is used and ambient temperature does
not fall below 15 degree Celsius.
a)
b)

Walls, column & vertical faces

of all structural members
Slab
i)
Spanning upto 4.50 m
ii)
Spanning over 4.50 M

16 to 24 hours as may be decided

by the Project Manager.
7
14

days
days

Note : Soffit forms of the slab may be removed after 3 days , props to be fixed immediately after
removal of shuttering .
c)
Beams and arches
i)
Spanning upto 6 M
14
days
ii)
Spanning 6 M to 9 M
21
days
iii)
Spanning over 9 M
28
days
Note:

1.

For other types of cement, the stripping time recommended for ordinary portland
cement may be suitably modified. Forms shall not be released un till the concrete has
achieved a strength of at least twice the stress to which concrete may be subjected to
after removal of the form.

2.

The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such as to be able to
safely carry the full dead load of the slabs, beam or arch as the case may be together with
any live load likely to occur during curing or further construction.

However, the Contractor shall delay the removal of shuttering as long as necessary in order to
avoid damaging the work. Where shuttering to soffit is removed prior to the props this is only
permissible if the design of the shuttering allows such a sequence of operations without the props
being in any way disturbed. If the shuttering and props are not independent, both must be left in
place until propping is no longer required.
Where shuttering to sides is removed prior to the shuttering soffit, the side shuttering shall be
removed without disturbing the shuttering to the soffit.
No concrete structure shall be loaded until the concrete is at least 21 days old and only then with
the approval of the Project Manager and subject to such conditions as may be imposed.

Page 106 of 304

The contractor may be required to produce evidence that the concrete has attained a strength
sufficient to support the live and dead loads to which that part of the structure may be subjected.
This evidence shall consist of reports of compression tests made on job cured test cubes. The
cost of such tests shall be borne by the contractor. The foregoing provisions of this clause shall
not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to ensure that the stability and strength of any
structure or part of a structure is not impaired by the release of shuttering.
Proposals for form work
Not less than 8 days before the contractor proposes to construct any form work his detailed
proposals thereof shall be delivered to the Project Manager. Proposals shall comprise all relevant
information including calculations, detailed drawings, rates of placing of concrete, sequence of
placing of concrete and details of any external vibrators which are proposed to be used.
No form work shall be constructed until the Contractors' proposals have been received and
approved by the Project Manager.
Type of form work
Wrought frame work wherever used should be of film faced marine ply for a good quality
concrete work. The frame work for the ply should not be of timber / wood and shall be of MS
frame work only.
Wrought form work, to all surfaces for which a smooth fair faced finish is required, shall be
constructed of purpose-made metal, water proof marine ply wood panel, hardboard lined form
work or of planed timber with edges shot so that tight joints can be formed which will prevent
loss of liquid from the concrete. The use of a particular material for wrought form work shall be
consistently maintained throughout the structure. The surfaces of the form work in contact with
the concrete shall be smooth and free from all blemishes. The number of times wrought form
work may be used shall be subject to the surfaces, joints and edges being clean and undamaged.
Surfaces of concrete
The contractor shall ensure that the finished face of concrete offers a suitable keyed surface for
the application of the finishing media, e.g. plaster, sand and cement screed, etc. The contractor
shall also ensure that where thin films of finished, e.g. skim coats "Snowcem", paint, etc. are to
be applied that the previous provisions regarding supporting of form work are complied with, so
that the concrete faces to be treated are left smooth, unblemished and true to line both vertically
and horizontally and require no making good before applying the finish.
Should the contractor fail however, to comply with the provision of this Clause, he shall submit
details of his proposed method of redoing the situation to the Project Manager and must obtain
written consent from the Project Manager to the proposals before continuing with any further
work on the affected surfaces.
Tolerances in concrete surfaces
The permissible tolerance in the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed the following
limits :
Type of irregularity
Departure of member planes from position and level.

12 mm

Variation in cross-sections

6 mm

Sharp changes in plane

2 mm

Departure from 3 M. template of any part of planes

3 mm

Page 107 of 304

3.20

Curing
Canvass, Hessian or other approved screens shall be erected at all points where concrete is being
placed to protect the concrete from the direct sun or from drying winds and such screens shall be
kept in position until the surface of the concrete has been protected as specified in the following
Clauses. The contractor shall be responsible for removing such screens and preparing surface of
concrete .
As soon as possible after it has been placed and concrete shall be covered with Hessian or other
approved material to protect it from the sun and all concrete surfaces shall be kept visibly wet
continuously for 14 days after placement, the Hessian being kept in position throughout this
period. Surfaces cast against forms shall also be kept moist and covered with Hessian for these
periods if the form work is removed before the periods have elapsed.
The top surface of slab shall be kept flooded with water at all times till the curing period of 14
days is over. Columns, wall and beam sides and other surface shall be completely covered by
gunny bags and kept thoroughly wet continuously for the period specified for curing. The ceiling
of slabs shall be frequently sprayed with water until the end of curing period.
The contractor shall ensure that all times there is an adequate supply of fresh water available for
curing the concrete.

3.21

Examinations and Repairs

The contractor shall not proceed with the surface finish or making good of concrete surfaces
until he has received the Project Manager's written permission to do so and he shall not apply
cement slurry or mortar or any other coating to the concrete surfaces as struck from the
shuttering or do anything else which would hinder the proper inspection of the concrete by the
Project Manager.
Concrete which is defective, has honeycombs, or which contains defective parts shall be cut out
completely unless the Project Manager agrees that a repair may be satisfactorily effected. This
agreement shall not preclude subsequent condemnation of the repaired work.
The method of repairing defective concrete which the contractor proposes to adopt shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for his prior written agreement in each particular case.
No repairs or remedial work shall be carried out without prior inspection and instructions of the
Project Manager. (No extra shall be paid to the contractor for the repair works).

3.22

Fair face finish to concrete surfaces

Concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth fair faced where indicated as such on the
drawings. These areas shall be entirely free from honey combing, stains, fins, lipping, nail or
screw marks, raised grain marks, air holes or any other imperfections. They shall also be of
even texture throughout. Very slight variations between member and member may be
acceptable but any such variations within a single member cannot be tolerated. The concrete
faces shall not be marked with mould oil.

The form work to these areas shall be wrought form work as specified herein.
Following inspection by the Project Manager the whole surface shall be rubbed down by hand.
Any surfaces with major imperfections, i.e. greater than can be easily, completely and
permanently obliterated by rubbing down shall be reported immediately to the Project Manager.
Remedial work is not normally possible to the above fair faced finish surfaces and the Contractor
will be required to demolish and recast defective works.
3.23

Reinforcement Fabrication
Bending Schedules

Page 108 of 304

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager, for the Project Manager's approval, bending
schedule for all the works, not less than Ten days before the contractor intends to bend the
reinforcing steel.
The Approval of the Project Manager shall in no way absolve the contractor of his
responsibilities under the Contract.
Programme of reinforcement details required
The Contractor shall provide a programme which gives the Project Manager at least 28 days prior
notification of any reinforcement details required. The contractor shall justify the practicability
of his programme to the Project Manager should it seem unreasonable before the programme be
regarded as valid notification. If progress on site falls behind the contractors' programme, the
issue of reinforcement details may be delayed by a period corresponding to the delay in
construction.
Bending and placing reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the shapes and dimensions shown on the finally agreed
bending schedules in accordance with the requirements of IS: 2502 and to the tolerances set out
therein.
Bending shall be carried out with an appliance which provides a continuous and uniform
application of the bending deformation at every section of the bend. There shall be provision for
the free movement of the surface of the bar during bending and the bends shall follow the
contour of the former without peaking.
High Yield reinforcement must be bent without the application of artificial heating.
Mild steel reinforcement may be sent either hot or cold but shall not be heated to a temperature
greater than 850 C., and if heated not cooled by quenching.
Mild steel reinforcement temporary left projecting from the concrete at construction or other
joints shall not be bent out of position unless shown on the drawings or agreed by the Project
Manager. Where such bending and subsequent rebinding takes place the radius of the bend shall
not be less than 4 bar diameters.
Reinforcement shall be fixed without forcing in the position shown on the drawings within a
tolerance of 5 mm or 5% of the minimum dimension of cross section, whichever be the greater
and maintained so that it is not displaced during concreting or other operations.
Horizontal bars shall be supported sufficiently to prevent displacement. This may be plastic
spacers, chairs bent from steel bar, or by concrete blocks. The method and sufficiency of the
support shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager.
Where concrete blocks are used, they shall be precast from concrete (not mortar) of the same
class as the concrete in which they are to be embedded, except that the largest size of aggregate
shall be 10 mm. Each block shall be secured to the reinforcement with wire or a clip embedded
in the centre of the block so that, it shall not be in contact with the shuttering or subsequently
cause rust marks on the concrete. Intersections of reinforcement shall be bound together with
16 gauge annealed soft iron binding wire.
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, no intersections of reinforcement may be fixed by
welding without the permission of the Project Manager. High yield and cold worked steel shall,
in no circumstances, be welded together.
Should any difficulty arise during the placing of steel in obtaining the appropriate cover, the
contractor shall immediately draw the attention of the Project Manager to the difficulty and shall
carryout such corrective measures as the Project Manager may suggest.
Protection of reinforcement and concrete
Page 109 of 304

The Contractor shall ensure that movement of men and material subsequent to steel fixing is
organized so that reinforcement is not thereby displaced.
Reinforcement left projecting from any concrete shall be protected so that there is no risk of
corrosion staining to any exposed concrete surface or to any other part of the works. For this
purpose a stiff grout wash will normally be acceptable to the Project Manager, this wash shall be
wire-brushed vigorously before further concrete is placed to remove any ill- bonded material.
3.24

Precast concrete units

Precast concrete materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with specifications unless
indicated otherwise. Where different tolerances are indicated in this specification or on the
drawings from these in the more severe tolerances shall apply. The units shall all be cast in
properly made strong moulds to form the shapes required. For work described as "finished fair"
the mould shall be lined with sheet steel or other approved material and care should be taken to
ensure no damage is caused to edges or surfaces when units are removed from the moulds.
The concrete shall be of the mixes given on the drawings and shall be thoroughly vibrated in the
moulds.
All precast work shall be cast under cover and shall so remain for seven days and shall be kept
damp in order that the units are properly matured. No units shall be lifted until 18 days have
elapsed since casting and no unit shall be erected until it has been approved by the Project
Manager as free from defects.
No cracked units will be accepted for incorporation in the works.
All reinforced structural precast units shall have the tops clearly marked.
Un-reinforced precast units, such as sills and copings, shall be lightly reinforced as necessary to
facilitate handling.

Page 110 of 304

4.0

MASONRY WORKS

4.1

STONE MASONRY

4.1.1

MATERIALS FOR STONE MASONRY WORK

4.1.1.1 Stone : The stone shall be of the type specified such as Delhi Quartzite, Pink quartzite, granite,
trap, limestone, sand stone, etc. and shall be obtained from the quarries, approved by the Project
Manager. Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering decay and defects like
cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes, injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other
similar defects that may adversely affect its strength and appearance. As far as possible stones
shall be of uniform colour, quality or texture. Generally stone shall not contain crypts crystalline
silica or chart, mica and other deleterious materials like iron-oxide organic impurities etc.
Stones with round surface shall not be used.
The compressive strength of common types of stones shall be as per Table 1 and the percentage
of water absorption shall generally not exceed 5% for stones other than specified in Table. For
laterite this percentage is 12%.
Type of Stone

Max. Water absorption

% age by weight

Minimum. Compressive
strength kg/sqcm.

Granite
Basalt
Lime Stone ( Slab & Tiles)
Sand Stone ( Slab & Tiles)
Marble
Quartzite
Laterite (Block)

0.5
0.5
0.15
2.5
0.40
0.40
12

100
400
200
300
500
800
35

a)

Size of Stones: Normally stones used should be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand.
Unless otherwise indicated, the length of stones for stone masonry shall not exceed three times
the height/ breadth/ base of the stone and shall not be greater than three-fourth the thickness of
wall, or not less than 15cm. The height of stone may be upto 30 cm or as decided by Project
Manager.

b)

Random Rubble Masonry shall be un-coursed or brought to courses as specified. Un-coursed

random rubble masonry shall be constructed with stone of sizes as referred in above para and
shapes picked up random from the stones brought from the approved quarry. Stones having
sharp corners or round surfaces shall, however, not be used.

c)

Random Rubble Masonry brought to the course is similar to uncoursed random rubble masonry
except that the courses are roughly levelled at intervals varying from 30cm to 90cm in height
according to the size of stones used.

d)

Dressing : Each stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides and the bed. Hammer
dressing shall enable the stones to be laid close to neighbouring stones such that the bushing in
the face shall not project more than 10mm on both the exposed faces.

4.1.1.2 Mortar : The mortar used for joining shall be as specified.

4.1.1.3 Laying : All stones shall be wetted before use. Each stone shall be placed close to the stones
already laid so that the thickness of the mortar joints at the face is not more than 20mm. Face
stones shall be arranged suitably to stagger the vertical joints and long vertical joints shall be
avoided. Stones for hearting or interior filling shall be hammered down with wooden mallet into
the position firmly bedded in mortar. Chips or sprawls of stones may be used for filing of
Page 111 of 304

interstices between the adjacent stones in heartening and these shall not exceed 20% of the
quantity of stone masonry. To form a bond between successive courses plum stones projecting
vertically by about 15 to 20 cm shall be firmly embedded in the heartening at the interval of
about one metre in every course. No hollow space shall be left any where in the masonry.
The masonry work in wall shall be carried up true to plumb or to specified batter.
Random rubble masonry shall be brought to the level courses at plinth, window sills, lintel and
roof levels. Levelling shall be done with concrete comprising of one part of the mortar as used
of masonry and two parts of graded stone aggregate of 20mm nominal size.
The masonry in structure shall be carried uniformly. Where the masonry of one part is to be
delayed, the work shall be raked back at an angle not steeper than 45 degree.
4.1.1.4 Bond Stones : Bond or through stones running right through the thickness of walls, shall be
provided in walls upto 60cm thick and in case of walls above 60cm thickness, a set of two or
more bond stones overlapping each other by at-least 15cm shall be provided in a line from face
of the wall to the back.
In case of highly absorbent types of stones ( porous lime stone and sand stone etc.) single piece
bond stone may give rise to dampness. For all thicknesses of such walls, a set of two or more
bond stones overlapping each other by at least 15cm shall be provided. Length of each such
bond stone shall be less than two-third of the thickness of the wall.
Where bond stones of suitable length are not available precast cement concrete block of 1:3:6
mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) of cross section not
less than 225 sqcm and length equal to the thickness of wall shall be used in lieu to bond stones.
(This shall be applicable only in masonry below ground level and where masonry above ground
level is finally required to be plastered).
At least one bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided for every 0.5 sqm of the area of
wall surface. All bond stones shall be marked suitably with paint as directed by the Project
Manager.
4.1.1.5 Quoin and Jamb Stones : The quoin and jamb stones shall be of selected stones neatly dressed
with hammer or chisel to form the required angle. Quoin stones shall not be less than 0.01 cum
in volume. Height of quoins and jamb stones shall not be less than 15cm. Quoins shall be laid
header and stretcher alternatively.
4.1.1.6 Joints : Stones shall be so laid that all joints are fully packed with mortar and chips. Face joints
shall not be more than 20mm thick.
The joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying when plastering or pointing is
not to be done. For the surfaces to be plastered or pointed, the joints shall be raked to a
minimum depth of 20 mm when the mortar is still green.
4.1.1.7 Scaffolding : Single scaffolding having one set of vertical support shall be allowed. The
supports shall be sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces, over which the scaffolding
planks shall be fixed. The inner end of the horizontal scaffolding member may rest in a hole
provided in the masonry. Such holes, however, shall not be allowed in pillars under one metre
in width or near the skew back of arches. The holes left in masonry work for supporting
scaffolding shall be filled and made good with cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6
stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).
4.1.1.8 Curing : Masonry work in cement or composite mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all
faces for a minimum period of seven days. In case of masonry with fat lime mortar curing shall
commence tow days after laying of masonry and shall continue for at least seven days thereafter.
Page 112 of 304

4.1.1.9 Protection : Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. the work shall also be
suitably protected from damage , mortar dropping and rain during construction.
4.1.1.10 Measurement
a)

The length, height and thickness shall be measured correct to a cm. The thickness of wall shall be
measured as per drawing. Only specified dimensions shall be allowed; anything extra shall be
ignored. The quantity shall be calculated in cubic metre nearest to two places of decimal.

b)

The work under the following categories shall be measured separately.

i)

From foundation to plinth level:

ii) From plinth level to superstructure level.

iii) Stone masonry in parapet shall be measured together with the corresponding item in the wall of
the storey next below.
c)

No deduction shall be made nor extra payment made for the following:

i)

Ends of dissimilar materials (that is joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders, rafters purlins, trusses,
corbels, steps etc. ) upto 0.1 sqm in section.

ii)

Openings each upto 0.1 sqm in area. In calculating the area of openings, any separate lintels or
sills shall be included alongwith the size of opening but the end portions of the lintels shall be
excluded and the extra width or rebated reveals, if any, shall also be excluded.

iii)

Wall plates and bed plates, and bearing of chajjas and the like, where the thickness does not
exceed 10cm and the bearing does not extend over the full thickness of the wall.

iv)

Drain holes and recesses for cement concrete blocks to embed hold fasts for doors, windows etc.

v)

Building in masonry, iron fixture, pipes upto 300mm dia, hold fasts of doors and windows etc.

vi)

Forming chases in masonry each upto section of 350 sq cm.

Masonry (excluding fixing brick work) in chimney breasts with smoke of air flues not exceeding
20 sq dm (0.20 sqm) in sectional area shall be measured as solid and not extra payment shall be
made for pargetting and coring such flues. Where flues exceed 20 sq dm (0.20 sqm) sectional
area, deduction shall be made for the same and pargetting and coring flues shall be measured in
running metres stating size of flues and paid for separately. Aperture for fire place shall not be
deducted and no extra payment made for splaying of jambs and throating.

d)

Apertures for fire places shall not be deducted and extra labour shall not be measured for
splaying of jambs, throating and making arch to support the opening.

e)

Square or Rectangular Pillars

These shall be measured as walls, no extra payment shall be allowed for stone work in square or
rectangular pillars over the rate for stone work in walls.

e) Tapered walls shall be measured net, as per actual dimensions and paid for as other walls.
4.1.1.11 Curved Masonry
Stone masonry curved on plan to a mean radius exceeding 6 metres shall be measured and
included with general stone work. Stone work circular on plan to a mean radius not exceeding 6
Page 113 of 304

metres shall be measured separately and shall include all cuttings and waste and templates. It
shall be measured as the mean length of the wall.
4.2

CONCRETE BLOCK

4.2.1

Description
This section covers the requirements for furnishing of all material and the construction of hollow
concrete block masonry load bearing and filler / partition walls using the type, dimensions,
arrangement and the coursing as required complete with reinforcing anchorage, mortar, jointing
grouting, pointing, and masonry accessories.

4.2.2

4.2.3

Application Codes and Standards

IS

269

Ordinary and low heat portland cement.

IS

383

Aggregates, coarse and fine from natural source for concrete.

IS

456

Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

IS

2185

Specifications for concrete masonry units.

Part - I Hollow and solid concrete block.

IS

2250

Code of practice for the preparation and use of masonry mortars.

Products

4.2.3.1 Hollow Concrete masonry blocks

Hollow concrete masonry blocks shall be of approved make conforming to IS : 2185. The
concrete mix used for blocks shall not be richer than 1 cement : 6 combined aggregate by volume
before mixing. Cement used in making concrete masonry unit shall conform IS : 269 and the
aggregates used shall conform to IS : 383. All units shall be cured in curing tank / curing yard or
steam cured.
A

Physical Requirements
i) General
All units shall be sound and free from cracks, honey combing, broken edges and other defects.
However minor chipping resulting from the customary methods of handling during delivery shall
not be deemed ground for rejection.
The face of masonry units shall be flat and rectangular, opposite faces shall be paralleled and all
rises shall be square. The bedding surface shall be at right angle to the face of the blocks.
ii) Texture
Concrete masonry units used in constructing exposed walls shall be of the specified surface
texture, free from stains and discoloration blemished and defects which detract the desired
appearance of the finished wall.
iii) Dimensions
Unless specified otherwise the nominal dimensions of hollow concrete masonry units shall be as
follows :

Page 114 of 304

Length
Height
Width

400mm
200mm
As specified in the drawings.

The maximum variation in dimension shall not be more than 1.5 mm in height and breadth
and 3mm in length.
iv) Special Units
Hollow concrete block masonry units shall include closer jamb, header and bond beam units and
special shapes and sizes required to complete the work indicated.
v) Block Density
The density of hollow concrete block shall be as prescribed in Table below :Type
a) Load bearing
b) Non-load bearing

Density of Block
kg/M3
Not less than 1500
Less than 1500 but
not less than 1000

Min.
Avg.
Strength of Units
5.5 N/Sqmm
1.5 N / Sqmm

Min Strength
Individual Units
4.4 N / Sqmm
1.2 N/Sqmm

vi) Compressive Strength

The minimum compressive strength at 28 days being the average of 8 units, and the minimum
compressive strength at 28 days of individual units shall be as prescribed in Table above.
vii) Water Absorption
The water absorption, being the average of 3 units, shall not be more than 10% by mass.
viii) Drying Shrinkage
The drying shrinkage, being average of 3 units shall not exceed 0.1 percent.
ix) Moisture movement
The moisture movement of the dried blocks on immersion in water being the average of 3 units,
shall not exceed 0.09%.
B

Product Handling
i) Transportation
The contractor shall be responsible for transporting hollow concrete masonry units in such a
manner that the units are adequately protected during transportation cracked, chipped, or
otherwise damaged concrete masonry units, delivered at the site shall be considered unacceptable
and shall be delivery to the site in air dry condition.
ii) Handling and storage
Concrete block masonry units shall be handled, stored and protected with care in an approved
manner to avoid any contact with moisture on the site, soiling, chipping or damage of any kind.
They shall be stock piled in neat piles on planks or other supports free from contact with the
ground and covered to protect against wetting. Broken chipped or otherwise damaged units will
be rejected and shall not be used on the works.
Page 115 of 304

Tests
Tests shall be conducted on samples of units selected according to the sampling productive given
in D below, to ensure conforming with the physical requirement laid down in A. The cost of the
tests shall be borne by the contractor.

Sampling

i)

A sample of 20 blocks shall be taken from every consignment of 4000 blocks or part thereof the
same size and same batch of manufacture. From these samples, the blocks shall be taken at
random for conducting the tests. The sample of block shall be marked for future identification
of the consignment it represents. The blocks shall be kept under cover and protect from extreme
condition of temperature relative humidity and wind until they are required for test. The tests
shall be undertaken as soon practicably after the sample has been taken.

ii)

Number of Tests
All the 20 blocks shall be checked for dimension and inspected for visual defects. Out of 20
blocks, 3 blocks shall be subjected to the testing for block density, 8 blocks to the test for
compressive strength, 3 blocks to the test for drying shrinkage and later to the test for moisture
movement. The remaining 3 blocks shall be reserved for retest for drying shrinkage and
moisture movement if a need arises.

Criteria for conformity

The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of the specifications if the
conditions mentioned below are satisfied.
a) The number of blocks with dimensions outside the tolerance limit and / or visual defects,
among those inspected shall not be more than two.
b) For block density and compressive strength, the mean value determined shall be greater than
or equal at the minimum limit specified in A (v) and (vi) respectively.
c) For drying shrinkage and moisture movement, all the test specimens shall satisfy the
requirements of the test. If one or more specimens fail to satisfy the requirements, the
remaining three blocks shall be subjected to these tests. All these blocks shall satisfy the
requirements.
d) For water absorption, the mean value determined shall be equal or less than the maximum as
specified.

Marking
Concrete masonry units shall be marked for the following information.
a) The identification of the manufacture.
b) The grade of the unit i.e. load bearing or non-load bearing.
c) The year of manufacture if required.

4.2.3.2 Mortar
Mortar shall be composed of cement and sand, unless otherwise specified. All mortar shall be
prepared in accordance with IS : 2250. Hollow concrete blocks shall be embedded with a mortar
Page 116 of 304

which is relatively weaker than the mix used in making blocks in order to avoid the formation of
cracks. The proportions of mortar measured by volume shall be as specified.
4.2.3.3 Concrete
Concrete used for filling cells in hollow concrete block masonry when reinforced shall be
composed of 1 part of cement : 2 parts of sand and 3 parts of coarse aggregate of size ranging
4.75 mm to 12.5 mm. The water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.6. When the cells exceed 10 cm
in the least side, the coarse aggregate size shall be graded between 4.75 and 20 mm and the
proportion of mix shall be 1:2 : 3 for reinforcements of IS : 456 shall be complied with.
Superstructure
i) First Course
The first course of concrete block masonry shall be laid with great care making sure that it is
properly aligned, leveled and plumbed. Before laying the first course, the alignment of the wall
shall be marked on the foundation, footings. The blocks for this course shall first be laid dry
along a string lighting stretched between properly located corners of the wall in order to
determine the correct position of the blocks including those of cross walls joining it and also to
adjust their spacing. When the blocks are set in proper position the two corner blocks shall be
removed a full mortar bed spread on the footing and these blocks laid back in place truly level
and plumb. The string shall then be stretched tightly along the faces of the two corner blocks
and the faces of the intermediate ones adjusted to coincide with the line. Therefore each block
shall be removed and re-laid over a bed of mortar. After every 3 or 4 blocks have been laid their
correct alignment, level and vertically shall be carefully checked.
ii) Horizontal Joints
Mortar shall be spread over the entire top surface of the block including front and rear as well as
the webs to a uniform layer of 1 cm thickness. Full mortar bedding shall be adopted for load
bearing walls but for non-load bearing walls. The mortar may be spread only over.
iii) Vertical Joints
For vertical joints, the mortar shall be applied on the vertical edges of the front and rear shells of
the blocks. The mortar may be applied either on the unit already placed on the wall or aggregate
size shall be graded between 4.75 and 20mm and the proportion of mix shall be 1:2 : 3 for
reinforced concrete and 1:3:6 for unreinforced concrete. Generally, in making the concrete, the
requirements of IS : 456 shall be complied with.
4.2.3.4 Anchors and Ties
The ties for laying concrete block masonry partitions to intersecting masonry and the anchorage
of interior walls to abutting walls and columns shall be as indicated on the drawings.
4.2.4

Execution

4.2.4.1 Preparation
The blocks shall be wetted before or during laying in the walls. In case the climatic conditions
require the top and the side of the blocks may only be slightly moistured so as to prevent
absorption of water from the mortar and ensure development of the required bond with the
mortar. No unit having a film of water on its surface shall be laid.

Page 117 of 304

4.2.4.2 Foundations
In foundation courses, plinth and basement walls, solid concrete blocks shall preferably be used.
If hollow blocks are used, their hollow must be filled with cement concrete 1:3:6 ( 1 cement : 3
sand : 6 gravel or crushed stone 5 to 20mm size). In special cases, the hollows may be left
unfilled if so approved by the PMC.
In damp soils the foundation and basement masonry shall be laid in richer mortar as directed by
the PMC.
i) Masonry shall not be spread so much ahead of the actual laying of the units that it tends to
stiffen and loss its plasticity, thereby resulting on poor bond. For most of the work, the joints
both horizontal and vertical shall be 1 cm thick. When the mortar has stiffened somewhat, it
shall be firmly compacted with the jointing tool. It may be necessary to add mortar, particularly
to the vertical joints, to ensure that they are well filled. Each units shall be adjusted to final
position while the mortar is still soft and plastic. Any unit that is disturbed after mortar has
stiffened shall be removed and re-laid with fresh mortar.
ii) The construction of walls may be started either at the corners first or started form one end
proceeding in the other direction. If the corners of the wall are built first, they shall be built 4 to
5 courses higher than the centre of the wall. After each course is laid at the corner, it shall be
checked for alignment, level and for being in plumb. Each block shall be carefully checked with
a level or straight edge to make certain that the faces of the block are all in the same plane. All
mortar joints shall be 1 cm thick. Each course, in binding the corners, shall be stepped back by a
half - block and the horizontal spacing of the block shall be checked by placing a mason's level
diagonally across the corners of the blocks.
iii) When filling in the wall, between corners, the mason's line shall be stretched from corner to
corner for each course and the top outside edge of the each block shall be laid to this line. The
manner of handling or gripping the block shall be such as to position the block properly with
minimum adjustment. Dead mortar that has been picked up from the scaffold or from the floor
shall not be used.
iv) Closure Blocks
When installing the closure block, all edges of the opening and all four vertical edges of the
closure block shall be buttered with mortar. The closure block shall be carefully lowered into
place. If any of the mortar falls out leaving as open joint, the closure block shall be removed,
fresh mortar applied and the operation repeated.
v) Provision for Door and Window frames
A course of solid concrete block masonry shall be provided under window openings or a 10 cm
thick pre-cast concrete sill blocks under windows as per the drawings. The solid course shall
extend for at least 20 cm beyond the opening on either side. If hollow concrete block units are
used the hollow shall be filled in with concrete of mix 1:3:6.
MS Hold fasts shall be so fixed to the door or window frames that these fall at block course level
and their ends are embedded in a hollow which shall be filled with 1:3:6 cement concrete
vi) Provisions for lintels
Lintels shall consist of either a single pre-cast units or a number of units. They shall be
reinforced as per structural drawings. In situ concrete used for forming a composite lintel with
the use of a number of units, shall preferably be of the same mix as of the concrete that is used in
Page 118 of 304

the pre-cast units and the composite unit shall also be reinforced as per structural drawings.
Where openings occur close to one another a continuous lintel shall be provided.
vii) Provision for roof
The course immediately below the roof slab shall be built with solid blocks. Alternatively, U shaped units may be used and filled in with 1:3:6 concrete later on.

Page 119 of 304

5.0

WATER PROOFING

5.1

General
It is the intent of this specification to secure a completely water tight basement, toilets and
terraces etc. guaranteed for at least 10 (Ten) years from the date of final completion. The
guarantee shall be executed & extended by the Contractor & not by the water proofing agency.
The contractor shall provide all materials, labour, plant, equipment, incidentals and everything
necessary for securing a fully waterproof job as called for above.
All water proofing work shall be carried out by specialists as approved by the Project Manager.
Installation and materials shall be as per best practices for obtaining water proof work and as
recommended by the manufacturer.
Water proofing work shall be commenced only after the surface is prepared, smooth rendered,
cleaned free of dirt, dust and foreign matters, inspected and approved. Compressed air shall be
used for effective cleaning of all surfaces. The vents and other projections through the roof shall
be made absolutely secure before flashing.

5.2

Roof And Sunken Area Water Proofing (Mud Phuska waterproofing and terracing)
The procedure is to clean the RCC slab off dust and loose material. Spread hot bitumen at 1.70
kg bitumen per square metre.
Immediately spread a layer of coarse sand over hot bitumen at 0.6 m3 of sand over 100 square
metre. Paddled clay mixed with hay (bhusa) is laid in 10 cm thick layer giving a proper slope
(1:40). This layer is thoroughly consolidated. Mud-phuska layer is plastered with mud-cow dung
mortar (3:1). 35 mm thk Tile bricks are laid flat on plastered surface and joints are sealed and
grouted in 1:3 cement mortar and finished neat.

5.3

Tapecrete Waterproofing
All the chasings or cuttings in the floors and walls shall be carried out prior to the
commencement of the treatment. The prepared surface than shall be plastered with 12mm thick
cement mortar 1:4 mix (1 cement : 4 coarse sand), mixed with `CICO' admixture, as per
manufacturers' specifications. The plastering shall be carried out throughout the sunk portion
and carried up to all sides of the walls. The specialist then shall carry out `TAPECRETE'
waterproofing treatment comprising of 3 coats of tapecrete with Ist coat of tapecrete mixed with
grey cement in proportion of 1:2 (1 part tapecrete : 2 grey cement), 2nd coat of tapecrete mixed
with grey cement and silica sand in proportion of 1:2:1.5 (1 Tapecrete : 2 grey cement : 1.5 silaca
sand) , 3rd coat of tapecrete mixed with grey cement in proportion of 1:2. After the first coat of
Tapecrete all corners, junctions, joints of pipes and masonry to be sealed with Epoxy putty. The
treatment is laid underneath and behind all pipes. The specification on verticals is taken 150mm
above the finished floor level and to full height where tubs/wash basin and WC are being fixed.
The top surface shall be protected with 12mm thick plaster in cement mortar 1:4 mix (1 cement :
4 coarse sand).

Page 120 of 304

6.0

WOOD WORKS
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all plant, tools, materials, labour and all things
necessary for the proper execution, completion and maintenance of the works.
a)

Timber :The moisture content of the timber during manufacture, delivery to site, storage, site
working, assembly, installation shall be 10 to 12 percent.
Timber shall be Burma Teak Wood/ Ivory Coast Teak Wood / Champ Wood, / Red
mirinti, soft or hardwood and shall be suitable for the purpose for which it is intended. It
shall be seasoned or Kiln dried, absolutely free from worm holes, large loose or dead
Knots or other defects which would effect strength or usability and shall be flat, straight
non-splitting and dressed on all sides. It shall be matched for colours and graining.
Burma Teak Wood/ Ivory Coast Teak Wood / Champ Wood / Red mirinti wherever
specified in the drawings / schedule of quantities , it is Ist quality Light Grained of
reasonably straight grains, light vein free of Knots and sap.
Fixing :The carpentry timber shall be fixed with nails, spikes, bolts screws, hangers, stirrups,
anchors, ties or any other accessories which are suitable to develop the full strength of
the member to which they are attached, as directed.
Carpentry timber where fixed to solid masonry or concrete shall be secured with
expansion bolts or other positive methods of mechanical fastening. MS hold fast grouted
in CC block shall be used to hold the door frames.
Timber - Treatment
All timber shall be protected with an organic solvent water repellent wood preservative
to give a highly efficient protection against termite, spider, worm, all insects and fungus
and rot attach and shall, where exposed, enhance the appearance of the timber. Colour
of the product shall be such as to bring out the natural colour of the respective timbers.
Fire retardant paint to timber shall be applied as per the recommendations of
manufacturer and shall comply with the requirement of ISI / B.S. code and local fire
requirements.

b)

Plastic Laminate :Plastic decorative laminate sheeting shall be of the brand, catalogues number and
indicated or approved. Plastic laminate shall be fire retardant to class I of BS : 476 or ISI
code where specified.

c)

Veneers :Veneer shall be of the timber species of Indian origin shown on drawings. Veneers are to
be kept in sequence as they are being cut from wood and supplied as such to the site for
accurate matching or figuring . The veneer shall be finished as specified and shall be
equal or superior quality to that laid down in IS: 1659 - 1960 or as approved.
wherever Veneer is stated, it is mainly Teak veneer of approved quality in Indian origin
unless otherwise mentioned.

d)

Plywood :All ply wood shall be of best / high quality close grained suitable for veneering, painting
or bonding plastic laminate. It shall be resin bonded and weather proof. Exposed edges
shall be finished with an edge strip of solid teak wood. tongued and grooved and glued ,
or as detailed. The plywood of approved brand and manufacture only shall be used in
the work. The thickness shall be in accordance with the drawings /schedule of
quantities.

e)

MDF (Medium Density Fibre Board):

For Interior Works MDF of approved make /manufacturer shall be of only
EXTERIOR GRADE as per IS : 12406 -1988. It is to be contained that MDF shall be
Page 121 of 304

invariably used in place of Ply / Boards .so specified in the specifications of either same
thickness or of higher thickness .wherever feasible The minimum thickness of MDF to
be used shall be 8mm. Wood screws are not to be used for MDF and only fully
threaded parallel shank screws shall be used after drilling pilot holes. Veneering
/lamination to the MDF surface shall be done by exterior grade adhesive only. Poly
urethene primers shall be used for sealing the edges and painting the rear side. For
specifications of various applications the MANUFACTURER USERS MANUAL shall
be followed.
Adhesives :The adhesives used for all wood work and MDF shall be FEVICOL or approved
equivalent of appropriate Grade. Manufacturers recommendations shall be followed for
adhesive other than above required for any specified / specialized work.
Joinery :- Joinery shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the drawings, Where
joints are not specifically indicated recognized forms of joints shall be used. Joinery shall
conform to IS Standards.
Panels shall be rendered flame retardant and to conform to local fire regulations.
The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials including samples of veneer for
approval.
All materials pre-fabricated, delivered and assembled shall be in accordance with the
approved sample.
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all items of wood-work done by him.
The contractor shall replace at his own expense any damaged work caused through lack
of adequate protection or care in installation or handling .
f)

Flush Doors
All flush door shall be solid core as specified. It shall conform to the relevant
specifications to IS: 2202 and shall be obtained from ISI approved manufacturers. The
finished thickness of the shutter shall be as mentioned in the items. Face veneers shall be
of the pattern and colour approved by the Architects and an approved sample shall be
deposited with the Architects for reference. The solid core shall be wood laminates
prepared from battens of well seasoned and treated good quality wood having straight
grains.

g)

Gypsum - Board :Gypsum -Board (Glass Fibre Reinforced Board) or Equivalent conforming to IS-2095 1982 and 2542-1981 shall be used . Technical detailing for fixing Gypsum-Board along
with jointing compound, paper tape, primer, screws, edge bead, angle bead etc. shall be
as per Manufacturers specification. Proper care is to be taken while handling, storing and
cutting the Gypsum-board as per manufacturers manual and the work shall be done in
technical co-ordination /assistance with the trained staff of Manufacturer, such services
being offered free by them.

h)

Mirrors and Glasses :Mirrors shall be fabricated from best clear plate or float glass of approved quality in
imported variety and shall match the International Standards. All fixed panel mirrors
shall be +/- 0.30mm tolerance . The edges of mirrors shall be polished and bevelled and
mitred as per IS specifications wherever, its indicated in the drawing.
All vision glasses shall be float glass of specified thickness. The edges shall be bevelled as
indicated in drawings and shall be done at approved source.
Page 122 of 304

The Etching wherever specified in drawings, shall be done at approved sources as per
full-scale drawing approved by the Project Manger. The etched panel shall be chemically
washed /treated as per specialist specifications to have a permanent dust free surface.
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all mirrors and glasses fixed by him
and shall replace at his own expense any broken or damaged mirror / glass caused
through lack of adequate protection or care in installation or handling.

Page 123 of 304

7.0

FLOORING/ CLADDING WORKS

7.1

General
All flooring shall be laid to the best practice known to the trade. The flooring shall be laid to the
level except where slopes are called for on the drawings in which case the slopes shall be uniform
and so arranged to drain in to the indicated outlets.
Particular care shall be exercised to ensure that all flooring, skirting and dado are perfectly
matched for colour and finish. Sufficient extra tiles (not less than 5%) shall be cast/ordered to
ensure an adequate supply of matched floor tiles. The contractor shall furnish for approval by the
Project Manager, samples of each type of floor finish.

7.2

Cement Concrete flooring (IPS Flooring)

Indian patent stone flooring shall be 40mm or of specified thickness and laid in two layers,
bottom layer 28mm thick or as specified in 1 part of portland cement, 2 parts of coarse sand and
4 parts of crushed stone aggregate 12.5mm down well graded machine mixed with not more than
5.5 gallons of water for each bag of cement and top layer 6mm thick in one part of portland
cement, 2.5 parts of selected crushed stone chips with just enough sand maximum part to make
workable mix, machine mixed with not more than 5 gallons of water. Top layer to be laid before
the bottom layer has hardened. Flooring shall be laid in squares or bays as directed and each
layers shall be well compacted by ramming with heavy teak wood floats. The top shall be brought
to a smooth and even surface free from blemishes and finished smooth with neat cement by steel
trowelling. The flooring shall be kept wet for seven days for curing. The flooring shall be laid by
forming panels as per the advised of the Project Manager / Architect including roughening of the
base layer and providing cement slurry for jointing.
Where ironite/hardonite topping is specified in the "Bill of Quantities" the bottom layer shall be
50mm thick or in the item of B.O.Q. and the top layer shall be 12mm thick mixed with
ironite/hardonite as per manufacturers specification and finished fair.

7.3

Granolithic Flooring
The general specifications for granolithic floors, where called for, shall be as per the cement
flooring except that the top 12mm finish shall be of granolithic consisting of 1 part of cement
and 1.1/2 part of well graded crushed aggregate. The aggregate shall be of approved quality.

7.4

Tiles
All tiles shall be minimum 8 mm thick of approved manufacturer as stated in the schedule of
quantities. Only first quality tiles of approved colour shall be used. No cracked or warped tiles
shall be used in the work. All tiles shall be required to be set in cement mortar. Prior to setting
the tiles the contractor shall at his own cost, clear the whole surface and thoroughly saturate it
with water. A layer of 12 to 20 mm avg. thick cement mortar shall then be applied to the surface
and the tiles laid firmly over a layer of clear cement slurry. The tiles shall be set in perfect line,
level and true to plumb line. The joints of tiles shall have white, coloured cement filling/tile
grout. After the setting operation is completed, the contractor shall carefully remove all cement
and dribbling and cure the tiled surface for atleast seven days with water.

7.5

Tile Dado
Tile dado where called for in the drawings, shall be minimum 6 mm thick tiles of approved
manufacture. The tiles shall be free from cracks, twists, uneven edges, cracking and such other
defects. The rear face of tiles shall be grooved and/or recessed to provide an adequately key for
the plaster. A layer of 12mm thick rough base plaster shall be done with cement mortar 1:3
(1
cement: 3 coarse sand). The tiles shall be finally set true to plumb with rich cement slurry over a
6mm average thick cement plaster in 1:3 (1cement : 3 fine sand), the joints of tiles shall have
Page 124 of 304

white, coloured cement filling/tile grout. After laying the tiles shall be thoroughly washed and
cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
7.6

Marble / Granite Stone

Marble/Granite shall be the best Indian Marble/Granite to be approved by the Project Manager
and a sample piece should be kept in the office of the Project Manager. The quality shall be
uniform and it shall be hard and free from any discolorations, cracks, flaws, veins of foreign
materials or any other defects. When marble/Granite of different colour and kinds associated,
care shall be taken to see that they are of equal hardness so as to wear evenly. The
marble/Granite slabs shall be machine cut true to the shape and size and machine mirror
polished. Care shall be taken to cut the slabs so as to provide a pattern as indicated.
Marble/Granite stone slabs for wall lining and dadoes shall be machine mirror polished edges.
The wall shall be lined with the marble/Granite in courses as indicated and grain of the
marble/Granite shall be arranged in pattern as per detailed drawings. The marble/Granite shall
be bedded in adequate thickness of cement mortar, backing covering the full area of the marble.
The wall surface shall cleaned from all dirt, mortar droppings etc. before applying the base
plaster. The marble/Granite shall be fixed to the wall by S.S cramps and pins of required sizes
embedded firmly in to wall by cutting hole and grouting alternately stainless steel cramps and
pins as per design including fixing small stone pieces with adhesive. Fixing of cramp shall be with
fastener (as approved by Project Manager) in case of RCC and in Brick Work pocket
(100mmX75mmX75mm) shall be made and filled by non-shrinkage compound (as approved by
Project Manager). The size and design of the cramp and fastener shall be to suite site requirement
and shall be approved by the Project Manager. The load of one marble/Granite slab shall not be
borne by the slab below. Joints between slabs shall be hair fine and filled with coloured cement
to match the marble/Granite. The marble/Granite lining and dadoes shall be finally polished by
Carborundum stone, buffing with polishing felt and cleaned with diluted oxalic acid wash.

7.7

Expansion and compression joints

These shall be clearly indicated on the shop drawings and formed of non-staining two parts
polysulphide with polyethylene foam backing to full depth of screed in pavings.
In no instance shall expansion joints be less than 10 mm. Supporting corbels cover shall be
recessed into the back of the above slab and not placed in the expansion joint. Expansion joint
shall be kept completely free of all fixing materials and are to be inspected by the consultant prior
to filling.

Page 125 of 304

8.0

FINISHING WORKS

8.1

General

8.1.1

All plaster work shall be of the best workmanship and in strict accordance with the dimensions
of the drawings. All plastering shall be finished to true levels including plumbs, without
imperfections, and square with adjoining work. It shall form proper foundations for finishing
materials such as paint etc. Masonry and concrete surface to which plaster is to be applied shall
be clean, free from efflorescence, sufficiently rough and keyed to ensure proper bond.

8.1.2

Wherever directed all joints between RCC frames and masonry walls, shall be expressed by a
groove in the plaster. This groove will exactly coincide with the joint beneath. At the corners of
all windows and doors or other openings and wherever instructed, 24 gauge expanded galvanized
metal mesh strips 300 mm wide shall be placed diagonally to prevent plaster cracks.

8.1.3

Where grooves are not called for, the joint between concrete and masonry in filling, chasing for
conduits, pipes, boxes etc. shall be covered by 24 gauge expanded galvanized metal strips, 300
mm wide installed before plastering. The contractor shall supply all necessary labour, material,
tools and scaffolding necessary for the completion of the work detailed. He shall be responsible
to take proper precautions to all works from damage. Any work rejected through noncompliance with the specifications or damaged work shall be removed and replaced at the
expense of the contractor.

8.1.4

All chasing, installation of conduits, boxes, etc. shall be completed before any plastering is
commenced on a surface. Chasing or cutting of plaster will not be permitted. Broken corners
shall be cut back less than 150 mm on both sides and patched with plaster of Paris as directed.
All corners shall be rounded to a radius. Contractor shall get samples of each type of plaster work
approved by the Project Manager.

8.1.5

The materials used for plastering shall be proportioned by volume by means of gauge boxes.
Alternatively it may be required to proportion the materials by weight.

8.2

Plaster Work

8.2.1

The joints in the brick work, concrete blocks, shall be raked (as specified in respective subhead)
while the masonry is green. Concrete surfaces to receive plaster shall be suitably roughened. All
walls shall be washed with water and kept damp for 10 hours before plastering.

8.2.2

The plaster unless specified otherwise shall be average of 15 mm thick on walls and minimum 6
mm thick for the ceiling. The finished texture shall be as approved by the Project Manager. The
mix for plaster unless otherwise specified, shall be one part cement and four parts sand, to walls
and one part cement, 3 parts sand to ceiling.

8.2.3

The interior plaster shall be applied in one coat only. The surface shall be trowelled smooth to an
approved surface. All plaster work shall be kept continuously wet for seven days.

8.2.4

The external plaster shall be minimum 20 mm. Preparations of walls to receive plaster work shall
be the same as in internal plaster. Both layers of all external plaster shall be waterproofed with
approved water proofing powder added to cement in proportion of 1.5 Kg. to 50 Kg. of cement
as per the manufacturers' instruction, for both the coats under layer 12 mm thick cement plaster
1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) finished with a top layer 8mm thick cement plaster 1:6 (1 cement :6
fine sand) including making of grooves, bands, drip coarse as shown in drawing.

8.2.5

For sand faced cement plaster, the finishing coat shall be in cement mortar 1:3, sand used shall be
of selected colour, properly graded and washed so as to give a grained texture. Finishing plaster
coat shall be 8 mm thick, uniformly applied and surface finished with special rubbing by sponge
pads and other tools and recommended by the Project Manager.
Page 126 of 304

8.3

White Washing

8.3.1

White washing with Lime

The wash shall be prepared from fresh stone lime (Narnaul/Satna or Dehradun quality). The lime
shall be thoroughly slaked on the spot, mixed and stirred with sufficiencies to water to make a
thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened
through a clean coarse cloth. 40 gm of gum desolved in hot water, shall be added to each 10
entire delimiters of cream. The approximate quantity of water to be added in making ht cream
will be 5 liters of water to 1 Kg. of lime.
Indigo (Neel) up to 3 gm. per Kg. of lime desolved in water, shall then be added and wash stirred
well. Water then shall be added at the rate of about 5 liters per Kg. of lime to produce a milky
solution.

8.3.2

Preparation of surface
Before white washing is started, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar
droppings and foreign-matter. Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty made of
plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the undulations and
then sand papering the same after it dry.

8.3.3

Application
The white wash shall be applied with moon brushes to the specified number of coats. The
operation for each coat shall consist of a stroke of the brush given from top downwards, another
from bottom upwards over the first stroke, and similarly one stroke horizontally from the right
and another from the left before it dries up.

8.4

White washing with whiting

Preparation of mix : Whiting (ground white chalk) shall be dissolved in sufficient quantity of
warm and thoroughly stirred to form a thin slurry which shall then be screened through a clean
coarse cloth. Two Kg. of gum and 0.4 Kg. of copper sulphate dissolved separately in hot water
shall be added for every cum of the slurry which shall then be diluted with water to the
consistency of milk also as to make a wash ready for use.
Other specifications described in above shall be applied in this case also.

8.5

Colour Washing
The mineral colours not affected by lime, shall be added to white wash. Indigo shall however, not
be added. No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour wash of the required tint or
shade has been got approved from the Project Manager. The colour shall be of even tint or shade
over the whole area.
A priming coat of white wash with lime or with whiting shall be applied. Three or more coats,
shall then be applied on the entire surface till it represents a smooth and uniform finish.
Other specifications described in above shall apply in this case also.

8.6

Distempering
Dry distemper of required colour and (IS; 427 - 1965) of approved brand and manufacture shall
be used. The shade shall be got approved from the Project Manager before application of the
distemper. The dry distemper colour as required shall be stirred slowly in clean water using 6
decilitres (0.6 litre) of water per Kg. of distemper or as specified by the makers. Warm water shall
preferably be used. It shall be allowed to stand for atleast 30 minutes (or if practicable over night)
before use. The mixture shall be well stirred before and during use to maintain an even
consistency. Distemper shall not be mixed in larger quantity than is actually required for one
days' work.
Preparation of surface
Before new work is distempered, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar
droppings and other foreign matter and sand papered smooth. Pitting in plaster shall be made
Page 127 of 304

good with plaster of Paris mixed with the colour to be used. The surface shall then be rubbed
down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied
over the patches. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat
of distemper is applied.
A priming coat of whiting shall be applied over the prepared surface. No white washing coat shall
be used as a priming coat for distemper.
Application
The treatment shall consist of a priming coat of whiting followed by the application of three or
more coats of distemper till the surface shows an even colour.
Other specifications described as above shall apply in this case also.
8.7

Oil bound distempering

Material: Oil emulsion (oil bound) distemper (IS:428-1929) of approved brand and manufacture
shall be used. The primer used shall be cement primer or distemper primer. This shall be of same
manufacture as distemper. The distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed
thinner in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemper
required for days work shall be prepared. The distemper and primer shall be brought by the
contractor in sealed tins in sufficient quantities, at a time to suffice for a fortnights work. The
empty tins shall not be removed from the site of work, till this item of work has been completed
and passed by the Project Manager.
Preparation of surface
Before new work is distempered, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar
droppings and other foreign matter and sand papered smooth. Pitting in plaster shall be made
good with plaster of Paris mixed with the colour to be used. The surface shall then be rubbed
down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied
over the patches. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat
of distemper is applied.
A priming coat of approved primer shall be applied over the prepared surface. No white washing
coat shall be used as a priming coat for oil bound distemper.
Application
The priming coat shall be with cement primer, as required in the description of the item and as
recommended by the manufacturer.
Note:
If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely cement primer shall be applied before
distempering the walls. But if distempering is done after the wall surface is dried completely,
distemper primer shall be applied.
Oil bound distemper is not recommended to be applied within six months of the completion of
wall plaster.
After the primer coat has dried for atleast 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to
make it smooth for receiving the distemper, taking care not to rule out the priming coat. All loose
particles shall be dusted off after rubbing. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner
(Water or other liquid as stipulated by the manufacture) shall be applied with brushes in
horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones which together constitute one coat. The
subsequent coats shall be applied in the same way.
For distemper 15 cm double bristled brushes shall be used. After each days work, brushes shall
be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap solution and hung down to dry. The final coat shall
be done by using approved roller.

Page 128 of 304

The specifications in respect of scaffolding protective measures and rute shall be as described
under.
8.8

Cement Primer Coat

Cement primer shall be used as lease on wall finish of cement lime or lime cement plaster or
asbestos cement surface before oil distemper paints are applied on them. Only approved cement
primer shall be used. Primer coat shall be preferably applied by brushing and not by spraying.
Preparation of surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or colour wash by washing and
scrubbing. The surface then be allow to dry for atleast 48 hours. It shall then be sand papered to
give a smooth and even surface. Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of
plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the undulations and
then sand papering the same after it is dry.
Application
Cement primer shall be applied with a brush. Horizontal strokes shall be given first and vertical
strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. The entire operation will constitute one coat.
The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed
to dry for atleast 48 hours, before oil emulsion paint is applied.

8.9

Cement Paint
Cement paint shall be (conforming to IS:5410 - 1969) of approved brand and manufacture.
Preparation of surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt, dust, alga, grease and other
foreign matter by brushing and washing. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water
before the cement paint is applied.
Preparation of mix
Cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within an hour of its mixing as
otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish.
Cement paint shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of
cement paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care
shall be taken to add the cement paint gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second stage
shall comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a
liquid of workable and uniform consistency. In all cases the manufacturers instructions shall be
followed meticulously. The lid of cement paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in
use, as by exposure to atmosphere the cement paint rapidly becomes air set due to its
hydrophobic qualities.
Application
The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or spraying machine.
The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. It shall be applied on the
surface which is on the shady side of the building so that the direct heat of the sun on the surface
is avoided. The method of application shall be as per manufacturer's specifications. The
completed surface shall be watered after day's work.
Water cement paint shall not be applied on surface already treated with white wash, colour wash
distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, paints etc. It shall not be applied on gypsum, wood and
metal surfaces.

8.10

Painting
i)

Painting priming coat of wood surface

Primer for wood work shall be as specified in the description of the item. Surface to be
primed shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down
smooth with sand paper and shall be well dusted, knots, if any, shall be covered with
Page 129 of 304

preparation of red lead made by grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong glue
sized and used hot. Appropriate wood filler material with same shade as paint shall be
used where so specified.
The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before primer is applied. After the primer is
applied the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with glaziers putty or
wood putty, stopping shall not be done before the priming coat.
ii)

Painting priming coat on Iron & Steel surfaces

All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brushes.
Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during raking which becomes
loose by rushing, shall be removed. All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped away
from the surface.

iii)

Textured paint
The textured finish to external surfaces of walls as per manufacturer's specification and
approved by the Project Manager including scaffolding etc. complete.

iv)

Painting priming coat on plastered surface

The surface shall ordinarily not be painted shall be applied to get correct finish until it
has dried completely. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations shall be filled up
with plaster of Paris and rubbed smooth.
The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and spread even
and smooth. Painting shall be done by crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying
off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first
time over and then brushing alternately in opposite direction, two or three times and
then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no
brush marks shall be left the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying
off will constitute one coat.

The surface to be painted shall have received the approval of the Project Manager after
inspection, before painting is commended.
Application
The number of coats including the under coat shall be stipulated in the item.

8.11

a)

Under Coat
One coat of specified paint of shade suited to the shade of the top coat shall be applied
and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade of wet
abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and all loose
particles dusted off.

b)

Top Coat
Top coats of specified paint of desired shade shall be applied. Each coat shall be allowed
to dry for not less than 24 hours and lightly rubbed down smooth with finest wet
abrasion paper to get an even glossy surface. If, however, the surface is not satisfactory
additional coats as required.

Acrylic Emulsion paint

The acrylic emulsion paint is not suitable for application on external wood, and iron
surface and surfaces which are liable to heavy condensation and are to be used on
internal surfaces except wood and steel which are liable for condensation. No priming
coat is required for the latter.
Acrylic emulsion paint as per IS : 5411 1969 of approved brand and manufacture and
of the required shade shall be used.

Page 130 of 304

8.11.1

Painting on New Surface

Preparation of surface
Before new work is distempered, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from
mortar droppings and other foreign matter and sand papered smooth. Pitting in plaster
shall be made good with plaster of Paris mixed with the colour to be used. The surface
shall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat
of paint shall be applied over the patches. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry
thoroughly before the regular of acrylic emulsion paint is applied.
A priming coat shall be applied over the prepared surface. No white washing coat shall
be used as a priming coat.
Application
The number of coats shall be as stipulated in the item. The paint will be applied in the
usual manner with brush and roller. The paint dries by evaporation of the water content
and as soon as the water has evaporated the film gets hard and the next coat can be
applied. The time of drying varies from one hour on absorbent surfaces to 2 to 3 hours
on non-absorbent surfaces.
The thinning of emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine. Thinning
with water will be particularly required for the undercoat which is applied on the
absorbent surface. The quantity of water to be added shall be as per manufacturers
instructions.
The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If necessary more
coats will be applied till the surface presents a uniform appearance.
a)

Precautions
Old brushes and rollers if they are to be used with emulsion paints, should be completely
dried of turpentine or oil paints by washing in warm soap water.
Brushes and rollers should be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept
immersed in water during break periods to prevent the paint from hardening on the
brush and roller.

8.12

b)

In the preparation of walls for plastic emulsion painting, no oil base putties shall be used in
filling cracks, holes etc.

c)

Splashes on floors etc. shall be cleaned out without delay as they will be difficult to
remove after hardening.

d)

Washing of surfaces treated with emulsion paints shall not be done within 3 to 4 weeks
of application.
Synthetic Enamel Paint
Synthetic Enamel Paint ( conforming to IS : 1932 1964 ) of approved brand and
manufacture and of the required colour shall be used for the top coat and an undercoat
of shade to match the top coat as recommended by the manufacturer shall be used.

8.12.1

Painting on New Surface

Preparation of surface

Page 131 of 304

a)

Wood work :- The surface shall be cleaned and all unevenness removed. Knotes if
available, shall be covered with a preparation of red red lead. Holes and indentations on
the surface shall be filled in with glazires putty or wood putty and rubbed smooth before
painting is done. The surface should be thoroughly dry before painting.

b)

Iron and steel work :- The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting
is started. Rust and scaling shall be carefully removed by scraping or by brushing with
steel wire brushes. All dust and dirt shall be carefully and thoroughly wiped away.

c)

Plastered surface:- The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is
started. All dust and dirt that has settled on the priming coat shall be thoroughly wiped
away before painting is started.
Application
The number of coats including the undercoat shall be as stipulated in the item.
Under Coat :- Two coat by spray method (by using compressor) of the specified paint of
shade suited to the shade of the top coat shall be applied and allowed to dry overnight.
It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure a
smooth and even surface, free form brush marks and all loose particles dusted off.
Top Coat :- Top coats of specified paint of the desired shade shall be applied by spray
method (by using compressor) after the undercoat is thoroughly dry. Additional finishing
coats shall be applied if found necessary to ensure properly uniform glossy surface.

8.13

Polishing New Surface

Preparation of surface
a)

The surface shall be cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand
paper and well dusted. Knots if visible shall be covered with a preparation of red lead
and glue size laid on while hot. Holes and indentations on the surface shall be stopped
with glaziers putty. The surface shall then be given a coat of wood filler made by mixing
whiting (ground chalk) in methylated spirit at the rate of 1.5kg of whiting per litre of
spirit. The surface shall again be rubbed down perfectly smooth with glass paper and
wiped clean.
Application
The number of coats of polish to be applied to achieve the desired shade / finish.
A pad of woollen cloth covered by a fine cloth shall be used to apply the polish. The
pad shall be moistened with the polish and rubbed hard on the wood, in a series of
overlapping circles applying the mixture sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to
given an even level surface. A trace of linseed oil on the face of the pad facilitates this
operation. The surface shall be allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the
same way. To finish off, the pad shall be covered with a fresh piece of clean fine cotton
cloth slightly damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and quickly with circular
motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform texture and high gloss.

Page 132 of 304

8.14

Melamine Polish
Timber works shall be finished by the application of two coats and catalysed clear
lacquer (melamine) wherever it is indicated in the drawing/specified. The finish shall be a
stain semi-gloss finish and shall be carried out as follows:The base shall be sand papered to the desired finish and coated with a colour tings to
give it shade. This shade shall be sealed with a coat of spirit finish.
After the base, first coat of melamine shall be applied evenly by spray to give as even
coat to the veneer surface.
After the first coat has fully dried, the surface shall be rubbed down in the direction of
the veneer grain with very fine glass paper and left completely smooth and clean before
the second coat is applied.
When the second coat of melamine is fully dry, the surface shall be rubbed down in the
direction of veneer grain with very wire dipped in a petroleum based wax to give
lubrication.
Twenty four hours after completion of this process the melamined veneer surface shall
be finished by burnishing a soft cloth to an approved finish.
8.15

PLASTER OF PARIS PUNNING

Where specified the walls and ceilings are to be treated with plaster of Paris over cement
plaster.
The particular brand of in gradients forming this special plaster and its composition to
be used must be previously approved by the Project Manager. The entire surface must
be of a very smooth surface and minutest unevenness must be removed. Specially
trained skilled labour with previous experience of this type work shall have to be
employed for the purpose to achieve high grade finish.
8.16

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

GRIT FINISH PLASTER

Select aggregates, 12mm below, Dholpur chips.

Remove all dirt, foreign material and stone dust.
Clean the aggregates with water thoroughly.
Mix the grey cement with marble powder in proportion of three Grey cement
to one marble powder by weight.
Mix the cement Marble powder mix with Dholpur chips in proportion of four
cement Marble powder mix to seven Dholpur chips by volume.
Apply on a rough plastered surface prepared to receive the grit plaster.
Water the plastered surface to an extent such that the grit plaster can be applied.
After initial setting of grit plaster use a wet sponge to clean the surface.
Use hose water to clean the grit surface effectively so that the grit particles are
seen neat and clean and the surface is cleaned of any of the cemented particles.

Page 133 of 304

9.0

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

9.1

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

9.1.1

This specification covers the fabrication and transportation to site and erection on prepared
foundations and structural steel work consisting of beams, columns, vertical trusses, bracings,
shear connections etc.

9.1.2

Fabrication, erection and approval of steel structures shall be in compliance with :

-

These General Specifications and IS : 800 - 1984

Drawings and supplementary drawings to be supplied to the contractors during

execution of the work.

9.1.3

Providing primer coat for steel structures. Grouting of holding-down bolt pockets and below
base plates where required.

9.1.4

In case of conflict between the Clauses mentioned here and the Indian Standards, those
expressed in this specification shall govern.

9.2

Scope

9.2.1

The fabrication and erection of the steel work consists of accomplishing of all jobs here-in
enumerated including providing all labour, tools and plant all materials and consumables such
as welding electrodes, bolts and nuts, oxygen and acetylene gases, oils for cleaning etc. of
approved quality as per relevant IS. The work shall be executed according to the drawings,
specifications, relevant codes etc. in an expeditious and workman like manner, as detailed in
the specifications and the relevant Indian Standard Codes and Standard Practice and to the
complete satisfaction of the Project Manager.

9.3

Fabrication Drawings

9.3.1

The contractor shall prepare all fabrication and erection drawings on the basis of design
drawings supplied to him and submit the same in triplicate to the Project Manager for review,
Project Manager shall review and comment, if any, on the same. Such review, if any, by the
Project Manager, does not relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees
responsibilities. The contractor shall however be responsible to fabricate the structurals
strictly conforming to specifications and reviewed drawings.

9.3.2

Fabrication drawings shall include the following :

-

Member sizes and details

Types and dimensions of welds and bolts
Shapes and sizes of edge preparation for welding
Details of shop and field joints included in assemblies.

Bill of material

9.3.3

Quality of structural steels, welding electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers etc. to be used.

Erection assemblies, identifying all transportable parts and sub-assemblies, associated

with special erection instructions, if required.

Calculations where asked for, for approval.

Connections, splices etc. other details not specifically detailed in design drawings shall be
suitably given on fabrication drawings considering normal detailing practices and developing
Page 134 of 304

full member strengths. Where asked for calculations for the merit shall also be submitted for
approval.
9.3.4

Any alternate design or change in section is allowed when approved in writing by the Project
Manager.

9.3.5

However if any variation in the scheme is found necessary later, the contractor will be
supplied with revised drawings. The contractor shall incorporate these changes in his
drawings at no extra cost and resubmit for review.

9.3.6

Project Manager review shall not absolve the contractor of his responsibility for the
correctness of dimensions, adequacy of details and connections. One copy will be returned
reviewed with or without comments to the contractor for necessary action. In the former
case further three copies of amended drawings shall be submitted by the contractor for final
review.

9.3.7

The contractor shall supply three prints each of the final reviewed drawings to the Project
Manager within a week since final review, at no extra cost for reference and records.

9.3.8

The Project Manager will verify the correct interpretation of their requirements.

9.3.9

If any modification is made in the design drawing during the course of execution of the job,
revised design drawings will be issued to the contractor. Further changes arising out of these
shall be incorporated by the contractor in the fabrication drawings already prepared at no
extra cost and the revised fabrication drawings shall be duly got reviewed as per the above
Clauses.

9.4

Materials

9.4.1

Rolled Sections
The following grades of steel shall be used for steel structures :
Structural steel will generally be of standard quality conforming to IS: 226. Whenever welded
construction is specified plates of more than 20 mm thickness will generally conform to IS:
2062.

9.4.2

Welding Materials
Welding electrodes shall conform to IS: 814.
Approval of welding procedures shall be as per IS: 823.

9.4.3

Bolts, Nuts & Washers

Bolts and nuts shall be as per IS: 1367 and tested as per IS:1608. It shall have a minimum
tensile strength of 44 Kg/mm2 and minimum elongation of 23% on a gauge length of 5.65
(A- Original cross sectional area of the gauge length). Washers shall be as per IS: 2016.

9.4.4

All materials shall conform to their respective specifications. The use of equivalent or higher
grade or alternate materials will be considered only in very special cases subject to the
approval of the Project Manager in writing.

9.4.5

Receipt & Storing of Materials

Steel materials supplied by the contractor must be marked for identification and each lot
should be accompanied by manufacturer's quality certificate, conforming chemical analysis
and mechanical characteristics.
Page 135 of 304

All steel parts furnished by supplier shall be checked, sorted out, straightened, and arranged
by grades and qualities in stores.
Structurals with surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations etc. shall be rejected if the
defects exceed the allowable tolerances specified in relevant standards or as directed by the
Project Manager.
Welding wire and electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and lots inside a dry and
enclosed room, in compliance with IS: 816 - 1969 and as per instructions given by the Project
Manager. Electrodes shall be perfectly dry and drawn from an electrode even, if required.
Checking of quality bolts of any kind as well as storage of same shall be made conforming to
relevant standards.
Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturer's test certificate.
The contractor may use alternative materials as compared to design specification only with
the written approval of the Project Manager.
9.4.6

Material Tests
The contractor shall be required to produce manufacturer's quality certificates for the
materials supplied by the contractor. Notwithstanding the manufacturer's certificates, the
Project Manager may ask for testing of materials in approved test houses. The test results
shall satisfy the requirements of the relevant Indian Standards.
Whenever quality certificates are missing or incomplete or when material quality differs from
standard specifications the contractor shall conduct all appropriate tests as directed by the
Project Manager at no extra cost.
Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test results do not tally with
relevant standard specifications, shall not be used.

9.5

Fabrication
Fabrication shall be in accordance with IS: 800 Section V in addition to the following :
Fabrication shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings adhering strictly to work
points and work lines on the same. The connections shall be welded or bolted as per design
drawings. Work shall also include fabricating built up sections.
Any defective material used shall be replaced by the contractor at his own expense, care being
taken to prevent any damage to the structure during removal.
All the fabricated and delivered items shall be suitably packed to be protected from any
damage during transportation and handling. Any damage caused at any time shall be made
good by the Contractor at his own cost.
Any faulty fabrication pointed out at any stage of work shall be made good by the contractor
at his own cost.

9.5.1

Preparation of Materials
Prior to release for fabrication, all rolled sections warped beyond allowable limit shall be
pressed or rolled straight and freed from twists, taking care that an uniform pressure is
applied.
Minor warping, corrugations etc. in rolled sections shall be rectified by cold working.
Page 136 of 304

The sections shall be straightened by hot working where the Project Manager so direct and
shall cooled slowly after straightening.
Warped members like plates and flats may be used as such only if wave like deformation does
not exceed L/1000 but limited to 10 mm (L-Length).
Surface of members that are to be jointed by lap or fillet welding or bolting shall be even so
that there is no gap between overlapping surfaces.
9.5.2

Marking
Marking of members shall be made on horizontal pads, of an appropriate racks or supports in
order to ensure horizontal and straight placement of such members.
Marking accuracy shall be atleast + 1 mm.

9.5.3

Cutting
Members shall be cut mechanically (by saw or shear or by oxyacetylene flame).
All sharp, rough, or broken edges, and all edges of joints which are subjected to tensile or
oscillating stresses, shall be ground.
No electric metal arc cutting shall be allowed.
All edges cut by oxyacetylene process shall be cleaned of impurities prior to assembly.
Cutting tolerances shall be as follows :
a)
b)

For members connected at both ends + 1 mm.

Elsewhere + 3 mm.

The edge preparation for welding of members more than 12 mm thick shall be done by flame
cutting and grinding. Cut faces shall not have cracks or be rough.
Edge preparation shall be as per IS : 823 - 1964.
9.5.4

Drilling
Bolts holes shall be drilled.
Drilling shall be made to the diameter specified in drawings.
No enlarging of holes filling, by mandrolling or oxyacetylene flame shall be allowed.
Allowed variations for holes (out-of-roundness, eccentricity, plumb-line deviation) shall be as
per IS:800.
-

Maximum deviation for spacing of two holes on the same axis shall be + 1 mm.

Two perpendicular diameters of any oval hole shall not differ by more than 1 mm.

Drilling faults in holes may be rectified by reaming the holes to the next upper diameter,
provided that spacing of new hole centres and distance of hole centres to the edges of
members are not less than allowed and that the increase of hole diameter does not impair the
structural strength. Hole reaming shall be allowed if the number of faulty holes does not
exceed 15% of the total number of holes for one joint.

Page 137 of 304

9.5.6

Preparation of Members for Welding

Assembly of structural members shall be made with proper jigs and fixtures to ensure correct
positioning of members (angles, axes nodes etc.)
Sharp edges, rust of cut edges, notches, irregularities and fissures due to faulty cutting shall be
chipped or ground or filled over the length of the affected area, deep enough to remove faults
completely.
Edge preparation for welding shall be carefully and accurately made so as to facilitate a good
joint.
Generally no special edge preparation shall be required for members under 8 mm thick.
Edge preparation (bevelling) denotes cutting of the same so as to result in V, X K or U seam
shapes as per IS: 823.
The members to be assembled shall be clean and dry on the welding edges. Under no
circumstances shall wet, greasy, rust or dirt covered parts be assembled. Joints shall be kept
free from any foreign matter likely to get in to the gaps between members to be welded.
Before assembly the edges to be welded as well as adjacent areas extending for atleast 20 mm
shall be cleaned (until metallic polish is achieved).
When assembling members, proper care shall be taken of welding shrinkage and distortions,
as the drawing dimensions cover finished dimensions of the structure.
The elements shall be got checked and approved by the Project Manager or their authorised
representative before assembly.
The permissible tolerances for assembly of members preparatory to welding shall be as per IS:
823-1964.
After the assemble has been checked, temporary tack welding in position shall be done by
electric welding, keeping in view finished dimensions of the structure.

9.5.7

Welding procedures
Welding shall be carried out only by fully trained and experienced welders as tested and
approved by the Project Manager. Any test carried out either by the Project Manager of their
representative or the inspectors shall constitute a right by them for such tests and the cost
involved thereon shall be borne by the contractor himself.
Qualification tests for welders as well as tests for approval of electrodes will be carried out as
per IS: 823. The nature of test for performance qualification of welders shall be
commensurate with the quality of welding required on this job as judged by the Project
Manager.
The steel structures shall be automatically, semi-automatically or manually welded.
Welding shall begin only after the checks mentioned in Clause 5.1 to 5.6 have been carried
out.
The welder shall mark with his identification mark on each element welded by him.
When welding is carried out in open air, steps shall be taken to protect the face of welding
against wind or rain. The electrodes, wire and parts being welded shall be dry.
Before beginning the welding operation, each joint shall be checked to ensure that the parts to
be welded are clean and root gaps provided as per IS: 823.
Page 138 of 304

For continuing the welding of seems discontinued due to some reason, the end of the
discontinued seem shall be melted in order to obtain a good continuity. Before resuming the
welding operation, the groove as well as the adjacent parts shall be well cleaned for a length of
approx. 50 mm.
For single butt welds (in V, 1/2 V or U) and double butt welds (in K, double U etc.) the
rewelding of the root is mandatory but only the metal deposit on the root has been cleaned by
back gouging or chipping.
The welding seams shall be left to cool slowly. The contractor shall not be allowed to cool the
welds quickly by any other method.
For multi-layer welding, before welding the following layer, the formerly welded layer shall be
cleaned metal bright by light chipping and wire brushing. Backing strips shall not be allowed.
The order and method of welding shall be so that -

No unacceptable deformation appears in the welded parts.

Due margin is provided to compensate for contraction due to welding in order to avoid
any high permanent stresses.

The defects in welds must be rectified according to IS: 823 and as per instruction of Project
Manager.
9.5.8

Weld Inspection
The weld seams shall satisfy the following :
-

shall correspond to design shapes and dimensions.

shall not have any defects such as cracks, incomplete penetration and fusion, under-cuts,
rough surfaces, burns, blow holes and porosity etc. beyond permissible limits.

During the welding operation and approval of finished elements, inspections and tests shall
be made as shown in annexure-B.
The mechanical characteristics of the welded joints shall be as in IS: 823.
9.5.9

Preparation of Members for Bolting

The members shall be assembled for bolting with proper jigs and fixtures to sustain the
assemblies without deformation and bending.
Before assembly, all sharp edges, shavings, rust dirt, etc. shall be removed.
Before assembly, the contacting surfaces of the members shall be cleaned and given a coat of
primer as per IS: 2074.
The members which are bolt assembled shall be set according to drawings and temporarily
fastened with erection bolts (minimum 4 pieces) to check the coaxiality of the holes.
The members shall be finally bolted after the deviations have been corrected, after which
there shall not be gaps.
Before assembly, the members shall be checked and got approved by the Project Manager.

Page 139 of 304

The difference in thickness of the sections that are butt assembled shall not be more than 3%
or maximum 0.8 mm whichever is less. If the difference is larger, it shall be corrected by
grinding or filling.
Reaming of holes to final diameter or cleaning of these shall be done only after the parts have
been check assembled.
As each hole is finished to final dimensions (reamed if necessary) it shall be set and bolted up.
Erection bolts shall not be removed before other bolts are set.
9.5.10

Bolting up
Final bolting of the members shall be done after the defects have been rectified and approval
of joints obtained.
The bolts shall be tightened starting from the centre of joint towards the edge.

9.5.11

Planing of Ends
Planing of ends of members like column ends shall be done by grinding when so specified in
the design.
Planing of butt welded members shall be done after these have been assembled, the spare
edges shall be removed with grinding machines or files.
The following tolerances shall be permitted on member that have been planed.

9.5.12

On the length of the member having both ends planed, maximum + 2 mm with respect
to design.

Level differences of planed surfaces, maximum 0.3 mm.

Deviation between planed surface and member's axis maximum 1/1500.

Holes for Field Joints

Holes for field joints shall be drilled in the shop to final diameters and tested in the shop, with
trial assemblies.
When three-dimensional assembly is not possible in the shop, the holes for field joints may be
drilled in shop and reamed on site after erection, on approval by the Project Manager.
For bolted steel structures, trial assembly in shop is mandatory.
The tolerance for spacing of holes shall be + 1 mm.

9.5.13

Tolerances
All tolerances regarding dimensions, geometrical shapes and sections of steel structures, shall
be as per Annexure B, if not specified in the drawing.

9.5.14

Marking for Identification

All elements and members prior to despatch for erection shall be shop marked.
The members shall be visibly marked with a weather proof light coloured paint. The size and
thickness of the numbers shall be chosen as to facilitate the indentification of members.

Page 140 of 304

For the small members that are delivered in bundles or crates, the required marking shall be
done on small metal tags securely tied to the bundle, while the crates shall be marked directly.
Each bundle or crate shall be packed with members for one and the same assembly; in the
same bundle or crate, general utility members such as bolts, quests etc. may be packed.
All bill of materials showing weight, quality and dimension of contents shall be placed in the
crates.
The members shall be marked with a durable paint, in a visible location, preferably at one end
of the member so that these may be easily checked during storage and erection.
All members shall be marked in the shop before inspection and acceptance.
When the member is being painted, the marking area shall not be painted but bordered with
white paint.
The marking and job symbol shall be registered in all shop delivery documents
(transportation, for erection etc.)
9.5.15

Shop Test Pre-assembly

For steel structures that have the same type of welding the shop test pre-assembly shall be
performed on one out of every 10 members minimum.
For bolted steel structures, shop test pre-assembly is mandatory for all elements as well as for
the entire structure in conformity with Clause 5.12.

9.6

Shop Inspection and Approval

9.6.1

General
The Project Manager or their representative shall have free access at all responsible times to
the contractors fabrication shop and shall be afforded all reasonable facilities for satisfying
himself that the fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with drawings and
specifications.
Technical approval of the steel structure in the shop by the Project Manager is mandatory.
The contractor shall not limit the number and kinds of tests, final as well as intermediate
once, or extra tests required by the Project Manager.
The contractor shall furnish necessary tools, gauges, instruments etc. and technical nontechnical personnel for shop tests by the Project Manager, free of cost.

9.6.2

Shop Acceptance
The Project Manager shall inspect and approve at the following stages :
The following approvals may given in shop :
-

Intermediate approvals of work that cannot be inspected later.

Partial approvals

Final approvals

Intermediate approval of work shall be given when a part of the work is preformed later :
Page 141 of 304

Cannot be inspected later

Inspection would be difficult to perform and results would not be satisfactory.

Partial approval in the shop is given on members and assemblies of steel structures before the
primer coat is applied and includes :
-

Approval of materials
Approval of field joints
Approval of parts with planed surfaces
Test erection
Approval of members
Approval of markings
Inspections and approvals of special features, like Rollers, loading platform mechanism
etc.

During the partial approval, intermediate approvals as well as all former approvals, shall be
taken in to consideration.
9.6.3

Final approval in the Shop

The final approval refers to all elements and assemblies of the steel structures, with shop
primer coat, ready for delivery from shop to be loaded for transportation, or stored.
The final approval comprises of :
-

Partial approvals
Approval of shop primer coat
Approval of mode of loading and transport
Approval of storage (for materials stored)

9.7

Painting and Delivery

9.7.1

Preparation of parts for shop painting

Painting shall consist of providing one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer to steel
members before despatch from shop.
Primer coat shall not be applied unless :
-

Surface have been wire brushed, cleaned of dust, oil, rust etc.

Erection gaps between members, spots that cannot be painted or where moisture or
other aggressive agents may penetrate, have been filled with an approved type of oil and
putty.

The surface to be painted are completely dry.

The parts where water of aggressive agents may collect (during transportation, storage,
erection and operation) are filled with putty and provided with holes for drainage of
water.

Members and parts have been inspected and accepted

Welds have been accepted.

The following are not to be painted or protected by any other product :

Page 142 of 304

Surface which are in the vicinity of joints to be welded at site.

Surfaces bearing markings

Other surfaces indicated in the design.

The following shall be given a coat of hot oil or any approved resistant lubricant only.
-

Planed surfaces
Holes for links

The surfaces that are to be embedded or in contact with the concrete shall be given a cost of
cement wash.
The surfaces which are in contact with the ground, gravel or brick work and subject to
moisture, shall be given bituminous coat.
The other surfaces shall be given a primer coating.
Special attention shall be given to locations not easily accessible, where water can collect and
which after assembly and erection cannot be inspected, painted and maintained. Holes shall
be provided for water drainage and in accessible box type sections shall be hermetically sealed
by welds.
If specified elsewhere, in the schedule of quantities, the contractor shall paint further coats of
red-oxide after erection and placing in position of the steel structures.
9.7.2

Packing, transportation, delivery

After final shop acceptance and marking, the item shall be packed and loaded for
transportation.
Packing must be adequate to protect item against warping during loading and unloading.
Proper lifting devices shall be used for loading, in order to protect items against warping.
Slender projecting parts shall be braced with additional steel bars, before loading, for
protection against warping during transportation.
Loading and transportation shall be done in compliance with transportation rules.
If certain parts cannot be transported in the lengths stipulated in the design, the position and
type of additional splice joints shall be approved by the Project Manager.
Items must be carefully loaded on platforms of transportation means to prevent warping,
bending or falling during transportation.
The small parts such as fish-plates, quests etc. shall be securely tied with wire to their
respective parts.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be packed and transported in crates.
The parts shall be delivered in the order stipulated by the Project Manager and shall be
accompanied by document showing:
-

Quality and quantity of structure or members

Position of member in the structure
Page 143 of 304

Particulars of structure
Identification number job symbol.

9.8

Field Erection

9.8.1

The erection work shall be permitted only after the foundation or other structure over which
the steel work will be erected is approved and is ready for erection.

9.8.2

The contractor shall satisfy himself about the levels, alignment etc. for the foundations well in
advance, before starting the erection. Minor chipping etc. shall be carried out by the
contractor on his expense.

9.8.3

Any faulty erection done by the contractor shall be made good at his own cost.

9.8.4

Approval by the Project Manager or their representatives at any stage of work does not relieve
the contractor of any of his required guarantees of the contract.

9.8.5

Storage and preparation of parts prior to erection

The storage place for steel parts shall be prepared in advance and got approved by the Project
Manager before the steel structures start arriving from the shop.
A platform shall be provided by the Contractor near the erection site for preliminary erection
work.
The contractor shall make the following verifications upon receipt of material at site.
-

for quality certificates regarding materials and workmanship according to these general
specifications and drawings.
Whether parts received are complete without defects due to transportation, loading and
unloading and defects, if any, are well within the admissible limit.

For the above work sufficient space must be allotted in the storage area.
Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of items during unloading.
The parts shall be unloaded, stored and stored so as to be easily identified.
The parts shall be stored according to construction symbol and markings so that these may be
taken out in order or erection.
The parts shall be at least 150 mm clear from ground on wooden or steel blocks for
protection against direct contact with ground and to permit drainage of water.
If rectification of members like straightening etc. are required, these shall be done in a special
place allotted which shall be adequately equipped.
The parts shall be clean when delivered for erection.
9.8.6

Erection & Tolerances

Erection in general shall be carried out as required and approved by the Project Manager.
Positioning and levelling of the structure, alignment and plumbing of the stanchion and fixing
every member of the structure shall be in accordance with the relevant drawings and to the
complete satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The following checks and inspection shall be carried out before during and after erection.
Page 144 of 304

damage during transportation

accuracy of alignment of structures
erection according to drawings and specifications
progress and workmanship.

In case there be any deviations regarding positions of foundations or anchor bolts, which
would lead to erection deviations, the Project Manager shall be informed immediately. Minor
rectifications in foundations, orientation of bolts holes etc. shall be carried out as part of the
work, at no extra cost.
The various parts of the steel structure shall be so erected so to ensure stability against
inherent weight, wind and erection stresses.
The structure shall be anchored and final erection joints completed after plan and elevation
positions of the structural members have been verified with corresponding drawings and
approved by the Project Manager.
The bolted joints shall be tightened so that the entire surface of the bolt heads and nuts shall
rest on the member. For parts with sloping surfaces tapered washers shall be used.
9.9

Final acceptance and handing over the structure

9.9.1

At acceptance, the contractor shall submit the following documents :

-

Shop and erection drawings - either in tracings or reproducible.

4 copies of each of the following :

\\-

9.9.2

shop acceptance documents

quality certificate for structurals, plates, etc. (electrodes, welding wire, bolts,
nuts, washers etc.)
\List of certified welders who worked on erection of structures.
\acceptance and intermediate control procedure of erection operations.
Approval by the Project Manager at any stage of work does not relieve the contractor of
any of his required guarantees of the contract.

9.10

Method of Payments

9.10.1

Payment for steel work shall be made on basis of admissible weight of the structure accepted, the
weight being determined as described in such Clause 9.10.2 below :

The rate for supply, fabrication and erection, shall include cost of all handling and
transportation to Owner's store/site o work where supply and fabrication only are involved,
trimming, straightening, edge preparation, preparation and getting reviewed of fabrication
drawings, and providing one or more coat of Red-oxide zinc chromate primer as specified in
the schedule of quantity.
In the case, Owner supplies materials the rate shall include cost of steel materials taking
delivery of the materials, from owner's store all handling and rehandling, loading and
unloading, transport to site or work, returning of surplus materials to owner's stores etc.
complete as well as the cost of all handling and transport, scaffolding, temporary supports,
tools and tackles, touching up primer coat, grouting etc.
9.10.2

The actual lengths installed shall be measured and the weight of structural material/plate shall
be calculated wherever necessary on the basis of IS handbook. If sections are different from
IS section, then manufacturers handbook shall be adopted. No allowance in weights shall be
made for rolling tolerance.

Page 145 of 304

9.10.3

Sections built out of plates, structural shall be paid on the actual weight incorporated except
for gussets which will be paid on the weight of the smallest rectangle enclosing the shape. No
deductions shall be made for skew cuts in rolled steel sections.

9.10.4

Welds, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. shall not be measured. Rate for structural steel work shall be
deemed to include the same.

9.10.5

No other payment either for temporary works connected with this contract or for any other
item such as welds, shims, pacing plates etc. shall be made. Such item shall be deemed to
have been allowed for in the rate quoted for steel work.

9.11

Grouting of Pockets

9.11.1

Grouting of pockets and under base plates will be done only after the steel work has been
levelled and plumbed and the bases of stranchions are supported by steel shims. The space
below the base plate and pockets shall be thoroughly cleaned.

9.11.2

The mortar used for grouting shall not be leaner than 1:2 (1 cement : 2 sand) (grade 300 in
case of concrete) and shall be mixed to the minimum consistency required. It shall be poured
under suitable head and tamped until the space has been completely filled.

9.12

Tolerances allowed in the erection of plant building without cranes

The maximum tolerances for line and level of the steel work shall be + 3.00 mm on any part
of the structure. The structure shall not be out of plumb more than 3.5 mm on each 10 M.
section of height and not more than 7.0 mm per 30 M. section.
These tolerances shall apply to all parts of the structure unless the drawings issued for
erection purposes state otherwise.

9.13

Rolling Shutters
Rolling shutters shall be in extruded MS sections, of approved make, type and finish. These
shutters shall be complete with locking arrangements, hoods, guides, pulling devices, springs
and other accessories. Wherever specified, mechanical device shall be fixed for easy operation
of the shutters. (Rolling shutters as per CPWD Specification Volume -1, Clause No. 10.8,
Page No. 564).

9.14

Steel Door / Window

Hot rolled steel sections for fabrication of steel doors, windows, ventilators and fixed lights
shall conform to IS : 7452. Shapes weights and designations of hot rolled sections shall be as
per IS : 7452. Appendix D of Chapter 10 (CPWD specification 2000) indicates the purpose
or the situation where the sections are normally used. Tolerance in thickness of the sections
shall be +0.2mm including provisions of lugs or anchoring strips, both for RCC and
Brickwork backing.

9.14.1

The steel doors and windows shall be according to the specified sizes and design. The size of
doors and windows shall be calculated, so as to allow 1.25 cm clearance on all the four sides
of opening to allow for easy fitting of doors windows and ventilators into opening. The
actual sizes of doors, windows and ventilators shall not vary by more than +1.5mm from
those given in the drawing.

9.14.2

Fabrication

9.14.2.1

Frames
Both the fixed and opening frames shall be made of sections which have been cut to length
and metered. The corner of fixed and opening frames shall be welded to form a solid fused
welded joint conforming to the requirements given below. All frames shall be square and flat.
Page 146 of 304

The process of welding adopted shall be flash butt welding. The section for glazing shall be
tennoned and riveted into the frames and where they intersect the vertical tie shall be
broached and horizontal tee threads through it, and the intersection closed by hydraulic
pressure.
Requirements of welded joints
i)

Visual Inspection Test

When two opposite corners of the frame are cut, paint removed and inspected, the joint shall
conform to the following:
a) Welds should have been made all along the place of meeting the members and tack
welding shall not be permitted.
b) Welds should have been properly grounded and
c) Complete cross section of the corner shall be checked up to see that the joint is
completely solid and there are no cavaties visible.

ii)

Micro and Macro Examinations

From the two opposite corners obtained for visual test, the flanges of the sections shall be cut
with the help of the sections shall be cut with the help of a saw. The cut surface of the
remaining portions shall be polished, etched and examined. The polished and etched faces of
the weld and the base metal shall be free from cracks and reasonably free from under cutting,
overlaps, gross porosity and entrapped slag.

iii)

Fillet Weld Test

The fillet weld in the remaining portion of the joint shall be fractured by hammering. The
fractured surfaces shall be free from slag inclusion porosity, crack penetration defects and
fusion defects.

9.14.2.2

Door
The hinges shall be of 50mm projecting type, Non projecting type hinges may also be used if
approved by the Project Manager. The hinge pin shall be of electro-galvanized steel or
aluminium alloy of suitable thickness and size. Door handles shall be approved by the Project
Manager. A suitable latch lock for door openable both from inside and outside shall be
provided.
In the case of double doors, the first closing leaf shall be the left hand leaf locking at the door
from the push side. The first closing shutter shall have a concealed steel bolt at top and
bottom. The bolts shall be so constructed as not to work loose or drop by its own weight.
Single and double shutter door may be provided with a three way bolting device. Where the
device is provided in the case of double shutters, concealed brass or steel bolts shall not be
provided.

9.14.2.3

Windows
a)
b)

For fixed windows, the frames shall be fabricated as per relevant CPWD specification
2000.
Side hung windows.

For fixing steel hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frame and hinges inserted inside and
welded to the frame at the back . The hinges shall be of projecting type with thickness not less
than 3.15 mm and length not less than 65mm and width not more than 25mm. Nonprojecting type hinges may also be allowed if approved by the Project Manager. The diameter
Page 147 of 304

of hinge pins shall not be less than 6mm. The hinge pin and washer shall be of galvanised
steel or aluminium alloy of suitable thickness.
For fixing hinges to inside frame, the method described above may be adopted but the weld
shall be cleaned, or the holes made in the inside frame and hinge revetted.
The handle of side hung shutters shall be pressed brass, cast brass, aluminium or steel
protected against rusting and shall be mounted on a steel plate. Thickness of handle shall not
be less than 3 mm incase of steel or brass and 3.5mm in ase of aluminium. The handle plate
shall be welded, screwed and/or revetted to the opening frame in such a manner that it should
be fixed before the shutter is glazed and should not be easily removable after glazing.
The handle shall have a two point nose which shall engage with a brass or aluminium alloy
striking plate on the fixed frame in a slightly opened position as well as closed position. The
boss of handle shall incorporate a friction device to prevent the handle shall incorporate a
friction device to prevent the handle from dropping under its own weight and the assembly
shall be so designed that the rotation of the handle may not cause it to unscrew from the pin.
The height of the handle plate in each type of standard windows will be as specified.
Otherwise it shall be at a height of 3/8 of the height of shutter, from its bottom. The strike
plate shall be so designed and fixed in such a position in relation to the handle that with the
later bearing against its stop, there shall be adequately tight fit between the casement and outer
frames.
In case where no friction type hinges are provided, the window shall be fitted with peg stays
which shall be either of black oxidised steel, pressed or cast brass or as specified, 300mm long
with steel peg and locking brackets. The pegs stay shall have three holes to open the side
hung casement in three different angles. The peg stay shall be of minimum thickness 2mm in
case of brass or aluminium and 1.25mm in case of steel. Where specified friction hinges shall
be provided. Side hung shutters fitted with friction hinges shall not be provided with a peg
stay.
If specified, side hung shutters maybe fitted with an internal removable fly proof screen in a
1.25mm thick sheet steel frame to the outer frame of the shutter by brass turn buckless at the
jambs, and brass tuds at the sill to allow the screen being readily removed. The windows with
removable fly proof screen shall be fitted with a through the screen level operator at the
sill level to permit the operation of the shutter through an angle of 90o without having to
remove the fly proof screen. The lever shall permit keeping the shutter open in minium three
different position.
9.14.2.4

Ventilators

a)

Top Hung Ventilators

The steel butt hinges for top hung ventilators shall be riveted to the fixed frame or welded to
it at the back after cutting a slot in it. Hinges to the opening frame shall be revetted or
welded.
Top hung ventilators shall be provided with a peg stay with three holes which when closed
shall be held tightly by the locking bracket. The locking bracket shall either be fitted to the
fixed frames or to the window.

b)

Centre Hung Ventilators

Central hung ventilators shall be hung on two pairs of brass or aluminium cup pivots as
specified, riveted to the inner and outer frames of ventilators to permit the ventilator shutter
to swing to an angle of approx. 85o. The opening portion of the ventilators shall be so
balanced that it remains open at any desired angle under normal weather conditions.
Page 148 of 304

9.15

Glazing

9.15.1

Specifications as described shall apply. The glass panes shall have square corners and straight
edges. The glass panes shall be so cut that it fits slightly loose in the frames. In doors,
windows, clerestory windows of bath, WC and lavatories frosted glass panes shall be used.

9.15.2

Glazing shall be provided on the outside of the frame unless otherwise specified. Putty of
approved make conforming to IS:419 shall be used for fixing glass panes. Putty shall be
applied between glass panes and glazing bars. Putty shall then be applied over the glass pane,
which shall stop 2 to 3 mm from the sight line of the back rebate to enable the painting to be
done upto the sight line to seal the edge of the putty to the glass. The oozed out putty shall
be cleaned and from putty cut to straight line. Quantity of putty shall not be less than 185
gm/metre of glass perimeter. Putty shall be painted within 2 to 3 weeks, after glazing is fixed
to avoid its cracking.
Note: Putty may be prepared by mixing one part of the white lead with three parts of finely
powdered chalk and then adding boiled linseed oil to the mixture to from a stiff paste and
adding varnish to the past at the rate of 1 litre of varnish to the paste at the rate of 1 litre of
varnish to 18 kg of paste.

9.15.3

Minimum Six glazing clips to be provided per glass pane of all types. In case of doors,
windows and ventilators without horizontal glazing bars, the glazing clips may be spaced,
according to the slots, in the vertical members provided the spacing does not exceed 30cm
otherwise the spacing shall be 30cm.
Note: Where large size glass panes are required to be used or where the door window is
located in heavily exposed situation, holes for glazing clips have to be drilled prior to
fabrication and cannot be done at any later stages.

9.15.4

Where specially stipulated, fixing of glass panes may be done with metal or wooden beading
instead of mere putty. Where beading are proposed to be used, the manufacturers shall be
intimated in advance to drill holes for hard screws. Usually beads shall be fixed with screws
spaced not more than 10 cm from each corner and the intermediate not more than 20 cm
apart. When glass panes are fixed with wooden or metal beading having mitred joints, a thin
layer of putty shall be applied between glass panes and sash bars and also between glass panes
and the beading.
Where metal beading is specified extra payment shall be made on this account.

9.16

T-Iron / Angle Iron Doors Frames

T-iron / Angle Iron doors, frames shall be manufactured from uniform mild steel tee section
/ angle section. The steel shall be of approved grade. The frames shall be got fabricated in
approved workshop as approved by the Project Manager. Provisions of lugs or anchoring
strips, both for RCC and Brickwork backing.

9.16.1

The sizes of door frames shall be as per drawing or as decided by the Project Manager. MS tie
bar of 10mm dia shall be welded at bottom of the frame. The size of doors shall be calculated
so as to allow 12.5mm clarance on all sizes to allow an easy fittings in opening. The actual
size of doors, windows and ventilators shall not vary by more than +/- 2mm than those
shown in the drawing.
The size of T-section / Angle section used for manufacture of doors, windows and ventilators
shall not be less than those specified in IS:1038. Unless otherwise directed by the Project
Manager.

9.16.2

Fabrications

Page 149 of 304

The frame shall be constructed in section which has been cut to length and metered. The
corners of the frames shall be butt welded to form a true and right angle. All frames shall be
square and flat.
The T-section / Angle section shall be mitre joined and continuously butt welded all along.

9.16.3

Fittings
Requisite number of holes shall be made in the frame for fixing of fittings. Detailed
arrangements of fixing fittings shall be as shown. All fittings shall be fillet welded to T-iron /
Angle iron frame all along the periphery of contact.
Butt hinges shall be fixed to the frame as below:

i)

MS flat of size 100mm x 25mm x 6mm will be welded with fillet weld all along the periphery
of contact on the rear side of the web of T-iron / Angle iron to receive the hinges. Requisite
number of holes shall be made in T-iron / Angle iron frame and MS flat for fixing of hinges
with counter sunk steel screws as shown.

ii)

An alternate method of fixing butt hinges can be adopted by fillet welding the hinge to the Tiron / Angle iron frame on three sides. No welding shall be done along the hinge pin to allow
free movement of butt hinges as shown.

9.16.4

Fixing Procedure
Fixing procedure for T-iron / Angle iron doors, windows and ventilator frames in masonry
opening shall be as shown in the drawing.

9.17

Gypsum Board False Ceiling

9.17.1

Products
A

Manufactures

Manufacturer : Indian Gypsum Ltd. or approved equivalent, for gypsum board and
all accessories, suspension systems, finishing coats etc.

9.17.1.1

Gypsum Board
A

General : Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to

minimise end to end joints.

1.

Thickness : Gypsum board in thickness indicated, in 12.5mm thickness to comply with

ASTMC 840 for application system and support spacing indicated.

9.17.1.2

Trim Accessories

9.17.1.3

Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation : G.I. corner beads, edge trim
and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 to be provided as per requirements
and drawings.
Gypsum Board Joint treatment Materials

Page 150 of 304

General : Materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840 and recommendations
of manufacturer or both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application
indicated.

Joint Tape : Paper reinforcing tape.

Setting Type Joint Compounds : Factory Pre-packaged,

hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated.

9.17.2

Execution

9.17.2.1

Installation of G.I. Steel Framing

job-mixed,

chemical

Hangers to be secured to structural support by connecting directly to structure where

possible, otherwise to be connected to cast-in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices
fasteners as required.

Hangers are not to be connected or suspended from steel framing from ducts, pipes or
conduits.

To keep hangers and braces 50mm clear of ducts, pipes and conduits.

To install suspended steel framing components in size and at spacing indicated but not less
than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.

Installation Tolerances : To install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so

that cross furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 3mm in 4M as
measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as
indicated.

Grid Suspension System: Perimeter wall track or angle not to touch where grid suspension
system meets vertical surfaces, suspended from structure above. Mechanically join main
beam and cross furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. Wall track
to be free moving from vertical wall surfaces.

For exterior soffits to provide cross-bracing and additional framing indicated or required to
resist wind uplift.

For isolated ceilings to hold perimeter 12mm away from adjacent partitions to prevent
flanking. The openings are to be sealed with compressible weather strip type edge seal to
allow vertical movement.

9.17.2.2 Application and finishing of Gypsum Board, General

A

Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: shall be to comply with ASTM C
840.

To install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless
readily installed after board has been installed.

To locate exposed end-butt joints as far from centre of walls and ceilings as possible, and
stagger not less than 600mm in alternate courses of board.

Page 151 of 304

To install ceiling boards across traming in the manner which minimize the number of
end-butt joints, and which avoids end joints central area of each ceiling. Stagger end
joints at least 600mm.

To attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional
support at openings and cutouts.

9.18

Armstrong False Ceiling

9.18.1

Armstrong Acoustical Suspended Ceiling System shall be done as detailed below :

9.18.2

TILES:
Mineral Fiber Acoustical Tiles with crisp finely granulated surface shall be of Armstrong
(Tegular edge/Micro) suitable for grids of specified sizes as per specifications below :-

9.18.3

Type

Prima Dune Plus /Prima Fine

Fissured

Humidity Resistance

RH 95

Fire Performance

Class 0 /class 1 (BS - 476)

Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC)

0.50 (Average)

Sound Attenuation

34 db

Light Reflectance

85%

Thermal Conductivity
(K Value)

0.052 - 0.057 w/m c

Acoustical Punchers

24000 (10mm deep)

SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Suspension system shall be Armstrong Prelude XL / TL Trulok F24 exposed grid Tsection. Flanges exposed face shall be powder coated colour white.
Suspension system (Hot Dipped galvanised steel) sections consisting of the following
members :
a)

Main Runner - Main Runner shall be T-shaped section with single rotary stitching made
from 0.33mm thick GS sheet and of size 24mm x 38mm and 3.60mm long.

b)

Cross Runner

c)

i)

Cross Runner T-shaped with double rotary stitching made from 0.25mm thick
GS sheet and of size 24mm x 30mm and 1.20m long.

ii)

Cross Runner T-shaped section made from 0.25mm thick GS sheet and of size
24mm x 25mm and 0.60m long.

Perimeter Section - Perimeter wall angle made from 0.45m thick GS sheet and of size
22mm x 22mm and 3.00m long, colour white.

Page 152 of 304

LIST OF CODES
The materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the requirement of the appropriate IS code
wherever applicable together with any building regulations or bye-laws governing the works.
The following list is included for guidance only and the omission from the list does not relieve the
contractor from compliance there with:
IS 1200
IS 269
IS 3812, 1981
IS 2386
IS 516

:
:

IS 1077, 1970

IS 456
IS 1597
IS 1597 PART 1
IS 1130
IS 287

:
:
:
:
:

IS 1141
IS 6313 PART 2

:
:

IS 2571
IS : 226
IS : 451
IS : 800
IS : 806
IS : 813
IS : 814
IS : 816

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

IS : 822

IS : 961
IS 73
IS 702
IS 1322
IS 1609
IS 13711 & 13712
IS 13630 Part 1 to 13
IS 104
IS 137

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

IS 5410
IS 6241
IS 2720

:
:
:

:
:

Mode of measurement.
Ordinary portland cement.
Flyash for use as pozzolana and admixtures,
Method of test for aggregate for concrete.
Method of test for strength of concrete
Coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete.
Method of test for Bricks.
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
Code of practice for construction of stone masonry.
Code of practice for construction of rubble stone masonry.
Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles)
Recommendation for maximum permissible moisture contents of Timber used
for different purposes.
Code of practice for seasoning of timber.
Anti-termite measures in buildings, pre-constructional chemical treatment
measures.
Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring
Structural Steel (Standard Quality)
Technical Supply Conditions for Wood Screws
Code of Practice for Use of Structural Steel in General Building Construction
Code of Practice for Use of Steel Tubes in General Building Construction
Scheme of Symbols for Welding
Covered Electrodes for Metal Arc Welding of (part I & II) Structural Steel
Code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in
Mild Steel
Code of Practice for Inspection of Welds
Structural Steel (High Tensile)
Paving bitumen.
Industrial Bitumen
Bitumen felts for waterproofing and damp proofing.
Code of practice for laying damp proof treatment using bitumen felts.
Ceramic tiles
Testing for Ceramic tiles
Specification for ready mixed painted, brushing, zinc chrome, priming.
Ready mixed paint, brushing, matt or egg-shell flat, finishing, interior to Indian
standard colour as required.
Cement paint, colour as required.
Method of test for determination of stripping value of road aggregate.
Density test of aggregate.

Page 153 of 304

PREAMBLE TO SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL

The conditions of contract and the drawings shall be read in conjunction with the specifications and
matters referred to, shown or described in one are not necessarily repeated in the other. These
specifications are comprehensive but may exceed the requirements of this project. Any ambiguity
between the General Specifications, the Bill of quantities and contract drawings, shall be referred to the
Project Manager for clarification not later than 10 days before the date fixed for delivery of Tenders. Any
ambiguity may be referred to the Project Manager after signing of the contract and Project Manager shall
give a ruling which shall prevail. No claim for additional cost due to above, however, will be entertained.
Notwithstanding the sub-division of the specification into various headings, every part of it is to be
deemed supplementary to every other part and is to be read with it, so far as it may be practicable so to
do, or when the context so admits.
In this contract, reference is made to the Indian Standards or CPWD specification as approved by
Project Manager and these references shall be deemed to include the latest editions or issue of standards,
specifications or By-Law including all revisions upto the date of invitation of Tenders. The contractor
shall ensure that all materials and workmanship in so far as they apply to this contract shall comply in
every specifications or any other equivalent or specification approved by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall keep at site copies of all relevant standards and codes of practice referred in these
specifications throughout the period of contract. These shall be the latest editions and shall include all
revisions/addendums thereof.
Approved Manufacturers: Names of approved manufacturers are given in the specifications.
Reference in the specifications to approved manufacturers shall be construed as establishing a standard of
quality and not as limiting competition.
The Contractor shall include in his prices for supplying the item or materials from the approved
manufacturers listed or equal and approved.
All items or materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturers original unopened containers with
the manufacturers brand and name clearly marked on.
All items or materials shall be assembled, mixed, fixed, applied or otherwise incorporated in the works in
accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer of the item or materials.
Date of construction to be written on all respective items for monitoring curing.
Contractor shall follow the pour card/check list for all the concrete/finishing items on prescribed
formats.

Page 154 of 304

1. 0 SITE DEVELOPMENT AND EARTH WORK

The rate of items in this section to include:

1. Measurement of excavation for payment shall be recorded only for the plan dimensions of the bedding
concrete (PCC under foundation) provided in the structure drawings. Excavation for working space and
slopes for soil stability shall not be measured and paid.
2. Stacking of excavated earth within the site including handling & rehandling.
3. Site clearance such as clearing of shrubs, brushwood, undergrowth, roots and small trees not exceeding
30cm in girth measured at 1m above ground.
4. Setting out the work, profiles, bench marks etc.
5. Excavation either straight or curved in plan or to any desired shape or slope.
6. Provision of adequate barriers, Signages, lighting, and gangways across excavated area open trenches etc.
for protection of workmen and public.
7. Getting out and throwing spoil clear of area being excavated or disposing clear of edge of excavation to
avoid falling in, as directed by the Project Manager.
8. Trimming all sides, plumb and square, levelling all bottoms, clearing out loose earth, slips and falls from
excavations before concreting.
9. Work at all depths and locations, unless otherwise specified.
10. Necessary shoring, strutting, battening, benching. Contractor to submit methodology & design.
11. Signing guarantee Performa for anti-termite treatment i.e. satisfactory performance for minimum of 10
years from the date of final completion of project in an approved proforma. The guarantee shall be
executed and extended by the Contractor and not by the anti-termite agency.
12. Conducting laboratory or field test for soil compaction.
13. Compacted volume of earth shall be measured for payment at true location of filling/ back filling.
14. All excavated material shall be the property of the owner or otherwise as specified in the Items.
15. Excavation and disposal for basement shall be done by mechanical means and equipment.
16. Manual dressing to achieve the final level as directed by structural Consultant.
17. Royalty & other taxes payable to authorities.
18. Dismantling & disposal of any structure / construction in excavation area found during excavation.
19. Compliance with all stipulation of technical specification.

Page 155 of 304

2.0 CONCRETE WORKS (PLAIN AND RCC)

The rates for all items under this section include :
1. Generally all concrete work shall be as per IS-456 (latest edition) characteristic strength (28 days) shall be
20 N/sq. mm, 25 N/Sq mm, 30 N/Sq mm and 35N/sqmm as may be specified on drawings. The rate
of all items to include for mix designs for various strengths and workability and routine cube testing at
various stages for strength as required. Cost of concrete admixtures is included in the quoted rates, the
use of which shall be approved by the Project Manager. The rates shall include for providing all materials,
mixing, placing, compacting, cutting, finishing, placing inserts, holding down bolts and flanges, sleeves,
puddle flanges, embedding all services pipes, boxes, hooks etc. as shown in drawings at correct location
level with required changes in form work, reinforcement etc., complete. All RCC works and all concrete
shall be machine vibrated. Formwork and reinforcement are measured separately. All concrete shall be
with 20mm and down graded nominal size stone aggregates except specified otherwise. Curing of the
concrete shall be as per IS-456 (Latest Edition). All RCC work will be measured and paid as laid,
quantity for both the case by using RMC or by using cast in situ concrete with batching plant. No
payment will be made according to the supply quantity.
2. The rate of reinforcement work shall include for unloading, handling/ storing clearing of rust,
straightening, bending and placing, binding, fixing in proper position at any height/level with 18 gauge
annealed binding wires, necessary chairs, spacer bars, wastage and cement mortar cover blocks at proper
positions to maintain proper cover as per IS-456 (Latest Edition). Reinforcement shall be bent in
accordance with IS-2502.
3. Inverted cantilever, Circular / Curved, offsets, Projection, fins, bands, nibs and sloping members on slab,
beams, columns, staircase including drilling, cutting, bonding agent complete to the satisfaction of Project
Manager .
4. Holes and openings in RCC slab/walls, parapet, masonry works, pockets in machine foundation, beam,
parapets, for rainwater pipe or spouts and plumbing pipes shall be left at the time of concrete casting or
raising masonry and making good after fixing fixtures.
5. If in the opinion of the Project Manager, any surface other than specified for obtaining patterns in
exposed surface in concrete under specific items, is asked to be left unrendered and painted, then the
item will not be measured as item concerning exposed surface and no extra for any reason will be
allowed.
6. Jointing new work with the existing concrete/brickwork including shuttering and approved bonding
agent for construction joints.
7. Reinforcement shall be paid separately by weight actually placed in position as per the bar bending
schedule, to be prepared by the contractor and approved by the Project Manger. The weight shall be
taken as per IS Code for the particular diameter. Rates quoted for reinforcement shall include for cutting,
bending, binding the reinforcement bars in any shape, hoisting to all leads and lifts and placing in any
position as per detailed drawings, including providing precast cement concrete cover blocks of required
thickness for keeping bars in position. 18 gauge annealed binding wire for tying for reinforcement shall
be provided by the contractor. The contractor should cover for this in his overall rate for the
reinforcement rates including removing rust, Mill scales, oil, grease, paint etc. from reinforcing bars.
8. Generally in items for form work rate to include for form work, centring, shuttering, boxing propping
including special nuts, bolts etc. in perfect line, level, plumb and if required to provide camber, slope and
removal thereof. Colourless shuttering oil or grease of approved quality shall be applied to forms before
placing steel. Rate to include for any shapes including offsets/ chamfering in columns, residues, grooves,
drip moulds, irregular shapes etc. Mode of measurement shall be in sqm regardless of shape, size and
thickness of members. Stripping time for the formwork, centring and dropping shall be as per IS-456
(Latest Edition).
9. Work at all heights, depths & levels irrespective of individual storey.
10. Work in narrow widths, Piece meal/ small work, screeding under floor etc.
11. All staging upto any height and scaffolding work shall comprise of MS Pipes/ Structural steel sections
with necessary coupling arrangement. (NO WOODEN BALLIES / PROPS WILL BE PERMITTED).
Page 156 of 304

Adequate size foundation blocks / base plates shall be provide below staging members to disperse the
loads as per the founding strata.
12. Contractor shall set up on site concrete pump, hoists, tower cranes, passenger elevator, automatic
microchips controlled Batching plant of capacity 10 cum per hour or more complete with silos/ stock
piles for cement and aggregates, and also a D.G. set to be provided for uninterrupted supply of concrete.
Use of batching plant for all concrete work is mandatory.
13. Providing grooves, drip moulds, moulds, chamfers, curved surfaces, and ornamental works in RCC
members as per drawing and finishing to specified shape.
14. Forming all expansion and / or construction joints as directed.
15. Contractor to consider in his quoted rates the necessary arrangement e.g. providing and fixing of required
quantity of woven mesh at the junction of Beam and Column or any other RCC members to separate
two different grade of concrete mixes. No payment shall be made for over flowed richer mix of one
RCC member into the other.
16. Use of greater than minimum specified quantities of cement to achieve specified or required mix design.
17. Use of plasticiser / super plasticiser (approved by Project Manager) and / or additional cement for
pumpable concrete.
18. Non-destructive test for defective concrete as directed by Project Manager, and their remedial measures
thereof.
19. Leaving dowels for anchorage of brickwork and other RCC members.
20. Mix designing and testing of all the ingredients of concrete from approved laboratory for each grade,
pumpable & non-pumpable concrete.
21. Compliance with all requirements of technical specification.

Page 157 of 304

3.0 MASONRY WORKS:

The rates for all items under this section to include:
1. All scaffolding, platforms, ladders, staging and plant required in the execution of work to any height or
depth and lift.
2. Hacking and roughening of concrete or other surfaces in contact with masonry for bondage.
3. Leaving out dowels from concrete members for anchorage.
4. Labour providing in beam bed blocks of concrete.
5. Rough cutting and waste.
6. Levelling up and preparing tops of walls for damp proof courses, plinth beams, precast units etc.
7. Raking out joints to specified depths either for plaster or pointing or finishing the joints flush as the work
proceeds, as directed.
8. Bedding and pointing wall planes, cills, lintels etc. in or on walls, bedding and pointing drops, window
and like structures in cement mortar.
9. Forming chases for edges of concrete floors or other units, for sealing in or other waterproofing layers
etc.
10. Holes (cut and formed or left), for fixing pipes, bolts and other inserts and making good including
grouting if necessary.
11. Building in holdfasts and such other inserts.
12. Work in steps, pillars (round and squared) and also in circular work.
13. Keeping the work well wetted for ten days.
14. Work at all heights, depths and locations, unless otherwise mentioned.
15. Work in parts / joining old / new work including, toothing applying cement slurry etc complete.
16. Washing and cleaning of brick surface with such chemical as are deemed necessary by the Project
Manager for any efflorescence observed in the brick work.
17. Opening for exhaust fan/ rain water pipes/ spouts etc as shown in drawing and/ or as directed at site.
No deduction for such opening shall be made.
18. Layout and layout course with flat brick/brick on edge / string coarse wherever required.
19. Any efflorescence observed in Brick Work should be watched on with clean water and treated with such
chemicals as are deemed necessary by Project Manager. The Brick Work shall be dismantled if deemed
necessary by Project Manager and rebuilt with new bricks including making good all disturbed and
damaged work.
20. Providing & laying of Hoop Iron as per specifications..
21 Rate to include for any shapes, fins, projections, shafts, Work in narrow widths, Piece meal/ small work
etc. Peace meal work necessitated by coordination & requiring of work of other agencies.
22 Compliance with requirements of technical specification

Page 158 of 304

4.0 WATER PROOFING:

Waterproofing work shall be carried out by the specialise agency as approved by Architect/ Project
Manager.
The rate of all relevant items of water-proofing covered under this section to include:
1. Cleaning, smooth rendering and preparation of surface for laying waterproofing, insulation and other
treatments.
2. All cutting, trimming, dressing and waste.
3. Treatment of down take pipes, and other obstructions as shown.
4. Providing 50x50, size chase in wall, parapets etc. at height as shown in the drawing from floor finish level
for tucking ends of vertical layers of the treatment, filling up the chase with cement mortar 1:4 and
preparing a drip mould as per detailed drawing just above the chase.
5. Sealing all joints, corners, junctions of pipes and masonry/ concrete with epoxy putty.
6. Curing/ wetting the surface at least for 10days and gunny bags to be spread wherever required before
applicant of subsequent coat.
7. Work in narrow widths, junctions and at all locations as shown.
8. Work at all heights and depths.
9. 72 hours Pond testing of treated areas to the satisfaction of Project Manager.
10. Signing guarantee as per approved Performa for waterproofing treatment for 10 years from the date of
final completion on non judicial stamp paper. The guarantee shall be executed & extended by the
contractor and not by the water proofing agency.
11. Hydro testing for under ground and over head water tanks. The contractor shall get water tanks tested
against any leakage by filling the tanks with water and maintaining it for seven days upto free board
including cost of water, all necessary arrangements required for filling and emptying the tank after testing.
12. Mode of Measurements.
a)

Terrace
All measurements will be for roof area only as measured on plan and no additional
area for vertical tucking/embedding upto 300mm hight from top of finish,
providing and making gola, khurrah where ever required shall not be paid extra.
The contractors rate will be inclusive of all these to make the work complete in all
respect as per specifications of drawing.

b)

Toilet blocks
Floor: Area of the toilet blocks shall be measured by length x breadth between wall.
Vertical side. The actual area treated shall be measured by length x height.

c)

Injection Treatment
Floor: The total area of raft/ floor including the area below walls and projections
and projections of treatment, if any shall be measured.

d)

Walls: Actual area treated shall be measured.

13.

Compliance with requirement of technical specifications.

Page 159 of 304

5.0

WOOD WORKS:

The rates for all items under this section include :

1. All timber shall be of Ist class quality as described and indicated on drawings and schedules, shall be
uniform in texture, free from large loose heads or cluster knots, injurious open shakes, bore holes, soft or
spongy spots, hollow pockets and all other defects and blemishes. The size shown or described are to be
taken as net sizes when finished, and cubic contents of wood as actually fixed would be measured.
2. All framing and other concealed wood members shall be sound wood or approved specials and shall be
well seasoned. Wood more than 12% moisture content shall not be used in any part of the structure.
3. All joints shall be approved by Project mangers and according to the best practice. All joinery work shall
be glued with best quality synthetic waterproof adhesive Fevicol or equivalent make as approved.
4. All woodwork in contact with masonry/ R.C.C shall be painted with approved antitermite paint before
placing in position. Care shall be taken to keep the exposed surface clear. All concealed wood members
shall be painted with applying Anti-termite paint.
5. Fixing the frames by using holdfasts, anchor fasteners, screws, nut and bolts etc.
6.

The work shall have to be executed at all heights and levels.

7.

Compliance with requirements of technical specification.

Page 160 of 304

6.0

FLOORING/ CLADDING WORKS:

(The rates for all items under this section include) :

1. Use and waste of all temporary fillets, side forms, templates, moulds, straight edges etc.
2. Final preparation of the base, sub-grade or sub-floor including trimming of the base to remove all
undulations including chipping or filling with concrete/ cement mortar, if necessary.
3. Cleaning and watering the surface immediately before laying the floor.
4. Providing bedding layer of mortar as specified, in the case of slabs, tiles etc. to correct levels and slopes as
called for.
5. Cutting, Rubbing and Tinoxide (mirror) polishing. Rounding of corners, edges, and junctions of floor
with skirting or dado.
6. Necessary cutting for Electrical switch boxes/ lift boxes, sinks, mixers, taps, gratings/floor trap jali etc
and all other Electrical and Plumbing fixtures as deemed necessary by Project Manager.
7. Providing and applying silicon sealant between the joints of floor & dado, around bath tub, kitchen sink,
wash basin etc.
8. Forming rounded recess in the floor where called for.
9. Providing grooves chamfering, moulding, noising, edge polishing etc where shown in the drawings.
10. Work in narrow widths, bands, architraves, curved surfaces, set backs, offsets, (any geometric pattern)
pattern and design at all heights and locations, unless otherwise mentioned.
11. Curing, protecting and cleaning all surfaces as specified.
12. Leaving or chasing recess for skirting to match with plaster surface, bends, steps etc. on walls/ concrete
and making them good after finishing of the wall.
13. Payment shall be made only for the finished dimension actually measured at site of work.
14. Matching grains/veins for different finishing items.
15. Protection (in required manner) & precaution to avoid any damage of flooring, dado, risers, treads etc.
Any damage shall be repaired at contractors expenses.
16. Cost of pre polishing (Tinoxide)/mirror wherever pre polished stones are specified.
17. No work shall be started until the concealed piping drains etc, are laid by other agencies. Prior to
commencing any finishing surfaces, levels and the slopes to drains shall be got approved, in writing by
the Project Manger. Further to do so may result in demolishing the finished surface and redoing the
work, all at contractors expenses
18. Laying floors to required slope in any size and shape of panels, pattern & design of panels. The strips
shall not be paid for separately.

19. Fixing of clamp shall be with fastner (as approved by Project Manager) in case of RCC and in Brick

Work pocket (100mmX75mmX75mm) shall be made and filled by non-shrinkage compound (as
approved by Project Manager). The size and design of the cramp and fastener shall be to suite site
requirement and shall be approved by the Project Manager.

20. Work shall be carried out at any elevations all heights, levels, leads and lifts.
21. Use of all scaffolding and cradles, dust seats and other coverings for fittings, furniture, floors etc. (for all
heights and locations).

22. Painting and Polishing on stone/wood/structural steel prior to handing over.

Page 161 of 304

23. Cladding in toilets and kitchen to be as per the pattern shown in drawings. To facilitate the work and its
accuracy providing tile module and marking of location coordinates for electrical and plumbing fixtures
in each toilet & kitchen.
24. The flooring stone / tile shall be taken continuously over the floor traps and cleanout plugs the location
of which shall be clearly marked / engraved on the floor. The cut outs shall be made for fixing jali after
completion the floor polish.
25. Compliance with requirements of technical specification.

Page 162 of 304

7.0

FINISHING WORKS:

The rates for all items under this section include :

1. Making all construction and expansion joints, curving, curing.
2. Making grooves of any pattern as per drawings or as directed by the Project Manger in plaster and
dados including rounding of junctions with floors.
3. In case of wall plaster, dado and skirting, raking out joints, cleaning the surfaces, application of cement
slurry, applying plaster, skirting and dado treatment unless otherwise specified.
4. Work on patches, narrow widths, small quantities, curved surfaces, projected/ resets bands, setbacks,
offsets, corbels, architraves etc.
5. Extra thickness of plaster over indentations etc.
6. Repairing and finishing the junctions of skirting and dado, with relevant mortar/finish.
7. Finishing the chases, edges of electrical fittings and boxes etc.
8. Use of all scaffolding and cradles, dustsheets and other coverings for the protection of fixtures, fittings,
furniture, floors etc. (for all heights and locations).
9. Grooves, bands in plaster, on RCC bands, drip coarse etc. in plaster works as per directions.
10. Cleaning of paint splashes, drops or dirt, glasses, joinery, electric fittings etc., including washing the
floor and leaving the premises neat and clean.
11. Work shall be carried out at any elevations all heights, levels, leads, lifts.
12. Enamel paint/ melamine polish application by compressed spray method. All other paint shall be
finished with roller.
13. Cutting line of two different finishes should be in straight line or as shown in drawing, bands
wherever required.
14. Providing and fixing 300mm wide chicken wire mesh with GI screw and washers at the junctions of
two different materials and on all chasing for electrical & plumbing conduits, pipes etc.
15. Cost of waterproofing compound wherever mentioned in Bill of Quantities.
16. Compliance with requirements of technical specification.

Page 163 of 304

8.0

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS:

The rates for all items under this section include :

1. Steel forging, reducing to required shape, size and figure, drilling, tapping, counter sinking for screws,
filling etc. and satisfactory workmanship required to fabricate, finish, erect and fix in position, all
structural steel and iron in a good and perfect manner.
2. Providing all bolts and nuts including holding down and anchor bolts, round, squared or tapered
washers, anchor plates, rivets, packing pieces, gusset plates, cleats, wedges, brackets, separators etc. (net
weight to be computed and paid).
3. All wastages and cut pieces.
4. Welding as per specifications and drawings but weight of welds not to be paid.
5. Weight of various members to be taken as standard ISI weights. No allowances being made for rolling
margins in steelwork.
6. Providing all spikes, nails, service bolts, clamps, jigs etc.
7. Making all necessary templates, patterns moulds and platforms for layout etc.
8. All smithy work, unloading, getting in, hoisting, erecting and fixing in position at all heights, levels and
locations, curve portion.
9. Rigidly inserting and setting in lead or other specified material and fixing into concrete and / or building
into brick work while the work proceeds and for all fixing, anchoring, plugging, screwing, bolting etc.
including non shrink grout and sealants as may be required or directed.
10. Painting two top coat of Red oxide primer before hoisting and erecting in position.
11. The priming coat is required to be of high grade loosing approved quality of Red Oxide primer to
provide a coating having a good rust preventive properties and shall adhere well to the metal surfaces,
affording a good foundation for subsequent coats.
12. Bending to required shape of square bars, pipes, angles, plates etc as per drawing.
13. Compliance with requirements of technical specification.

Page 164 of 304

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS

1.

Chlorpyriphios

DE-NOCIL, Cynamide

2.

Structural Sealant

Wacker, Dow Corning, GE

3.

Structural Steel TMT Fe 500

SAIL / TISCO

4.

M.S. Pipe, Tubes, Bar, Flats,

Angle, Tee Sections

SAIL / TISCO

5.

Concrete admixture

Fosroc/ Cico.

6.

Polysulphide sealant

Pidilite, Chemetall-Rai

7.

Bitumen Impregnated Board

Shalitex or approved equivalent

8.

Polyethylene back up rod

Supreme Ind. Ltd. or approved equivalent

9.

PVC water stops

Fixopan / Sintex

10.

White Cement

Birla, J.K

11.

Water proofing compound

FOSROC/CICO / Pidilite / Laticrete or

approved equivalent

12.

White washing lime

Dehradun (Source)

13.

Paints

Asian Paints, ICI, Nerolac

14.

Water proof cement paint

Snowcem India Ltd

15.

Fire Retardant paint

Viper or approved equivalent

16.

Wax Polish

Mansion or approved equivalent

17.

Epoxy

Fosroc/ STP/ Cico.

18.

Glass

Modi Guard, Asahi or approved equivalent

19.

Mirror

Modi Guard or approved equivalent

20.

Waterproof Ply

Duro, Century, Jyotiply, Premier, Mayurply

21.

Commercial ply.

Duro, Century, Jyotiply, Premier, Mayurply

22.

Veneer

Duro, Green, Premier, Century, Mayurply

23.

Laminate

Donear, Merino, Century or approved equivalent

24.

Cement Bonded Board

BISON by NCL or approved equivalent

25.

Gypsum board.

India Gypsum Ltd.

26.

False Ceiling Members

Gyp. Steel of India Gypsum Ltd.

Page 165 of 304

a) Perimeter
b) Celling section
c) Intermediate
d) Angle
27.

APP Polymeric Polyethylene Felt -

BITUMAT or approved equivalent

28.

Expanded Polystyrene
(Thermocole)

Beardshell or approved equivalent

29.

Extruded Polystyrene

ISO board ND or approved equivalent

30.

Hessian Based Felt

BITUMAT or approved equivalent

31.

Flush Door Shutter

Duro, Jyotiply, Century, Premier or approved

equivalent

32.

Door Hardware

Haffle / Hetitch

33.

Door Lock & Handle

Dorma, Haffle

34.

Door closer

Dorma, Haffle

35.

Chequered Precast Cement c

Concrete Tiles

NITCO / Unitile or approved equivalent

36.

Commercial Quality White

Glazed Ceramic Tiles

Orient or approved equivalent

37.

PVC strips

Fixopan or approved equivalent

38.

Geotextile Fabric

Netlon / Ca Polyteck Pvt. Ltd. or approved equivalent

39.

UPVC Pipe

Finolex Industries Ltd. or approved equivalent

40.

Steel Fire Door

Shakti Met / Promat or approved equivalent

41.

Non Metallic Fire Door

Navir / Promat or approved equivalent

42.

Particle Board

Novopan, Merino, Bajaj Ecotec

43.

MDF

NUWUD MDF grade I as per IS 12406 / Green

Panelmax / Bajaj Ecotec

44.

Screws, Nails etc.

Nettlefold or approved equivalent.

45.

Pre-Laminated Board

Merino / Green / Duro

46.

Metallic Laminate

Duro, Green or approved equivalent

47.

Welding rod

ADVANI or approved equivalent

48.

MS black enameled/
galvanized ERW conduits

AKG, BEC, Steelkraft

49.

MS Conduit accessories

Sharma, Approved equivalent

Page 166 of 304

50.

Modular Kitchen

Veneta Cucine or Approved equivalent

51.

Shower Cubical hardwares

Dorma or Approved equivalent

52.

Wooden Flooring

Cosmos, New Era

53.

Laminated Wooden Flooring

Pergo, Span, Armstrong

54.

Fire Door Hardware

Briton or approved equivalent

55.

Toilet Partition

Merino / Green

56.

MR Ultra Partition

Gypsum India

57.

Cement OPC 43 Grade

The India Cement Ltd, Birla Grasim Industries

Limited, ACC Ltd., Ultra tech

Note:

In the List of recommended above, out of makes mentioned in the list, only 1 st make shall be quoted for and
used. However if due to non-availability or any other technical reasons, the alternative make is allowed, with
due prior permission of the Owner/Architect/Project Manager.

Page 167 of 304

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
PLUMBING WORKS

Page 168 of 304

INDEX
S.NO

DESCRIPTION

PAGE

1.

TECHNICAL CONDITIONS

170 - 174

2.

TECHNCIAL SPECIFICATIONS

175 - 203

3.

LIST OF MAKE OF MATERIAL

204 - 207

4.

BILL OF QUANTITIES

257 - 277

Page 169 of 304

PROJECT

PROPOSED OFFICE BUILDING AT LEH

SUBJECT
SANITARY ENGINEERING SERVICES
GENERAL TECHNICAL CONDITIONS

SECTION - I
1.

SCOPE OF WORK

1.1

Work under this contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and
appliances necessary and required to completely furnish all the Plumbing and other specialized
services as described hereinafter and as specified in the Schedule of Quantities and/or shown on
the Plumbing Drawings.
This contract is an Item Rate Contract. All payments are made for the actual work executed. Any
variation in the quantities will not have any extra cost implication on the quoted rates.

1.2

Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing Sanitary installations shall include the
following:a) Sanitary Fixtures.
b) Soil, Waste, Rain Water and Vent Pipes.
c) Water supply (Internal).
d) External Sewerage/storm water drainage system

1.3

Services rendered under sub-section 1.4 shall be done without any extra charge.

1.4

The Contractor must get acquainted with the proposed site for the works and study
Specifications and Conditions carefully before tendering. The work shall be executed as per
programme approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. If part of site is not available for any reason or
there is some unavoidable delay in supply of materials stipulated by the Owner, the programme
of construction shall be modified accordingly and the Contractor shall have no claim for any
extras or compensation on this account.

1.5

Works area shall be the area shown in the plan attached.

2.

SPECIFICATIONS

2.1

Work under this contract shall be carried out strictly in accordance with Specifications attached
with the tender.

2.2

Items not covered under these Specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or additional
works, the work shall be carried out as per Specifications of the latest Central Public Works
Department with latest amendments as applicable in the contract.

2.3

Works not covered above para 2.1 and 2.2. shall be carried out as per relevant Indian Standards
Specifications or Codes of Practice and, if not available, as per British Standards specifications or
Codes of Practice or unified Plumbing Code of U.S.A.

Page 170 of 304

2.4

The work shall be carried out strictly as specified in Schedule of Quantities and Technical
Specifications. In case of any ambiguity, the details of particular item as given in Schedule of
Quantities shall supersedes the details in Specifications.

3.

EXECUTION OF WORK

3.1

The work shall be carried out in conformity with the Plumbing drawings and within the
requirements of Architectural, HVAC, Electrical, Structural and Other specialized services
drawings.

3.2

The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working on the site. He shall make
provision for hangers, sleeves, structural openings and other requirements well in advance to
prevent hold up of progress of the construction programme.

3.3.

On award of the work, Contractor shall submit a programme of construction in the form of a
Pert Chart or Bar Chart for approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. All dates and time schedule
agreed upon should be strictly adhered to, within the stipulated time of
completion/commissioning along with the specified phasing, if any.

4.

DRAWINGS

4.1

Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction
permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the Architectural and other services
drawings.

4.2

Architectural drawings shall take precedence over Plumbing or other services drawings as to all
dimensions.

4.3

Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Architects or
Engineer-In-Charge all discrepancies or deviations noticed. Architects decision shall be final.

4.4

Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall take
precedence over small-scale drawings.

4.5

All drawings supplied with the tender shall be returned in good conditions along with the tender.

4.6

All drawings/sketches issued by the Architects/Consultant for the works are the property of the
Architects/Consultant and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works other than
intended without the written permission of the Architects/Consultant.

5.

INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS

5.1

Contractor shall be required, if requested, to produce manufacturers Test Certificate for the
particular batch of materials supplied to him. The tests carried out shall be as per the relevant
Indian Standards.

5.2

For examination and testing of materials and works at the site Contractor shall provide all
Testing and Gauging Equipment necessary but not limited to the followings:a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)

Theodolite
Dumpy level
Steel tapes
Weighing machine
Plumb bobs, Spirit levels, Hammers
Micrometers
Thermometers, Stoves
Hydraulic test machine
Page 171 of 304

i)

Smoke test machine

5.3

All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at any approved laboratory, if required by the
Engineer-In-Charge.

5.4

All Testing Equipment shall be preferably located in special room meant for the purpose.

6.

METRIC CONVERSION

6.1

All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender document are
commercial metric sizes.

6.2

Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the nearest
equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any additional cost.

7.

REFERENCE POINTS

7.1

Contractor shall provide permanent Bench Marks, Flag Tops and other reference points for the
proper execution of work and these shall be preserved till the end of the work.

7.2

All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations given in the Architectural
and Plumbing drawings.

8.

REFERENCE DRAWINGS

8.1

The Contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. These
shall not be used on site.
All corrections, deviations and changes made on the site shall be shown on these reference
drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings. All changes to be made shall be
initialed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

9.

SHOP DRAWINGS

9.1

Shop drawings shall be submitted under following conditions:(a)

Typical details for Toilets & Fixtures required.

(b)

Structural supports/hanging/laying and jointing details for all types of pipes as required.

(c)

Plumbing and Fire Fighting layout plans as required and for any changes in the layout of
Plumbing /Architectural Drawings.

(d)

Equipment & piping layout for Mechanical and Electrical equipments as required, SLDs,
mounting details of circuit breakers, location of panels, installation of terminals and faucets
etc. w.r.t. finishes, surrounding levels & locations.

(e)

Manufacturers and Contractor fabrication drawings

10.

CONTRACTORS RATES

10.1

Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour, supervision, erection,
tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to site, taxes, octroi and levies, breakage,
wastage, Works Contract Tax and Service Tax if any, all such expenses as may be necessary and
required to completely do all the items of work and put them in a working condition.

10.2

Rates quoted are for all heights and depths required for this work.
Page 172 of 304

10.3

All rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of all such accessories, Fixtures and fixing
arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a standard part of the particular item except where
specially mentioned otherwise.

10.4

All rates quoted are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and making good the
same with cement mortar/concrete of appropriate mix and strength as directed by Engineer-InCharge. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves and recesses in the concrete and masonry work as
the work proceeds.

10.5Rates quoted shall be inclusive of cost incurred in testing, commissioning of works and materials
including equipment etc.
11.

TESTING

11.1

Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clauses of the
specifications.

11.2

Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer-In-Charge/ Consultant.

11.3

All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and whole work tested to meet the
requirements of the specifications.

11.4

Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the local authorities
to meet Municipal or other bye-laws in force.

11.5

Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance of the tests.

11.6

Contractor shall afford all the expenses for the offsite testing of material and equipments.

12.

SITE CLEARANCE AND CLEANUP

12.1

The Contractor shall, from time to time clear away all debris and excess materials accumulated at
the site.

12.2

After the Fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned, Contractor
shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster, paints stains, stickers and other foreign matter of
discoloration leaving the same in a ready to use condition.

12.3

On completion of all works, Contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all surplus materials and
leave the site in a broom clean condition, failing which the same shall be done at Contractors risk
and cost.

13.

LICENSE AND PERMITS

13.1

Contractor must hold a valid Plumbing license issued by the Municipal Authority or other
competent authority under whose jurisdiction the work falls.

13.2

Contractor must keep constant liaison with all relevant authorities and shall be responsible for
obtaining all approvals relating to water supply, sewerage, drainage system. He shall also be
responsible for co-ordination for getting the approval , with other agencies working on the
project relating to their scope of work.

13.3

Contractor shall obtain No Objection Certificate before commencement of work, from the local
authorities all related to his work as required for the building.

Page 173 of 304

13.4

Contractor shall obtain, from the local authorities all related completion certificates with respect
to his work as required for occupation of the building.

13.5

All inspection fees or submission fees paid by the Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner
on production of valid official receipts.

14.

RECOVERY OF COST FOR MATERIALS ISSUED TO CONTRACTORS FREE OF

COST

14.1

If any materials issued to the Contractor, free of cost, are damaged or pilfered, the cost of the
same shall be recovered from the Contractor on the basis of actual cost to Owner which shall
include all freight and transportation, excise duty, sales tax, octroi, import duty etc. or the actual
cost given by the Owner shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

15.

CUTTING & MAKING GOOD

No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of the Project
Manager.

16.

MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY OWNER

16.1

The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the Owner conform to the specifications
of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall be brought to the notice of the
Engineer-In-Charge.

16.2

After receipt of materials, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor for any damage found
and he shall be liable to pay the actual cost of the material as per market rate at that time.

17.

MATERIALS (SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR)

17.1

All materials used in the works shall conform to the tender specifications.

17.2

As far as possible materials bearing I.S. certification marks shall be used with the approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge.

17.3

Unless otherwise specified and expressly approved in writing by the Engineer-In-Charge,

materials of makes and specifications mentioned with tender shall be used.

18.

MOCK UP
The Contractor shall install all pipes, Fixtures, clamps and accessories and fixing devices in mockup shaft and room so constructed as directed by Engineer-In-Charge without any extra cost. The
materials used in the mock-up may be reused in the works if found undamaged.
Any tiles or finished surfaces or floors damaged by the Contractor while doing his work shall be
made good with new tiles or other finishing material. No payment shall be admissible for such
repairs. The Engineer-In-Charge may, at his discretion get the damaged work repaired by other
agencies and debit the cost of such repairs to the Contractor.
END OF THE SECTION - I

Page 174 of 304

PROJECT
PROPOSED OFFICE BUILDING AT LEH
SUBJECT
SANITARY ENGINEERING SERVICES
TECHNICAL PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - I

SANITARY FIXTURES

1.

SCOPE OF WORK

1.1

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all Material and labour as necessary and
required to completely install all Sanitary Fixtures, brass and Chromium Plated fittings and
accessories as required by the drawings and specified hereinafter or given in the Schedule of
Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing the Sanitary Fixtures shall include all Sanitary
Fixtures, C.P. fittings and Accessories etc. necessary and required for the Building.

1.3

Whether specifically mentioned or not all Fixtures and appliances shall be provided with all fixing
devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as required.

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1

All Fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to complete
the item in working condition whether specifically mentioned or not in the Schedule of
Quantities, Specifications and Drawings.

2.2

All Fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching the tiles or
interior finish as per Architectural/ Interior designers requirements. Wherever necessary the
fittings shall be centered to dimensions and pattern desired.

2.3

Fixing screws shall be half round head Chromium Plated brass with C.P. washers wherever
required as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge.

2.4

All Fittings and Fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true to Levels and Heights
shows on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Care shall
be taken to fix all Inlet and Outlet Pipes at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good
and any damage to the finished floor, tiling or terrace shall be made good at Contractors cost.
When directed, Contractor shall install Fixtures and accessories in a mock-up room for the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Sample room Fixtures may be reused on the works if
undamaged, but no additional payment for fixing or dismantling shall be admissible.

2.5

3.0

EUROPEAN W.C.

3.1

European W.C. shall be wash down, single or double siphonic type, wall mounted set, flushed by
means of exposed or concealed cistern, as specified in Schedule of Quantities.
Flush pipe/bend shall be connected to the W.C. by means of suitable rubber adapter.
Wall hung W.C. shall be supported by C.I. floor mounted chair.

3.2

Each W.C. seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary in vertical position without
falling down on the W.C.

Page 175 of 304

4.

INDIAN W.C.

4.1

Indian W.C. pan shall be Orissa pattern of size as specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Each
W.C. shall be provided with a 100 mm dia cast iron or porcelain P or S trap with or without vent
horn.

4.2

W.C. shall be flushed by means of an exposed or concealed type cistern / Flush Valve or as
specified in Schedule of Quantities.

4.3

The W.C. shall be fixed in level in a neat workmanlike manner. The W.C. and trap shall be set in
cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size)
joints between W.C. and flush pipe shall be made with a putty or white lead and linseed oil and
caulked well or with an approved rubber joint.

5.0

URINALS

5.1

Urinals shall be white glazed Vitreous China flat back half stall or lip type as specified in Schedule
of Quantities.

5.2

Half stall Urinals shall be provided with 15 mm dia C.P. spreader, 32 mm dia C.P. domical waste
and C.P. cast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange, and shall be fixed to wall by one C.I.
bracket and two C.I. wall clips as recommended by manufacturers complete and as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge.

5.3

Half stall urinals shall be fixed with C.P. Brass screws and shall be provided with 32 mm dia
Domical Waste leading to Urinal trap.

5.4

Urinals shall be flushed by means of automatically sensor operated flushing system as specified in
Schedule of Quantities.

5.5

Waste pipes for urinals shall be of the following:

(a) G.I. Pipes
Waste pipes may be exposed on wall or concealed in chase as directed by the Engineer-inCharge. Specifications for waste pipes shall be same as given in Sub Section .

5.6

SINKS

5.7

Sinks shall be of precast Terrazzo marble or White Glazed fire clay or vitreous china or stainless
steel or any other material as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

5.8

Hand Wash Sinks and Process Sinks shall be of stainless steel.

5.9

Each sink shall be provided with R.S. or C.I. brackets and clips and securely fixed. Counter top
sinks shall be fixed with suitable angle iron clips or brackets as recommended by the
manufacturer. Each sink shall be provided with 40 mm dia C.P. waste with chain and plug or
P.V.C. waste. Fixing shall be done as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

5.10

Supply fittings for sinks shall be mixing fittings or C.P. Censor Operated (Battery/Electrical) taps
as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

6.0

MIRRORS

6.1

Mirrors shall be electro coated copper 6 mm thick of guaranteed reputed make. The size shall be
as specified in the Schedule of Quantities or shown on the drawings. The image shall be clear and
without waviness at all angles of vision.
Page 176 of 304

6.2

Mirrors shall be provided with backing of 12 mm thick Marine Plywood sheet fixed with C.P.
brass semi-round headed screws and cup Washers or C.P. Brass Clamps as specified or instructed
by Engineer-in-Charge.

7.0

SHOWER SET

7.1

Shower set shall comprise of single lever mixer or four way diverter with two C.P. brass
concealed stop cocks, with bath spout or as given in the Schedule of Quantities.

7.2

Each shower set shall also be provided with C.P. shower arm with wall flange and shower head
of approved quality as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

7.3

Concealed stopcocks shall be so fixed as to keep the wall flange clear off the finished wall. Wall
flanges embedded in the finishing shall not be accepted.

8.0

ACCESSORIES

8.1

Contractor shall install all Chromium Plated and porcelain accessories as shown on the drawings
or directed by Engineer-in-Charge, and given in the Schedule of Quantities.

8.2

All C.P. Accessories shall be fixed with C.P. brass half round head screws and cup washers in
wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and making good as required or
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

8.3

Porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.

9.0

URINAL PARTITIONS

9.1

Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous china or 25mm thick marble of size specified in
the Schedule of Quantities.

9.2

Porcelain partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with C.P. brass bolts, anchor fasteners and
M.S. clips as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

10.0
10.1

MEASUREMENT
Rates for fixing of Sanitary Fixtures Accessories, urinal partitions shall include all items and
operations stated in the respective specifications and Schedule of Quantities and nothing extra is
payable.
10.2 Rates for all items under specifications above shall be inclusive of cutting holes and
chases and making good the same, C.P. screws, nuts, bolts and any fixing arrangements
required and recommended by Manufacturers, Testing and Commissioning.
END OF SECTION - I

Page 177 of 304

SECTION - II

SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES

32

1.

SCOPE OF WORK

1.1

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipments and
appliances necessary and required to completely install all soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes as
required by the drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the Schedule of Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing, the soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes
system shall include the followings:a) Vertical and horizontal Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes, Rainwater Pipes and Fittings, Joints
Clamps and connections to Fixtures.
b) Connection of pipes to Gully Traps & Manholes etc.
c) Floor and urinal traps, cleanout plugs, inlet fittings and rainwater heads as specified.
d) Waste pipes connections from all Fixtures e.g. wash basins, sinks, urinals and kitchen
equipments.
e) Testing of all pipes.

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1

All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

2.2

Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workmanlike manner.

2.3

Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and
shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

2.4

Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified.

2.5

Access doors for fittings and cleanouts shall be so located that they are easily accessible for repair
and maintenance.

2.6

All works shall be executed as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

2.7

Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes in shafts, ducts and in concealed areas i.e., (false ceiling) shall consist
of cast iron pipes. In General wastes and vents smaller than 65mm dia shall be of medium class
Galvanized Iron Pipes and Fittings.

3.

CAST IRON PIPES & FITTINGS

3.1.1

All pipes shall be straight and smooth and inside free from irregular bore, blowholes, cracks and
other manufacturing defects. Pipes shall be sand cast iron pipes conforming to I.S: 1729-1967 or
centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes conforming to I.S:3989 as specified in Bill of Quantities.

3.1.2

Standard weight, dimensions and pig lead required for joints shall be as follows:-

Page 178 of 304

For pipes conforming to I.S: 1729-1967 (sand cast iron soil pipes and fittings)

3.1.3

Nominal
Dia (MM)

Thickness
(MM)

Overall
Weight for 1.8
m long pipe
(Kg.)

Minimum depth of
lead joint from the
lip of socket ( MM)

Quantity of
lead per Joint
(Kg.)

50
75
100
150

5
5
5
5

11.41
16.52
21.67
31.92

25
25
25
38

0.50
0.66
1.00
1.25

Tolerance
Acceptable tolerance for pipes to I.S: 3989 / IS: 1729 shall be as follows:(a) Wall thickness
(b) Length
(c) Weight

- 15%
20 mm
- 10%

3.1.4
In order to ensure that required quantity of Lead is poured into the joint and to
control wastage of Lead, at the beginning, three samples shall be made and the quantum of
lead per joint shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.1.5
The actual consumption of Lead should be within 5% of the approved
sample job subject to the provision that variation 20% shall be allowed over the
theoretically quantity L due to dimensional tolerances allowed as per Indian Standards. This
variation includes allowances of Wastage also.

3.2

Fittings

3.2.1

Fittings shall conform to the same Indian Standard. The Contractor shall use pipes and fittings of
matching specifications.

3.2.2

Fittings shall be of the required degree of curvature with or without access doors.

3.2.3.

Access door shall be made up with 3mm thick insertion rubber washer and white Lead. The
bolts shall be lubricated with grease or white Lead for easy removal later. The fixing shall be air
and watertight.

3.3

Fixing

3.3.1

All vertical pipes shall be fixed by M.S. clamps truly vertical. Branch pipes shall be connected to
the stack at the same angle as that of the fittings. No collars shall be used on vertical stacks.
Each stack shall be terminated at top with a Cowl (terminal guard).

3.3.2

Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on structural adjustable clamps of special
design shown on the drawings or as directed. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform slope and
the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest on them.

3.3.3

Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during the construction. He shall
provide all necessary information to the building Contractor for making such provisions in the
structure as necessary. All damages shall be made good to restore the surface.

Page 179 of 304

3.4

Jointing
C.I pipes wherever used shall be jointed with refined pig lead conforming to IS: 27-1977. A
sufficient skein or jute rope shall be caulked to leave a minimum space for the pig lead to be
poured in. After pouring the lead shall be caulked into the joint with caulking tool and hammer.
All surplus lead shall be cut and joint left flush with the rim of the socket neatly.

3.5

Cast Iron Pipes for Drainage

3.5.1

Wherever specified, drainage lines passing under building, floors and roads, in exposed position
above ground or at basement ceiling level shall be C.I. LA pipes or as specified hereinafter.
Position of such pipes shall be generally shown in the relevant drawings.

3.5.2

Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun iron pipes conforming to I.S: 1536-1976. Quality
certificates shall be furnished.

3.5.3

Fittings and Inspection Chambers

3.5.4

(a)

Fittings used for C.I. drainage pipe shall conform to I.S. 1538-1976.
junction from branch pipes shall be made by a Y-tee.

Wherever possible

(b)

Contractor shall provide Cast Iron inspection chamber at all junction as indicated on drawings or
directed by Architects Inspection chambers shall be specially cast with inlet, outlet and branches of
appropriate and required sizes. Branches shall be Y type wherever possible.

(c)

Cleanout plugs shall be provided on head of each drain and at location indicated on plans
or directed by Architects. Cleanout plugs shall be of size matching the full bore of the
pipe. Plugs shall be made out with G.I. coupling caulked into the socket of the pipe or
fittings. The end shall be provided with a brass screwed plug with suitable key for
opening.

Laying
(a)

All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be jointed with best quality soft pig lead, which shall be
free from impurities. In wet trenches joints shall be made from lead wool. Nothing extra
will be paid for lead wool joints. Depth of pig lead and weight for joints shall be as given
in sub section .

(b)

The spigot of pipe of fittings shall be centered in the adjoining socket by caulking.
Sufficient turns of tarred gaskin will be given to leave unfilled the required depth of socket
when the gaskin has been caulked tightly barrel and against the face of the socket. Molten
pig lead shall then be poured to fill the remainder of the socket. This shall then be done in
one pouring. The lead shall then be solidly caulked with suitable tools and hammers.

(c)

In order to ensure that adequate lead is poured properly into the joints and to control
waste in use of lead, at the beginning of work three or four sample joints shall be made and
the quantum of lead per joint approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

4.0

CLAMPS

4.1

M.S. clamps shall be of standard design and fabricated from M.S. flat 40x3mm thick. They shall
be painted with two coats of black bitumen paint before fixing.

4.2

Where M.S. clamps are to be fixed on RCC columns or slotted angles, walls or beam they shall be
fixed with 40x3mm flat iron U type clamps with anchor fasteners of approved design or 6mm
nuts and bolts.

Page 180 of 304

4.3

Structural clamps shall be fabricated from M.S. Structural members e.g. rods, angles, channels
flats as per detailed drawing or as directed. Contractor shall provide all nuts, bolts, welding
material and paint the clamps with one coat of red oxide and two or more coats of black Enamel
paint. Wooden saddles, where required shall be provided free of cost.

4.4

Slotted angle/channel supports on walls shall be provided wherever shown on drawings.

Angles/channels shall be of sizes shown on drawings or specified in Schedule of Quantities,
angles/channels shall be fixed to brick walls with bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks and
to RCC walls with suitable anchor fasteners. The spacing of support bolts horizontally shall not
exceed 1 m.

4.5

Wherever M.S. clamps are required to be anchored directly to brick walls, concrete slabs, beams
or columns, nothing extra shall be payable for clamping arrangement and making good with
cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 mm stone aggregate 20mm nominal size)
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

5.

TRAPS

5.1

Floor traps shall be UPVC deep seal with an effective seal of 50 mm. The trap and waste pipes
shall be set in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on the structural floor. The blocks shall
be in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and extended to
40 mm below finished floor level. Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centering
for the blocks. Size of the block shall be 30x30 cm of the required depth.

5.2

Urinal Traps
Urinal traps shall be UPVC /SCI trap with or without Vent and set in cement concrete block
specified in Para above without extra charge.

5.3

Floor Trap Inlet

Bath room traps and connections shall ensure free and silent flow of discharging water. Where
specified, Contractor shall provide a special type inlet hopper without or with one, two or three
inlet sockets to receive the waste pipe. Hopper shall be connected to UPVC/SCI trap with at
least 50 mm seal (Hopper and traps shall be paid for separately.) floor trap inlet hoppers and the
traps shall be set in cement concrete blocks as specified in Para above without extra charge.

5.4

C.P./Stainless Steel Gratings

Floor and Urinal Traps shall be provided with 100-150 mm square or round C.P/Stainless steel
grating, with rim of approved design and shape. Minimum thickness shall be 4-5 mm or as
specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

6.0

CLEANOUT PLUGS
Contractor shall provide brass cleanout plugs as required. Cleanout plugs shall be threaded and
provided with key holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall be fixed to the pipe by G.I. Socket &
a male threaded adaptor.

7.

WASTE PIPE FROM APPLIANCES

7.1

Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash basins, sinks, urinals, bathtubs, water coolers shall be of
galvanized steel as given in the Schedule of Quantities or as shown on the drawings.

7.2

All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of drains. Pipes inside a toilet room shall
be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where required pipes may be run at ceiling
Page 181 of 304

level in suitable gradient and supported on structural clamps. Spacing for clamps for such pipes
shall be as follows:G.I pipes

7.3

Vertical

Horizontal

300 cms

240 cms

Galvanized Iron Pipes

Pipes shall be galvanized iron tubes conforming to IS: 1239-1979 (medium class) and quality
certificates shall be furnished. Pipes shall be provided with all required fittings e.g. Tees,
Couplings, Bends, Elbows, Unions, Reducers, Nipples, Plugs. All G.I. waste pipes shall be
terminated at the point of connection with the appliance with an outlet of suitable diameter.

8.0

POLYTHENE PIPES

8.1

Where specified, Polythene pipes shall be either UPVC pipes confirming to I.S: 4985-1988 or
high density polythene pipes conforming to IS: 4984-78. The details of the nominal outer
diameter, weight and working pressure at 200C. shall be as per the above standards, for the
respective pressure rating as specified in the B.O.Q.

8.2

Polythene pipes may be cold bending to a radius of not less than eight times of their external
diameter. Pipes bent for smaller radius may be made by hot bending.

8.3

Fittings used for Polythene pipes shall be compression moulded fittings matching to the above
specifications.

8.4

Jointing
All Polythene pipes shall be laid and jointed as per manufacturers specifications and relevant I.S
codes.

8.5

All pipes shall be tested after installation for a pressure equal to twice the maximum working
pressure in the line as per manufacturers specifications.

8.6

CEMENT CONCRETE

8.7

Cast Iron Soil and Waste pipes under floors in sunken slabs and in wall chases (When cut
specially for the pipe) shall be encased in cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
stone aggregate 12 mm size) 75 mm in bed and alround. When pipes are running well above the
structural slab, the encased pipes shall be supported with suitable cement concrete pillars of
required height and size at intervals as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

9.0

PAINTING

9.1

Wherever CI pipes are used, it shall be painted with two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint
to give an even shade.

9.2

Paint shall be of approved quality and shade, pipes shall be painted in accordance with approved
pipe colour code.

Page 182 of 304

9.3

Waste pipes in chase shall be painted with two coats of Bitumen paint, covered with polythene
tape and a final coat of bitumen paint. Exposed pipes shall be painted with two or more coats of
Synthetic enamel paint.

9.4

C.I. pipes below ground and covered in cement concrete shall not be painted.

10.0

CUTTING AND MAKING GOOD

10.1

Pipes shall be fixed and tested as buildings proceeds. Contractor shall provide all necessary holes
cutouts and chases in structural members as building work proceeds. Wherever holes are cut or
left originally, they shall be made good with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) and the
surface restored as in original condition.

11.0

INSPECTION & TESTING

11.1

Inspection
Work should be inspected during installation and tests applied on completion, care being taken
that, all work which is to be encased for concealed is tested before it is finally enclosed.
Inspection should be carried out to ensure the following:

11.2

(a)

Work accords with the drawing and specifications.

(b)

All pipe brackets, clips etc. are securely fixed.

(c)

Fixtures are correctly spaced.

(d)

Pipe is protected where necessary by Thermal Insulation.

(e)

Embedded pipe work is properly protected before sealing-in

(f)

All access covers, caps or plugs.

Are accessible

Are so made that the internal faces truly complete in internal bore.

Cause no obstruction in the pipe bore

Are well joined.

Testing
The soil,waste piping system
follows:

and rain water should be tested after installation as

(a)

Water Test
The pipes shall be tested after installation & before the appliances are connected,
preferably in sections so as to limit the static head of 4.5m . The pipe shall be filled with
water for at least 10 minutes. After filling, pipes shall be struck with a hammer and
inspected for blow holes and cracks. Then it will be necessary to seal all openings and leaks
at joints immediately as observed during the test and all defective pipes shall be rejected
and removed from the site. Pipes with minor sweating shall be accepted at the discretion
of the Engineer-in-Charge.

(b)

Smoke Test
Alternatively, the Contractor may test all Soil, Waste and Rainwater stacks by smoke
testing machine. The smoke test shall be carried out as under:

Page 183 of 304

Smoke shall be pumped into the stack after plugging all inlets and connections at the
lowest points from a smoke testing machine which consists of a bellow & burner. The
material usually burnt is greasy cotton waste which gives out a clear pungent smoke which
is easily detected by sight as well as by smell, if there is leak at any points of the pipe. The
top end shall however be left open. The stack shall then be observed for leakness and all
defective pipes and fittings removed or repaired as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
11.3

A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by Contractors and
Engineer-in-Charge.

12.0

MEASUREMENTS

12.1

General

12.1.1 Rates for all items quoted shall be inclusive of all work and items given in the above mentioned
specifications and Schedule of Quantities and applicable for the work under floor, in shafts or at
ceiling level at all heights and depths.
12.1.2 All rates are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in RCC and masonry work and making good
the same.
12.1.3 All rates are inclusive of pre testing and on site testing of the installations, materials and
commissioning.
12.2

Pipes (Unit of measurement. Linear meter to the nearest centimeter)

12.2.1 C.I. (L.A) pipes shall be measured along the center line when fixed, correct to a centimeter
including all fittings and lead caulked joints along its length.
12.2.2 C.I. pipes shall be measured overall along the centerline correct to a centimeter including all
fittings along its length. The rate for these pipes shall be inclusive of all fittings, holder bat
clamps, lead caulked joints and all other items described in the Schedule of Quantities. Traps
structural clamps and cement concrete shall however be paid separately under the relevant item.
12.2.3 G.I., S.C.I & P.V.C. Polythene pipe shall be measured per running meter correct to a centimeter
for the finished work, which shall include fittings e.g. Bends, Tees, Elbows, Reducers, Crosses,
Sockets, Nipples and Nuts but exclude brass or Gunmetal Taps (Cocks), Valves lead connection
pipes and shower rose. The length shall be taken along center line of the pipes and fittings. All
pipes and fittings shall be classified according to their diameter, method of jointing and fixing
substance, quality and finish. The diameter shall be nominal diameter of internal bore. The pipes
shall be described as including all cutting and waste. In case of fittings of unequal bore, the
largest bore shall be measured.
12.3

Cement concrete around pipes shall be measured along the center of the pipe line measured per
linear meter and include any Masonry Supports, Shuttering and Centering Cutting complete as
described in the relevant specifications.

12.4

Slotted angles/channels shall be measured per linear metre of finished length and shall include
support bolts and nuts embedded in masonry walls with cement concrete blocks and nothing
extra will be paid for making good the same.

12.5

Painting: Painting of pipes shall be measured per running metre and shall be inclusive of all
fittings and clamps. No deduction for fittings shall be made.

12.6

Structural Clamps: Structural clamps and U clamps shall be paid for by weight per kg. rates
shall be inclusive of all nuts, bolts, dash fasteners, drilling, cutting, welding. Weight of clamps
Page 184 of 304

shall be calculated from the actual length used in structural members multiplied by its theoretical
weight given in manufacturers catalogues. Weight of nuts, bolts, shall not be taken into account.
M.S holder bats for holding C.I pipes in walls shall not be measured separately and it shall be a
part of fixing C.I pipes.
12.7

Excavation for soil pipes: No extra payment shall be admissible with respect to excavation,
refilling and disposal of surplus earth for Cast Iron Soil and Waste Pipes.

13.

COMMISSIONING

13.1

After successful testing of the different soil and waste pipes in parts, the Contractor shall provide
all facilities including necessary pipings, labours, tools and equipment etc. for carrying out testing
and commissioning of the entire soil waste and rain water system complete as per requirement in
the presence of Client representative/Consultant, whenever and as may be required. Generally,
the following test/inspection has to be carried out:-

13.1.1 To check any leakages/seapages in the soil, waste and rain water pipes and doing water testing
and smoke testing of the complete soil, waste and rain water piping system, in totality in
sequential method as per site conditions.
13.1.2 To check that the access doors are available at all junction points in the entire soil and waste
piping system and they are placed at proper approachable and accessible locations.

END OF SECTION - II

Page 185 of 304

SECTION - III
1.0

EXCAVATION FOR PIPE LINE

33

EXCAVATION

The excavation for pipe works shall be open cutting unless the permission of the Engineer-inCharge for the ground to be tunneled is obtained in writing. Where sewers have to be
constructed along narrow passages, the Engineer-in-Charge may order the excavation to be made
partly in tunnel and in such cases the excavated soil shall be brought back later on for refilling the
trenches or tunnel.
1.1

Opening out Trenches

In excavation the trenches, etc. the solid road metalling, pavement, curbing etc. and turf is to be
placed on one side and preserved for reinstatement when the trenches or other excavation shall
be filled up. Before any road metal is replaced, it shall be carefully shifted. The surface of all
trenches and holes shall be restored and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge
and of the Owners of the roads or other property traversed and the Contractor shall not cut out
or break down any live fence of trees in the line of the proposed works but shall tunnel under
them, unless the Engineer-in-Charge shall order to the contrary.
The Contractor shall grub up and clear the surface over the trenches and other excavations of all
trees, stumps roots and all other encumbrances affecting execution of the work and shall remove
them from the site to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.2

Obstruction of Roads
The Contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the width of
any road or street and sufficient space shall then be left for public and private transit, he shall
remove the materials excavated and bring them back again when the trench is required to be
refilled. The Contractor shall obtain the consent of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing before
closing any road to vehicular traffic and the foot walks must be clear at all times.

1.3

Removal of Filth
All night soil, filth or any other offensive matter met with during the execution of the works,
immediately after it is taken out of any trench, sewer or cess pool, shall not be deposited on to
the surface of any street or where it is likely to be a nuisance or passed into any sewer or drain
but shall be at once put into the carts and removed to a suitable place to be provided by the
Contractor.

1.4

Excavation to be Taken to Proper Depths

The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth that the pipes shall rest on concrete or on firm
bedding as described in the several clauses relating to these so that the inverts may be at the
levels given in the sections. In bad ground, the Engineer-in-Charge may order the Contractor to
excavate to a greater depth than that shown on the drawings and to fill up the excavation to
the level of the sewers with concrete, broken stone, gravel or other materials. For such extra
excavation and concrete, broken stone, gravel or other materials, the Contractor shall be paid
extra at rates laid down for such works in the schedule, if the extra work was ordered by the
Engineer-in-Charge in writing, but if the Contractor should excavate the trench to a greater
depth than is required without a specific order to that effect in writing of the Engineer-inCharge the extra depth shall have to be filled up with concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement: 5 fine
sand: 10 stone aggregate 40mm nominal size) at the Contractors own costs and charges to the
requirements and satisfactions of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 186 of 304

1.5

Refilling
After the pipes or other work has been laid and proved to be water tight, the trench or other
excavations shall be refilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damage shall be
caused to the sewer and other permanent work. The filling in the haunches and upto 75 cms
above the crown of the sewer shall consist of the finest selected materials placed carefully in 15
cms layers and flooded and consolidated. After this has been laid, the trench and other
excavation shall be refilled carefully in 15 cms layers with materials taken from the excavation,
each layer being watered to assist in the consolidation unless the Engineer-in-Charge shall
otherwise direct.

1.6

Contractor to Restore Settlement and Damages

The Contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, make good promptly during the whole period
the works are in hand, any settlement that may occur in the surfaces of roads, beams, footpaths,
gardens, open spaces etc. Whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his other
excavations and he shall be liable for any accidents caused thereby. He shall also, at his own
expenses and charges, repair and make good and damage done to buildings and other property.
If in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge he fails to make good such works with all practicable
dispatch, the Engineer-in-Charge shall be at liberty to get the work done by the Contractor or
deducted from any money that may be or become due to him or recovered from him in any
other manner according to the law of the land.

1.7

Disposal of Surplus Soil

The Contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for disposal of all surplus
materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled the surplus soil shall
be immediately removed, the surface properly restored and roadways and sides left clear.

1.8

Timbering of Sewer and Trenches

a) The Contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides of the sewer
trenches and other excavations by suitable timbering, piling and sheeting and they shall be
close, timbered in loose or sandy strata and below the surface of the sub soil water level.
b) All timbering, sheeting and piling with their waling and supports shall be of adequate
dimensions and strength and fully braced and strutted so that no risk of collapse or
subsidence of the walls of the trench shall take place.
c) The Contractor shall be held responsible and will be accountable for the sufficiency of all
timbering, branches, sheeting and piling used as also for all damage to persons and property
resulting from improper quality, strength, placing, maintaining or removing of the same.

1.9

Shoring of Buildings
The Contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures, the stability of which is
liable to be endangered by the execution of the work and shall be fully responsible for all
damages to persons or property resulting from any accident.

1.10

Removal of Water from Sewer, Trench etc.

The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of the work keep the trenches and
excavations free from water which shall be disposed off by him in a manner as will neither cause
injury to the public health nor to the public or private property nor to the work completed or in
progress nor to the surface of any roads or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the
same by the public.

Page 187 of 304

1.11

Width and Depth of Trench

The Engineer-in-Charge shall have power by giving an order in writing to the Contractor to
increase the maximum width in respect of which payment will be allowed for excavation in
trenches for various classes of sewer, manholes, and other works in certain lengths to be
specifically laid down by him, where on account of bad ground or other unusual conditions, he
considers that such increased widths are necessary in view of the site conditions.

2.0

MEASUREMENTS

2.1

Excavation
Measurement for excavation of pipe trenches shall be made per linear metre under the respective
category of soil classification , as given in Schedule of Quantities.

2.1.1

Trenches shall be measured between outside walls of manholes at top and the depth shall be the
average depth between the two ends to the nearest cm. The rate quoted shall be for a depth upto
1.5m or as given in the Schedule of Quantities.

2.1.2

Payment for trenches more than 1.5m in depth shall be made separately and as given in Schedule
of Quantities.

2.2

Refilling, Consolidation and Disposal of Surplus Earth

Rate quoted for excavation of trenches shall be inclusive of refilling, consolidation and disposal
of surplus earth within a lead of 50m. No separate payment for refilling shall be made.
END OF SECTION - III

Page 188 of 304

SECTION IV

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

34

1.0

SCOPE OF WORK

1.1.

Work under this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials equipment and appliances
necessary and required to completely install the water supply system as required by the drawings,
specified hereinafter and given in the Schedule of Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the water supply system shall include the
following:a) All water lines to different parts of building and making connection from source etc.
b) Pipe protection and painting.
c) Providing Hot water supply lines and insulation of hot water pipe lines.
d) Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances.
e) Connections to all toilets, kitchen equipments, storage tanks and appliances.
f)

Excavation and refilling of pipe trenches, wherever required.

g) Trenches for taking pipe lines for these services.

2.0

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1

All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications. All works executed
shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.2.

Pipes and Fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workmanlike manner.

2.3

Short or Long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use of Elbows shall
be restricted for short connections.
As far as possible all Bends shall be formed by means of a hydraulic pipe bending machine for
pipes up to 65mm dia.

2.4

Pipes shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and
shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

2.5

Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified.

2.6

Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located as to provide easy accessibility for operations,
maintenance and repairs.

3.0

G.I. PIPES & FITTINGS

3.1

All pipes inside the buildings and where specified, outside the building shall be galvanized steel
tubes conforming to I.S. 1239-1979 of class specified. When class is not specified they shall be
medium class.

3.2

Fittings shall be malleable iron galvanized fittings, of approved make. All fittings shall have
manufacturers trade mark stamped on it. Fittings for G.I. pipes shall include Couplings, Bends,
Tees, Reducers, Nipples, Unions, Bushes. Fittings shall be of I.S:1879 - (part I to X) 1975.

Page 189 of 304

3.3

Pipes and fittings shall be jointed with screwed fittings. Care shall be taken to remove burr from
the end of the pipe after cutting by a round file. Genuine red lead with grumet and a few strands
of fine hemp shall be applied. All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment
shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets. G.I. pipes inside toilets shall be
fixed in wall chases well above the floor. No pipes shall be run inside a sunken floor as far as
possible. Pipes may be run under the ceiling or floors and other as shown on drawings.

4.0

CLAMPS
G.I. pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by M.S. clamps of design approved by
Engineer-in-Charge. Pipe in wall chases shall be anchored by iron hooks. Pipes at ceiling level
shall be supported on structural clamps fabricated from M.S. structural as described in the sub
section. Pipes in typical shafts shall be supported on Slotted Angles/Channels as specified
elsewhere.

5.0

UNIONS
Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to enable dismantling later.
Unions shall be provided near each Gunmetal Valve, Stop Cocks, or Check Valves and on
straight runs as necessary at appropriate locations as required and/or directed by Engineer-inCharge.

6.0

FLANGES
Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes where shown on the drawings, all equipment
connections as necessary and required or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Connections shall
be made by the correct number and size of the bolts and made with 3 mm thick insertion rubber
washer. Where hot water or steam connections are made insertion gasket shall be of suitable high
temperature grade and quality approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Bolt hole dia for flanges shall
conform to match the specification for C.I. Sluice Valve to I.S. 780.

7.0

TRENCHES
The galvanized iron pipes and fittings shall be laid in trenches. The width and depth of the
trenches for the different diameters of the pipes shall be as follows:
Dia of Pipe

15mm to 50mm
65mm to 100mm

Width of Trench

Depth of Trench

30 cms
45 cms

60 cms
75 cms

At joints the trench width shall be widened where necessary. The work of excavation and refilling
shall be done true to line and gradient in accordance with general specifications for earthwork in
trenches.
When excavation is done in rock, it shall be cut deep enough to permit the pipes to be laid on a
cushion of sand minimum 7.5 cm deep.
8.0

PAINTING

8.1

All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of Red Lead and two coats of Synthetic
Enamel paint of approved shade and quality. Pipes shall be painted to standard colour code
specified by Engineer-in-Charge.

8.2

All pipes in chases and below floor shall be provided Anti-corrosive treatment.

9.0

PIPE PROTECTION
Where specified in the Schedule of Quantities all pipes below ground shall be protected against
corrosion by wrapping 100mm wide and 4mm thick layer of PYPKOTE/MAKPOLYKOTE
over the pipe.
Page 190 of 304

10.

GUNMETAL VALVES

10.1

Valves 65mm dia and below shall be heavy Gunmetal Fullway Valves or Globe Valves or Ball
valves conforming to I.S. 778-1971 of 20 Kg/cm2 class. Valves shall be tested at manufacturers
works and the same stamped on it.

10.2

All Valves shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before they are allowed to be used on
work.

11.

SCOUR VALVES:
Scour valves shall be C.I. sluice valves as specified above. They shall be installed at the lowest
level or tail end of the system as shown on drawings and directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

12.0

AIR RELEASE VALVES

a) Air release valves shall be single acting type air valves with cast iron body and
bronze/gunmetal internal parts and plastic float.
b) Each air release valve shall be provided with a cast iron isolating sluice valve of specification
given above.

13.0

INSULATION

13.1

The insulation for hot water pipes shall be done as specified in Bill of Quantities and accordingly
following guidelines shall be followed:

13.1.1 For Chased Internal Pipes

Hot water pipes fixed in chase shall be insulated by wrapping 9 mm thick KAIFLEX thermal
insulation tubings OR Supercera Ceramic Rope made up of Ceramic fibres laid parallel to each other
with stainless steel wire wrapped around for reinforcing the fibre complete as per requirement and
finishing it with cement plaster 1:3 mixed with Rapid Hardening Cement.
13.1.2 For External Piping
External hot water line laid in trenches, exposed in shafts, on terrace and along ceiling level shall
be insulated with either KAIFLEX thermal tubings of specified thickness OR fibre glass wool
blankets/mats, as specified in Bill of Quantities. After the insulation, all the pipes shall be
protected with either 12mm thick smooth finished cement plaster (two layers of 6 mm thick of
mix 1:2 Portland cement and fine sand) OR they shall be cladded with 24 SWG aluminum sheet
as specified in Bill of Quantities.
13.1.3

The specifications of the material shall be generally as follows, unless specified:

13.1.4

Generally, following procedure shall be adopted:

(i)

Cleaning the pipe surface to be insulated to make it free from dust &oil.

(ii)

Applying a layer of zinc chromate/anti-rust Japanese primer.

(iii)

Fixing fibre glass wool blankets or mats/Elastomeric Flexible Tubings as specified.

(iv)

Covering it alround with 24 gauge x " wire netting with proper butt joint and tightly
wrapped.
Page 191 of 304

(v)

Applying two layers of 6 mm thick each cement plaster in the ratio of 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine
sand).

(vi)

Applying weatherproofing coating of Insulkote OR of approved material over the cement

plaster.

(vii) For certain places, where exposed insulation is not to be plastered as specified in item (v)
and (vi), then aluminum foil sheet of 24 gauge with 50 mm overlapping, fixed with self
tapping recessed screwed shall be provided.
14.0

CAST IRON PIPES

14.1

Pipes for water supply mains shall be cast iron pipes, centrifugally cast spun iron pipes, class LA
conforming to I.S. 1536. Quality certificates shall have to be furnished.

14.2

Fittings and Inspection Chambers

Fittings used for C.I. drainage pipe shall conform to I.S. 1538-1967.
junctions from branch pipes shall be made by a Y-tee.

14.3

Anchor Block
Suitable anchor blocks shall be provided at all bends and tees to encounter the excessive thrust
developed due to water hammer.

14.4

Rubber Joints
Joints between two pipes shall be made by premoulded rubber joints with suitable tackles in a
manner recommended & approved by the manufacturer. No joints shall be covered until the
lines are Hydraulically tested.

14.5

Lead Caulked Joints:

a) Joints between pipes and C.I. fittings shall be made with refined pig lead. The spigot of the
pipe shall be centered in the adjoining socket by caulking sufficient turns of tarred gaskin,
which will be caulked into the joint to leave a depth of 45 mm for pig lead. Molten pig lead
shall then be poured into the joint in one pouring. The lead shall then be solidly caulked
with suitable tools and hammers.

Whenever possible

b) Contractor may use lead wool joints in wet trench conditions. No additional payment for
lead wool joints will be admissible.
15.0

VALVE CHAMBERS
Contractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chambers in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5
coarse sand) on cement concrete foundations 150 mm thick 1:5:10 mix (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10
graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) 12 mm thick cement plaster inside and outside
finished with a floating coat of neat cement inside with cast iron surface box as approved or as
specified in Schedule of Quantities and in drawings including excavation, back filling complete.

16.0

WATER METERS
Water meters of approved make and design shall be supplied for installation at locations as
shown. The water meters shall meet with the approval of the local municipal authorities. Suitable
valves and chambers to house the meters shall also be provided along-with the meters.
All meters shall conform to Indian Standard IS:779-1978 (Water meters-domestic type) and
IS:2373-1981 (water meters-bulk type). Where called for water meters shall be located in
masonry chambers of appropriated size.
Page 192 of 304

17.0

TESTING

17.1

All pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of min. 1.5 times, the working
pressure and subject to minimum of 7 kg/cm2 in any case and with the consent of Engineer-inCharge.
Pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least two hours without appreciable drop in the
pressure after fixing at site. (+10 %). A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be
signed and dated by Contractor(s) and Engineer.

17.2

In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction, Contractor shall test the
entire installation after connections to the overhead tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall
rectify all leakages, and shall replace all defective materials in the system. Any damage done due
to carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building, furniture and Fixtures
shall be made good during the defects liability period without any extra cost.

17.3

After completion of the water supply system, Contractor shall test each valve by closing and
opening it a number of times to observe if it is working efficiently. Valves which do not
effectively operate shall be replaced by new ones at no extra cost and the same shall be tested as
above.

18.0

MEASUREMENT

18.1

Pipes
Pipes shall be measured per linear metre (to the nearest cm) and shall be inclusive of all fittings
e.g. couplings, tees, bends, elbows, unions, deduction for valves shall be made, cutting holes
chases and making good the same and all items mentioned in the specifications and Schedule of
Quantities.

18.1.1 Gunmetal and cast iron valves shall be measured by numbers.

18.1.2 Single flanges shall be measured by numbers (per single flange) and shall include bolts, nuts,
washers and 3mm thick rubber gasket complete.
18.1.3 Pair of flanges shall be measured by number of pairs and shall include bolts, nuts, washers, and 3
mm thick rubber gaskets complete.
18.2

Insulation
Insulation for hot water pipes shall be measured per linear metre (to the nearest cm) along the
centre line of pipe and shall be measured over all fittings and flanges. No separate or additional
payment shall be made for insulation of Bends, Tees, Flanges or Other Fittings and Valves. The
rate shall include all items specified in the Schedule of Quantities and given in the specifications.

18.2.1 Aluminum cladding/Plaster over the insulated pipes shall be measured by square metre area of
the finished surface. The rate shall be inclusive of all items given in the Schedule of Quantities.
18.3

Painting
Painting for Pipes and over insulation shall be measured per linear metre over finished surface
and shall include all valves and fittings for which no deduction shall be made.

19.0

DISINFECTION
Page 193 of 304

19.1

After completion of the work Contractor shall flush clean the entire system with the citys filtered
water after connection has been made.

19.2

After the first flushing, commercial bleaching powder is to be added to achieve a dosage of 2 to 3
mg/l of water in the system added and flushed. This operation should be performed twice to
ensure that the system is fully disinfected and usable.

20.0

PRE COMMISSIONING:

20.1

Ensure that all pipes are free from debris and obstructions.

20.2

Check all valves and fire hydrant for effective opening and closing action. Defects should be
rectified or valves replaced.

20.3

Ensure that all Connections to Branches has been made.

20.4

Ensure that mains have been connected to the respective pumps, underground and Overhead
tanks.

20.5

Water supply should be available at main Underground tank.

20.6

All main line Valves should be closed.

21.0

COMMISSIONING

21.1

Fill Underground tank with water. Add 1kg fresh bleaching powder after making a solution to
be added near inlet.

21.2

Start Water Supply Pump and allow water to fill main Underground tank. Water will first fill the
fire tank and then overflow to the Raw Water tanks.

21.3

After filling Overhead Reservoir drain the same to its one forth capacity through tank scour
valve. (This is to ensure removal of all mud, debris etc. from the tank).

21.4

Fill Overhead tank to full.

21.5

Release water in the main lines by opening Valves in each circuit. Drain out water in the system
through scour valves or fire hydrant in lower regions. Ensure clean water is now coming out of
the system.

21.6

Open valves for individual clusters. Observe for leakages or malfunctions, check pressure &
flow at end of line by opening Hydrants etc. Remove and rectify defects noticed.

21.7

Check all outlet points for proper operation by opening each valve and allowing water to flow for
a few minutes. Also check for effective closure of valve.

21.8

The entire water supply system should be disinfected with bleaching powder and system flush
cleaned.

21.9

Send four samples of water drawn from four extreme locations for testing for bacteriological test
in sterilized bottles obtained from the concerned laboratory. (Laboratory personal may collect
the samples themselves).

22.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Responsibility for various activities in pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures will rest
with the Contractor.
Page 194 of 304

SECTION - V

SEWERAGE / DRAINAGE SYSTEM

35

1.0

SCOPE OF WORK

1.1

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all Labour, Materials, Equipments and
Appliances necessary and required to completely finish Sewerage/Drainage system as required by
the drawings and specified hereinafter or given in the Schedule of Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the sewerage system shall include:
a) Internal/External sewer line.
b) Excavations including refilling etc.
c) Construction of Collection Chambers, Manholes and Drop Connections.
d) Storm Water Drainage, Harvesting and Disposal
e) Construction of Grease Trap
f)

Sewerage Treatment Plant / Tertiary Treatment / Use of treated effluent for Flushing and
Horticulture purposes.

2.0

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1

All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.2

Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles.

2.3

All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local Municipal

2.4

Location of all manholes, catch basins etc., shall be got confirmed from the Contractor from the
Engineer-in-Charge before the actual execution of work at site.

2.5

All works shall be executed as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

3.0

ALIGNMENT AND GRADE

byelaws.

The sewer pipes shall be laid to alignment and gradient shown on the drawings but subject to
such modifications as shall be ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge from time to time to meet the
requirements of the works. No deviations from the lines, depths of cutting or gradients of
sewers shown on the plans and sections shall be permitted except by the express direction in
writing of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.0

SALT GLAZED STONEWARE PIPES

4.1

Stoneware pipes shall be of first class quality salt glazed and free from rough texture inside or
outside and straight. All pipes shall have the manufacturers name marked on it and shall comply
to IS: 651-1971 and shall be of approved makes.

4.2

Laying and Jointing of Stoneware Salt Glazed Pipes

a) Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit and notwithstanding tests that may have been made
before dispatch each pipe shall be examined carefully on arrival at site. Each pipe shall be
rung with a wooden hammer or mallet and those that do not ring true and clear shall be
rejected. Sound pipes shall be carefully stacked to prevent damage. All defective pipes
should be segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner and their use in the works prevented.
Page 195 of 304

b) The pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and should rest on solid and even
foundations for the full length of the barrel. Socket holes shall be formed in the foundation
sufficiently deep to allow the pipe jointer room to work right round the pipe and as short as
practicable to admit the socket and allow the joint to be made.
c) Where pipes are not bedded on concrete the trench bottom shall be left slightly high and
carefully bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds so that the pipe barrels rest on firm ground. If
excavation has been carried too low it shall be made up with cement concrete 1:5:10 mix at
the Contractors cost and charges.
d) If the bottom of the trench consists of rock or very hard ground that cannot be easily
excavated to a smooth surface, the pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed of 1:5:10 mix
to ensure even bearing.
4.3

Jointing of Pipes
a) Tarred gaskin shall first be wrapped round the spigot of each pipe and the spigot shall then
be placed into the socket of the pipe previously laid, the pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed
in its correct position and the gaskin caulked tightly home so as to fill not more than one
quarter of the total length of the socket.
b) The remainder of the socket shall be filled with stiff mix of cement mortar (1 cement: 1 clear
sharp washed sand). When the socket is filled, a fillet should be formed round the joint with
a trowel forming an angle of 45 degrees with the barrel of the pipe. The mortar shall be
beaten up and used after it has begun to set.
c) After the joint has been made any extraneous materials shall be removed from inside of the
joint with a suitable scraper or Badger. The newly made joints shall be protected until set
from the sun, drying winds, rain or dust. Sacking or other materials, which can be kept
damp, shall be used. The joints shall be exposed and space left all rounds the pipes for
inspection by the Engineer-in-Charge. The inside of the sewer must be left absolutely clear
in bore and free from cement mortar or other obstructions throughout its entire length, and
shall efficiently drain and discharge.

5.0

GULLY TRAPS

5.1

Gully traps shall be of the same quality as described for stoneware pipes in Clause 5.

5.2 Gully traps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement: 5 coarse sand: 10 stone aggregate
40mm nominal size) and a brick masonry chamber 30x30 cms inside in cement mortar 1:3 with 10 x
10 cms grating inside and 30x30 cms C.I. sealed cover and frame weighting not less than 7.2 kg to be
constructed as per standard drawing. Where necessary, sealed cover shall be replaced with C.I.
grating of the same size.
5.2

Grease Trap
Grease Trap shall be provided on Kitchen waste lines before discharging the waste into the
main sewer line. Grease Trap shall be built in brick masonry and shall be similar in
construction to manholes. The grease trap shall be construction to size as shown at the
location on drawings. The grease trap shall be provided with drop inlet, drop outlet,
galvanised wrought iron sediment pan and a baffle wall. Grease trap shall be provided with
2 Nos, double seal manhole cover and frame which shall be identified with lettering `Grease
trap".

Page 196 of 304

6.0

REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES

6.1

All underground storm water drainage pipes and sewer lines where specified (other than those
specified cast iron) shall be centrifugally spun RCC pipes of specified class. Pipes shall be true
and straight with uniform bore. Throughout cracked, warped pipes shall not be used on the
work. All pipes shall be tested by the manufacturer and the Contractor shall produce, when
directed a certificate to that effect from the manufacturer.

6.2

Laying
R.C.C. spun pipes shall be paid on cement concrete bed or cradles as specified and shown on the
detailed drawings the cradles may be precast and sufficiently cured to prevent cracks and
breakage in handling. The invert of the cradles shall be left 12mm below the invert level of the
pipe properly placed on the soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall than be placed on the
bed concrete or cradles and set for the line and gradient by means of sight rails and bonding rods
etc. cradles or concrete bed may be omitted, if directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

6.3

Jointing
After setting out the pipes the collars shall be centered over the joint and filled in with tarred
gaskin, so that sufficient space is left on either side of the collar to receive the mortar. The space
shall then be filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) and caulked by means of
proper tools all joints shall be finished at an angle of 45 degree to the longitudinal axis of the pipe
on both side of the collars neatly.

7.0

CAST IRON PIPES FOR DRAINAGE

7.1

All drainage lines passing under building, floors and roads with heavy traffic, in exposed position
above ground e.g. service floor and basement ceiling shall be cast iron pipes. Position of such
pipes shall generally be shown on the drawings.

7.2

Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun iron pipes conforming to I.S: 1536-1967. Quality
certificates shall be furnished.

7.3

Fittings and Inspection Chambers

a) Fittings used for C.I. drainage pipe shall conform to I.S: 1538-1967. Wherever possible
junction from branch pipes shall be made by a Y tee.
b) Cleanout plugs shall be provided on head of each drain and at location indicated on plans or
directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Cleanout plugs shall be of size matching the full bore of the
pipe. Plugs shall be made out with G.I. coupling caulked into the socket of the pipe or
fittings. The end shall be provided with a brass screwed plug with suitable key for opening.

7.4

Laying
a) All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be jointed with best quality soft Pig Lead (conforming to
IS: 27-1977) which shall be free from impurities. In wet trenches joints shall be made from
Lead Wool. Nothing extra will be paid for Lead Wool joints. Depth of pig lead and weight
for joints shall be as given in I.S.code.
b) The spigot of pipe or fittings shall be centered in the adjoining socket by caulking. Sufficient
turns of tarred gaskin to leave unfilled the required depth of socket for depth of 45mm when
the gaskin has been caulked tightly home. Jointing ring shall be placed round the barrel and
against the face of the socket. Molten Pig Lead shall then be poured to fill the remainder of
the socket. This shall then be done in one pouring. The lead shall then be solidly caulked
with suitable tools and hammers weighting not less than 2 kg.

Page 197 of 304

c) For lead wool joints the socket shall be caulked with tarred gaskin, as explained above. The
lead wool shall be inserted into the sockets and tightly caulked home skein by skein with
suitable tools and hammers of not less than 2 kg weight until joint is filled.
7.5

Testing
a) All lengths of the sewer and drain shall be fully tested for water tightness by means of water
pressure maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from manhole.
All pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure of at least 1.5 metre head of water. The test
pressure shall, however, not exceed 1.5 metre head at any point. The pipes shall be plugged
preferably with standard design rubber plugs on both ends. The upper end shall, however,
be connected to a pipe for filling with water and getting the required head. The tolerance
figure of two liters per centimeter of dia per kilometer may be allowed during a period of ten
minutes. Subsidence of the test water may be due to one or more of the following causes.
(i) Absorption by pipes and joints
(ii) Sweating of pipe or joints
(iii) Leakage at joints or from defective pipes
b) Trapped Air
Allowance shall be made for (i) by adding water until absorption has ceased after which the
test proper should commence. Any leakage will be visible and the defective part of the work
should be cut out and made good. A slight amount of sweating which is uniform may be
overlooked, but excessive sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall be watched for and
taken as indicating a defect to be made good.
c) Sewer and Drain Pipelines shall be tested for straightness by:
(i) Inserting a smooth ball 12mm less than the internal diameter of the pipe. In the absence
of obstructions such as yarn or mortar projecting at the joints the ball should roll down
the invent of the pipe and emerge at the lower end.
(ii) Means of a mirror at one end and a lamp at the other end. If the pipe line is straight the
full circle of light will be seen otherwise obstruction of deviation will be apparent.
d) The Contractor shall give a smoke test to the drains and sewer at his own expense and
charges, if directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
e) A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by Contractor, Engineerin-Charge and representative of Architects/ Consultants.

8.0

CEMENT CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORKS FOR MANHOLES AND

CHAMBERS ETC.

8.1

Materials
a) Water
Water used for all the construction purposes shall be clear and free from Oil, Acid, Alkali,
Organic and other harmful matters, which shall deteriorate the strength and/or durability of
the structure. In general, the water suitable for drinking purposes shall be considered good
enough for construction purpose.
b) Aggregate for Concrete
Page 198 of 304

The aggregate for concrete shall be in accordance with I.S. 383 and I.S. 515 in general, these
shall be free from all impurities that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement. Before actual
use these shall be washed in water, if required as per the direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
The size of the coarse aggregate shall be done as per I.S.383.
c) Sand
Sand for various constructional purposes shall comply in all respects with I.S 650 and I.S.
2116. It shall be clean, coarse hard and strong, sharp, durable, uncoated, free from any
mixture of clay, dust, vegetable matters, mica, iron impurities soft or flaky and elongated
particles, alkali, organic matters, salt, loam and other impurities which may be considered by
the Engineer-in-Charge as harmful for the construction.
d) Cement
The cement used for all the constructional purposes shall be ordinary Portland cement or
rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to I.S. 269.
e) Mild Steel Reinforcement
The mild steel for the reinforcement bars shall be in the form of round bars conforming to
all requirements of I.S. 432 (Grade I).
f)

Bricks
Bricks shall have uniform colour, thoroughly burnt but not over burnt, shall have plan
rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp right angled edges. They should give ringing
sound when struck. Brick shall not absorb more than 20% to 22% of water, when immersed
in water for 24 hours. Bricks to be used shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

g) Other Materials
Other materials not fully specified in these specifications and which may be required in the
work shall conform to the latest I.S. All such materials shall be approved by the Engineer-inCharge before use.
8.2

Cement Concrete (Plain or Reinforced)

a) Cement concrete pipes bedding, cradles, foundations and RCC slabs for all works shall be
mixed by a Mechanical mixer where quantities of the concrete poured at one time permit.
Hand mixing on properly constructed platforms may be allowed for small quantities by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Rate for cement concrete shall be inclusive of all shuttering and
centering at all depth and heights.
b) Concrete work shall be of such thickness and mix as given in the Schedule of Quantities.
c) All concrete work shall be cured for a period of at least 7 days. Such work shall be kept
moist by means of gunny bass at all times. All pipe trenches and foundations shall be kept
dry during the curing period.

8.3

Masonry Work
Masonry work for manholes, chambers, brick masonry pipe trench and such other works as
required shall be constructed from 1st class bricks or 2nd class as specified in the Schedule of
Quantities in cement mortar 1:5 mix (1 cement: 5 coarse sand). All joints shall be properly raked
to receive plaster.

8.4

Cement Concrete for Pipe Support

a) Wherever specified or shown on the drawings, all pipes shall be supported in concrete bed all
round or in haunches. The thickness and mix of the concrete shall be given in the Schedule
of Quantities. Type of the bedding is as described as follows:
Page 199 of 304

b) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-Charge cement concrete for bed, all round or
in haunches shall be laid as follows:Description
Pipes in open ground (No sub soil water)
Pipes (all) in sub soil water condition
Pipes under the building or at road crossing or
under public places

Upto 3 M depth
All round (1:4:8)
All round (1:4:8)
All round (1:3:6)

(1=1 cement, 3-5=coarse sand, 6-10 stone aggregate 40mm nominal size)
c) R.C.C. pipes or C.I. pipes ,may be supported on brick masonry or precast R.C.C or Cast
insitu cradles. Cradles shall be as shown on the drawings.
d) Pipes in loose soil or above ground shall be supported on brick or RCC anchor blocks as
shown on the drawings.
9.0

MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

9.1

All manholes, chambers and other such works as specified shall be constructed in brick masonry
in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) or as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

9.2

All Manholes, Chambers, etc., shall be supported on base of cement concrete of such thickness
and mix as given in the Schedule of Quantities or shown on the drawings.
Where not specified, Manholes may be constructed as follows:(All dimensions internal clear in cms)
Size of Manhole
Type
Maximum depth
Average thickness of
R.C.C slab
Size of cover and
frame (Internal dia)
Weight of cover and
frame

Type of Cover &

Frame

90x80
Rect.
120

120x90
Rect.
245

910 dia
Circular
170

1220 dia
Circular
245

15

15

--

--

1400 dia
Circular
Any depth
beyond 245
--

61x45.5

50 dia

56 dia

56 dia

56 dia

38 Kg. or as
specified

116 Kg. or 170

Kg. or 208 Kg.
or as specified
in BOQ

C.I

C.I. or SFRC
as specified in
BOQ.

116 Kg. or
170 Kg. or
208 Kg. or
as specified
in BOQ
C.I. or SFRC
as specified
in BOQ.

116 Kg. or
170 Kg. or
208 Kg. or
as specified
in BOQ
C.I. or SFRC
as specified
in BOQ.

116 Kg. or
170 Kg. or
208 Kg. or
as specified
in BOQ
C.I. or SFRC
as specified
in BOQ.

9.3

All manholes shall be provided with cement concrete benching in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand: 4 stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). The benching shall have a slope of 10cm towards
the channel. The depth of the channel shall be full diameter of the pipe. Benching shall be
finished with a floating cost of neat cement.

9.4

All manholes shall be plastered with 12/15mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse
sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement inside. Manhole shall be plastered outside
as above but with rough plaster.

Page 200 of 304

9.5

All manholes with depths greater than 1 M. shall be provided with plastic encapsulated 20mm
square or 25mm round rods foot rungs set in cement concrete blocks 25 x 10 x 10cms in 1:2:4
mix 30cms vertically and staggered. Foot rests shall be coated with coal tar before embedding.

9.6

All manholes shall be provided with cast iron covers and frames and embedded in reinforced
cement concrete slab or SFRC precast concrete covers as per instructions of the Engineer-inCharge. Weight of cover, frame and thickness of slab shall be as specified in the Schedule of
Quantities or as given above.

9.7

All catch basins shall be having C.I. grating or SFRC precast Gully Grating as per instructions
of Engineer-in-Charge. The grating along with frame shall be of approved design and quality as
per instruction of Engineer-in-Charge.

10.0

MAKING CONNECTIONS
Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manhole by cutting the walls,
benching and restoring them to the original condition. A new channel shall be cut in the
benching of the existing manhole for the new connection. Contractor shall remove all sewage
and water if encountered in making the connection without additional cost.

10.1

MEASUREMENT

10.2

Stoneware Pipes/R.C.C. Pipes/C.I. Pipes

Stoneware pipes/R.C.C. pipes/C.I. pipes shall be measured for the finished length of the pipe
line per linear metre i.e. (a) lengths between Manholes shall be recorded from inside of one
manhole to inside of other manhole, (b) length between socket of pipe near gully trap and inside
of manhole. Rate shall include all items given in the Schedule of Quantities and specifications.

10.3

Gully Traps
Gully traps shall be measured by the number and rate shall include all Excavation, Foundation,
Concrete Brick Masonry, Cement Plaster inside and outside, C.I. Grating and sealed cover and
frame.

10.4

Manholes

10.5

(a)

All manholes shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items specified above and
necessary Excavation, Refilling & Disposal of surplus earth.

(b)

Manholes with depths greater than specified under the main item shall be paid for under
extra depth and shall include all items as given for manholes. Measurement shall be
done to the nearest cm. Depth of the manholes shall be measured from top of the
manhole cover to bottom of Channel.

Drop Connections
Drop connections shall be measured by number for a depth of 60 cms or part thereof between
invert levels. Additional depth shall be paid for as extra per metre depth as per the actual length
of the drop connection, measured to the nearest cm.

10.6

Making Connections
Item for making connection to municipal sewer shall be paid for by number and shall include all
items given in the Schedule of Quantities and Specifications.

Page 201 of 304

10.7

Masonry Drains
Payment for masonry drains shall be made under individual items of Masonry, Cement concrete
and plaster by volume or area as given in the Schedule of Quantities.

10.8

Brick Masonry and Cement Concrete shall be measured per cubic metre and shall include all
items as given in the Schedule of Quantities.

10.9

Cement Plaster shall be measured per square metre area.

11.0

COMMISSIONING

11.1

After successful testing of the different sewerage and drainage pipes in parts, the Contractor
shall provide all facilities including necessary pipings, labours, tools and equipments etc. for
carrying out testing and commissioning of the entire external sewerage and drainage system
complete as per requirement in the presence of Client representative/Consultant, whenever and
as may be required. Generally, the following test/inspection has to be carried out:(a)

For any Leakages/seepages in the external sewerage and drainage pipes.

(b)

For checking the functioning of the entire external sewerage and drainage system including
rainwater harvesting system and to ensure that the waste water is continuously flowing
towards outfall without any intermediate stagnation.

(c)

For the functioning of the valves and accessories etc. by putting ON/OFF the controlling
valves of the various diversions in the sewerage and drainage and rain water harvesting
system.
END OF SECTION - V

Page 202 of 304

SECTION VII

SHOP DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS

1.

The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant two copies of Shop Drawings for Plumbing works
as an Advance Copy to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval before start of work. Subsequent to
the approval of the shop drawings, the Contractor shall submit six copies of Shop Drawings for
execution to the Engineer-in-Charge. Also the Contractor shall submit four copies of the
Technical Specifications and Catalogues.

2.

Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following conditions:

3.

(a)

Structural supports/hanging/laying and jointing details for all types of pipes as required.

(b)

Plumbing & Fire Fighting layout plans as required and for any changes in the layout of Plumbing &
Fire Fighting and Architectural drawings.

The Contractor can only commence the work after the approval of above documents by
Consultant.

END OF SECTION VIII

Page 203 of 304

PROJECT
PROPOSED INDIAN ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING AT LEH
SUBJECT

SANITARY ENGINEERING AND FIRE FIGHTING SERVICES

GUIDE LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS

S.No
1.

Materials
Vitreous China
Sanitaryware
(1st class quality)

I.S:No
2556

Brand Name
HINDWARE
PARRYWARE
CERA

2.

Plastic W.C Seats

ADMIRAL

COMMANDER
3.

C.P
fittings
Toilets)

(For

ESS ESS
VIJAY

4.

C.P Bottle Trap

VIJAY

5.

Stainless Steel Sink

NIRALI
NEELKANTH
JAYNA

6.
7.

For Hospital Sink &

C.P. Fittings of Wet
Areas
Bath Room C.P
accessories

VIJAY
ESS ESS
JAQUAR

8.

Health Faucet
(With S/S)

9.

G.I. pipes
(Upto 150mm dia)

1239 Pt-I

10.

M.S Pipes
(Upto 150mm dia)

1239 Pt-I TATA

/Pt-II
JINDAL HISSAR
3589
TATA

Above 150mm dia

VIJAY
TATA

Page 204 of 304

Manufacturer/Dealer
Hindustan Sanitaryware
Bahadurgarh
E.I.D Parry, Madras
Madhusudan Ceramics
N.D.S.E, Part II
New Delhi 110 049
Navin Industries,
C-82, Mayapuri Indl. Area,
Phase-I, New Delhi
Ph: 540 4543
Phenoweld Polymer Pvt. Ltd,
Mumbai
Ess Ess Bathroom Products Pvt.
Ltd.
Vijay Metal Industries
Delhi 110 006
Tel: 23931621
Vijay Metal Industries
Delhi 110 006
Tel: 23931621
Nirali
Sekhri Brothers
B-57, Mayapuri Indl. Ph-I
New Delhi
Jain Brothers Sanitation Pvt. Ltd.
12, SSI Industrial Area, GT Karnal
Road
Delhi 110 033
Ph: 2725 2436/2745 2594
Vijay Metal Industries
Delhi 110 006
Tel: 23931621
Ess Ess Bathroom Products Pvt.
Ltd.
Jaquar & Co., New Delhi
Vijay Metal Industries
Delhi 110 006
Tel: 23931621
The Tata Iron and Steel Co. Ltd.
Calcutta
The Tata Iron & Steel Co. Ltd.,
Calcutta
Jindal Hissar
The Tata Iron & Steel Co. Ltd.,
Calcutta

S.No
11.

Materials
Ductile Iron
Pipes

I.S:No
(D.I) 8329

12.

Sand Cast Iron Pipes & 1729

fittings

Brand Name

NECO

SRIF
13.

Sand Cast Iron Pipes & 3989

fittings

NECO
HEPCO

14.

UPVC pipes

4985-1981

POLYPACK

Manufacturer/Dealer
Durable Polymer Products (P) Ltd.,
C/1, B, Block C, 1st Floor
Parvati Vihar, Kolkata
700 059
Jayaswal Neco Ltd.,
Nagpur
B-19, Foundry Nagar
Hathras Road
Agra 282 006
Jayaswal Neco Ltd.,
Nagpur
Sham Trading Co.
Ph No: - 9899145748
Polypack Industries, Udyog Vihar,
Gurgaon

FINOLEX

Finolex Industries Ltd.

PRINCE

511, Juneja Tower I

District Centre, Janakpuri
New Delhi 110 058
#011-51579511

SUPREME

The Supreme Industries Ltd.

518, Osian Building
12, Nehru Place
New Delhi 110 019

15.

G.I.
(Malleable)

Fittings 1879
(Part I
to X)

R
KS
UNIK

16.

Stoneware
Gully Trap

pipes

& 651

17.

CILA S/S pipes

1536

18.

C.I. fittings

1538

ANAND

R.M. Engg. Works,

4, GIDC Estate Ph-I, Vatva
Ahmedabad.
K.S Engineering Works. Ghaziabad
Unique Mfg. Co.
Jallandhar
Lal Chand Anand & Sons
13/1, Bulandshahr Road
Ghaziabad 201 011

RK
or Local Equiv. of
approved quality
KESORAM
Kesoram Spun Pipe & Foundries,
Calcutta
IISCO
Indian Iron & Steel Co.
Calcutta
ELECTROSTEEL Electrosteel Castings Ltd.
40, Stephen House
4, B.B.D Bag (East)
Calcutta
NEEL
AR Shining Foundry & Engg.
Works, Delhi 110 006
Page 205 of 304

S.No

Materials

19.

Horizontal Soil/Waste
hanging supports

I.S:No

Brand Name
KARTAR

CHILLY

CAMRY

20.

Flush Valve

JAQUAR
ESS ESS

21.

Ball valve

ZOLOTO
IBP

ARCO (ITALY)

SANT
22.

Butterfly Valve

130951991

AUDCO
KSB

SANT
LEADER
23.

Float valve (G.M) upto

40mm

LEADER
SANT

24.

Float valve (C.I) 50mm

and above

LEADER

SARKER

25.

C.I Manholes cover

26.

Insulation

1726

NECO or Eqv.
SRIF

Page 206 of 304

Manufacturer/Dealer
Dealer
Ranjeet Water Supply Co.
4273, Gali Shahtara
Ajmer Gate, New Delhi
Tel 23215738
Veer Sanitary Appliances Pvt. Ltd.
B-10/3, Paras Bhawan, Group Indl.
Area, Wazirpur,
Delhi 110052
Tel-20532036/9811156106
Veer Bath Accessories Pvt. Ltd.
I-2228, DSIDC Industrial Park
Narela, New Delhi 40
Ph: - 27787172
Jaquar & Co., New Delhi
Ess Ess Bathroom Products Pvt.
Ltd.
Zoloto Industries Ltd.
Jallandhar, Punjab
Goojar Mal Ganpat Rai
3370-71, Hauz Qazi
Delhi 110 006
Tel:3264483/3263380
Deepak Exim Company
LG-4, J-21, South Extn I
New Delhi 110049
Tel: 24628121
Sant Brass Metal Works
Jallandhar
Audco India Ltd.
P.B-976, Chennai 600 089
Auth. Dealer

Aquatech Engineers
E-5/12, Basement
Malviya Nagar, N. Delhi- 17
Sant Brass Metal Works
Jallandhar
Leader Engg. Works
Jallandhar
Leader Engg. Works
Jallandhar
Sant Brass Metal Works
Jallandhar
Leader Engg. Works
Jallandhar
H.Sarker & Co.
Ajit Sen Bhawan
13, Crooked Lane
2nd Floor, Calcutta 69
Jayaswal Neco Ltd.,Nagpur
SRIF Agra

S.No Materials
a) For Internal

b) For External
27.

Mirror

28.

Grating for Floor Trap

& Floor Drain

29.

Liquid Soap Container

I.S:No

Brand Name
KAIFLEX

PYKOTE
MAKPOLYKOTE
ATUL
GOLDENFISH
VIJAY
UTEC

TOSHI

30.

Sensor Operated Urinal

Flushing

UTEC

TOSHI

SAFEGUARD

Page 207 of 304

Manufacturer/Dealer
Carewell Pipes
102, First Floor, Usha
Building, Azadpur
New Delhi 110 033
Ph: 7410491/7462019
PYKOTE
MAKPOLYKOTE
Atul Miror, New Delhi
Vijay Metal Industries
Delhi 110 006
Tel: 23931621
Utec Systems
17, New Rohtak Road
First Floor
New Delhi 110 005
Ph: 3632741/3422574
Toshi Automatic Systems
D-132, Indl. Area
Ghaziabad,
Ph-8700941/1072
Utec Systems
17, New Rohtak Road
First Floor
New Delhi 110 005
Ph:3632741/3422574
Toshi Automatic Systems
D-132, Indl. Area
Ghaziabad,
Ph-8700941/1072
Ashok Engineering Co.
Delhi

Kiran

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS

Page 208 of 304

SUBJECT
TENDER FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.NO

DESCRIPTION

PAGE NO.

1.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS & TECHNICAL DATASHEET

210 228

2.

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS

229 230

3.

BILL OF QUANTITIES

278 - 285

2.

Page 209 of 304

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION,
& ALLIED WORKS
1.0

GENERAL
The electrical Installation work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian Standard
Code of Practice. It shall also be in conformity with the current Indian Electricity rules
and regulations and requirements of the Local Electricity Supply Authority and Fire
Insurance regulations, so far as these become applicable to the installation. Electrical
work in general shall be carried out as per following CPWD Specifications amended upto
date.
General Specifications for Electrical Works.
- Part -I - Internal Work

- 2005.

- Part -II - External Work

- 2007.

- Part -IV - Substation Work - 2007.

Wherever this specifications calls for a higher standard of material and or workmanship
than those required by any of the above mentions regulations and specification then the
specification here under shall take precedence over the said regulations and standards.
The details of scope of work subhead wise are given in the subsequent paras. The
quantities worked out in schedule of quantities are based on particular equipment
considered at design stage. The contractor is required to recheck the quantities based on
equipment offered by him to achieve required parameters.

Page 210 of 304

SECTION 1
POINT WIRING
1.0

SCOPE
This section covers the general technical requirements and measurement of the various
component in Internal Electrical Installation Works.

1.1

TERMINOLOGY
The definition of terms shall be accordance with IS 732: 1989 (Indian Standard Code
of Practice for Electrical Wiring), except for the definitions of point, circuit and
submain wiring, which are defined in Clause 1.2, 1.3 and 1.3.2 hereunder.

1.2

POINT WIRING

1.2.1

Definition :
A point (other than socket outlet point) shall include all works necessary in complete
wiring to the following outlets from the controlling switch or MCB. The scope of
wiring for a point shall, however, includes the wiring work necessary in tapping from
another point in the same distribution circuit: a)

Ceiling rose or connector (in the case of points for ceiling/ exhaust fan points,
pre-wired light fittings and call bells)

b)

Ceiling rose (in case of pendants except stiff pendants)

c)

Back plate (in the case of stiff pendants)

d)

Lamp holder (in the case of gooseneck type wall brackets, batten holders and
fittings which are not pre-wired.

1.2.2

In the case of call bell points, the words from the controlling switch or MCB shall be
read as from the ceiling rose meant for connection to bell push.

1.2.3

Scope
i)

Following shall be deemed to be included in point wiring :

a)

Conduit, accessories for the conduit and wiring cables between the switch box
and point outlet, loop protective earthing of each fan/ light fixture.

b)

All fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, Phil plug, rawl plug etc. as
required.

c)

Metal switch boxes for control switches, regulators, sockets etc. recessed or
surface type and modular sheet covers in case of modular type switches and
outer & inner cover plates in case of modular type switches.

d)

Outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull-through boxes etc. but excluding metal boxes
if any, provided with switchboards for loose wires/ conduit terminations.
Page 211 of 304

e)

Control switch or MCB as specified.

f)

Ceiling rose or connector as required.

g)

Connections to ceiling rose, connector, lamp holder, switch etc.

h)

Interconnection wiring between points on the same circuit, in the same switch
box or from another.

i)

Protective (loop earthing) conductor from one metallic switch box to another in
the distribution circuits, and for socket outlets. (The length of protective
conductor run alongwith the circuits/ submains is excluded form the scope of
points)

j)

Based conduit or porcelain tubing where wiring cables pass through wall etc.

ii)

Following shall be deemed to be included in group control point wiring :

Conduit, accessories for the conduit and wiring cables between the Switchboard/
MCBDB to the first point or wiring cable between points forming a group
including loop protective earthing of each fan/ light fixture.
(Providing
MCB/Switch is not included in this scope and will be measured seperately].
All fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, Phil plug, rawl plug etc. as
required.
Junction boxes, pull-through boxes etc. but excluding metal boxes if any,
provided with Switchboard/ MCBDB for loose wires/ conduit terminations.
Ceiling rose or connector as required.
Connections to ceiling rose, connector & Switch/ MCB etc.
Bushed conduit or porcelain tubing where wiring cables pass through wall etc.

1.3

MEASUREMENT

1.3.1

POINT WIRING (OTHER THAN SOCKET OUTLET POINT)

Unless and otherwise specified, there shall be no linear measurement for point wiring
for light points, fan points, exhaust fan points and call bell points. These shall be
measured on unit basis by counting.
No separate measurement will made for interconnections between points in the same
distribution circuit and for the circuit protective (loop earthing) conductors between
metallic switch boxes.

1.3.2

POINT WIRING FOR SOCKET OUTLET POINTS

i)

The light plug (5 / 6 Amp) point and power(15 / 16 Amp) point wiring shall be
measured on linear basis, from the respective tapping point of live cable, namely,
Page 212 of 304

switchbox, another socket outlet point, or the Sub distribution board as the case
may be, upto the socket outlet.

1.3.3

ii)

The metal box with covers, switch/ MCB, socket outlet and other accessories
shall be measured and paid as separate item.

iii)

The power point may be 15/5 Amp or 16/6 Amp 6 pin socket outlet, where so
specified in the Tender documents. (2 pin or 5 pin socket outlet shall not be
permitted.)

SWITCH CONTROL GROUP POINT WIRING

i)

ii)
1.3.4

1.3.5

In the case of points with more than one point controlled by one switch, such
points shall be measured in part i.e. from switch to the first point outlet as one
point and (from switch to first point of group controlled point). Subsequent
looping points i.e one point to another point in the same group will be measured
under group controlled point (from one point to another point).
No recovery shall be made for non provision of more than one switch in such
cases.

MCB CONTROL GROUP POINT WIRING

i)

In the case of points with more than one point controlled by one MCB, such
points shall be measured in part i.e. from MCB to the first point outlet as one
point and will be measured under group controlled point (from MCB to first
point of group controlled point). Subsequent looping points i.e one point to
another point in the same group will be measured under group controlled point
(from one point to another point).

ii)

Providing MCB is not covered in this scope and will be measured separately and
shall be separately paid for.

TWIN CONTROL LIGHT POINTS WIRING

i)

A light point controlled by two numbers of two way switches shall be measured
as two points from the fitting to the switches on either side.

ii)

No recovery shall be made for non-provision of more than one ceiling rose or
connector in such cases.

1.4

CIRCUIT AND SUBMAIN WIRING

1.4.1

Circuit Wiring
Circuit wiring shall mean the wiring from the distribution board upto the tapping point
for the nearest first point of that distribution circuit, viz. upto the nearest first switch
box.

1.4.2

Submain Wiring
Submain wiring shall mean the wiring from one Main/Distribution switchboard to
another. Measurement of circuit and submain wiring.
Page 213 of 304

1.5

i)

Circuit and submain shall be measured on linear basis along the run of the wiring.
The measurement shall include all lengths from end to end of conduit exclusive
of interconnections inside the switchboard etc. The increase on account of
diversion or slackness shall not be included in the measurement

ii)

The length of circuit wiring with two wires shall be measured from the
distribution board to the first nearest switch box in the circuit irrespective of
whether the neutral conductor is take to switch box or not.

iii)

When wires of different circuit are grouped in as single conduit the same shall be
measured on linear basis depending on the actual numbers and sizes of wires run.

iv)

When circuit wires and wires of point wiring are run in the same conduit, circuit
wiring shall be measured on linear basis depending on the actual number and
sizes of wires run in the existing conduit. As far as, practicable circuit wiring and
point wiring shall be drawn in different conduit.

v)

Circuit wiring and submain shall not be run in the same conduit.

vi)

Protective (loop earthing) conductors, which are run along the circuit wiring and
the submain wiring, shall be measured on linear basis and paid for separately.

OTHER WIRING WORKS

i)

1.6

Except as specified above for point wiring, circuit wiring and submain wiring,
other types of wiring shall be measured separately on linear basis alongwith the
run of wiring depending on the actual number and sizes of wires run.

SYSTEM OF DISTRIBUTION AND WIRING

The main distribution board and branch distribution board shall be controlled or
provided with linked switch fuse unit or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) of specified
rating on the phase or live conductor or combined phase and neutral control gear for
incoming and outgoing as indicated in the BOQ.
Distribution of submain and circuits.
As per final approved single line diagram.

1.6.1

Balancing of Circuits
i)

1.6.2

The balancing of circuits in three wire or poly phase installations shall be

arranged before handling to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge.

Wiring System
i)

Unless and otherwise specified in the tender documents, wiring shall be done
only by the Looping System. Phase of live conductors shall be looped at the
switch boxes and neutral conductors at the point outlets.

Page 214 of 304

1.6.3

ii)

Lights, fans and call bell shall be wired in the lighting circuits. 15/ 16 Amp
socket outlets and other power outlets shall be wired in the Power circuits. 5/
6Amp socket outlets shall be wired in the lighting circuits.

iii)

The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is no break in the
neutral wire except in the form of linked switchgear

iv)

The wiring shall be segregated as Essential and non-essential in all the building in
the airports except in the case of residential quarters.

Run of Wiring
The type of wiring shall be as specified in tender document, i.e. conduit.
Surface wiring shall run, as far as possible, along the walls and ceiling so as to be easily
accessible for inspection.
In no case, the open wiring shall be run above the false ceiling without the approval of
Engineer-In-Charge.
In all types of wiring, due consideration shall be given for neatness, good appearance
and safety.

1.6.4

Passing through walls or floors

When wiring cables are to pass through a wall, these shall be taken through a
protection (Steel/PVC) pipe or porcelain tube of suitable size such that they pass
through in a straight line without twist or cross in them on either end of such holes.
The ends of metallic pipe shall be neatly bushed with porcelain, PVC or other
approved material.
Where a wall pipe passes outside a building so as to be exposed to weather, the outer
end shall be bell mouthed and turned downwards and properly bushed on the open
end.
All floor openings for carrying any wiring shall be suitably sealed after installation.

1.6.5

Joints in Wiring
i)

No bare conductor in phase and/or neutral or twisted joints in phase, neutral,

and/or protective conductors in wiring shall be permitted.

ii)

There shall be no joints in the through runs of cables. If the length of final circuit
or submain is more than the length of a standard coil, thus necessitating a
through joint, such joints shall be made by means of approved mechanical
connectors in suitable junction boxes.

iii)

Termination of multi-stranded conductors shall be done using suitable crimping

type thimbles.

Page 215 of 304

1.7

CONFORMITY TO IE ACT, IE RULES AND STANDARDS

i)

All electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of
Indian Electricity Act, 1910 and Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, amended upto
date.

ii)

The works shall also conform to relevant Indian Standard Codes of Practice shall
be followed.

1.8

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF COMPONENTS

1.8.1

Quality of Materials
All material and equipments supplied by the Contractor shall be new. They shall be of
such design, size and materials as to satisfactorily function under the rated conditions
of operation and to withstand the environmental conditions at site.

1.8.2

1.8.3

Conformity of Standards
a)

All components shall conform to relevant Indian Standard Specification,

wherever existing. However, for conduits, wiring cables, modular switches and
socket outlets, ISI marked materials shall only be permitted.

b)

The Indian Standards, including amendments or revisions thereof upto the date
of tender acceptance, shall be applicable.

Interchangeability
Similar parts of all switches, lamp holders, distribution fuse boards, switchgears, ceiling
roses, brackets, pendants, fans and all other fittings of the same type shall be
interchangeable in each installation.

1.9

CABLES

1.9.1

Wiring Cables
Conductors of wiring cables (other than flexible cables) shall be of aluminium or
copper, as specified.
Stranded aluminium conductor shall not be used in wiring cables upto and including 6
Sq.mm. size.
Unless and otherwise specified, copper conductor of size 1.5 Sq.mm. and above used
for wiring shall be stranded.

1.9.2

Flexible Cables
i)

Conductor of flexible cables shall be of copper. The minimum cross sectional

area of conductor for flexible cable shall be 0.0006 Sq. inch (14/.0076 or
14/0.193 mm).

ii)

Only 3 core flexible cables shall be used for connecting single-phase appliances.
Page 216 of 304

iii)

Unless armour, or tough rubber, or PVC sheath mechanically protects the

flexible cables, these shall not be used in workshops and other places where they
are liable to mechanical damage.

iv)

Flexible cable connection to bell push from ceiling rose shall be taken through
steel conduit/ metallic casing and capping.

1.10

WIRING ACCESSORIES

1.10.1

Control Switches For Points

1.10.2

1.10.3

i)

Combined switch cum socket shall not be permitted.

ii)

Control switch shall be placed only in the live conductor of the circuit. No single
pole switch or fuse shall be inserted in the protective (earth) conductor, or
earthed neutral conductor of the circuit.

Socket Outlets
i)

5/ 6Amp and 15/ 16Amp 6 Pin socket outlets shall be installed at the following
positions, unless otherwise specified.

a)

Kitchen/ Pantry 23 cm above working platform and away from the likely
positions of stove and sink.

b)

Toilets in non-residential building 1.25 mt. Above floor level.

c)

At all other places 23 cm above floor level.

Switch box covers

Modular sheet of 3 mm thick of approved shade shall be used for switch box covers in
case of modular type switches. For modular type switches/sockets suitable outer and
inner cover plates as specified shall be provided over the standard box as
recommended by the manufacturers of modular type switch/ sockets and no separate
sheet cover is required to be provided.

1.10.4

1.10.5

Ceiling Rose
i)

A ceiling rose shall not be used on circuit the voltage of which normally exceeds
250 Volts.

ii)

Only one flexible cord shall be connected to ceiling rose. Specially designed
ceiling roses shall be used for multiple pendants.

iii)

A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse terminal as an integral part of it.

Lamp Holders

h) The standard constructional feature of manufacturers (ISI approved) of lamp holders is

acceptable. Where the lamp holders are part of light fixtures the holders shall be suitable
for the type of lamps used.

Page 217 of 304

1.11

FITTINGS

1.11.1

The type of fittings shall be as specified in BOQ of tender documents.

Indoor Type Fittings
i)

The contractors shall supply the specified model and make of the fittings. The
standard constructional features of specified make and model as given in the
tender document are acceptable.

ii)

Where conductors are required to be drawn through tube or channel leading to

the fitting, the tube or channel must be free from sharp angles or projection edge,
and of such size as will enable them to be wired with the conductors used for the
final circuit without removing the braiding or sheathing. A far as possible all such
tubes or channels should be of sufficient size to permit looping back.

iii)

Pendants in verandahs and similar situations exposed to wind shall be of fixed

rod type.

iv)

Fittings using discharge lamps shall be complete with power factor correction
capacitors, either integrally or externally. An earth terminal with suitable marking
shall be provided for each fitting for discharge lamps.

v)

Fittings shall be installed such that the lamp is at a height specified in approved
drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

vi)

Copper chokes of Fluorescent Tube light fittings shall be of Electronics type or

as specified in BOQ.

1.12

ATTACHMENT OF FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

1.12.1

Conduiting Wiring System

1.12.2

i)

All accessories like switches, socket outlets, call bell pushed and regulators shall
be fixed in flush pattern inside the switch/ regulator boxes. Accessories like
ceiling roses, brackets, batten holders, stiff pendants etc. shall be fixed on metal
outlet boxes.

ii)

Brass screws shall be used to fix the accessories to their bases.

iii)

The switch box/ regulator box shall normally be mounted with their bottom 1.25
m from floor level, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

Fixing of Walls and Ceiling

i)
PVC sleeves/ dash fasteners should normally be used for fixing to walls or
ceiling.
ii)

1.12.3

Plugging of walls or ceiling can be done in a better way where neatness is the first
consideration. In all such cases, an approved type of asbestos or fiber fixing plug
(rawl or Phil plug) with correct size of tools shall be used and done in a
workmanlike manner.

FANS, REGULATORS AND CLAMPS

1.12.3.1 Ceiling Fans

Page 218 of 304

i)
ii)

iii)

iv)

Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to relevant Indian

Standards.
Any additional hardware items required for installation of ceiling fans including
fan hooks/ clamps as specified below, shall be provided as specified in BOQ as a
separate item.
All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special connector boxes, and
suspended from hooks or shackles, with insulators between hooks and
suspension rods. There shall be no joint in the suspension rod.
For wooden or steel joists and beams, the suspension shall consist of MS flat of
size not less than 40mm x 6mm, secured on the sides of the joists or beams by
means of two coach screws of size not less than 5 cm for each flat. Where there
is space above the beam, a through bolt of size not less than 1.5cm dia shall be
placed above the beam from which the flats are suspended. In the latter case, the
flats shall be secured from movements by means of another bolt and nut at the
bottom of the beam. A hook consisting of MS rod of size not less than 1.5 cm
dia shall be inserted between the MS flat through oval holes on their sides.
Alternatively, the flats may be bent inwards to hold tightly between them by
means of a bolt and nut, a hook of S form.

v)

In the case of I beams, flats shall be shaped suitably to catch the flanges and
shall be held together by means of a long bolt and nut.

vi)

For concrete roofs, a 12mm dia. MS rod in the shape of U with their vertical
legs bent horizontally at the top at least 19cm on either side and bound to the top
reinforcement of the roof shall be used.
In buildings with concrete roofs having a low ceiling height, where the fan clamp
mentioned under sub clause (vi) above cannot be used, or wherever specified,
recessed type fan clamp inside a metallic box shall be used. The metallic box
shall suitably be covered with 3mm thick modular sheet.

vii)

viii) Canopies on top of suspension rod shall effectively hide the suspension.
ix)

The leading in wire shall be of copper and nominal cross sectional area not less
than 1.5 Sq.mm. and shall be protected from abrasion.

x)

All ceiling fans shall be hung at a height as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

xi)

In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including wiring,
the same shall be measured in units of 10 cm. Any length less than 5cm shall be
ignored.
xii) The wiring of extra down rod shall be paid as supplying and drawing cable in
existing conduit.
1.12.3.2 Exhaust Fans
i)
ii)

Exhaust fans shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

Exhaust fans shall be erected at the places indicated by the Engineer-In-Charge
additional hardware items required for installation of ceiling fans including fan
hooks/ clamps as specified below, shall be provided as specified in BOQ as a
separate item.
1.12.3.3 Regulators
The metallic body of regulators of ceiling fans / exhaust fans shall be connected to
earth by protective conductor.
Page 219 of 304

1.12.3.4 Workmanship
Good workmanship is an essential requirement to be complied with. The entire work
of manufacture/ fabrication, assembly and installation shall conform to sound
engineering practice.
The work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of an engineer, employed by
the contractor, who shall rectify then and there the defects pointed out by the
Engineer-In-Charge during the progress of work. The qualification of engineer or
supervisor for over all supervision and to take instructions from the Engineer-InCharge shall be as specified in the special conditions.
1.13

TESTING OF INSTALLATION
All the completed installations shall be tested as per specification for Testing of
Installation.

1.13.1

Drawings
i)

The work shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings enclosed with the
tender documents and also in accordance with modification thereto from time to
time as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge or as per the drawing prepared by
the contractor based on inventory and approved by Engineer-In-Charge.

ii)

All wiring diagrams shall be deemed to be Drawings within the meaning of the
term as used in the Conditions of Contract. They shall indicate the main
switchboard, the distribution boards (with circuit numbers controlled by them),
the runs of various mains and submains and the position of all points with their
controls.

iii)

All circuits shall be indicated and numbered in the wiring diagram and all points
shall be given the same number as the, circuit to which they are electrically
connected.

1.14

COMMISSIONING OF COMPLETION

1.14.1

Before the workman leaves the work finally, he must make sure that the installation is
commissioned, after due testing.

1.14.2

Completion Plan and Completion Certificate

i)

For all work completion certificate after completion of work as required by

CLIENT shall be submitted to the Engineer-In-Charge.

ii)

Completion plan drawn to a suitable scale in tracing sheet with three blue print
copies of the same shall also be submitted.

a)
b)
c)

General Layout of the building.

Locations of main switchboard and distribution boards.
Position of all points and their controls indicating the circuit numbers controlled
by them.
Types of fittings, viz. fluorescent, pendants, brackets, bulkhead, fans and exhaust
fans etc.

d)

Page 220 of 304

e)

Name of work, job number, accepted tender reference, actual date of completion,
names of Architect/Consultants and name of the firm who executed the work
with their signature.

Page 221 of 304

SECTION 2
SPECIFICATIONS FOR METALLIC CONDUIT WIRING SYSTEM
1.0

SCOPE
This section covers the detailed requirements for wiring work in metallic conduits.
This section covers both surface and recessed types of works.

1.1

APPLICATIONS
Conduit system used shall be Rigid.
Flexible conduits may only be permitted for interconnections between switchgear &
DBs and conduit terminations in wall.

1.2

MATERIALS

1.2.1

Conduits :

i)

All rigid conduit pipes shall be of steel and be ISI marked. The wall thickness shall
be 1.6mm (16 SWG) for conduits upto 32mm dia. and 2mm (14 SWG) for conduits
above 32mm dia and as per IS. These shall be solid drawn or reamed by welding, and
finished with galvanized or stove enameled surface.

ii)

The maximum number of PVC insulated cables conforming to IS: 694-1990 that can
be drawn in one conduit is given size wise in Table I., and the number of cables per
conduit shall not be exceeded. Conduit sizes shall be selected accordingly in each
run.

iii)

No steel conduits less than 20mm in diameter shall be used.

1.2.2

Conduits Accessories :

i)

The conduit wiring system shall be complete in all respects, including their
accessories.

ii)

All conduit accessories shall be of threaded type, and under no circumstances pin
grip type or clamp grip accessories shall be used.

iii)

Bends, couplers etc. shall be solid type in recessed type of works and may be solid or
inspection type as required, in surface type of works.

iv)

a)

Saddles for surface conduit work on wall shall not be less than 0.55mm (24
gauge) for conduits upto 25mm dia and not less than 0.9mm (20 gauge) for
larger diameter. The corresponding widths shall be 19mm and 25mm.

b)

The minimum width and the thickness of girder clips used for fixing conduits
to steel joints, and clamps shall be as per Table-II.

1.2.3

Outlets :

i)

The switch box regulator box shall be made of metal on all sides, except on the front.
In case of welded mild steel sheet boxes the wall thickness shall not be less than
1.2mm (18 gauge) for boxes upto a size of 20 cm x 30 cm and above this size 1.6mm
Page 222 of 304

(16 gauge) thick MS boxes shall be used. The metallic boxes shall be duly painted
with anticorrosive paint before erection as per painting specification.
ii)

a)

Outlet boxes for light/ power sockets shall be of standard size of manufacturer
to accommodate required number of modular switches, socket outlet.

b)

Where a large number of control switches and/ or fan regulators are required
to be installed at one place, these shall be installed in more than one outlet box
adjacent to each other for ease of maintenance.

iii)

An earth terminal with stud and metal washers shall be provided in each DB/MS box
for termination of protective conductor and for connection to socket outlet/ metallic
body of fan regulator etc.

iv)

A metal strip shall be welded/ screwed, to the metal box as support if fan regulators
are to be fixed herein.

v)

Clear depth of the box shall not be less than 50mm, and this shall be increased
suitably to accommodate mounting of fan regulators in flush pattern.

vi)

The fan regulators can also be mounted on the switch box covers, if so directed by
the Engineer-In-Charge.

vii)

The size of the switchbox in case of modular type switches shall be as below
a)

Without any fan regulator/ Dimmer on the Switch box:- The size of the switch
box shall be minimum 75mm x 75mm x 60mm deep to accommodate the
number of switches meeting spacing requirements mentioned below.

b)

With electronic/ resistance type fan regulator on the Switch box:- The size of
the switch box shall be minimum 75mm x 75mm x 60mm to accommodate the
number of switches and fan regulators meeting spacing requirements
mentioned below.

Spacing Requirements
The spacing between any edge of live terminal of Switch/ socket and the body shall
not be less than 26mm at any point.
viii)

The size of the switch box in case of modular type switches shall be as per
manufacturers standard.

1.3

INSTALLATION

1.3.1

Common aspects for recessed and surface conduit works.

i)

Conduit Joints
a)

The conduit work in each circuit or section shall be completed before the
cables are drawn in.

b)

Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of screwed couplers and screwed

accessories only. Threads on conduit pipes in all cases shall be between 13mm
Page 223 of 304

to 19mm long, sufficient to accommodate pipes to full threaded portion of

couplers or accessories.

ii)

c)

Cut ends of conduit pipes shall have no sharp edges, nor any burrs left to avoid
damage to the insulation of the conductors while pulling them through such
pipes.

d)

The Engineer-In-Charge, with a view to ensuring that the above provision has
been carried out, may require that the separate lengths of conduit etc. after they
have been prepared shall be submitted for inspection before being fixed.

e)

No bare threaded portion of conduit pipe shall be allowed, unless such bare
threaded portion is treated with anticorrosive preservative or covered with
approved plastic compound.

Bends in Conduit
a)

All necessary bends in the system, including diversion, shall be done either by
neatly bending the pipes without cracking with bending radius of not less than
7.5 cm., or alternatively, by inserting suitable solid or inspection type normal
bends, elbows or similar fittings, or by fixing cast iron inspection boxes,
whichever is most suitable.

b)

No length of conduit shall have more than the equivalent of four quarter bends
from outlet to outlet.

c)

Conduit fittings shall be avoided as far as possible on conduit system exposed

to weather. Where necessary, solid type fittings shall be used.

iii)

Outlets
a)
All outlets such as switches, wall sockets etc. may be either flush mounting
type, or of surface mounting type, as specified in the additional specifications if
any or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
b) All modular type switches and accessories shall be fixed on the modular sheet
covers in flush pattern.

iv)

Painting after erection

After installation, all accessible surface of conduit pipes, fittings, switch and regulator
boxes etc. shall be painted in compliance with the clauses under the painting
specification.

1.3.2

Additional requirements for surface conduit works

i)

Painting before erection

The outer surface of conduit including all bends, unions, tees, junction boxes, etc.
forming part of the conduit system, shall be adequately protected against rust, by
painting with 2 coats of red oxide paint applied before they are fixed.

ii)

Fixing Conduit On Surface

Conduit pipes shall be fixed by saddles, secured to suitable approved plugs with
screws in an approved manner at an interval of not more than one metre, but on
Page 224 of 304

either side of the couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a
distance of 30 cm from the centre of such fittings.
Where conduit pipes are to be laid along the trusses, steel joists etc. the same shall be
secured by means of saddles or girder clips or clamps as required by the Engineer-InCharge.
In long distance straight run of conduit, inspected type couplers at reasonable
intervals shall be provided, or running threads with couplers and jam nuts shall be
provided.
iii)

Fixing Outlet Boxes

Only a portion of the switch box shall be sunk in the wall, the other portion being
projected out for suitable entry of conduit pipes into the box.

1.3.3

Additional requirements for recessed conduit works

i)

Making Chase

ii)

iii)

a)

The chase in the wall shall be neatly made, and of ample dimensions to permit
the conduit to be fixed in the manner desired.

b)

In the case of building under construction, the conduits shall be buried in the
wall before plastering, and shall be finished neatly after erection of conduit.

c)

In chase of exposed brick/ rubber masonry work, special care shall be taken to
fix the conduit and accessories in position along with the building work.

Fixing Conduits in Chase

a)

The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of staples, J-hooks, or by means of

saddles, not more than 60 cm apart, or by any other approved means of fixing.

b)

All threaded joints of conduit pipes shall be treated with some approved
preservative compound to secure protection against trust.

Fixing Conduits in RCC work

a)

The conduit pipes shall be laid in position and fixed to the steel reinforcement
bars by steel binding wires before the concreting is done. The conduit pipes
shall be fixed firmly to the steel reinforcement bars to avoid their dislocation
during pouring of cement concrete and subsequent tamping of the same.

b)
iv)

Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as practicable, and

all curves shall be maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with all long
radius, which all permit easy drawing in of conductors.
Fixing Inspection Boxes
Suitable inspection boxes to the minimum requirement shall be provided to permit
inspection, and to facilitate replacement of wires, if necessary. The distance between
inspection/ junction boxes shall not exceed 12.5 mts in straight run.
Page 225 of 304

Location of inspection/ junction boxes in RCC work should be identified by suitable

means to avoid unnecessary chipping of the RCC slab subsequently to locate these
boxes.
These shall be mounted flush with the wall or ceiling concrete. Minimum 65mm
depth junction boxes shall be used in roof slabs and the depth of the boxes in other
places shall be as per IS : 2667-1977.
Suitable modular sheet cover shall be provided on the inspection box.
Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided in the inspection box covers.
v)

Fixing Switch Boxes and Accessories

Switch boxes shall be mounted flush with the wall. All outlets such as switches,
socket outlets etc. shall be flush mounting type, unless otherwise specified.

vi)

Fish wire
To facilitate subsequent drawing of wires in the conduit, GI fish wire of 1.6mm /
1.2mm (16/ 18 SWG) shall be provided alongwith the laying of the recessed conduit.

vii)

Bunching of Cables
a)

Cables carrying direct current may, if desired, be bunched whatever their

polarity, but cables carrying alternating current, if installed in metal conduit
shall always be bunched so that the outgoing and return cables are drawn into
the same conduit.

b)

Where the distribution is for single phase loads only, conductors for these
phases shall be drawn in one conduit.

c)

In case of three phase loads, separate conduits shall be run from the
distribution boards to the load points or outlets as the case may be.

1.3.4

Earthing Requirements

i)

The entire system of metallic conduit work, including the outlet boxes and other
metallic accessories, shall be mechanically and electrically continuous by proper
screwed joints, or by double check nuts at termination. The conduit shall be
continuous when passing through wall or floors.

ii)

Protective (loop earthing) conductor (s) shall be laid along the runs of the conduit
between the metallic switch boxes and the distribution boards/ switchboards,
terminated thereto. The conductors shall be of such size and material as specified.
Depending upon their size and material, the protective earth conductors shall be
either drawn inside the conduits along with the cables, or shall be laid drawn in
outside the conduits. When laid external to the conduits, this shall be properly
clamped with the conduit at regular intervals.

iii)

The protective conductors shall be terminated properly using earth studs, earth
terminal block etc. as the case may be.
Page 226 of 304

iv)

Gas or water pipe shall not be used as protective conductor (earth medium).

TABLE - I
Maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100 V grade aluminium/copper
conductor cable conforming to IS : 694 - 1990
Nominal 20mm
CrossSectional
area of
conductor
in sq.mm
S
B

25mm

32mm

38mm

51mm

64mm

10

11

12

13

1.50

10

18

12

2.50

12

10

4
6
10
16

3
2
2
-

2
-

6
5
4
2

5
4
3
2

10
8
6
3

8
7
5
3

8
6

6
5

10

12

25

35
50
70

3
-

2
-

6
5
4

5
3
3

8
6
5

6
5
4

NOTE :
1.
2.

3.

The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous
drawing in of cables.
The columns headed 'S' apply to runs of conduits which have distance not
exceeding 4.25m between draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the
straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees. The columns headed 'B' apply to
runs of conduit which deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15
degrees.
Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.

TABLE - II
Girder clips or clamps
Size of Conduit
i)
ii)
iii)

20 mm
25 mm
32 mm & above

Width

Thickness

19 mm
19 mm
25 mm

0.9mm (20 SWG)

0.9mm (20 SWG)
1.2mm (18 SWG)

Page 227 of 304

1.4

SPECIFICATION FOR PAINTING

1.4.1

SCOPE
This section covers the requirements of painting work in internal electrical
installations, carried out manually by brush. This does not cover spray painting work
of factory made items.

1.4.2

PAIINTING WORK IN GENERAL

1.4.2.1

PAINTS
Paints, oils, vanishes etc. of approved make, in original tin to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-In-Charge shall only be use.

1.4.2.2

PREPRATION OF THE SURFACE

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free from dust or foreign matter
before painting is started. The proposed surface may be inspected by the EngineerIn-Charge before the paint is applied.

1.4.2.3

APPLICATION :

i)

Paint shall be applied with brush. The paint shall be spread as smooth and even as
possible. Particular care shall be paid to rivets, nuts, bolts and over-lapping. Before
drawing out in small containers, it shall be continuously stirred with a smooth stick,
while painting work is taken up.

ii)

Primary coat of anti-corrosive paint shall be given in the case of steel work, after
preparation the surface. In all cases of painting work, finishing shall be with 2 coats
of paint in approved shade.

iii)

Each coat shall be allowed to dry out sufficiently before a subsequent coat is applied.

1.4.2.4

PRECAUTIONS
All furniture, fixture, glazing, floors etc. shall be protected by suitable covering. Al
stains, smears splashing, dropping etc. shall be removed. While painting of wiring
etc. it shall be ensured that the painting of wall and ceiling etc. is not spoiled in any
way.

Page 228 of 304

PROJECT
PROPOSED INDIAN ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING AT LEH
GUIDE LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS
FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

SL.
No.
1

DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS

MAKES

HT Load Break Switches/VCB

ALSTHOM/ABB/MEGAWIN

Transformers

LT Panels, MCCs

Air Circuit Breakers

KIRLOSKAR/UNIVERSAL/
INDOTECH/VOLTAMP
LOAD CONTROL/BALAJI ELECTRO
CONTROL/POWER CONTROL
ABB

Potential Transformers

PRAGATHI/VOLTAMP

Current Transformers

KAPPA/VOLTAMP

Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

Minature Circuit Breakers

C&S/GEPC/SCHINEDER/ABB/
INDOKOOP
HAVELS/SCHNIEDER/ABB

MDS/SCHNIEDER/HAVELS

10

Residual Current Circuit breakers

(RCCB)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
(ELCB)
Miniature Circuit Breakers

11

KWH Meters

12

Fuses & Fuse Bases

ENERCEON/NEW HORIZAN/
ELECTRIX
L&T/C&S/GEP

13

Switch Fuse & Fuse Switch

C&S/HPL/GEP

14

Selector Switches & Rotary Switches

KAYCEE/SALZER/CLIPSAL

15

Change over switches

C&S/HPL/SCHNIEDER

16

CGL/BAJAJ/WIPRO/PHILLIPS

17

Light fittings and Lamps (Industrial,

commercial & decorative)
HT & LT Cables

18

HT Cables sealing kits

REYCHEM/MSEAL

19

Cable glands

DOWELLS/SMI

20

PVC Insulated copper wires

FINOLEX/VGUARD/ANCHOR

MDS/HAVELLS/SCHNIEDER

UNIVERSAL/POLYCAB/PRIMECAB

Page 229 of 304

21

PVC rigid conduits

VIP/ATUL

22

M.S.Conduits

SUPREME/BHARAT

23

Crimping type lugs

DOWELLS/USHA

24

Industrial sockets on sheet steel enclosure

with MCB

HAVELLS/MDS

25

Ceiling rose

ANCHOR/LISHA

26

Lighting & Power Switches (Modular Type)

MK/ANCHOR/LK

27

Power Socket

MK/ANCHOR/LK

28

Ceiling Fans & Exhaust fans

KHAITAN/USHA

29

Indicating Instruments

IMP/RISHAB/ENERCON

30

Indicating Lamps

TECHNIC/VAISHNO

31

Capacitors

NAGOBA/DUCATI

32

Telephone cables

DELTON/DOORVANI

33

Intercom/telephone hand sets

COROL/BPL/TATA

34

Raceway

LK/MK

Page 230 of 304

BILL OF QUANTITIES

Page 231 of 304

PROJECT
Construction of INDIAN ASTRONOMICAL BUILDING for Indian
Institute of Astrophysics at LEH
SUBJECT
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL, FINISHING, SANITARY ENGINEERING & FIRE
FIGHTING, ELECTRICAL WORKS
GRAND SUMMARY OF COST

SL.No

DESCRIPTION

CIVIL, STRUCTURAL & FINISHING

WORKS

II

PLUMBING

III

ELECTRICAL WORKS

AMOUNT
(Rupees)

GRAND TOTAL
Amount in words
Rupees___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________

Signature of the Tenderer

With Seal and Address

Page 232 of 304

SUMMARY OF COST
CIVIL & FINISHING WORKS

SL.NO.

DESCRIPTION

Part 1
-

SITE DEVELOPMENT AND EARTH WORK

Part 2
-

PLAIN and REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORK

Part 3
-

MASONARY WORK

Part 4
-

WATER PROOFING

Part 5
-

FLOORING / CLADDING WORKS

Part 6
-

FINISHING WORKS

Part 7
-

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

Part 8
-

DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

TOTAL AMOUNT

TOTAL CARRIED TO GRAND SUMMARY OF

COST
Amount in words
Rupees___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________

Signature of the Tenderer

With Seal and Address
Page 233 of 304

SL.
No.

Description

1.0

SITE DEVELOPMENT AND EARTH WORK

1.1

Earthwork Excavation

1.1.1

Excavation in over areas or foundation

trenches from existing natural ground
level
Earth work in excavation in foundation
trenches, Columns pits etc. upto a width
of 3 mtr. from existing natural ground
level and stacking the excavated
material within the site or adjacent plots
including dressing of bottom, sides
strutting, timbering, shoring, trimming of
sides dewatering, all leads and lifts,
incidentals, etc. complete with ramming
of bottom, surface preparation as per
specifications to receive the
PCC.
Excavation shall be payable only for
vertical cut up to the outer edge of
foundation lean concrete as indicated
in drawings for all depths. Cost of extra
excavation required for working space,
supporting side shuttering of foundations
and retaining walls and that required for
making slopes for stability of excavation
shall be deemed to be included in the
rate quoted.

a.

All kinds of soils for all leads, depth and

lifts

1.2

Earth Filling

1.2.1

Filling with selected, suitable excavated

earth already available at site in plinths,
back of retaining walls, foundations and
trenches etc. and spreading the
remaining soil for landscaping and other
location as directed by the Project
Manager and shall be done in layers,
not exceeding 20cm in depth and
consolidating each deposited layer by
mechanical means, ramming and
watering as per specifications including
re-excavation, transportation, loading,
unloading, carriage to dumping spot
and all incidentals at all depth, levels,
leads
and
lifts
complete.
(Net
consolidated area fill volume will be
computed from the initial and final
levels. Volume in slopes, embankments
etc. will be computed applying

Qty.

Unit

820.00

Cum.

786.00

Cum.

Page 234 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

appropriate formula, as per CPWD

specification).
1.2.2

Supply selected/ approved earth

brought from outside the site and filling
the same in plinths, back of retaining
walls, foundations and trenches and
spreading in landscaping and other
location as directed by the Project
Manager and shall be done in layers,
not exceeding 20cm in depth and
consolidating each deposited layer by
mechanical means, ramming and
watering as per specifications including
transportation, cost of soil, royalty,
loading,
unloading,
carriage
to
dumping spot and all incidentals at all
depths and levels, for all leads and lifts
complete (Net consolidated area fill
volume will be computed from the initial
and final levels. Volume in slopes,
embankments etc. will be computed
applying appropriate formula, as per
CPWD specification).

1.3

Sand Filling
Supplying and Filling in plinth, under floor
with available fine Jamuna sand
including
ramming,
watering,
consolidating and dressing complete as
per specification and as directed by the
Project Manager.

1.4

Anti termite treatment

Note: The work must be executed by
approved specialised Agency who is
the member of IPCA. The Contractor
shall give a 10 years guarantee as per
instruction of Project Manager.

1.4.1

Providing and injecting chemical

emulsion for pre-constructional antitermite treatment and creating a
chemical barrier under and all-round
the column pits, wall trenches, top
surface of plinth filling, junction of wall
and floor along the external perimeter
of
building,
expansion
joints,
surroundings of pipes and conduits etc.
complete ( plinth area at ground floor
level will be measured and paid for )

a.

With Chlorpyriphos / Landane E.C. 20%

10

Cum.

91.00

Cum.

609.00

Sqm.

Page 235 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

with 1% concentration.

Total carried over to summary

2.0

CONCRETE WORK (PLAIN AND RCC)

(Rates for all cement concrete items
plain and reinforced described below
shall include work from Basement Level
to top of last roof including roof of
machine room, mumty, over head
water tanks and parapets above at all
floors and for all heights, required
hacking of the surfaces for smooth
plaster. (This section covers cast in situ
structural and architectural as well as
precast structural and architectural
concrete work).

2.1

Plain cement concrete

Providing and laying plain cement
concrete of specified grade as bed
concrete under foundation, bases for
rafts, underground water tank, building
machine equipments, column footing,
under floor landings, below road and
pathways,cill, coping, screeding at roof
to required slope and other locations as
called for laid, consolidated and cured
etc. complete including finishing the top
surface to receive the next course /
layer as per specification and drawing
including the cost of centering and
shuttering.

2.1.1

1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4

graded stone aggregate 20 mm and
down gauge)

5.00

Cum.

2.1.2

1:4:8 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8

graded stone aggregate 40 mm and
down gauge)

146.00

Cum.

2.2

Damp proof course

10

Sqm.

Providing and laying damp proof course

40mm thick with cement concrete 1:2:4
(1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded

Page 236 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

stone aggregate 20mm nominal size)

including providing and mixing of water
proofing compound @ 2% of cement
content and providing and applying
two layers of bitumen of grade 85/25
and as directed by the Project
Manager.

2.3

Cast - in -situ concrete

Providing and laying in position machine
batched, machine, mixed and machine
vibrated design mix concrete of
specified grade for reinforced cement
concrete structural elements, excluding
the cost of centring, shuttering, finishing
and reinforcement, but including cost of
making shear keys and provision of
construction / contraction / control
joints
in
various
locations,
laid,
consolidated and cured, include all
structural items like foundation, raft slab,
raft beams, plinth beam, lift pits, sump
pits, pedestals / bases of coloum, wall
foundations grade slab, Suspended
floors,
roofs,
balconies,
shelves/
counters, stair waist slabs, folded plate
stairs and landings, lintel and floor
beams, , RCC bands, cantilever
projections, Columns,
lift walls,
Parapets, facias, fins, vertical projection
of balconies, pergolas, copings, cills etc.
including admixture in recommended
proportions (as per IS 9103) to
accelerate, retard setting of concrete
improve workability without impairing
strength and durability as per direction
of Engineer-In-Charge.
(for all heights as shown in the drawing),
Cornics, moulding, bands, corbeling
strips, drains and sumps etc. of any
shape and sizes. The rates of concrete
to include the cost of admixtures /
plasticisers to achieve specified strength
and to facilitate pumpable concrete.

2.3.1

Foundation, raft slab, lift pits, sump pits,

pedestals / bases of column, etc.

(a)

RCC 1:1.5:3 concrete

R/O

Cum.

Page 237 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

(b)

RCC 1:1:2 concrete

2.3.2

Suspended floors, roofs, landings,

balconies, stairs and landings, ramp
slabs, lintels, beams, floor beams,
cantilever beams, deep beams, etc..

(a)

Qty.

Unit

376.00

Cum.

RCC 1:1.5:3 concrete

408.00

Cum.

(b)

RCC 1:1:2 concrete

R/O

Cum.

2.3.3

Columns, pillars,
and projection of
columns, lift walls, etc.

(a)

RCC 1:1.5:3 concrete

R/O

Cum.

(b)

RCC 1:1:2 concrete

150.00

Cum.

2.3.4

Parapets, planters, facias, fins, vertical

projection of balconies, copings, cills
etc. (for all heights as shown in the
drawing)

(a)

RCC 1:1.5:3 concrete

Cum.

2.3.5

Cornics, moulding, bands, corbeling

strips etc.

(a)

RCC 1:1.5:3 concrete

Cum.

2.4

Centring and shuttering

Approved Marine plywood shuttering
and centering for structural concrete
work in locations called for including
strutting, propping, bracing, bolting,
wedging, casing, striking, removal etc.
complete for any size, section, thickness.
Props shall consist of well designed steel
pipes adequately braced (wooden
ballies as props shall not be permitted).
The item to include centering and
shuttering at all heights and levels.
Allow for forming grooves, drip course,
Page 238 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

chamfers, cut-outs, openings etc. where

called for and for dressing with
approved shuttering oil to prevent
adhesion. Unexposed concrete surfaces
subsequently left untreated (in the
condition obtained on removal of form
work) shall not constitute exposed
concrete work and shall be measured
under this item only. Irregular shapes
with sides which may not be
perpendicular to each other for shapes
not conforming to rectangle or square
shall not be paid separately. (quoted
rate to include all staging upto any
height).
Foundation, raft slabs, raft beams, plinth
beam, pedestals/ bases of columns
grade slab, Retaining walls (any
thickness), suspended floors, roofs,
landings, balconies, stairs and landings,
slabs of water tank, ramp slabs, lintels,
beams, floor beams, girders, cantilever
beams, deep beams, ramp beams,
Columns, pillars, piers, abutments, posts
and struts, off sets & projection of
columns, transfer columns, lift walls,
water tank walls, swimming pool wall
,ramp walls, all structural walls, Shelves in
kitchen/ pantries and toilets, Parapets,
Planters, vertical fins, balcony facias,
projections, pergolas as per the shape
and
profiles
indicated
in
the
drawings,Cornices, moulding , bands ,
corbelling, strips, Folded plate staircase
steps etc

2.4.1

Foundation, raft slab, lift pits, sump pits,

pedestals / bases of column, etc.

108.00

Sqm.

2.4.2

Suspended floors, roofs, landings,

balconies, stairs and landings, ramp
slabs, lintels, beams, floor beams,
cantilever beams, deep beams, etc..

2972.00

Sqm.

2.4.3

Columns, pillars,
and projection of
columns, lift walls, etc.

1691.00

Sqm.

2.4.4

Shelves in kitchen/ pantries and toilets

etc

18.00

Sqm.

Page 239 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

2.4.5

Parapets, Planters, vertical fins, balcony

facias, projections, as per the shape
and profiles indicated in the drawings.

10

Sqm.

2.4.6

Cornices, moulding , bands , corbelling,

strips etc.

10

Sqm.

2.5

Reinforcement steel
Providing, Laying and fixing in position
steel reinforcement in all reinforced
concrete work, including straightening,
cutting, removal of loose rust by wire
brush and coating with cement slurry,
bending, hoisting, laying in position to
the shape and profile required at all
levels and heights as per drawing and
design and/ or as directed, binding with
16 gauge MS annealed steel wire etc.
complete. (Quoted rate also to include
providing & fixing the binding wire,
cement mortar spacer blocks etc.)

2.5.1

Thermo
mechanically
Treated
Reinforcement (TMT) of Fe 500 grade

119638.00

kg

2.6

Water proofing compound

Providing and mixing water proofing
compound of approved manufacturer
in cement concrete work etc in the
proportion as recommended by the
manufacturers.

500

kg

Cum.

2.7

Precast concrete

2.7.1

Providing, hoisting and fixing precast

reinforced cement concrete work with
1:1.5:3 concrete mix of any shape &
thickness in trench covers, cills, copings,
vertical supports of kitchen counters,
expansion joint cover etc. where ever
required including the cost of required
centering,
shuttering,
making
chamfered edges, grooves, drip course
complete
wherever
shown
but
excluding cost of reinforcement, at all
floors, for all heights, and at all depth
etc. as per drawing and as directed by
Project Manager.

Qty.

Unit

Page 240 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

2.7.2

Providing and fixing precast cement

concrete ( 1:2:4 concrete mix) drain
cover panels, fixed to MS flat as shown
in the drawing or as called complete (
Mild steel will be measured and paid
separately in respective item)

Unit

Cum.

Total carried over to summary

3.0

MASONARY WORK
(Quoted Rates are for all heights, all
depths, all levels, including basement to
roof (mumty) & all leads and lifts,
including racking curved or circular
masonary work, racking of brick work
should be 10mm)

3.1

Solid concrete block

Providing and constructing
Solid
concrete block work in cement mortar
(1 cement : 4 coarse sand) at all levels
in walls, piers and architectural features
using factory made, load bearing,
approved quality, Grade D (4.0) Density
of blocks not less than 1800 kg/cum.
Minimum average compressive strength
of units 4.0 N/sqmm and minimum
strength of individual unit is 3.2 N/sqmm,
set to level plumb including setting in
position, at all levels heights & depths
and locations complete in all respects
including
cutting,
chamfering,
scaffolding, curing etc Complete.

3.1.1

For
150
mm
thick
walls
(400x150x200)mm size blocks

using

270.00

Cum.

3.1.2

For 200 mm and above thick walls using

(400x200x200)mm size blocks

291.00

Cum.

3.2

Extra for Providing and constructing

cavity 50mm wide in walls with
necessary weep and vent holes
including use of cores and cost of
providing and fixing Thermocol as per
approved design.

1480.00

Sqm.

Page 241 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

3.3

Stone Masonary

3.3.1

Coursed
rubble masonry with hard
stone in foundation and plinth with
Cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse
sand) scaffolding, curing, complete as
per specification and drawing or as
directed by Project in charge.

33.00

Cum.

3.3.2

Coursed rubble masonry with hard stone

in superstructure above plinth level and
upto floor five level. With Cement
mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand)
scaffolding, curing, complete as per
specification and drawing or as
directed by Project in charge.

953.00

Cum.

3.3.3

Providing and constructing CEMENT

STABILIZED MUD BLOCK MASONRY (Mud
block made out of soils containing 60 to
70% of sand and 10% of clay and 5% of
cement pressed using manual machine)
in Cement Mortar CM 1:4 in walls. The
size of the block is 305x143x100mm. 125
blocks can be produced of with one
bag of cement. Laid in courses in
cement mortars as per the direction of
Engineer in charge.

468.00

Cum

Total carried over to summary

4.0

WATER PROOFING
(Quoted Rates are for all heights,
depths,
levels,
leads
and
lifts)
The operations describe below are only
indicative & the item is to be executed
as
per
technical/
manufacturer's
specification.
Testing shall be done by ponding water
(150mm depth) for 72 hours.
Note: (The Water proofing work must be
executed by an approved specialised
Agency. The Contractor shall give a 10
years guarantee as per instruction of the
Project Manager).

4.1

Tapcrete water proofing

Page 242 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Providing and laying composite built up

waterproofing in the toilets/ kitchen/
pantry etc. comprising of three coats of
Tapcrete polymer, each coat admixed
with cement in the proportion 1:2 (one
part vincrete and two parts cement)
over a primer coat of neat cement
sturry admixed with impermeable
chemical CH-9. After the second coat
of vincrete, all corners, edges, joints of
pipes with concrete / masonry should
be sealed with epoxy putty. The
waterproofing treatment is to be laid
underneath all sanitary pipes on the
base and taken up onto the verticals
upto a level of minimum 300mm above
the finished toilet floor level including
providing and fixing of PVC spout.

Qty.

Unit

159.00

Sqm.

422

Sqm.

10mm thick protective plaster 1:4 (1

cement : 4 coarse sand) over treated
surface, curing etc complete. (Quoted
rate to include grouting of RCC surface
for any cracks/ fissures and cost of white
cement)

4.2

Terrace waterproofing with insulation

Providing and laying terrace insulation
and waterproofing with the following
specification including cleaning and
smooth rendering the RCC slab top
surface. (Only plan area shall be
measured and paid for):
A layer of bituminous primer over dry
surface.
1st layer of 1mm thick APP polymeric
polyethylene felt over a coat of hot
refined mineral asphalt @1.5 Kg./Sqm
with 75mm & 100mm side & end laps.
2nd layer of 1mm thick APP polymeric
polyethylene felt over a coat of hot
refined mineral asphalt @1.5 Kg./Sqm
with 75mm & 100mm side & end laps.
3rd layer of 50 mm thick Expanded
Polystyrene (THERMOCOLE or approved
equivalent) of density 24 kg/ cum laid
over hot refiend mineral asphalt layer
for adhesion.
4th layer of Bitumenised Kraft paper with

Page 243 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

6" overlapped sealed and spot stuck

with bitumen.
5th layer of 1mm thick APP polymeric
polyethylene felt over a coat of hot
refined mineral asphalt @1.5 Kg./Sqm
with 75mm & 100mm side & end laps.
6th layer of protective hessian based
felt type 3 grade-I laid with hot asphalt
with 75mm & 100mm side & end laps &
further sealed with hot bitumen.
On vertical: Laying a layers of hussian
felt fibre glass tissue and 250 mm wide
APP polymeric polyethene felt each
layer laid in semi hot asphalt over a
coat of bitumenous primer with 75mm
and 100mm side and end laps
respectively. The vertical waterproofing
overlaps with horizontal wateproofing
by 100mm. Including cutting 50 mm
deep chase in walls and tucking the
waterproofing.

4.3

Same as Item no. 4.2 but excluding the

cost of 3rd and 4th layer.

4.4

Protection on Waterproofing
Providing
and
laying,
over
waterproofing courses, average 75mm
thick CC screed with M15 grade
concrete in required
slope with
providing and fixing M.S. weldmesh
fabric of size 150x150x2.25mm including
cutting, straightening and welding with
each other wherever required, on
horizontal surfaces. (The waterproofing
course on the vertical shall be
protected with a 115mm thick cladding
wall of brick masonry to be measured
and paid separately under brick work
items)

R/O

Sqm.

422

Sqm.

The item also include providing and

making khurrahs 450mm x 450mm with
average minimum thickness of 50mm
cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2
coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate of 20 mm nominal size)
finished with aluminium foil and 12mm
cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand) and a coat of neat cement
Page 244 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

punning , rounding the edges , making

and finishing the outlet complete.

4.5

4.6

Sunken area filling

Providing and laying on sunken areas
broken light weight concrete block bats
of approximately 600 kg. per cum
density laid, consolidated, finished
smooth, including finishing & grouting
the top layer with water proof cement
mortar with CICO and as per
specifications and drawing.

Khurras
Making khurras 450mm x 450mm with
average minimum thickness of 50mm
cement concrete 1:2:4 finished with
12mm cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3
coarse sand) and a coat of neat
cement rounding the edges & finishing
the outlet complete including providing
suitable M.S.Iron grating.

40.00

Cum.

each

Total to be carried over the summary

5.0

FLOORING / CLADDING WORKS

(Quoted Rates are for all heights,
depths, levels, leads and lifts and for all
design and pattern shown in drawings)
Marble shall be procured in standard
and equal cut to size pieces, quoted
rates also to include cutting of odd sizes
and skirting from standard size stone
pieces, rest all other stones shall be
procured in slabs of varying sizes. All
types of unpolished stone shall be cut
by the machine only.

5.1

Stone flooring
Providing and laying stone of approved
quality in specified size of stone slab as
per drawings and pattern in flooring/
bands in flooring with cement mortar 1:4
(1 cement : 4 coarse sand) of adequate
thickness to match the total thickness of
50mm and joint to be filled with cement
slurry mixed with pigment to match the
Page 245 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

shade of stone including surfaces

pointing, curing etc. complete as per
specification, pattern and drawing.

5.1.1

With 18 to 20mm thick Prepolished Grey

Granite stone and joint to be filled with
white cement slurry mixed with pigment
to match the shade of stone (base rate
of Prepolished Granite stone Rs 1750/per Sqm)

5.2

Stone Skirting
Providing and laying skirting in stone in
12 mm average thick cement mortar 1:3
(1 cement : 3 coarse sand) jointed
cement slurry mixed with pigment to
match the shade of slab including
chamfering, corner/ edge grinding,
wherever required complete as per
specification, pattern and drawing.

5.2.1

With 18 to 20mm thick Prepolished Grey

Granite stone and joint to be filled with
white cement slurry mixed with pigment
to match the shade of stone (base rate
of Prepolished Granite stone Rs 1750/per Sqm)

5.3
5.3.1

Stone dado/ Cill/ jamb

Providing and fixing prepolished stone
cladding/
dado/
bands/
making
architraves/ strips/ cills/ soffits/ jambs /
coping/ ledges etc in specified sizes as
per drawing laid with 20 mm avg.
thickness of cement mortar 1:3
(1cement : 3 coarse sand) wet
cladding. The item includes providing
and fixing stainless steel clamps of
adequate size & design fixed in
cladding as per design, all fixing to be
done with approved dash fastners for
masonary/concrete as per situation,
with non shrink grouting material, gun
metal pins of approved make and fixing
grit on back of stone with araldite etc
including filling the joints with white
cement
with
matching
pigment,
chamfering, making grooves, pointing,
edge polishing etc wherever required,
scaffolding, curing etc. complete as per
drawing.

920.00

Sqm.

92

Sqm.

Page 246 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

(a)

With 18 to 20mm thick Prepolished Grey

Granite stone and joint to be filled with
white cement slurry mixed with pigment
to match the shade of stone (base rate
of Prepolished Granite stone Rs 1750/per Sqm)

5.4

Staircase flooring
Providing and laying stone in specified
size (in single piece) of stone slab in
treads and risers of steps as per design
and pattern shown in drawings laid over
20mm average thick CM 1:3 (1 cement
: 3 coarse sand) jointed with cement
slurry mixed with pigment to match the
shade of slab including chamfering,
corner /edge grinding and mirror
polishing, making nosing as per profile in
steps, rubbing and mirror polishing,
drilling holes and grouting for fixing of
staircase railing etc. complete as per
specification and drawing.

5.4.1
(a)

Treads of steps
With 18 to 20mm thick Prepolished Grey
Granite stone and joint to be filled with
white cement slurry mixed with pigment
to match the shade of stone (base rate
of Prepolished Granite stone Rs 1750/per Sqm)

5.4.2
(a)

Risers of step.
With 18 to 20mm thick Prepolished Grey
Granite stone and joint to be filled with
white cement slurry mixed with pigment
to match the shade of stone (base rate
of Prepolished Granite stone Rs 1750/per Sqm)

5.5

Tile flooring
Providing & laying of tile flooring of
approved make, shade and pattern as
approved by Architect laid over 20mm
average thick bed of cement mortar
1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand),grooves
using 2mm PVC spacers and epoxy
grouted with tile groute of matching
shade of tile including cutting, grouting
the joints with laticrete epoxy grout and

Qty.

Unit

40.00

Sqm.

32

Sqm.

19

Sqm.

Page 247 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

pigment to match the shade of tile

including cutting, etc. complete in all
respects as per pattern and drawing.

5.5.1

With Vitrified tile (Basic rate of @ Rs. 60

/ sqft)

369.00

Sqm.

5.5.2

With Anti skid tile (Basic rate of @ Rs. 45

/ sqft)

121.00

Sqm.

5.5.3

With Ceramic Tile (Basic rate of @ Rs.

40/ sqft)

80.00

Sqm.

5.6

Tile Skirting
Providing and laying tile in skirting laid
over 12mm thick cement mortar 1:3
(1cement : 3 coarse sand) including
cutting of tiles, curing etc. complete in
all respects as per drawing.

5.6.1

With Vitrified tile (Basic rate of @ Rs. 60

/ sqft)

37

Sqm.

5.6.2

With Anti skid tile (Basic rate of @ Rs. 45

/ sqft)

12

Sqm.

5.6.3

With Ceramic Tile (Basic rate of @ Rs.

40/ sqft)

Sqm.

5.7

Tile Dado
Providing & laying of tiles in cladding/
dado/ jamb/ soffit/ cill of uniform
thickness, size, shade and pattern as
approved by Architect/Project in
charge laid with rich cement slurry over
a bedding plaster of 6mm (avg.) thick
cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine
sand) including the cost of 12mm
average thick rough base plaster of mix
1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand),
providing grooves using 2mm PVC
spacers and grouted with laticrete
epoxy grout of matching shade of tile,
cutting, curing etc. complete in all
respects as per drawing.

Page 248 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

5.7.1

With Ceramic Tile (Basic rate of @ Rs.

45/ sqft)

381.00

Sqm.

5.7.2

With Ceramic Tile (Basic rate of @ Rs.

30/ sqft)

43.00

Sqm.

5.8

Counter top, Facia, ledge

Providing and laying machine cut prepolished stone slab/ / tile in required
size of approved quality in counters
fixed over average 20 mm thick cement
mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand)
and joints neatly finish with cement
paste mixed with matching pigment
including edge chamfering, moulding,
making openings/ holes for sink/ wash
basin, mixers, soap dispenser, ledge/
surrounding of bath tub,back splash,
facia, ledges of shower area etc. as
required and mirror polishing of
moulding and cut edges, filling silicon at
junctions with sanitary fixtures and
corners with wall wherever required etc
complete as per drawing.

5.8.1

With 18 to 20mm thick Prepolished

Granite stone and joint to be filled with
white cement slurry mixed with pigment
to match the shade of stone (base rate
of Prepolished Granite stone Rs 1750/per Sqm)

33.00

Sqm.

5.9
(a)

Wooden floor / Skirting

Providing and laying laminated wooden
flooring ( grade AC4)of approved make
and as per approved sample, colour
and laid on the existing leveled flooring
with approved adhesive & underlay
including skirting & profile etc. complete
as per manufacturers specification &
approval of Architect. (Basic rate Rs.
1250 / sqm)

58.00

Sqm.

5.10

IPS floor
Providing and laying 40mm thick
Cement Concrete 1:2:4 (1cement :2
coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate of 12.5mm nominal size)
including and finished with a floating
coat of neat cement including cement

168.00

Sqm.

Page 249 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

slurry, 40mm wide and 6mm thick.glass

strip etc. complete in true lines and level
as per specification and drawing.

5.11

Cement plaster skirting / risers/ dados /

platforms.
Providing and laying 18 mm thick
Cement plaster with cement mortar 1:3
(1 cement : 3 coarse sand) finished with
a floating coat of neat cement as per
drawing and design.

17

Sqm.

Total to be carried over the summary

6.0

FINISHING WORKS
(Quoted Rate shall be for all heights,
depths, levels, leads and lifts and to
include providing and fixing chicken
wire mesh in junction RCC and brick /
AAC Block walls and all chasing for
electrical & plumbing conduits, pipes
etc. for internal and external plaster
works).

6.1

Wall plaster

6.1.1

Providing and applying 12 to 15mm

thick plaster to masonry and RCC walls,
columns etc. in cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement : 4 fine and coarse sand in
equal proportion) finished smooth
including scaffolding, curing, making
grooves at desired location etc.
complete as per drawing.

3436.00

Sqm.

6.1.2

Providing and applying 20 to 25mm

thick plaster to masonry and RCC walls,
columns etc. in cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement : 4 fine and coarse sand in
equal proportion) finished smooth
including scaffolding, curing, making
grooves at desired location etc.
complete as per drawing.

300

Sqm.

6.1.3

Providing mud plastering 20mm thick for

internal walls with chopped straw @
33kg per cum of earth including
scaffolding etc. complete.

R/O

Sqm

Page 250 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

Description

Ceiling plaster
Providing and applying 6mm thick
plaster to RCC slab in cement mortar
1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine and coarse sand
in equal proportion) finished smooth
including scaffolding, curing, making
grooves at desired location etc.
complete as per drawing.

20 mm cement plaster in two layer External Plaster

Providing and applying 20 mm thick
external cement plaster in two coats
under layer 12 mm thick cement plaster
1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) finish
rough with sponge, finished with a top
layer 8mm thick cement plaster 1:6 (1
cement :6 fine sand) including making
of grooves, bands, drip coarse as shown
in
drawing,
scaffolding,
curing,
providing & mixing water proofing
compound (CICO) in both layers as per
manufacturer
specification,
neat
cement slurry between two layer etc.
complete as per drawing.

Waterproof plaster
12mm cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement : 4
coarse sand) including providing &
mixing water proofing compound
(CICO)
as
per
manufacturers
specification and with a floating coat of
neat cement.

Oil bound distemper

Providing and applying three or more
coats of oil bound distemper of
approved brand and colour to give an
even shade on new plastered work over
a coat of approved primer including
the cost of preparing the surfaces with
filling materials (putty), along with sand
papering wherever required, scaffolding
etc. complete.

Acrylic emulsion
Providing and applying three or more
coats of acrylic emulsion paint
of
approved brand, manufacturer and

Qty.

Unit

1528.00

Sqm.

186.00

Sqm.

100

Sqm.

10

Sqm.

5264.00

Sqm.

Page 251 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

shade to give a smooth finish on new

plastered surfaces over a coat of
approved primer including the cost of
preparing the surfaces with filling
materials (Birla putty), along with sand
papering wherever required, scaffolding
etc. complete.

6.7

6.8

White washing
Providing and applying three or more
coats of white wash on wall and ceiling
to give an even shade including primer
and preparation of surfaces, along with
sand papering wherever required,
scaffolding, mixing of indigo blue and
DDL etc. complete.

10

Sqm.

186.00

Sqm.

100

rmt

1000

kg

Texture paint
Finishing walls with textured exterior
paint of required shade :
New work (Two or more coats applied @
3.28 ltr/10 sum) over and including base
coat of water proofing cement paint
applied @ 2.20kg/10 sum.

6.9

POP cornice
Providing and making decorative
plaster of paris (super fine quality)
cornice (cast in situ), moulding in the
required profile and smooth in line and
level to the entire satisfaction of Project
Manager complete as per design and
drawing.

(a)

Cornice of size 75mm x 75 mm (3"*3")

Total to be carried over the summary

7.0

7.1

MISCELLANEOUS
(Quoted Rates are for all
depths, levels, leads and lifts)

heights,

Structural Steel
Supplying,
fabricating,
assembling,
hoisting / erecting and fixing in position
at all heights and with all leads,

Page 252 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

structural steel works of MS rolled

sections (angle, channel, beams, flats,
tees, insert plates, bolts etc.) all as per
structural drawings and as per detailed
specifications
(for
materials
&
workmanship) in the situations described
hereinafter including:
i) Cutting of components to required
lengths/ widths and shapes/profiles,
ii)
Smooth grinding / machining of
edges / faces / all welding joints.
iii)
Preparing the surface to ensure
complete removal of mill scale by grit &
sand blasting to achieve finish to grade
SA
2.5.
iv)
Necessary welding (electric arc
welding) for required weld lengths and
sizes
v)
Allow for surface preparation,
derusting primer coat, three or more
coats of synthetic enamel paint etc.
complete all as directed by the Project
Manager.
Note:
The contractor shall submit
fabrication drawings for work involved
based on construction drawings (that
may be issued during construction
period) for approval by the Project
Manager.
The fabrication work shall start only after
approval of the fabrication drawings.
Any change required in the fabrication
drawings shall be carried out at no extra
cost.
Fabrication shall be in a perfect
Architectural workmanship manner and
as provided in Section V & VI of IS 800 &
IS7215.
Welding shall be carried out by qualified
welders.
Electrodes for welding, the procedure,
selection, test and inspection shall
confirm to provisions in IS 816, IS 818, IS
822,& IS833.
Erection/ hoisting shall commence only
after passing of fabricated parts by the
Project Manager.

7.2

Mild steel and stainless steel work

(a)

Providing and fixing in position screen,

guard rail, gratings, drain cover, ladder,

10000

kg

Page 253 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

angle iron, column guards, corner

guard, foot rests, Trellis etc made of MS
Pipe, MS square bars/tube with MS flats,
MS shoes welded as per design and
drawing including bending to profile as
per drawing, grinding, cutting holes in
RCC / Stone work, grouting the
balustrades in position etc. complete
including providing two coats of red
oxide primer with two or more coats of
synthetic enamel.

(b)

Providing and fixing in position railing

(staircase,
balcony,
or
wherever
required) made of MS Pipe, MS square
bars/tube with MS flats, MS shoes
welded as per design and drawing
including bending to profile as per
drawing, grinding, cutting holes in RCC /
Stone work, grouting the balustrades in
position
etc.
complete
including
providing two coats of red oxide primer,
with two or more coat of Synthetic
Enamel paint.

7.3

Mirror
Providing and fixing 6mm thick (of any
shape & size ) mirror with steam beach
wooden frame 35mmX100mm fixed with
hard wood frame of section as shown in
the drawing, mirror with 12 mm thick
waterproof ply backing supported with
20mm thick water proof board fixed to
wall with hard wood pegs including
providing and fixing 300 micron HDP film
as vapour barrier, all necessary fixing
arrangement like nails/ screws dash
fastner, wood
preservative
paint,
providing and fixing polythene bubble
sheet between mirror and backing ply,
stainless steel caping to bolt head,
melamine polish on wooden frame etc.
complete.

7.4

False ceiling

7.4.1

Providing and fixing suspended false

ceiling, which includes providing and
fixing GI perimeter channels of size
0.55mm thick having one flange of
20mm and another flange of 30mm
and a web of 27mm along
with

1312.00

kg

23

Each

R/O

Sqm.

Page 254 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

perimeter of ceiling, screw fixed to brick

wall/partition with the help of nylon
sleeves and screws, at 610mm centers.
The
suspending
GI
intermediate
channels of size 45mm 0.9mm thick with
two flanges of 15mm each from the
soffit at 1220mm centers with ceiling
angle of width 25mm x10mm x 0.55mm
thick fixed to soffit with GI cleat and
steel
expansion
fasteners. Ceiling
section of 0.55mm thickness having
knurled web of
51.5mm
and two
flanges of 26mm each with lips of
10.5mm are then fixed to the
intermediate channel with the help of
connecting clips and in direction
perpendicular to the intermediate
channel at 457mm centers.
12.5mm tapered edge Gypboard
(conforming to IS-2095 - 1982) is then
screw fixed to ceiling
section with
25mm drywall screws at
230mm
centers.
Screw
fixing is done
mechanically either Finally the boards
are to be jointed and finished so as to
have a flush look which includes filling as
finishing the tapered and square edges
of the boards with jointing compound,
paper tape and two coats of primer
suitable for Gypboard and three or
more coats of Acrylic Emulsion paint (as
per recommended practices of India
Gypsum or equivalent) etc. complete
including opening to be made for AC
grills, light fittings, trap door etc.

7.4.2

Armstrong False ceiling

Providing and fixing of false ceilings at
all heights of 600mm x 600mm
ARMSTRONG ceiling tiles with Regular/
Microlook Edge laid on prelude XL
exposed grid systems with 24mm /
15mm wide T- section flanges colour
white. The framework comprise of main
runner spaced at 1200mm centers
securely fixed to the structural soffit by
approved
hangers
at
1200mm
maximum centers. Hangers (GI wire of
4.0mm dia) to be fixed by approved
roof plug/ fastener, level adjusters and
screws etc. The last hanger at the end
of each main runner should not be
greater than 450mm from the adjacent

R/O

Sqm.

Page 255 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

wall. Flush fitting 1200mm long cross tees

(with double stitching) to be interlocked
between main runners at 600mm
centers to form 1200 x 600 modules. Cut
cross tees longer than 600mm to be
supported independently.
600mm x 600mm modules to be formed
by fitting 600mm long flush fitting cross
tees centrally between the 1200m cross
tees. Perimeter trim to be Armstrong wall
angle secured to walls at 450mm
maximum centrers. The quoted rate
shall be inclusive for making opening for
light fixtures, diffusers & AC grills. The
quoted rate shall be inclusive of
suspenders at all heights & extra
member required for all openings.
(Basic rates with installation Rs 75/- per
Sqft. Contractor to include the cost of
members & all other accessories
mentioned above in his quoted rate)

7.5

Trap door
Extra over item 8.12.1 for providing and
fixing trap door in false ceiling, made of
15 mm thick hard wood panel resting/
fixed including all hardware, hard wood
lipping etc. complete as per drawing
and drawing.

R/O

Sqm.

162

Nos

Total carried over to summary

8.0

DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

8.1

Labour charges for Fixing of Doors,

windows and ventilators (frames and
shutters) including fixing of necessary
fittings like hinges, tower bolts, door
locks as per the design drawings and as
per the instruction of Engineer In
Charge.
Note : Hardware materials will be
provided by IIA
Total carried over to summary

Page 256 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SUMMARY OF COST
PLUMBING WORKS
SL.NO.

DESCRIPTION

(I-A)
-

SANITARY INSTALLATIONS

(I-B)
-

SANITARY FIXTURES / C.P FITTINGS

(II-A)
-

SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES

(II-B)
-

SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES, RAIN WATER PIPES &

FITTINGS

(III-A)
-

WATER SUPPLY (INTERNAL & EXTERNAL)

(III-B)
-

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

TOTAL AMOUNT

TOTAL CARRIED TO GRAND

SUMMARY OF COST

Amount in words
Rupees___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________

Signature of the Tenderer

With Seal and Address

Page 257 of 304

SL.
No.

Description

(I-A)

SANITARY INSTALLATIONS

Providing and Fixing white vitreous china

laboratory sink with C.I. Brackets , C.P
Brass chain with rubber plug 40mm C.P.
brass waste and 40mm C.P. Brass trap
with necessary C.P. brass unions
complete including painting of fittings
and brackets, cutting and making good
the walls wherever required.

a)

Size 600x450x200 mm

Providing and Fixing draining board with

C.I. / M.S. brackets including painting of
brackets, cutting and making good the
walls where ever required.

a)

White glazed Fire clay draining board of

size 600 x 450 x25 mm

Providing and fixing P.V.C waste pipe

for sink or wash basin including P.V.C
waste fittings complete.

a)

Semi rigid pipe

i)

Qty.

Unit

Each

Each

40mm dia

50

Each

Providing and fixing 600x450 mm

bevelled edge mirror of superior glass
(of approved quality) complete with
6mm thick hard board ground fixed to
wooden cleats with C.P. brass screws
and washers complete.

24

Each

Providing and Fixing 600x120x5 mm glass

shelf with edges round of supported on
anodised aluminimum angle frame with
CP Brass brackets and guard rail
complete fixed with 40 mm long screws,
rawl plugs etc. complete

24

Each

Providing and fixing toilet paper holder

a)

CP Brass

12

Each

b)

Vitreous china

12

Each

Providing and fixing PTMT

Waste
Coupling for wash basin and sink of
approved quality, colour and make
(Pryag or Equivalent)

Page 258 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

(i)

Waste Coupling 31 mm of 79 mm length

and 62 mm breadth weighing not less
than 45 gms

25

Each

(ii)

Waste Coupling 38 mm of 83 mm length

and 77 mm breadth weighing not less
than 60 gms

RO

Each

Providing and fixing PTMT Bottle Trap for

Wash Basin and sink (Jaquar or
equivalent)

24

Each

Providing and Fixing ball valve (brass) of

approved quality complete

a)

High or low pressure with plastic floats

(i)

50 mm nominal bore

Each

10

Providing and Fixing unplasticised PVC

connection pipes with Brass unions

a)

30 cm length

(i)

15 mm nominal bore

RO

Each

11

Providing and Fixing CP Brass shower

rose with 15 mm or 20 mm inlet

a)

100 mm diameter

15

Each

12

Providing
and
fixing
PTMT
(An
Engineering thermoplastic) push cock of
approved quality colour and make
(Prayag or equivalent)

(i)

15mm nominal size, with 20mm B.S.P.

Female threads, 100mm long, 57 mm
high and 33 mm wide with 12mm seat
dia. and replaceable washers, weighing
not less than 90 gms.

24

Each

13

Providing and fixing PTMT soap dish

holder having length of 138 mm,
breadth 102mm, height of 75 mm with
concealed
fitting
arrangements,
weighing not less than 110 gms (Jaquar
or equivalent)

24

Each

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

Page 259 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

(I-B)

SANITARY FIXTURES / C.P FITTINGS

Providing and Fixing vitreous china wall

mounted European Water Closet with
cistern & lid, CP bolts & nuts, CI chair
and other hanging arrangement,
Cistern inner fittings including dual
flushing system, Plastic seat and cover,
CP brass hinges, rubber buffers
concealed pipework with "P" trap with
accessories including cutting and
making good the walls wherever
required
ROCA VICTORIA make with code RS
346307000 + RS 341307000 + RA
80P396001)

Providing and Fixing of CP health faucet

with Hose & wall hook
ROCA make with code RF9061A1

Qty.

Unit

24

Each

24

Each

Providing and fixing white vitreous china

flat
back half stall urinal of size
580x300x350mm with PVC automatic
flushing cistern, Parryware/ Hindware
Seabird/ Oreint (Corel) with fitting,
standard size CP Brass flush pupe,
spreaders with unions and clamps (All in
CP brass) with waste fitting as per IS:
2556, CI trap with outlet grating and
other couplings in CP brass including
painting of fittings and cutting and
making good the walls and floors
wherever required

3.1

Range of two half stall urinals with 5 litre

PVC automatic flushing cistern

Each

3.2

single half stall urinals with 5 litre PVC

automatic flushing cistern
NEW MAGNUM C 0575

R.O.

Each

Providing and Fixing of vitreous china

620mm x 440mm under counter wash
hand
basin,
specially
fabricated
brackets painted white, 32mm CP cast
brass bottle trap RF9066 A1 and
connection pipe to wall with CP wall
flange and rubber adaptor for waste
connection complete, including cutting
and making good the walls wherever
required

a)

ROCA DIVERTA make with code RS

24
Each
Page 260 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

327115000 + Bottle Trap "ECO" "ROCA"

make Code: RF9066 A-1
5

Providing and Fixing 1145mm x 510mm

stainless steel sink with drain board with
CI brackets duly painted white, 40mm
CP waste, CP brass chain and rubber
plug, 40mm CP cast bottle trap with
connection pipe to wall and CP wall
flange, rubber adaptor for waste
connection complete including cutting
and making good the walls wherever
required
JAYNA make with code SBSD 04 DX +
CP Bottle trap 40 mm Jaquar Allied Cat
No: 777)

Each

Providing and fixing C.P. brass bib cock

of approved quality conforming to
IS:8931 - 15mm nominal bore.(Make:
Jaquar Cat No: 047)

24

Each

Providing and fixing C.P. brass long

body bib cock of approved quality
conforming to IS standards and
weighing not less than 690 gms. - 15mm
nominal bore.(Make: Jaquar Cat No:
107)

Each

Providing and fixing C.P. brass angle

valve for basin mixer and gyser points of
approved quality conforming to IS:8931
- 15mm nominal bore.
Jaquar Cat No: 059 & 803).

102

Each

Providing and fixing C.P brass twin coat

hook fixed to wooden cleats with CP
Brass Screws complete each.

24

Each

10

Providing and fixing Grante Urinal

Partition of required
size fixed with
expandable anchor fasteners with CP
Brass bolts and washers, embedded in
wall and set in cement concrete,
complete including cutting and making
good the walls wherever required.

Each

11

'Providing and fixing wall mounted

single hole sink mixer with swinging spout
complete, including cutting and making
good the walls wherever required.

Each

12

'Providing and fixing 15mm dia C.P.

single hole mixer for Wash Basin.

24

Each

Page 261 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

13

Providing and fixing C.P brass airpurifier

container, fixed to wooden cleats with
C.P brass screws, complete including
cutting and making good the walls
wherever required.

24

Each

14

'Providing and fixing C.P brass towel rail

of size 610mm long and 20mm dia,
complete with C.P brass brackets fixed
to wooden cleats with C.P. brass screws.

15

Each

15

'Providing and fixing C.P. brass towel

ring fixed to wooden cleats with C.P.
brass screws including
cutting and
making good the walls wherever
required.
Jaquar Model: Continental Cat No: 1121
N).

24

Each

16

Providing and Fixing CP Health Faucet

with 1 mt Flexible Tube and Wall Hook
complete
Make:
Jaquar,
"Allied"
Range
Catalogue No.577 or approved make or
equivalent.

24

Each

17

Providing CP soap dish size 150x150 mm

fixed to PVC/Wooden cleats by CP
Screws, complete including cutting and
making good the walls, wherever
required.
Make: Jaquar, Model "Continental"
Catalogue No. 1131, or approved
equivalent)

24

Each

18

Providing and fixing Grab Bar with

Stainless Steel Screws on wooden cleats

Each

19

'Providing and fixing 15mm C.P hands

shower with shower arm with wall hook
including cutting and making good the
walls, wherever required.

Each

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

(II-A)

SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES

Earth work in excavation in foundation

trenches or drains (not exceeding 1.5m
in width or 10 Sqm on plan) including
dressing of sides and ramming of
bottoms, lift upto 1.5m, including getting
Page 262 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

out the excavated soil and disposal of

surplus ecavated soil as directed, within
a lead of 100m.
a)

All kind of soil

i)

Pipes etc. exceeding 80mm dia but not

exceeding 300mm dia.

250

Cum

Making khurras 45x45cm with average

mininmum thickness of 5 cm cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse
sand : 4 stone aggregate of 20mm
nominal
size)
over
P.V.C
sheet
1mx1mx400 micron, finished with 12mm
cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand) and a coat of neat cement
rounding the edge sand making and
finishing the outlet complete.

Each

Providing & Fixing on wall face

unplasticised - rigid PVC rain water
pipes conforming to IS:13592 type A
including
jointing
with
seal
ring
conforming to IS:5382 leaving 10 mm
gap for thermal expansion.

i)
ii)

110mm dia
75mm dia

50
70

Metre
Metre

Providing & Fixing unplasticised - PVC

pipe clips of approved design to
unplasticised - PVC rain water pipes by
means of 50*50*50mm hard wood plugs,
screwed with MS screws of required
length including cutting brick work and
fixing in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4
coarse sand) and making good the wall
etc. complete

i)

110mm dia

25

Each

Providing and Fixing on wall face

unplasticised - PVC moulded fittings /
accessories for unplasticised - Rigid PVC
rain water pipes confirming rto IS: 13592
Type A including jointing with seal ring
confirming to IS: 5382 leaving 10 mm
gap for thermal expansion

i)

Bend 87.5 0

a)
b)

110 mm bend
75 mm bend

5
5

Each
Each

Page 263 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

ii)

Shoe (Plain)

a)
b)

110 mm Shoe
75 mm Shoe

5
5

Each
Each

Providing & Fixing to the inlet mouth of

rain water pipe cast iron grating 15 cm
diametre and weighing not less than
440 grams

10

Each

Providing and Fixing soil, waste and vent

pipes: IS 3989

i)

Sand Cast Iron S & S pipe

a)

100 mm dia

370

Metre

b)

75 mm dia

25

Metre

Providing and fixing M.S. holder-bat

clamps of approved design to Sand
Cast
iron/cast
iron
(spun)
pipe
embedded in and including cement
concrete blocks 10X10X10cm of 1:2:4
mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4
graded
stone
aggregate
20mm
nominal size) including cost of cutting
holes and making good the walls etc.

a)

For 100mm dia. Pipe

100

Each

Providing and fixing bend of required

degree with access door, insertion
rubber washer 3mm thick, bolts and nuts
complete

a)

Sand cast iron S&S

i)

100 mm

10

Each

10

Providing and fixing plain bend of

required degree.

a)

Sand cast iron S&S as pr IS 3989

i)

100 mm

10

Each

11

Providing and fixing heel rest sanitary

bend

a)

Sand cast iron S&S

i)

100 mm dia

Each
Page 264 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

12

Providing and fixing single equal plain

junction of required degree with access
door, insertion rubber washer 3mm thick,
bolts and nuts complete.

a)

Sand cast (spun) iron S&S

i)

100x100x100mm

13

Providing and Fixing single unequal

junction of required degree with access
door insertion rubber wash 3 mm thick,
bolts and nuts complete.

a)

100x100x75 mm

i)

Sand Cast Iron S & S as per IS 3989

14

Providing and Fixing terminal guard

i)

Sand Cast Iron S & S as per IS 3989

a)

100mm

15

Providing and Fixing collar:

i)

Sand Cast Iron S & S as per IS 3989

a)

Qty.

Unit

Each

Each

Each

100mm

10

Each

b)

75mm

Each

16

Providing lead caulked joints to sand

cast iron/centrifugally cast (spun) iron
pipes and fittings of diameter.

i)

100mm

10

Each

17

Providing and fixing M.S. stays and

clamps for sand cast iron/centrifugally
cast (spun) iron pipes and fittings of
diameter:

a)

100mm

25

Each

18

Providing and Fixing trap of self

cleansing design with screwed down or
hinged grating with or without vent arm
complete, including cost of cutting and
making good the walls and floors

i)

100mm inlet and 75 mm outlet

a)

Sand Cast iron as per Is 3989

26

Each

Page 265 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

19

Painting of sand cast iron / centrifugally

cast (spun) iron soil, waste, vent pipes
and fittings with paint of any color such
as chocolate, grey or buff etc. over a
coat of primer (of approved quality) for
new work:

i)

100mm dia. Pipe

370

Metre

ii)

75mm dia. Pipe

25

Metre

20

Providing & fixing G.I. pipe to IS:1239

(medium class) complete with G.I.
fittings, clamps and hinges including
cutting and making good the walls and
ceiling for waste pipes, bath wastes,
overflow, kitchen equipment waste
connections and condensate drainage.

a)

32 mm nominal bore for wash basin

55

Metre

b)

40 mm nominal bore for wash basin

Metre

c)

50 mm nominal bore for wash basin

25

Metre

21

Painting of G.I. pipes with two coats of

bitumastic paint wrapping polythene
tape & applying the final coat of
bitumastic paint.

a)

32mm nominal bore

55

Metre

b)

40mm nominal bore

Metre

c)

50mm nominal bore

25

Metre

22

Providing, laying and jointing glazed

stoneware pipe grade 'A' with stiff
mixture of cement mortar in the
proportion of 1:1 (1 cement : 1 fine
sand) including testing of joints etc.
complete.

22.1
22.2

100 mm diameter
200 mm diameter

15
85

Metre
Metre

23

Providing and laying cement concreate

1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand : 10
graded stone aggregate 40 mm
nominal size) alround S.W. pipes
including bed concrete as per standard
design:

Page 266 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4

100 mm diameter
200 mm diameter
250 mm diameter
300 mm diameter

24

Providing and fixing square-mouth S.W.

gully trap grade 'A' complete with C.I.
grating brick masonry chamber with
water tight C.I. cover with frame of
300X300 mm size(inside) the weight of
cover to be not less than 4.50 kg and
frame to be not less than 2.

a)

With FPS Bricks class designation 75

i)

100x100mm size P type

25

Constructing brick masonry manhole in

cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse
sand ) R.C.C. top slab with 1:2:4 mix (1
cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded
stone aggregate 20mm nominal size),
foundation concrete 1:4:8 mix (1
cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded
stone aggregate 40mm nominal size)
inside plastering 12mm thick with
cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand) finished with floating coat of neat
cement and making channels in
cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2
coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20mm nominal size) finished
with a floating coat of neat cement
complete as per standard design:

i)

Qty.

Unit

15
105
120
10

Metre
Metre
Metre
Metre

Each

Inside size 90x80cms and 45cms deep

including C.I. Cover with frame (light
duty) 455x610mm internal dimensions
total weight of cover and frame to be
not less than 38 kg ( wt. of cover 23 kg
and wt. of frame 15 kg).

Each

ii)

Inside size 90x120cms and 90cms deep

including C.I. Cover with frame (light
duty) 455x610mm internal dimensions
total weight of cover and frame to be
not less than 116 kg ( wt. of cover 58 kg
and wt. of frame 58 kg).

Each

26

Providing and Laying S & S centrifugally

cast (spun) iron pipes (Class LA)
confirming to IS : 1536

i)

100 mm dia pipe

Each
Page 267 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.
ii)

Description

150 mm dia pipe

Qty.

Unit

Each

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

(II-B)

SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES, RAIN WATER

PIPES & FITTINGS

Providing and fixing Sand Cast 'P' or 'S'

trap of self cleaning design with or
without
vent
with
provision
for
connecting G.I inlet fittings complete
including cost of cutting and making
good the walls and floors wherever
required.

26

Each

Providing and fixing 100mm dia G.I. inlet

fitting consisting of 100mm dia main G.I
pipe with multiple G.I. sockets (Inlets) of
required diameter welded to it (as per
site requirement) and fixing the same to
C.I trap and setting in
cement
concrete, complete.

26

Each

Providing and fixing cast brass Floor

Clean Out plug with suitable insert keys
for opening, male threaded joint with
G.I. socket, lead caulked to soil pipe /
waste pipe of C. I. and C.I. (LA) pipe
as required, complete as shown in
attached sketch.

a)

100mm dia

32

Each

Providing and
consisting of
(grating and
separately),
instructions.

16

Each

Providing & laying cement concrete

1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand: 4
stone aggregate 20mm and down
gauge) 75mm in bed and pipe.

a)

For 100mm, 75mm and 50mm dia pipes

under floor including centering &
shuttering wherever required.

85

Metre

Providing and fixing 125mm dia Bronze

Chrome plated ring and Grating with 2
stainless steel screws, ring to be
embedded in floor with salient / seal

42

Each

fixing G.I floor drain

100x50mm G.I elbow
G.I pipe to be paid
complete
as
per

Page 268 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Making Khurras 30x30 cms with average

minimum thickness of 5 cm cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse
sand : 4 graded stone aggregate of 20
mm nominal size) over P.V.C sheet 1 m x
1 m x 400 micron, finished with 12 mm
cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand) and a coat of neat cement
rounding the edge sand making and
finishing the outlet complete.

Providing drip seal joints to cast Iron /

Centrifugally cast iron pipes and fittings

a)

Qty.

Unit

Each

100mm dia

10

Each

b)

75mm dia

Each

Providing and laying UPVC pipes

(I.S:4985) of
6 kg./cm2
including all fittings with
or without
access i.e bends, junctions, cowls,
offsets, etc., and jointing with solvent
cement and excavation, refilling and
disposal of
surplus earth, including
cutting holes in
walls and floors
,wherever required and making good
the same, complete as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge
20
120

RM
RM

12

Each

160 mm O.D.
220 mm O.D.
10

Constructing brick masonry catch basin

with 75 class designation bricks in
cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse
sand),
150mm
thick
foundation
concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 coarse
sand: 10 graded stone aggregate
40mm nominal size) inside and outside
plaster in cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement:
3 coarse sand). inside finished with
floating coat of neat cement, making
haunches and channel in cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20mm
nominal size) neatly finished, complete
as per standard design including
excavation, refilling and disposal of
surplus earth.

a)

'Size
300X300X300mm inside with
precast S.F.R.C. grating of approved
design and sample fixed in RCC slab in
cement 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse

Page 269 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20mm

nominal size) including centering,
shuttering all complete as per site
conditions.
b)

'Size
600X600X600mm inside with
precast S.F.R.C. grating of approved
design and sample fixed in RCC slab in
cement 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20mm
nominal size) including centering,
shuttering all complete as per site
conditions.

11

Constructing brick masonry septic tank

with solid cement block in cement
mortar 1:4 (1 Cement : 4 Coarse Sand)
foundation concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4
coarse sand: 8 graded stone aggregate
with 40 mm nominal size) inside and
outside plastering 12 mm thick with
cement mortar 1:3 (1 Cement: 3 Coarse
Sand) with water proofing compound
finished with a floating coat of neat
cement inside and making connection
for pipe in Cement Mortar 1:3 (1
Cement: 3 Coarse Sand) neatly finished
complete as per standard design
including disposal of surplus earth.
Cover of Septic tank to be RCC 1:2:4 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone
aggregate with 20 mm nominal size)
with a provision of 2 Nos. SFRC cover
and frame (Medium Duty) MD-10 grade
designation confirming to IS: 12592,
including centering, shuttering and reinforcement all complete as per
attached sketch.
Internal
size
5.0x2.5x1.25
meters
effective depth [overall depth shall be
as per site topography]

12

Each

Each

Supply of all materials and labour for

construction of soak pit consisting of
inner core of Brick Honey comb work
with 75x 75 mm openings, filled with
brick blast loosely filled with another
layer of Brick Blast 50-80 mm nominal
size and final covering with brick blast 40
mm nominal size. The covering of the pit
will be RCC slab 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2
coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate
with 20 mm nominal size) having central
opening of 670x670 mm or 670 mm dia
Page 270 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

with removable RCC precast cover

complete in all respect as per attached
sketch.
Size 3.5 m dia and 3m effective depth

Each

13

Providing and fixing sound insulated

POLO KAL NG piping system with 3 layer
pipe made of PP-C + PP-MV + PP-C in
Blue Ral 5014 (halogen and calcium
free) colour, push-fit type, food safe,
high impact and stiffness as per ON EN
1451-1 and DIN 19560 offering sound
levels of not more than 21 dBA at a flow
rate of 4 l/s and having pipe ring
stiffness as per 1S0/DIS 9969 and
tightness as per EN 1277/B and C and
DIN 19560, with all necessary fittings in
blue colour as per ON EN 1451-1 and
DIN 19560 all fitted with factory fitted lip
ring.

a)

75mm dia

75

Metre

b)

110mm dia

370

Metre

14

Providing,
fixing,
testing
and
commissioning of POLO KAL NG inlet
fittings with maximum 3 inlets 32, 40 & 50
mm OD size POLO KAL NG sockets, fixed
to 'P' traps including solvent weld
joint/rubber ring joint complete .

26

Each

15

Providing and fixing push fit cap plug of

POLO KAL NG for cleaning

a)

110mm dia

32

Each

16

Providing and fixing PP white Trap with

50mm water seal with rubber seal on
inlet to push fit hopper for indirect waste
connections (McAlpine, UK/ veaga).

a)

110 mm let and 110 mm outlet

26

Each

17

Providing and fixing sound insulated

POLO KAL NG piping system with 3 layer
pipe made of PP-C + PP-MV + PP-C in
Blue Ral 5014 (halogen and calcium
free) colour, push-fit type, food safe,
high impact and stiffness as per ON EN
1451-1 and DIN 19560 offering sound
levels of not more than 21 dBA at a flow
rate of 4 l/s and having pipe ring
stiffness as per 1S0/DIS 9969 and
Page 271 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

tightness as per EN 1277/B and C and

DIN 19560, with all necessary fittings in
blue colour as per ON EN 1451-1 and
DIN 19560 all fitted with factory fitted lip
ring.
a)

40 mm nominal bore

55

Metre

b)

50 mm nominal bore

Metre

c)

75 mm nominal bore

25

Metre

18

'Providing and fixing POLO KAL NG floor

drain (110 x 50 mm Elbow ) with cement
mortar, complete in all respect.

15

Each

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

(IIIA)

WATER SUPPLY (INTERNAL & EXTERNAL)

Providing and fixing G.I. Pipes B Class

complete with G.I. fittings and clamps,
including cutting and making good the
walls etc. (internal work)

a)

Exposed on wall and shaft

i)

15mm dia. Nominal bore

20

Metre

ii)

20mm dia. Nominal bore

80

Metre

iii)

25mm dia. Nominal bore

65

Metre

iv)

32mm dia. Nominal bore

50

Metre

v)

40mm dia. Nominal bore

30

Metre

vi)

50mm dia. Nominal bore

15

Metre

vii)

65mm dia. Nominal bore

10

Metre

viii)

80mm dia. Nominal bore

10

Metre

Providing and fixing gun metal ball

valve with C.I.,wheel
of approved
quality
(screwed
end)
Make
AIP/CIM/SANT

a)

40mm dia nominal bore

Each

b)

50mm dia nominal bore

Each

c)

65mm dia nominal bore

Each
Page 272 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

Providing and fixing gun metal nonreturn valve of approved quality

(screwed end)

a)

50mm dia nominal bore

Each

b)

65mm dia nominal bore

Each

c)

80mm dia nominal bore

Each

Painting G.I. Pipes and fittings with

synthetic enamel white paint over a
ready mixed priming coat, both of
approved quality for new work.

i)

15mm dia. Nominal bore

20

Metre

ii)

20mm dia. Nominal bore

80

Metre

iii)

25mm dia. Nominal bore

65

Metre

iv)

32mm dia. Nominal bore

50

Metre

v)

40mm dia. Nominal bore

30

Metre

vi)

50mm dia. Nominal bore

15

Metre

Providing and fixing G.I. Union in G.I.

Pipe including cutting and threading
the pipe and making long screws etc.
complete (new work)

i)

15mm dia. Nominal bore

Each

ii)

20mm dia. Nominal bore

10

Each

iii)

25mm dia. Nominal bore

Each

iv)

32mm dia. Nominal bore

10

Each

v)

40mm dia. Nominal bore

10

Each

vi)

50mm dia. Nominal bore

Each

vii)

65mm dia. Nominal bore

Each

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

Page 273 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

(IIIB)

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Providing and fixing CPVC (Chlorinated

Poly Vinyl Chloride) water supply pipes
with pipe as per CTS SDR 11 at working
pressure of 400 PSI at 23. Deg.C & 100
PSI at 82 Deg.C. using solvent welded
CPVC fitings I.e Tees, Elbows, Couplers,
Unions,
Reducers,
brushings
etc.
including transition fittings connection
between CPVC & metal pipe/G.I i.e
Brass Adaptors (Both male & Female
threaded) conforming to ASTM D-2846
with only CPVC solvent cement
conforming
to
ASTM
F-493
with
fabricated and subsequently hot dip
galvanised
clamps/structural
steel
supports as required/directed at site
including cutting chase and fitting the
same with cement concrete/cement
mortar as required. All termination points
for installation of faucets shall have
brass termination fittings. Installation
shall be to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager/ Consultant.

a)

16 mm outer dia

RO

Metre

b)

22 mm outer dia

RO

Metre

c)

28 mm outer dia

RO

Metre

d)

34 mm outer dia

RO

Metre

e)

42 mm outer dia

RO

Metre

f)

54 mm outer dia

RO

Metre

Providing and fixing thermal insulation

over water pipes in chase (internal) &
exposed in ceiling with 6mm thick
'Kaiflex' or approved equivalent thermal
insulation tubing, a elastomeric flexible
material having hermetic blister closed
cell structure of expanded synthetic
rubber having density of 60-90 Kg/m3
over pipes of following sizes including all
required accessories complete as per
Manufactuer's
specifications
and
finishing it with 6mm thick plaster of 1:3
Mix ( 1 Portland Cement : mixed with
hard setting cement compound: 3 fine
/Coarse sand)
Page 274 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

a)

16 mm outer dia

345

Metre

b)

22 mm outer dia

45

Metre

c)

28 mm outer dia

10

Metre

Providing and fixing thermal insulation

over water pipes in shaft & terrace with
9 mm thick 'Kaiflex' or approved
equivalent thermal insulation tubing, a
flexible elastomeric foam of closed cells
structure of expanded synthetic rubber
having Thermal conductivity 0.038 w /
m.k at + 20 deg. c., density as per ASTM
D 1667 50 - 110 kg / cum
over pipes
of following sizes including all required
accessories i.e. adhesive & Tape on all
joints complete as per Manufactuer's
specifications

a)

For 15mm

20

RM

b)

For 20mm

80

RM

c)

For 25mm

65

RM

d)

For 32mm

50

RM

Providing and fixing thermal insulation

over water pipes in shaft & terrace with
13 mm thick 'Kaiflex' or approved
equivalent thermal insulation tubing, a
flexible elastomeric foam of closed cells
structure of expanded synthetic rubber
having Thermal conductivity 0.038 w /
m.k at + 20 deg. c., density as per ASTM
D 1667 50 - 110 kg / cum
over pipes
of following sizes including all required
accessories i.e. adhesive & Tape on all
joints complete as per Manufactuer's
specifications

a)

For 40mm

30

RM

b)

For 50mm

15

RM

c)

For 65mm

10

RM

Providing & fixing 24 SWG X20 mm G.I.

wire mesh netting complete as per
requirement. Providing and laying
12mm thick Cement Sand Plaster (in two
layers of 6mm thick each) with
Page 275 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

approved water proofing

compound.insulated hot water pipes as
per relevent item of insulation.
a)

For 15mm

20

RM

b)

For 20mm

80

RM

c)

For 25mm

65

RM

d)

For 32mm

50

RM

e)

For 40mm

30

RM

f)

For 50mm

15

RM

g)

For 65mm

10

RM

Providing and fixing forged brass lever

operated ball valve of full flow with
forged brass ball (Machined to mirror
smooth finish with hard chrome plated)
and spindle with setting and gland of
superior quality having minimum
working pressure of 10 kg/cm2

a)

15mm dia.

36

Each

b)

20mm dia.

Each

c)

25mm dia.

Each

Providing and Fixing Sch. 80 uPVC Pipes

as per ASTM D-1785, in Trenches / Wall
grooving / on Exposed wall faces
including labour with supply of all Upvc
specials, as per ASTM D-2467, with
hydraulic testing including clamping,
making trenches, holes, grooves, etc. &
making good the damages & bringing
them to original condition & complete
in all respects as directed by the
Architect / Consultant. Joints to be
made with uPVC Solvent cement as per
ASTM D 2654.

a)

60.32 outer dia

RO

Metre

b)

73.02 outer dia

RO

Metre

c)

88.9 outer dia

RO

Metre

Providing and Fixing Highly flexible water

supply pipes in PE-RT type 1 and PE-RT
Page 276 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

type 2 with additional layers (5 layer), in

ivory colour with maximum continous
pressure handling capability (10 bar at
70 degree C) including PPSU fittings for
for press connection and end fitings in
DZR brass. (for internal application).
POLO FIT - Germany.
a)

16mm

345

Metre

b)

20mm

45

Metre

c)

25mm

10

Metre

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

Page 277 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SUMMARY OF COST
ELECTRICAL WORKS

SL.NO.

DESCRIPTION

TOTAL AMOUNT

A
B
C
D
-

TOTAL CARRIED TO GRAND SUMMARY OF

COST
Amount in words
Rupees___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________

Signature of the Tenderer

With Seal and Address

Page 278 of 304

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

A)
1

1.1

Wiring for light point/fanpoint/exhaust

fan point/call bell point with 1.5 sq.mm.
FR PVC insulated, copper conductor
single core cable in surface/recessed
PVC conduit with modular switch,
modular plate, suitable GI box and
earthing the point with 1.5 sq mm FR
PVC insulated copper conductor single
core cable etc. as required
Group C

248

Point

Wiring for light/power plug with 2x4

sq.mm FR PVC insulated, copper
conductor, single core cable in
surface/recessed PVC conduit along
with 1 no. 4 sq mm FR PVC insulated
copper conductor single core cable for
loop earthing as required.

2500

Metre

S/F 20A SPN MCB industrial socket

outlet:Supply
and
fixing
20amps
,240V,SPN
industrial
type,socket
outlet,with 2 pole and earth ,metal
enclosed plug top along with 20 amps
C
series,SP
,MCB,in
sheet
steel
enclosure,on surface or in recess,with
chained metal cover for the socket
outlet and complete with connections
,testing and commissioning etc. as
required.

12

Each

S/F modular type blanking plate :Supply and fixing modular blanking
plate on the existing modular plate &
switch box excluding modular plate as
required.

Each

Wiring for circuit / submain wiring

alongwith earth wire with the following
sizes of FR PVC insulated copper
conductor single core cables in
surface/recessed
PVC
conduit
complete as required

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

2x2.5 sq mm + 1x2.5 sq mm earth wire

2x6 sq mm + 1x6 sq mm earth wire
4x10 sq mm + 2x10 sq mm earth wire
4x6 sq mm + 2x6 sq mm earth wire

1500
240
50
15

Metre
Metre
Metre
Metre

Supplying & drawing following pair, 0.5

sq mm FR PVC insulated copper
conductor,
unarmoured
telephone
cable in the existing surface / recessed

750

Metre

Page 279 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

steel/PVC conduit as required.

7

Supplying & drawing co-axial TV cable

RG-6 grade, 0.7 mm solid copper
conductor PE insulated, shielded with
fine tinned copper braid and protected
with PVC sheath in the existing
surface/recessed steel/PVC conduit as
required

500

Metre

Supplying and fixing of following sizes of

PVC conduit along with the accessories
in surface/recess including painting in
case of surface conduit, or cutting the
wall and making good the same in case
of recessed conduit as required

8.1
8.2
8.3

20mm dia
25mm dia
32mm dia

3000
500
50

Metre
Metre
Metre

Supply and fixing following

switch / socket on the existing
plate
&
switch
box
connections but excluding
plate etc. as required.

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6

5/6 amps switch

15/16 Amp Switch
5/6 amps socket
15/16 amp socket
Telephone socket outlet
TV antenna socket

81
88
81
88
28
16

Each
Each
Each
Each
Each
Each

10

Supply and fixing following size/modules,

GI box alongwith modular base & cover
plate for modular switches in recess etc.
as required

10.1

1 or 2 module (75mmX75mm) - For

Telephone & TV outlet socket

44

Each

11

Supply and fixing suitable size GI box

with modular plate and cover in front on
surface or in recess, including providing
and fixing 3 pin 5/6 amps modular
socket outlet and 5/6 amps modular
switch, connection, painting etc. as
required.

81

Each

12

Supply and fixing suitable size GI box

with modular plate and cover in front on
surface or in recess, including providing
and fixing 6 pin 15/16 & 5/6 amps

88

Each

modular
modular
including
modular

Page 280 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

modular socket outlet and 15/16 amps

modular switch, connection, painting
etc. as required.
13

ERECTION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES

Installation, testing and commissioning
of prewired, flourescent fitting /
compact fluorescent fitting of all types,
complete with all accessories and tubes
etc. directly on ceiling / wall, including
connection with 1.5 sq. mm. PVC
insulated, copper conductor, single
core cable etc. as required.

248

Each

14

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

14.1

S/F prewired TP MCB DB

Supplying and fixing foolowing way
three pole and neutral, prewired, sheet
steel, MCB distribution board, 415 volts,
on surface/recess, complete with loose
wire box, terminal blocks, duly prewired
with suitable size FR PVC insulated
cooper conductor up to terminal
blocks, tinned copper busbar, neutral
link, earth bar, din bar, detachable
gland
plate,
interconnections,
phosphatized and powder painted
including earthing etc. as required. (But
without MCB / RCCB / Isolator)
6 way (4 + 18),single Door
8 way (4 + 24), single Door

1
3

Each
Each

S/F TP MCB isolator

Supplying and fixing following rating,
four pole, 415 volts, isolator in the
existing MCB DB complete with
connections, testing and commissioning
etc, as required.
63 amps

Each

S/F C series, SP MCB:Supplying and fixing

5 amps to 32 amps ,240V ,C series
,miniature circuit breaker suitable for
inductive load of following poles in the
existing MCB DB complete with
connections ,testing and commisioning
etc as required.
single pole

85

Each

i)
ii )
14.2

i)
14.3

i)

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

B)
Page 281 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

1.1
1.2
2

2.1
2.2

Description

Qty.

Unit

Supplying and drawing in existing

conduits and testing & commissioning of
following multicore PVC insulated PVC
sheathed annealed tinned copper
conductor 0.61 mm dia telephone wires
conforming to ITD-S/SW-113C including
terminal joints complete as required.
50 Pair
10 Pair

50
50

Metre
Metre

Supply and installation of telephone tag

block of IDC type of following sizes in
sheet metal enclosure of suitable
dimensions fabricated out of 16 SWG
sheet steel with castle key lock, hinged
type cover including termination of
telephone cables, making connections,
painting of box etc, complete as
required.
50 Pair
10 Pair

1
4

Each
Each

Supply, laying, connecting at outlet

end, testing and commissioning of Cat6e 4Pair UTP Data Cable 24 AWG in
existing conduits/raceway/furniture.

500

Metre

3.1

Supply, laying, connecting at outlet

end, testing and commissioning of Cat5e 4Pair UTP Data Cable 24 AWG in
existing conduits/raceway/furniture.

300

Metre

Supply & installation of Plug in type RJ45

computer data/Telephone outlet with
GI outlet box & cover plate in
wall/furniture/floor
complete
as
required.
Single face plate with RJ45 outlet
Single face plate with RJ11 outlet

16
28

Each
Each

4.1
4.2
5
5.1

FIXTURES & FANS

Supply, assembling, installation, testing
& commissioning of following type of
light fixtures and fans. All fluorescent
fixtures shall be provided with power
factor improvement capacitors & lamps
and installation arrangement using
proper support etc. complete as
required.

5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4

1x36W WFTL (Philips TMS 021/136 HF-E).

1x6 W led SURAFACE MOUNTED LIGHTS
1x12 W led SURAFACE MOUNTED LIGHTS
1x36W SFTL

4
Each
152
Each
50
Each
20
Each
Page 282 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

5.1.5 1x18W CFL Light Fitting

5.1.6 1x11W Mirror Light (Philips FMS 200/111).
Note: The quantity will vary as per requirement.
The model will be selected as per requirement
during execution of work

Qty.

Unit

51
21

Each
Each

100
20
40
40
40

RM
RM
RM
RM
RM

100
20
40
40
40

RM
RM
RM
RM
RM

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

M.V. CABLES & CABLE TRAYS :

M.V CABLES
Supply,
laying,
testing
and
commissioning of 1100 Volt grade XLPE
insulated extruded PVC inner and outer
sheathed armoured cables conforming
to IS 7098 amended upto date including
the cost of providing required gap
between adjacent cables (minimum
one cable dia.) and including the cost
of providing identification tags etc.
complete as per specification, as
required.

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

3.5C x 240 Sq.mm cable

3.5C x 185 Sq.mm cable
3.5C x 150 Sq.mm cable
4C x 16 Sq.mm cable
4C x 10 Sq.mm cable

Cable termination :
Supplying
of
all
materials
for
terminations
of
1.1
KV
grade
copper/aluminium multicore cables.
The work includes cable glanding using
brass plated double compression
glands, sizing the core leads, removing
insulation, fixing suitable crimping type
copper lugs/thimbles by using hydraulic
crimping tools with correct size of the
dies, shaping the leads and neatly
connecting the same to the equipment
terminals.

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

3.5C x 240 Sq.mm cable

3.5C x 185 Sq.mm cable
3.5C x 150 Sq.mm cable
4C x 16 Sq.mm cable
4C x 10 Sq.mm cable

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

Page 283 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

EARTHING SYSTEM:

1
1.1

EARTHING STATION:
Supply,
installation,
testing
and
commissioning of G.I. Plate earthing
stations making earth pits, earthing with
G.I earth plate 600 mm x 600 mm x 6
mm
thick
including
funnel,
charcoal/coke, salt, all earth work.
Providing masonry enclosure with 10
mm thick C.I. cover plate having locking
arrangement and watering pipe,
disconnecting/ testing links etc as per IS3043-1987 complete as required.

1.2

Supply,
installation,
testing
and
commissioning of Copper Plate earthing
stations making earth pits, earthing with
copper earth plate 600 mm x 600 mm x
3 mm thick including
funnel,
charcoal/coke, salt, all earth work.
Providing masonry enclosure with 10
mm thick C.I. cover plate having locking
arrangement and watering pipe,
disconnecting/ testing links etc as per IS3043-1987 complete as required.

EARTHING STRIP/WIRES:

2.1

G.I. Earthing Strip/Wire:

Qty.

Unit

Nos.

Nos.

100
20

RM
RM

Supply,
installation,
testing
and
commissioning of following sizes of G.I.
strip/wire clamped to walls, cable
trays, bus ducts, cables in recess or
surface etc for equipment/ System /
Lightning protection earthing complete
as required including inter connection
between length at joints, all fixing
accessories saddles, clamps etc. and
other fixing hardware material as
required for proper installation.
2.1.1
2.1.2

50 x 6 mm strip
32 x 6 mm strip

2.2

Copper Earthing Strip/Wires:

Supply,
installation,
testing
and
commissioning of
following sizes of
copper strip/wire clamped to walls,
cable trays, bus ducts, cables in recess
or surface etc for equipment/ system
earthing complete
as required
including inter connection between
length at joints, all fixing accessories
Page 284 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

SL.
No.

Description

Qty.

Unit

saddles, clamps etc. and other fixing

hardware material as required for
proper installation.
2.2.1

50 x 6 mm strip

80

RM

TOTAL C/O TO SUMMARY

Page 285 of 304

Rate (Rupees)
In
In Words
Figures

Amount
(Rupees)

VOLUME - III

Page 286 of 304

NOTE

4.53

2.29

2.18

4.01

1.97

4.39

1.97

D2

2.08

W10

1.75

1.57

1.00
0.39

2.29

4.53

STORAGE
1.30

9.92

PROJECTION WALL

5.10

CONFERENCE
PARKING
W7

C
PARKING
W7

0.82

0.75

4.69

1.59

W7

2.07

2.85

3.71

0.30

0.30

0.30

LVL +900 D4

3.85
0.35

0.69

1.94

1.80

LINTEL NOS

2.25 X 2.5

2.50

2.

D2

1.0 X 2.1

2.10

D3

1.0 X 2.1

2.10

4.

D4

1.8 X 2.1

2.10

5.

D5

0.65 X 2.1

2.10

6.

D6

1.5 X 2.1

2.10

7.

D7

0.75 X 2.1

2.10

8.

W1

2.5 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

9.

W2

0.77 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

10.

W3

0.30 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

11.

W4

1.28 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

12.

W5

1.85 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

13.

W6

1.10 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

14.

W7

0.30 X 0.90

1.20

2.10

LEGEND

1.70

0.95
0.75

0.50

500 THK CAVITY WALL(REFER NOTE)

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

1.95

300 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

TOILET

D7 1.50

0.60

1.20

MEDICAL ROOM
W1

2.67

2.67

2.50

RECEPTION/LOUNGE

1.68

1.68

D1

150 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

W3
0.77

LVL +450D2

D2

5.65

W5

RAMP
1:8 SLOPE

150 THK RCC WALL

STONE MASONRY(BUTTRESS)
OF VARIED THICKNESS

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

BUTTRESSED WALL

2.50

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

W5

CILL

D1

W6

1.43

2.10

5.74

UP

1.00

W1

BUTTRESSED WALL

0.77

W3
0.60

1.85

SIZE

1.

1.45

2.24

1.20

1.54

LVL +900D4

LVL +900

0.18

W2

W4

1.85

LOBBY

2.00

4.64

5.83

MUSEUM

1.20

1.28

1.65

1.64

SERVER ROOM

4.23

0.60

TOILET FOR
HANDICAPPED

D3

4.12

1.00
1.80

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

2.81

1.68
1.00

3.79

4.99

DISPLAY AREAS

1.00

W4

3.97

6.17

2.52

1.12

W5

0.13

D2

4.53

1.00

2.10

0.97

W5

1.82

0.76

5.64

OFFICE SPACE

0.50
1.28

0.25

1.85

EXTERNAL
BUTTRESSED
WALL(REFER
ELEVATIONS)

DISPLAY

D2

0.50

1.85

0.67

0.35
1.10

W6

2.05

TOILET(HE)

4.34

6.07

D5

D5

1.10

LVL +900

1.10

1.50

UP

0.15THK RCC WALLS

W6

1.80

1.66

1.66

1.90

LIFT

1.80

1.80

D4

LIBRARY

6
5
4
3
2
1

8 9 10 11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TREAD: 0.30M
RISER: 0.15M
WIDTH: 1.50M

8.57

0.30

0.60

2.34

1.90

LIFT

D2

1.57

1.00

0.30

1.77

STORE7

4.01

0.65

D5

SHE

6.17

3.97

6.67

3.71

E-LIBRARY

1.75

0.30

0.65

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

0.61

0.98

D5

D7

1.75

0.30

8.62

0.60
0.92

1.10

W6

(GROUND FLOOR)
S. NO. OPENING

D6
0.68

DOOR/ WINDOW SCHEDULE

W6

1.10

W7

TREAD: 0.30M
RISER: 0.15M
WIDTH: 0.90M

LIFT

W6

1.10

2.11

1.93

C
3.29

2.10

13

LVL +900

2.00

12

SERVICE CORE

7.84

11

UP

1.75

3.90

4.32

1.00
0.39

10

D2
W10

SUNKEN SLAB

7.83

GLAZING AS PER DETAIL

LVL +450

GLAZING AS PER DETAIL

H
ENTRANCE FOR OFFICE.

10

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

11

12
TENDER DRAWINGS

GROUND FLOOR

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 287 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
22.03.2012

13
REVISIONS

SCALE

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31-01-2012
22-03-2012

4. REVISION

30-03-2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

1.

NOTE

Z
4.53

3
2.29

2.18

4.01

1.97

4.39

0.50

1.75

1.39

2.10

12

13

2.29

4.53

SERVICE CORE

DN

3.40

W9

2.00

11

UP

D2

0.50

W9

0.90

4.32

1.57

10

2.08

0.90

W10

1.75

8
1.97

W10

1.39

1.93

1.30

1.00

TREAD: 0.30M
RISER: 0.15M
WIDTH: 0.90M

LIFT

B
2.11

9.92

LABORATORY SPACE

5.10

6.70

C
W7

W7
0.82

0.75

4.69

1.59

2.07

D6

UP

1.81

W5

0.54

0.30

2.27

W5

D9

1.94

3.05

D6

DN

DISPLAY
1.20

6.17

3.97

OFFICE SPACE
LVL +3900

2.10

W6

D5

D2

1.12

1.85

D9

4.34

D5

1.12

1.85

W5

0.50

0.97

0.35
1.10

W6

1.62

6.07

2.78

3.79
0.50

2.27

0.35

1.81

1.85

W5

W5

1.85

1.10

D6
1.78

HE
1.00

1.62

D2

LVL +3900

1.10

0.70

LIFT

28 29 30 31 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TREAD: 0.30M
RISER: 0.15M
WIDTH: 1.50M

0.97

1.66

LIFT

8.62

1.70

27
26
25
24
23
22
21

1.90
1.66

1.00

OFFICE SPACE
1.50

3.97

6.17

1.90

6.67

STORE

D5

3.35

1.75

0.30

1.57

1.68

SHE

0.65

0.65

1.75

D5
0.95

D7

0.61

0.98

1.50

0.60
0.92

0.30

8.62
3.05

W6

1.10

0.68

(FIRST FLOOR)
S. NO. OPENING

3.29

W7

DOOR/ WINDOW SCHEDULE

1.20
5.89

LINTEL NOS

1.0 X 2.1

2.10

D5

0.65 X 2.1

2.10

6.

D6

1.5 X 2.1

2.10

7.

D7

0.75 X 2.1

2.10

7.

D8

1.0 X 2.1

2.10

8.

D9

1.2 X 2.1

2.10

9.

W5

1.85 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

10.

W6

1.10 X 1.15

0.15

2.10

11.

W7

0.30 X 0.90

1.20

2.10

12.

W8

2.59 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

13.

W9

0.90 X 1.10

1.00

2.10

14.

W10

1.75 X 1.10

1.00

2.10

LEGEND

0.15

5.77

CILL

D2

W6

W5

SIZE

2.

4.10

300 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

LVL +3900

1.54

2.59

1.00

W8

D8

8.83

1.5 M WIDE BALCONY

1.00

2.59

D8

W8

150 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

BUTTRESSED WALL

RECEPTION /ENTRACE
LOBBY BELOW

150 THK RCC WALL

1.5 M WIDE BALCONY

BUTTRESSED WALL

5.64

OFFICE SPACE

4.10

4.53

500 THK CAVITY WALL(REFER NOTE)

STONE MASONRY(BUTTRESS)
OF VARIED THICKNESS

SUNKEN SLAB

LVL +450

H
ENTRANCE FOR OFFICE.

10

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

11

12
TENDER DRAWINGS

FIRST FLOOR

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Checked by
Drawn by

Page 288 of 304

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
22.03.2012

13
REVISIONS

SCALE

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31-01-2012
22-03-2012

4. REVISION

30-03-2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

2.

NOTE

4.53

2.29

2.18

4.01

1.97

4.39

0.50

1.97

W10

1.69

1.57

1.75

1.17

2.08

1.89

4.53

5.40

1.50

1.93

1.30

2.90

1.69

1.10

2.29

TREAD: 0.30M
RISER: 0.15M
WIDTH: 0.90M

LIFT

0.93

D6
1.50

3.01

0.61

0.82

0.30

W13

1.66

UP

0.50
1.73

3.99

5.77

W12

1.50

1.32

1.50

1.44

5.89

W12

1.18

1.06

0.90

1.10

INLINE DUCTING

0.30

4.

D11

.90 X 2.1

2.10

12

5.

W6

1.10 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

6.

W9

0.90 X 1.10

1.00

2.10

7.

W10

1.75 X 1.10

1.00

2.10

8.

W11

1.85 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

9.

W12

1.73 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

10.

W13

1.00 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

W11

11.

W14

1.50 X 1.20

0.90

2.10

BALCONY(1.50 WIDE)

12.

W15

2.10 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

1.90

1.15

0.15

0.35
1.00

0.90

0.30
0.90

0.35
1.00

1.85

3.99

W13

W13

1.00

0.82

D11
SEATING

2.10

0.59

BUTTRESSED WALL

LEGEND

300 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

150 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

W15

150 THK RCC WALL

BALCONY(1.00 WIDE)

3.76

3.76

4.63

500 THK CAVITY WALL(REFER NOTE)

VIP ROOM
0.50
0.90

2.71

BUTTRESSED WALL

2.10

1.80

2.71

TERRACE BELOW

3.79

2.10

SEATING

BALCONY(1.00 WIDE)

1.54

0.90

D11

1.32

D11

1.98

D11

.75 X 2.1

0.75

D7
2.07

1.32

0.50

eq

1.47

0.82
0.75
1.47
1.00

4.02

TERRACE BELOW

0.60

4.02

4.53

eq

0.15

W15

D7

D11 D11
0.30

D7

0.90

1.15

0.50
1.73

eq 0.60 eq

2.10

2.10

D6
DN

4.23

1.68

0.59

DOUBLE BED

BALCONY(1.50 WIDE)

VIP ROOM

1.5 X 2.1

2.00

1.14

BALCONY(1.50 WIDE)

D6

1.10

D7

LVL +6900

3.79

5.64

1.02

CORE

D11
W13

BALCONY(1.50 WIDE)

2.10

2.

0.90

DOUBLE BED

LINTEL NOS

TERRACE BELOW

D11

0.35

4.29

4.63

0.30
0.90

4.29

W11

1.00
0.90

LIFT

2.07

0.35
1.00

1.85

1.90
1.66

6.67

1.96

1.90

LIFT

47 48 49 50 51 52
53
46
54
45
55
44
56
43
57
42
58
41
59
60

CILL

1.0 X 2.1

2.06

1.75

1.75
4.43

4.43

1.57

DOUBLE BED

D7

SIZE

D2

0.13

0.75

D7

0.15

DOUBLE BED

INLINE DUCTING

4.69

0.90

(SECOND FLOOR)
S. NO. OPENING

W6

4.43

1.43

1.00

DOOR/ WINDOW SCHEDULE

1.

D11

0.30

0.75

D7

0.75

0.15

1.90

DINING HALL
3.01

2.13

4.43

D7

1.70

D11

0.15

0.30

1.90

0.30

1.15
0.75

0.75

1.90
0.15

1.60

2.13

0.30

7.00

1.00

1.15

0.90

W14

8.81

0.90

0.15

0.50

8.92

3.71

D11

1.50

3.00

D11

10.44

W14

0.19

3.30

1.10

2.00

INLINE DUCTING

0.30
0.13

1.50

0.15

1.10

0.30

3.29

W6

INLINE DUCTING

0.50

0.50

2.11

2.11

5.40

2.10

13

DN

1.29

KITCHEN

2.00

12

SERVICE CORE

2.21

0.50

0.90

W9

11

UP

D2

PANTRY

0.90

4.32

W9

10

W10

0.15

8
1.00

STONE MASONRY(BUTTRESS)
OF VARIED THICKNESS

TERRACE BELOW

SUNKEN SLAB

LVL +450

H
ENTRANCE FOR OFFICE.
LVL 00

10

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

11

12
TENDER DRAWINGS

SECOND FLOOR

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 289 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
22.03.2012

13
REVISIONS

SCALE

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31-01-2012
22-03-2012

4. REVISION

30-03-2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

3.

NOTE

4.53

2.29

2.18

4.01

1.97

4.39

1.97

2.08

2.00

11

12

2.10

13

2.29

4.53

A
1.00

D7

1.50

SERVICE CORE

W14
TERRACE
( FOR SERVICES)

DN

0.80

4.32

10

1.47

0.80

A
X

1.93

1.30

0.30

TREAD: 0.30M
RISER: 0.15M
WIDTH: 0.90M

LIFT

D7

0.30

0.35
1.90

0.50

UP

1.60

1.43

1.23

4.87

1.43

D11

0.50
INLINE DUCTING

0.75

0.15

1.15

1.70
0.50

1.90

INLINE DUCTING

0.75

3.99

0.30

W17

2.10

11

2.

D11

.90 X 2.1

2.10

10

W6

1.10 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

4.

W11

1.85 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

5.

W12

1.73 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

6.

W14

1.50 X 1.20

0.90

2.10

7.

W16

2.52 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

8.

W17

1.90 X 1.95

0.15

2.10

1.85

4.63

TERRACE (BELOW)

D11

LEGEND

0.35
1.90

W17

500 THK CAVITY WALL(REFER NOTE)

W11
0.90

0.90

300 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

150 THK CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

D7

150 THK RCC WALL

4.92

1.68

1.80

STONE MASONRY(BUTTRESS)
OF VARIED THICKNESS

DOUBLE BED

1.80

1.68

LINTEL NOS

.75 X 2.1

2.23

4.28
4.43

4.58

W12

0.90

0.30

CILL

D7

2.13

DOUBLE BED

1.90

SIZE

1.

2.07

1.32

DOUBLE BED

3.35

4.53

4.99

LOUNGE

D7

W6

2.00

2.00

0.35
1.73

2.89

0.75

2.89

2.00

DOUBLE BED

0.50

0.82

0.90

1.15

4.43

4.26

4.34
0.51

TERRACE (BELOW)

0.15

1.90

DN

CORE

0.90

D7

S. NO. OPENING

0.75

3.66

18.73

W12

D7

(THIRD FLOOR)

0.95

0.90

2.16

67 68 69 70 7172
73
66
74
65
75
64
76
63
77
62
78
61
79
80

1.10

DOOR/ WINDOW SCHEDULE

D11

2.46

LIFT

1.73

3.99

1.02

2.19
0.90

ATTENDANTS

LVL +9900

W17

D11 D11

2.13

3.64

3.64

2.59

1.30
1.60

D11

0.30

3.71

1.75
1.66

0.25

D11

D7

0.30

W17

0.10

0.51

1.90

W14

DN

1.90

LIFT

0.33

2.23

1.57

1.66

1.96

DOUBLE BED

WC

D7
D7
0.70
0.70

0.75

0.90
4.58

4.43

W11 4.63

0.53

1.90

0.75

6.67

0.35
1.85

0.75

2.19

D11

0.82

0.30

2.00

DOUBLE BED

0.82

0.23

1.15

0.15

0.56
0.90

2.75

1.75

2.00

DRIVERS

D11

0.95

2.07

2.13

D7

0.75

0.50

D7

1.60

3.84

2.13
1.90

1.00

3.07

0.30

0.90
1.70

0.90

1.15
0.75

0.15

1.90

1.10

1.03

1.11

2.07

W14

4.14

INLINE DUCTING

D11 D11

2.00

1.50

2.75

0.90

0.50
1.10

INLINE DUCTING

3.29

0.30

W14

0.90

0.10

D11
LINEN STORAGE

W6

3.50

1.61

2.11

LAUNDARY
0.90

1.50

INLINE DUCTING

W14

1.50

0.75

0.10

0.30

SUNKEN SLAB

0.30
0.59

0.68

0.68

2.52

0.59

W16
BUTTRESSED WALL

1.54

W16

5.64

2.52

LVL +450

H
1

10

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

11

12
TENDER DRAWINGS

THIRD FLOOR

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 290 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
22.03.2012

13
REVISIONS
1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION
4. REVISION

SCALE
08-03-2011
31-01-2012
22-03-2012
30-03-2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

4.

2
4.53

3
2.29

4
2.18

5
4.01

1.97

4.39

8
1.97

2.08
3.91

1.47

2.00

2.10

12
2.29

13
4.53

A
0.25

MUMTY

0.15

MACHINE ROOM
3.91

4.10

4.32

11

1.68

0.50

10

TERRACE BELOW
SERVICE LIFT

0.30

0.30

2.11

B
C

C
3.29

TERRACE

D
TERRACE

TERRACE

6.67

LIFT

EQUIPMENT
STORE

LIFT
UP

LVL +12900

DN

OBSERVATORY
PLATFORM

4.53

1.54
5.64

BUTTRESSED WALL

H
1

10

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

11

12
TENDER DRAWINGS

OBSERVATORY FLOOR

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 291 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
22.03.2012

13
REVISIONS

SCALE

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011

4. REVISION

30-03-2012

31-01-2012
22-03-2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

5.

2
4.53

3
2.29

4
2.18

5
4.01

7
4.39

1.97

8
1.97

2.08

10
2.00

11
2.10

12

13
4.53

2.29

A
MUMTY
BELOW

4.32

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +13510

MACHINE ROOM ROOF

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +16650

B
2.11

B
C

C
TERRACE BELOW

3.29

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +13510

D
TERRACE BELOW

TERRACE BELOW
MUMTY

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

6.67

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +15230

OBSERVATORY
PLATFORM

4.53

LVL +14100

BUTTRESSED WALL

1.54

SOUTH LIGHT

5.64

BUTTRESSED WALL

H
1

10

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

11

12
TENDER DRAWINGS

TERRACE PLAN

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 292 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
22.03.2012

13
REVISIONS

SCALE

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011

4. REVISION

30-03-2012

31-01-2012
22-03-2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

6.

NOTE

KEY PLAN

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +15230

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12500

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

DOUBLE BED ROOM

C.DOOR

STABILIZED COMPRESSED EARTH BLOCK

MASONRY WALLS

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

SUNK

DOUBLE BED ROOM

C.DOOR

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

SUNK

OFFICE
FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

STABILIZED COMPRESSED EARTH BLOCK

MASONRY WALLS
STONE MASONRY
BUTTRESSED WALL
54

OFFICE
FINISHED FLOOR LVL +900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +900

SE C T IO N X X

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

REVISIONS

SHEET TITLE

SECTIONS

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 293 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

SCALE

TENDER DRAWINGS

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
31.01.2012

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31.01.2012
22.03.2012

4. REVISION

30.03.2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

7.

NOTE

KEY PLAN

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +15230

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

DRIVER'S ROOM

DOUBLE BED ROOM

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

DINING HALL

VIP BED ROOM

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

TOILET

OFFICE SPACE

STABILIZED COMPRESSED EARTH BLOCK

MASONRY WALLS
FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

TOILET
FINISHED FLOOR LVL +900

LIFT

MUSEUM

DOUBLE HT
PARKING SHADE
FINISHED FLOOR LVL +450

SE C T ION YY

PIT

REVISIONS

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

SECTIONS

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Checked by
Drawn by

Page 294 of 304

SCALE

TENDER DRAWINGS

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
31.01.2012

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31.01.2012
22.03.2012

4. REVISION

30.03.2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

8.

KEY PLAN

0.23

Z
FINISHED FLOOR LVL +15230

0.23

OBSERVATORY

0.23

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +13510

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

1
1.0
1
1.0

LINEN
STORE

PV PANEL AS PER DETAIL

0.23

1
1.0

0.23

1
1.0

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

1
1.0
1
1.0

VIP ROOM

DINING HALL

KITCHEN

0.23

0.23

DGU CURTAIN GLAZING AS PER DETAIL

1
1.0

CORRIDOR

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

1
1.0

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

1
1.0

2.77

1
1.0

LABORATORY SPACE

OFFICE SPACE

STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK IN
ALUMINIUM/MILD STEEL
SECTIONS FOR CURTAIN GLAZING

0.23

1
1.0

0.23

CORRIDOR

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

1
1.0

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

CONFERENCE

RECEPTION/LOUNGE
ENTRANCE

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +900

0.30

450

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +900

54

2.36

STORAGE

SE C T IO N ZZ

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

REVISIONS

SHEET TITLE

SECTIONS

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 295 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

SCALE

TENDER DRAWINGS

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
31.01.2012

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31.01.2012
22.03.2012

4. REVISION

30.03.2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

9.

NOTE

A
KEY PLAN

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +16650

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +15230

MUMTY

STORE

TERRACE

TERRACE

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

DOUBLE BED ROOM

DOUBLE BED ROOM

CORRIDOR
LIFT LOBBY

STAIRCASE

LIFT LOBBY

STAIRCASE

LIFT LOBBY

STAIRCASE

LIFT LOBBY

STAIRCASE

CORRIDOR

DOUBLE BED ROOM

DOUBLE BED ROOM

CORRIDOR

DOUBLE BED ROOM

DOUBLE BED ROOM

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

DOUBLE BED ROOM

DOUBLE BED ROOM

CORRIDOR

DINING HALL

BUTTRESSED WALL AS PER

STRUCTURAL DETAIL

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

OFFICE SPACE

OFFICE SPACE

CAVITY WALL AS PER

DETAIL

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

LIBRARY

OFFICE SPACE

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +900

SE C T IO N AA

REVISIONS

SHEET TITLE

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

SECTIONS

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 296 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

SCALE

TENDER DRAWINGS

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
31.01.2012

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31.01.2012
22.03.2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

10.

NOTE

C
N

KEY PLAN

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +15230

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ASTROPHYSICS

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +12900

PV PANELS

LVL -7183

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

LVL -7183

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +9900

LVL -13413

LVL -8096

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

LVL -13413

LVL -8096

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +6900

LVL -11713

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

LVL -7183

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

LVL -11713

LVL -7289

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +3900

SOLARIUM CURTAIN GLAZING

LVL -7289

TROMBE WALL

LVL -5645

LVL -5645

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

FINISHED FLOOR LVL +900

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

TROMBE WALL

LVL -7183

TROMBE WALL

LVL 00

LVL 00

FRONT ELEVATION (ELEVATION A)

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.
B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

REVISIONS

SHEET TITLE

ELEVATIONS

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

Page 297 of 304

Checked by
Drawn by

SCALE

TENDER DRAWINGS

Prithvi
Bikash

DATE
31.01.2012

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

08-03-2011
31.01.2012
22.03.2012

4. REVISION

30.03.2012

NTS

Job number
IIAP 01

SHEET NO.

11.

47.3

Page 298 of 304

ID

A
RR
TE

W
LO
BE

W
LO
BE

+3
G

CE

+3
G
CE

A
RR
TE

AD
O

9.0

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.

B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

30.50

SOFT LANDSCAPE

IN

AL
N

R
TE

100 kva DG SET

4.4

100 kva DG SET

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

STORM WATER DRAIN

RAIN WATER
HARVESTING PIT

4.

11.0

2.5

POWER SHED

AMF PANEL

DB PANEL

STORM WATER DRAIN

RY
TO

A
RR
TE

LA

G
N
ZI

W
LO
BE

+3
G
CE

Checked by
Drawn by

SITE PLAN

SHEET TITLE

Prithvi
Bikash

19.0

C
AN
TR
N
E

E.
IC
FF
O

DATE
22.03.2012

3.77

GUARD ROOM

PAVED AREA

4. REVISION

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

UP

RAMP

31-01-2012
22-03-2012
30-03-2012

08-03-2011

4.0
EXIT

STEEL GRATING

LVL 0.00
(99.00 AS PER SURVEY PLAN)

REVISIONS

4.0
ENTRY

STEEL GRATING

R
FO

SOFT LANDSCAPE

LVL+ 0.90 M
(99.00 AS PER SURVEY PLAN)

APPROACH ROAD

A
V
ER
BS

4.0

STEEL GRATING

4.0 m WIDE INTERNAL ROAD

INVERTER

W
AL
L

STABILIZER

BU
TT
R

ES
SE
D

43.0

W
AL
L

SERVICE ENTRY

TT
R

BU

ES
SE
D

7.4

STORM WATER DRAIN

10.0
STORM WATER DRAIN

15.

SHEET NO.

IIAP 01

Job number

INVERTER

2.5

47.3

Page 299 of 304

.0

+3
G

W
LO
BE

+3
G

CE

18.38

RY
TO

R
TE

LA

G
N
ZI

W
LO
BE

+3
G
CE
RA

Checked by
Drawn by

Prithvi
Bikash

BUILDING SETTING OUT PLAN

SHEET TITLE

19.0

C
AN
TR
N
E

DATE
22.03.2012

RAMP

3.77

GUARD ROOM

PAVED AREA

4. REVISION

1. ISSUE
2. REVISION
3. REVISION

UP

4.0

31-01-2012
22-03-2012
30-03-2012

08-03-2011

EXIT

4.0

STEEL GRATING

LVL 0.00
(99.00 AS PER SURVEY PLAN)

REVISIONS

ENTRY

4.0

STEEL GRATING

R
FO

E.
IC
FF
O

LVL 0.00
(99.00 AS PER SURVEY PLAN)

SOFT LANDSCAPE

SLOPE IN SOFTSCAPE

LVL+ 0.90 M
(99.00 AS PER SURVEY PLAN)

APPROACH ROAD

A
V
ER
BS

4.0

9.2

Architects , Engineers, Interior designers, Planners.

B- 4 / 103 Safdarjung Enclave, New Delhi. -110029.

IIAP BUILDING AT LEH

30.50

27.6

SOFT LANDSCAPE

R
TE

CE
RA

A
RR
TE

W
LO
BE

AD
O
R

9.0

STEEL GRATING

45

ARVIND VIVEK AND ASSOCIATES

START POINT

STORM WATER DRAIN

RAIN WATER
HARVESTING PIT

ID

AL
N

TE
IN

100 kva DG SET

4.4

100 kva DG SET

STORM WATER DRAIN

LVL 0.00
(99.00 AS PER SURVEY PLAN)

SLOPE IN SOFTSCAPE

AMF PANEL

3.7

POWER SHED

STABILIZER

DB PANEL

43.0

4.0 m WIDE INTERNAL ROAD

SERVICE ENTRY

.0
13

7.4

STORM WATER DRAIN

10.0
STORM WATER DRAIN

16.

SHEET NO.

IIAP 01

Job number

D
CONFERENCE

W7

PARKING

PROJECTION WALL

PARKING

W7

$
$

W7

W7

E-LIBRARY
D

STORE 7

SHE

1.90

1.90

LIFT
D

1.66

1.66

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

LIFT

6
5
4
3
2
1

LIBRARY

UP
D

TOILET(HE)

8 9 10 11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

EXTERNAL
BUTTRESSED
WALL(REFER
ELEVATIONS)

D
DISPLAY

OFFICE SPACE
LVL +900

LVL0.15THK
+900 RCC WALLS
$
DISPLAY AREAS

LOBBY
LVL +900
TOILET FOR
HANDICAPPED

MUSEUM

RAMP
1:8 SLOPE

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

LVL +900

SERVER ROOM

TOILET

D
D

UP
W3

W3

LVL +450

BUTTRESSED WALL

BUTTRESSED WALL

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

MEDICAL ROOM
S

RECEPTION/LOUNGE

GLAZING AS PER DETAIL

LVL +450

GLAZING AS PER DETAIL

ENTRANCE FOR OFFICE.

GROUND FLOOR

Page 300 of 304

EXTERNAL BUTTRESSED WALL

(REFER ELEVATIONS)

UP
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

35
34
33
32
31
30

LABORATORY SPACE

W7

W7

W7

$
$
HE
STORE27

SHE

OFFICE SPACE

LIFT

1.66

1.90
1.66

1.90

LIFT

26
25
24
23
22
21

UP
D

28 29 30 31 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

DN
D

$
DISPLAY

BUTTRESSED WALL

1.5 M WIDE BALCONY

BUTTRESSED WALL

OFFICE SPACE

RECEPTION /ENTRACE
LOBBY BELOW

LVL +450

ENTRANCE FOR OFFICE.

FIRST FLOOR

Page 301 of 304

1.5 M WIDE BALCONY

OFFICE SPACE

UP
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

PANTRY

KITCHEN

49
48
47
46
45
44

DINING HALL

DOUBLE BED

DOUBLE BED

LIFT

LIFT
UP

47 48 49 50 51 52
53
46
54
45
55
44
56
43
57
42
58
41
59
60

DOUBLE BED

DOUBLE BED

DN

CORE

$
BALCONY(5'-0" WIDE)

BALCONY(5'-0" WIDE)

VIP ROOM

TERRACE BELOW

VIP ROOM

SEATING

D
BALCONY(3'-0" WIDE)

TERRACE BELOW

BUTTRESSED WALL

SEATING

BALCONY(3'-0" WIDE)

BUTTRESSED WALL

TERRACE BELOW

BALCONY(5'-0" WIDE)

TERRACE BELOW

Page 302 of 304

BALCONY(5'-0" WIDE)

50

dn

TERRACE

LAUNDARY

D4
D5
W5

D3

W4

LINEN
STORE

W4
D
D4 D4

D3
DRIVERS

D4

D3

D5

D4

ATTENDANTS

D4

D3

LIFT

LIFT
UP

W1
TERRACE (BELOW)

W2

W2

67 68 69 70 71 72
73
66
74
65
75
64
76
63
77
62
78
61
79
80

DOUBLE BED

W2
CORE

D5

LOUNGE

D4

W2
D5

DOUBLE BED

DN

D4

DOUBLE BED

DOUBLE BED

W6

W6
BUTTRESSED WALL

DOUBLE BED

D4

D5

DOUBLE BED

D3

D3

D4
D

W5

THIRD FLOOR

Page 303 of 304

TERRACE (BELOW)

W2

W2

W1

Page 304 of 304

STARTING THE WORK AT SITE FOR GEETING APPROVAL FROM ELECTRICAL CONSULTANT.

EXACT LAYOUT IS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR BEFORE

23. ALL CONDUITS SHOWN IN THE DRG. ARE TENTATIVE ONLY & ONLY FOR GUIDELINES,

WILL BE USED FROM EACH TEL. SOCKET TO UPTO TEL. J.BOX

22. 4 PAIR .61MM PVC INSULATED PVC SHEATHED ANNEALED TINNED CU. COND. WIRE

WILL BE USED FOR INDIVIDUAL TV SOCKET TO UPTO TV J. BOX.

21. LCG-21 PVC INSULATED & PVC SHEATHED COPPER CONDUCTOR COAXIAL CABLE

20. ALL UPS DB AT 600mm AFFL.

WILL BE USED,UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.

19. FOR SUBMAIN OR MAINS ETC.32/40/50MM DIA HEAVY DUTY,UPVC RIGID CONDUIT

CCTV,TV,FIRE DETECTION,TELEPHONE & COMPUTER ETC..

18. ONLY 25 MM DIA HEAVY DUTY,UPVC RIGID CONDUIT WILL BE USED FOR

ADJACENT TO EACH CCTV CAMERA SOCKET.

17. ONE 5AMPS UPS SOCKET WILL BE PROVIDED AT 2400MM(AFFL)

AND TELEPHONE SOCKETS WILL BE CONNECTED WITH EACH OTHER.

16. ALL UPS POWER,CCTV CAMERA'S, UPS SOCKET'S FOR CCTV CAMERA

14. IN CASE ANY DISCREPANCY FOUND IN THE DRAWING,THE SAME SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY

SHALL BE LEFT AT SUFFICIENT HEIGHT AT THE TIME OF CASTING.

13. FOR CONNECTING VARIOUS SOCKETS OR POINTS AT LATER STAGE, THE CONDUIT SLEEVES

12. THE NUMBER e.g.(D1/R1)INDICATES LIGHTING CIRCUIT NO.1 OF R PHASE OF D.B.NO.1.

11. SEPERATE NEUTRAL & EARTH WIRE SHALL BE TAKEN FROM DB FOR EACH CIRCUIT.

SHOP DRAWINGS AND GOT APPROVED IN WRITING FROM ELECTRICAL CONSULTANT/ARCHITECT.

9. PULL OUT BOXES OF APPORIPRIATE SIZE SHALL PROVIDED FOR LONG RUNS OF CONDUITS.

SIMILARLY LIGHTING AND POWER CIRCUITS SHALL ALSO BE LAID IN DIFFERENT CONDUIT.

8. SEPARATE CONDUIT SHALL BE LAID FOR DIFFERENT PHASES AND

CONDUIT PROPERLY TO AVOID BLOCKING OF CONDUIT.

THE DRAWING OF WIRES AT LATER DATE AND ALSO SEALED THE OPENINGS OF

7. ALL CONDUITS WHICH ARE NOT TO BE WIRED SHALL BE LEFT WITH FISH WIRE FACILITATING

TENTATIVELY WHICH HAS TO BE CO-ORDINATTED WITH INTERIOR LAYOUT.

6. LOCATION AND LAYOUT OF LIGHTING FIXTURES, SOCKETS AND SWITCHES ARE MARKED

OF THE ELECTRICAL AUTHORITIES IN ALL RESPECTS AND SHALL CONFIRM TO IE RULES.

5. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL BE COMPLETED AS PER LOCAL RULES AND REGULATIONS

ONLY AFTER TAKING APPROVAL FROM THE ELECTRICAL CONSULTANT/ARCHITECT.

4. FLOOR CHASING SHALL BE AVOIDED AS FAR AS POSSIBLE,THIS SHALL BE CHASED

AND EXECUTED SIMULTANEOUSLY WHERE SO REQUIRED.

3. ALL WORKS ARE TO BE STRICTLY COORDINATED WITH ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES

2. FOR ALL LEVELS AND DIMENSIONS ARCHITECTRUAL DRAWINGS ARE TO BE FOLLOWED.

1. THIS DRAWING SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL OTHER RELEVENT DRAWINGS.